For use in service manual form SB4047E SB4048E00 Oct. 2000
SERVICE MANUAL CONTENTS NOTICE This form lists the contents of the complete Service Manual for this product. The items listed with form numbers are available and included in the manual. If form numbers listed with mark (*) are, they are not available for the initial release of the manual. When items are updated, or supplements added, they will be announced in preview and should be ordered as they become available.
TITLE Service Manual Contents Safety Torque Specifications
FORM NUMBER SB4048E00 SB2003E00 SB2004E00
ENGINE G420 LP/Gasoline Engine DC24 Diesel Engine Delco Remy CS-121 Series Alternator CS-105D Series Alternator
SB4008E01 SB2012E02 SB2007E01 SB4050E00
POWER TRAIN Power Train
SB4018E01
VEHICLE SYSTEMS Vehicle Systems Vehicle Systems D & A Mast Systems Hydraulic System Schematic Electric System Schematic D15/18/20S(C)-2 Electric System Schematic G15/18/20S(C)-2
SB4019E01 SB4020E01 SB2143E01 SB4021E01 SB4049E00 SB4022E00
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Operation & Maintenance Manual
Models ; D15S-2, D18S-2, D20SC-2 G15S-2, G18S-2, G20SC-2
SB2309E01
SB2003E00 O c t. 1 9 9 6
WARNING
SAFETY WARNING
WARNING
Do not operate this machine unless you have read and understand the instructions in the OPERATOR'S GUIDE. Improper machine operation is dangerous and could result in injury or death.
The proper and safe lubrication and maintenance for this machine, recommended by DAEWOO, are outlined in the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GUIDE for this machine. Improper performance of lubrication or maintenance procedures is dangerous and could result in injury or death. Read and understand the OPERATION & MAINTENANCE GUIDE before performing any lubrication or maintenance.
5. Use steps and grab handles (if applicable) when mounting or dismounting a machine. Clean any mud or debris from steps, walkways or work platforms before using. Always face machine when using steps, ladders and walkways. When it is not possible to use the designed access system, provide ladders, scaffolds, or work platforms to perform safe repair operations.
The serviceman or mechanic may be unfamiliar with many of the systems on this machine. This makes it important to use caution when performing service work. A knowledge of the system and/or components is important before the removal or disassembly of any component.
6. To avoid back injury, use a hoist when lifting components which weigh 23 kg (50 lb.) or more. Make sure all chains, hooks, slings, etc., are in good condition and are of the correct capacity. Be sure hooks are positioned correctly. Lifting eyes are not to be side loaded during a lifting operation.
Because of the size of some of the machine components, the serviceman or mechanic should check the weights noted in this Manual, Use proper lifting procedures when removing any components.
7. To avoid burns, be alert for hot parts on machines which have just been stopped and hot fluids in lines, tubes and compartments.
Following is a list of basic precautions that should always be observed.
8. Be careful when removing cover plates. Gradually back off the last two bolts or nuts located at opposite ends of the cover or device and pry cover loose to relieve any spring or other pressure, before removing the last two bolts or nuts completely.
1. Read and understand all Warning plates and decals on the machine before operating, lubricating or repairing the product. 2. Always wear protective glasses and protective shoes when working around machines. In particular, wear protective glasses when pounding on any part of the machine or its attachments with a hammer or sledge. Use welders gloves, hood/goggles, apron and other protective clothing appropriate to the welding job being performed. Do not wear loose-fitting or torn clothing. Remove all rings from fingers when working on machinery.
9. Be careful when removing filler caps, breathers and plugs on the machine. Hold a rag over the cap or plug to prevent being sprayed or splashed by liquids under pressure. The danger is even greater if the machine has just been stopped because fluids can be hot. 10. Always use tools that are in good condition and be sure you understand how to use them before performing any service work.
3. Do not work on any machine that is supported only by lift jacks or a hoist. Always use blocks or jack stands to support the machine before performing any disassembly.
11. Reinstall all fasteners with same part number. Do not use a lesser quality fastener if replacements are necessary. Do not mix metric fasteners with standard nuts and bolts.
4. Lower the forks or other implements to the ground before performing any work on the machine. If this cannot be done, make sure the forks or other implements are blocked correctly to prevent them from dropping unexpectedly.
12. If possible, make all repairs with the machine parked on a level, hard surface. Block machine so it does not roll while working on or under machine.
1 of 2
WARNING 21. Do not operate a machine if any rotating part is damaged or contacts any other part during operation. Any high speed rotating component that has been damaged or altered should be checked for balance before reusing.
13. Disconnect battery and discharge any capacitors (electric trucks) before starting to work on machine. Hang "Do Not Operate" tag in the Operator's Compartment. 14. Repairs, which require welding, should be performed only with the benefit of the appropriate reference information and by personnel adequately trained and knowledgeable in welding procedures. Determine type of metal being welded and select correct welding procedure and electrodes, rods or wire to provide a weld metal strength equivalent at least to that of parent metal.
22. On LP equipped lift trucks, be sure to close the valve on the LP tank before service work is performed. Always close the valve on the LP tank when the lift truck is being stored. Do not check for LP leaks with an open flame. 23. Caution should be used to avoid breathing dust that may be generated when handling components containing asbestos fibers. If this dust is inhaled, it can be hazardous to your health. Components in DAEWOO products that may contain asbestos fibers are brake pads, brake band and lining assemblies, clutch plates and some gaskets. The asbestos used in these components is usually bound in a resin or sealed in some way. Normal handling is not hazardous as long as airborne dust which contains asbestos is not generated.
15. Do not damage wiring during removal operations. Reinstall the wiring so it is not damaged nor will it be damaged in operation by contacting sharp corners, or by rubbing against some object or hot surface. Do not connect wiring to a line containing fluid. 16. Be sure all protective devices including guards and shields are properly installed and functioning correctly before starting a repair. If a guard or shield must be removed to perform the repair work, use extra caution.
If dust which may contain asbestos is present, there are several common sense guidelines that should be followed.
17. Always support the mast and carriage to keep carriage or attachments raised when maintenance or repair work is performed, which requires the mast in the raised position.
a. Never use compressed air for cleaning. b. Avoid brushing or grinding of asbestos containing materials.
18. Loose or damaged fuel, lubricant and hydraulic lines, tubes and hoses can cause fires. Do not bend or strike high pressure lines or install ones which have been bent or damaged. Inspect lines, tubes and hoses carefully. Do not check for leaks with your hands. Pin hole (very small) leaks can result in a high velocity oil stream that will be invisible close to the hose. This oil can penetrate the skin and cause personal injury. Use cardboard or paper to locate pin hole leaks.
c. For clean up, use wet methods or a vacuum equipped with a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter. d. Use exhaust ventilation on permanent machining jobs. e. Wear an approved respirator if there is no other way to control the dust. f. Comply with applicable rules and regulations for the work place (for example in the U.S.A., OSHA requirements as set forth in 29 CFR 1910. 1001).
19. Tighten connections to the correct torque. Make sure that all heat shields, clamps and guards are installed correctly to avoid excessive heat, vibration or rubbing against other parts during operation. Shields that protect against oil spray onto hot exhaust components in event of a line, tube or seal failure must be installed correctly.
g. Follow environmental rules and regulations for disposal of asbestos. h. Avoid areas where asbestos particles may be in the air.
20. Relieve all pressure in air, oil or water systems before any lines, fittings or related items are disconnected or removed. Always make sure all raised components are blocked correctly and be alert for possible pressure when disconnecting any device from a system that utilizes pressure.
2 of 2
SB2004E00 Dec. 1998
Specifications TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD TORQUE FOR METRIC FASTENERS
NOTE : Take care to avoid mixing metric and inch dimensioned fasteners. Mismatched or incorrect fasteners can result in vehicle damage or malfunction, or possible injury. Exceptions to these torques are given in the Service Manual where needed. NOTE : Prior to installation of any hardware, be sure components are in near new condition. Bolt and nut threads must not be worn or damaged. Hardware must be free of rust and corrosion. Clean hardware with a non-corrosive cleaner and apply engine oil to threads and bearing face. If thread lock or other compounds are to be applied, do not apply engine oil.
METRIC NUTS AND BOLTS THREAD SIZE (mm)
STANDARD TORQUE (N i m)
M6
12 ± 3
(lb i ft)
M8
28 ± 7
20 ± 5
M10
55 ± 10
40 ± 7
M12
100 ± 20
75 ± 15
M14
160 ± 30
120 ± 22
M16
240 ± 40
175 ± 30
M20
460 ± 60
340 ± 44
M24
800 ± 100
600 ± 75
M30
1600 ± 200
1200 ± 150
M36
2700 ± 300
2000 ± 225
9 ± 2
METRIC TAPERLOCK STUDS THREAD SIZE (mm)
STANDARD TORQUE (N i m)
M6
8± 3
(lb i ft)
M8
17 ± 5
13 ± 4
M10
35 ± 5
26 ± 4
M12
65 ± 10
48 ± 7
M16
110 ± 20
80 ± 15
M20
170 ± 30
125 ± 22
M24
400 ± 60
300 ± 45
M30
650 ± 80
480 ± 60
M36
870 ± 100
640 ± 75
1 of 7
6 ± 2
STANDARD TORQUE FOR INCH FASTENERS Exceptions to these torques are given in the Service Manual where needed.
INCH NUTS AND BOLTS THREAD SIZE inch
STANDARD TORQUE (N i m)
(lb i ft)
1/4
12 ± 3
5/16
25 ± 6
18.0 ± 4.5
3/8
47 ± 9
35 ± 7
7/16
70 ± 15
50 ± 11
1/2
105 ± 20
75 ± 15
9/16
160 ± 30
120 ± 20
5/8
215 ± 40
160 ± 30
3/4
370 ± 50
275 ± 35
7/8
620 ± 80
460 ± 60
1
900 ± 100
660 ± 75
1-1/8
1300 ± 150
950 ± 100
1-1/4
1800 ± 200
1325 ± 150
1-3/8
2400 ± 300
1800 ± 225
1-1/2
3100 ± 350
2300 ± 250
9 ± 2
INCH TAPERLOCK STUDS THREAD SIZE inch
STANDARD TORQUE (N i m)
1/4
8 ± 3
(lb i ft)
5/16
17 ± 5
13 ± 4
3/8
35 ± 5
26 ± 4
7/16
45 ± 10
33 ± 7
1/2
65 ± 10
48 ± 7
5/8
110 ± 20
80 ± 15
3/4
170 ± 30
125 ± 22
7/8
260 ± 40
190 ± 30
1
400 ± 60
300 ± 45
1-1/8
500 ± 70
370 ± 50
1-1/4
650 ± 80
480 ± 60
1-3/8
750 ± 90
550 ± 65
1-1/2
870 ± 100
640 ± 75
2 of 7
6± 2
O-RING FACE SEAL FITTINGS O-RING FACE SEAL FITTING
O-RING GROOVE
O-RING FACE SEAL NUT
O-RING
IDAS001B
STRAIGHT THREAD O-RING FITTING (FOR O-RING FACE SEAL FITTING ONLY) THREAD SIZE inch
STANDARD TORQUE (lb i ft) (N i m)
45±15 lb i in
5/16-24
5.0 ± 1.5
3/8-24
12 ± 2
7/16-20
20 ± 4
1/2-20
30 ± 5
22 ± 4
9/16-18
40 ± 5
30 ± 4
3/4-16
100 ± 15
75 ± 10
7/8-14
135 ± 15
100 ± 10
1 1/16-12
200 ± 25
150 ± 20
1 3/16-12
250 ± 25
185 ± 20
1 5/16-12
300 ± 40
225 ± 30
1 5/8-12
300 ± 40
225 ± 30
1 7/8-12
300 ± 40
225 ± 30
2 1/2-12
300 ± 40
225 ± 30
110±20 lb i in 15 ± 3
O-RING FACE SEAL FITTING NUT THREAD SIZE inch
STANDARD TORQUE (N i m)
(lb i ft)
9/16-18
16 ± 3
12 ± 2
11/16-16
30 ± 4
22 ± 3
13/16-16
50 ± 7
37 ± 5
1-14
90 ± 10
65 ± 7
1 3/16-12
120 ± 15
90 ± 10
1 7/16-12
160 ± 20
120 ± 15
1 11/16-12
190 ± 20
140 ± 15
2-12
215 ± 25
160 ± 20
3 of 7
STRAIGHT THREAD O-RING PORT FITTING END
FITTING INSTALLATION 1. Put locknut (3), backup washer (4) and O-ring seal (5) as far back on fitting body (2) as possible. Hold these components in this position. Turn the fitting into the part it is used on until backup washer (4) just makes contact with the face of the part it is used on.
HYDRAULIC LINE INSTALLATION 1. For a metal tube to hose installation, install the tube and tighten all bolts finger tight. 2. Tighten the bolts at the rigid end.
2.To put the fitting assembly in its correct position, turn the fitting body (2) out (counterclockwise) a maximum of 359û. Tighten locknut (3) to the torque shown in the correct chart for the fitting used.
3. Install the hose and tighten all bolts finger tight. 4. Put the hose in a position so that it does not make contact with the machine or another hose.
NOTE: If the fitting is a connector (straight fitting), the hex on the body takes the place of the locknut. To install this type fitting, tighten the hex against the face of the part it goes into.
5. Tighten the bolts on both connections. 6. Start the engine. 7. Move the implement control levers to all positions. 8. Look at the hose during movement of the implement. Make sure hose is not in contact with the machine or other hoses.
TORQUES FOR FLARED AND O-RING FITTINGS The torques shown in the charts that follow are to be used on the nut part of 37û Flared, 45û Flared and Inverted Flared fittings (when used with steel tubing), O-ring plugs, O-ring fittings and swivel nuts when used in applications to 3000 psi (20 700 kPa).
9. Shut off the engine. 10. If necessary, put the hose in a new position where it will not make contact when the implement is moved.
ASSEMBLY OF FITTINGS WITH STRAIGHT THREADS AND O-RING SEALS
HOSE CLAMP-BAND TYPE
This type of fitting is used in many applications. The tube end of the fitting will be different in design so that it can be used in many different applications. However, the installation procedure of the fitting is the same. If the tube end of the fitting body is the same as in the illustration (either an elbow or a straight body) it will be necessary to assemble the sleeve on the tube before connecting the tube to the end.
2 1
IDAS003B
4
CLAMP WIDTH 7.9 mm (.312 in) 13.5 mm (.531 in) 15.9 mm (.625 in)
3 5 6
IDAS002B
ELBOW BODY ASSEMBLY (1) End of fitting body (connects to tube). (2) Fitting body. (3) Lock-nut. (4) Backup washer. (5) O-ring seal. (6) End of fitting that goes into other part.
4 of 7
TORQUE ON NEW HOSE 0.9 ± 0.2 N i m 8 ± 2 lb i in
RETIGHTENING TORQUE 0.7 ± 0.2 N i m 6 ± 2 lb i in
7.5 ± 0.5 N i m 65 ± 5 lb i in
4.5 ± 0.5 N i m 40 ± 5 lb i in
4.5 ± 0.5 N i m 40 ± 5 lb i in
3.0 ± 0.5 N i m 25 ± 5 lb i in
37û FLARED AND STRAIGHT THREAD O-RING FITTINGS
37û FLARED
O-RING FITTING-PLUG
SWIVEL NUTS
IDAS004B
37û FLARED AND STRAIGHT THREAD O-RING FITTINGS (EXCEPT O-RING FACE SEAL FITTINGS)
METRIC
INCH
THREAD SIZE inch
3.18
.125
4.76
NOMINAL TUBE O.D.
STANDARD TORQUE (N i m)
5/16
5.0 ± 1.5
(lb i ft)
.188
3/8
11.0 ± 1.5
8 ± 1
6.35
.250
7/16
16 ± 2
12 ± 1
7.94
.312
1/2
20 ± 5
15 ± 4
9.52
.375
9/16
25 ± 5
18 ± 4
9.52
.375
5/8
35 ± 5
26 ± 4
12.70
.500
3/4
50 ± 7
37 ± 5
15.88
.625
7/8
65 ± 7
48 ± 5
19.05
.750
1-1/16
100 ± 10
75 ± 7
22.22
.875
1-3/16
120 ± 10
90 ± 7
25.40
1.000
1-5/16
135 ± 15
100 ± 11
31.75
1.250
1-5/8
180 ± 15
135 ± 11
38.10
1.500
1-7/8
225 ± 15
165 ± 11
50.80
2.000
2-1/2
320 ± 30
240 ± 22
TIGHTENING OTHER FITTINGS Hi Duty (Shear sleeve) Tube Fittings After tube has been put through the nut and makes contact against the tube shoulder in the fitting body, turn the nut with a wrench until a small decrease in torque is felt. This is an indication that the sleeve has been broken off the nut. Hold the tube to prevent turning and tighten the nut 1-1/2 turns.
IDAS005B
Hi Seal Fittings Put nut and sleeve over the tubing with the short heavy end of the sleeve facing the end of tubing. Put the tube end against the counterbore in the body of the fitting and tighten until nut is over the last thread on the body. The remainder of space is used whenever the fitting is removed and installed again.
IDAS006B
5 of 7
4 ± 1
45û FLARED AND 45û INVERTED FLARE FITTINGS
INVERTED 45û FLARED
45û FLARED
IDAS007B
45û FLARED AND 45û INVERTED FLARE FITTINGS
METRIC
INCH
THREAD SIZE inch
3.18
.125
4.76
NOMINAL TUBE O.D.
STANDARD TORQUE (N i m)
5/16
5.0 ± 1.5
(lb i ft)
.188
3/8
8.0 ± 1.5
6 ± 1
6.35
.250
7/16
11 ± 2
8 ± 1
7.94
.312
1/2
17 ± 3
13 ± 2
9.52
.375
5/8
30 ± 3
22 ± 2
11.11
.438
11/16
30 ± 3
22 ± 2
12.70
.500
3/4
38 ± 4
28 ± 3
15.88
.625
7/8
50 ± 5
37 ± 4
19.05
.750
1-1/16
90 ± 8
65 ± 6
22.22
.875
1-1/4
100 ± 10
75 ± 7
TIGHTENING OTHER FITTINGS Ermeto Tube Fittings Put nut and sleeve over the tube with head or shoulder end of sleeve next to nut. Push tube into counterbore of fitting body as far as possible. Turn nut clockwise until sleeve holds tube and prevents movement. Tighten the nut 1-1/4 turns more to seat sleeve and give a locking action. When necessary to assemble again, put sleeve over tube and tighten nut until a sudden increase in torque is felt. Then tighten 1/6 to 1/3 turn more to seat the sleeve.
IDAS008B
Flex Fittings Put nut and sleeve over the tubing and push tube in to counterbore of fitting body as far as possible. Tighten the nut until it is against the hex part of the fitting body.
IDAS009B
6 of 7
4 ± 1
AIR CONDITIONING AND TAPERED PIPE THREAD FITTINGS
O-RING
45û FLARE
IDAS010B
AIR CONDITIONING FITTINGS 45û FLARE FITTING END
O-RING FITTING END
STEEL TUBES
ALUMINUM TUBES
STANDARD TORQUE
STANDARD TORQUE
THREAD SIZE inch
STANDARD TORQUE
5/8-18
18 ± 4
13 ± 3
30 ± 3
22 ± 2
23 ± 3
17 ± 2
3/4-16
37 ± 4
27 ± 3
52 ± 5
38 ± 4
33 ± 4
24 ± 3
7/8-14
40 ± 4
30 ± 3
60 ± 7
44 ± 5
38 ± 4
28 ± 3
1 1/16-14
45 ± 5
33 ± 4
75 ± 8
55 ± 6
50 ± 5
37 ± 4
N im
(lb i ft)
N im
(lb i ft)
N im
TAPERED PIPE THREAD FITTINGS STANDARD TORQUE
PIPE THREAD SIZE inch
THREADS WITH 1E2200E SEALANT
THREADS WITHOUT SEALANT
Nim
(lb i ft)
Nim
(lb i ft)
1/16-27
15
11
20
15
1/8-27
20
15
25
18
1/4-18
25
18
35
26
3/8-18
35
26
45
33
1/2-14
45
33
60
45
3/4-14
60
45
75
55
1-11 1/2
75
55
90
65
1 1/4-11 1/2
95
70
110
80
1 1/2-11 1/2
110
80
130
95
2-11 1/2
130
95
160
120
7 of 7
(lb i ft)
SB4008E01 May 2000
Service Manual G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Important Safety Information
Most accidents involving product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly. Read and understand all safety precautions and warnings before operating or performing lubrication, maintenance and repair on this product. Basic safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the Service or Technical Manual. Additional safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the owner/operation/maintenance publication. Specific safety warnings for all these publications are provided in the description of operations where hazards exist. WARNING labels have also been put on the product to provide instructions and to identify specific hazards. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or other persons. Warnings in this publication and on the product labels are identified by the following symbol.
WARNING Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death. Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information. Operations that may cause product damage are identified by NOTICE labels on the product and in this publication. DAEWOO cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the product are therefore not all inclusive. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not specifically recommended by DAEWOO is used, you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures you choose. The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information available at the time it was written. The specifications, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can affect the service given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before starting any job. DAEWOO dealers have the most current information available.
1
Index General Information General ......................................................................8 How To Read This Manual.........................................4 Precautions Before Servce ........................................6 Sealant .....................................................................12 Tightening Torque ......................................................9
Specifications General Specifications .............................................13 Service Specifications..............................................14
Removal And Installation Air Governor.............................................................78 Carburetor ................................................................71 Crankshaft And Cylinder Block ................................64 Cylinder Head And Valves .......................................41 Distributor.................................................................88 Exhaust Manifold and Water Pump .........................33 Front Case And Oil Pan ...........................................47 Fuel System .............................................................28 Ignition System ........................................................17 Intake Manifold.........................................................31 Piston And Connecting Rod.....................................56 Rocker Arms And Camshaft.....................................35 Starter Motor ............................................................80 Timing Belt ...............................................................19
System Operation Engine ......................................................................90 Lubricating System ..................................................95 Fuel System .............................................................96 Cooling System......................................................105 Intake and Exhaush System ..................................106 Electrical System ...................................................107
Adjust And Trouble Shooting Engine Adjustment .................................................113 Troubleshooting......................................................115
Special Tools Special Tools ..........................................................123
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
3
Index
General Information How To Read This Manual Scope of Explanation This book describes the service procedures for the engine removed from the vehicle. For procedures concerning removal of the engine from the vehicle and on-vehicle inspection and servicing, refer to the appropriate service manuals separately prepared for the individual models.
Maintenance and Servicing Procedures (1) A diagram of the component parts is provided near the front each section in order to give the reader a better understanding of the installed condition of component parts. (2) The numbers provided within the diagram indicate the sequence for maintenance and servicing procedures; the symbol N indicates a non-reusable part; the tightening torque is provided where applicable.
¥ Removal steps: The part designation number corresponds to the number in the illustration to indicate removal steps. ¥ Installation steps: Specified in case installation impossible in reverse order of removal steps. Omitted if installation is possible in reverse order of removal steps. ¥ Disassembly steps: The part designation number corresponds to the number in the illustration to indicates disassembly steps. ¥ Reassembly steps. Specified in case reassembly is impossible in reverse order of disassembly steps. Omitted if reassembly is possible in reverse order of disassembly steps.
Classification of Major Maintenance/Service points When there are major points relative to maintenance and servicing procedures (such as essential maintenance and service points, maintenance and service standard values, information regarding the use of special tools, etc.), these are arranged together as major maintenance and service points and explained in detail. A : Indicates that there are essential points for removal or disassembly. B : Indicates that there are essential points for installation or reassembly.
Symbols for Lubrication, Sealants and Adhesives Information concerning the locations for lubrication and for application of sealants and adhesives if provided, by using symbols, in the diagram of component parts, or on the page
following the component parts page, and explained. .... Sealant or adhesive .... Engine oil or gear oil
Inspection Only the inspections to be performed by using special tools or measuring instruments are covered. General service procedures not covered in this manual, such as visual inspections and cleaning of parts, however, should always be performed during actual service operations.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
4
General Information
FRONT CASE AND OIL PAN REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
6EN1898 Removal steps N M
A
L K
B
J
C
I
H
1. Oil filter 2. Oil pressure switch 3. Drain plug 4. Drain plug gasket 5. Oil pan 6. Oil screen 7. Oil screen gasket 8. Plug 9. O-ring 10. Flang bolt 11. Relief plug 12. Gasket 13. Relief spring 14. Relief plunger 15. Oil filter bracket 16. Oil filter bracket gasket
MD998727
G G G F E D
D E E
C B A
17. Oil pump case assembly 18. Front case gasket 19. Oil pump cover 20. Oil pump drive gear 21. Oil pump driven gear 22. Crankshaft front oil seal 23. Oil pump oil seal 24. Counterbalance shaft oil seal 25. Front case 26. Counterbalance shaft, left 27. Counterbalance shaft, right 28. Counterbalance shaft, front bearing 29. Counterbalance shaft, rear bearing, left 30. Counterbalance shaft, rear bearing, right
REMOVAL SERVICE POINTS A Oil pan removal (1) Remove the all oil pan bolts. (2) Drive in the special tool between the cylinder block and oil pan. (3) Side the tool by striking the edge of the special tool to separate the oil pan from the cylinder block.
6EN0698
This alphabetical letter corresponds to the one assigned to a part in the removal, installation, disassembly or reassembly steps that are indicated in the drawing on the first page of each section.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Operating procedures, cautions, etc. on removal, installation, disassembly and reassembly are described
5
General Information
Precautions Before Servce Removal and Disassembly For prevention of wrong installation or reassembly and for ease of operation, put mating marks to the parts where no function is adversely affected.
1EN0018
Special Tool Be sure to use Special Tools when their use is specified for the operation. Use of substitute tools will result in malfunction of the part or damage it.
1EN0019
Tightening Torque Tighten the part properly to specified torque.
1EN0020
SE AL AN T
Sealant Use specified brand of sealant. Use of sealant other than specified sealant may cause water or oil leaks.
1EN0021
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
6
General Information
Replacement Part When oil seal, O-ring, packing and gasket have been removed, be sure to replace them with new parts. However, rocker cover gasket may be reused if it is not damaged.
1EN0022
Rubber Parts Do not stain timing belt and V-belt with oil or water. Therefore, do not clean the pulley and sprocket with detergent.
1EN0023
Oil and Grease Before reassembly, apply specified oil to the rotating and sliding parts.
1EN0024
Genuine Part When the part is to be replaced, be sure to use genuine part. For selection of appropriate parts, refer to the Parts Catalog.
1EN0025
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
7
General Information
General Engine models and numbers Engine model
Fuel type
G420
L. P. G./ Gasoline
Indication of engine model and number The engine model and serial number are stamped on the right side of cylinder block surface. Engine model
Engine number
4G63
AA0001 to YY9999
6EN1916
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
8
General Information
Tightening Torque Major Bolts and Nuts Torque
Item
Remarks
kg¥m
lb¥ft
N¥m
Water pump pulley bolt
0.9
6.5
9
Crankshaft pulley bolt
2.5
18.1
25
Spark plug
2.5
18.1
25
Distributor nut
1.2
8.7
12
Timing belt cover bolt
1.1
8.0
11
0.9
6.5
9
Tensioner spring spacer
4.9
35.4
48
Tensioner bolt
4.9
35.4
48
Oil pump sprocket nut
5.5
39.8
54
Crankshaft bolt
12.0
86.8
118
Tensioner B bolt
1.9
13.7
19
Counterbalance shaft
4.6
33.3
45
Engine support bracket bolt
3.6
26.0
35
Camshaft sprocket bolt
9.0
65.1
88
Timing belt rear bolt
1.4
10.1
14
Fuel system
Carburetor nut
1.2
8.7
12
carburetor
Air horn nut
1.2
8.7
12
Stud
1.2
8.7
12
Fuel pump
1.1
8.0
11
LPG carburetor nut
1.2
8.7
12
LPG carburetor Fuel pump cover
1.1
8.0
11
Intake manifold Water outlet bolt
1.4
10.1
14
Intake manifold bolt/nut
1.8
13.0
18
Exhaust
Oil level gauge guide bolt
1.4
10.1
14
manifold
Heat protector bolt
0.9
6.5
9
Exhaust manifold nut
3.5
25.3
34
Water inlet pipe bolt
1.4
10.1
14
Water pump bolt
1.4
10.1
14
Rocker cover bolt
0.6
4.3
6
M8 B 25
2.4
17.4
24
M6 B 65
2.0
14.5
20
Ignition system
Tensioner belt
Fuel system
Rocker arm and camshaft
Bearing cap bolt
Cylinder head, valve
Cylinder head bolt
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
8.0 kgf¥m(57.9 lb¥ft)[78 N¥m]+ 0 + 2.0 kgf¥m(14.5 lb¥ft)[20 N¥m]+ 1/4 turn + 1/4 turn
9
General Information
Torque
Item
Remarks
kg¥m
lb¥ft
N¥m
Drain plug
4.0
28.9
39
Oil pan bolt
0.7
5.1
7
Oil screen bolt/nut
1.9
13.7
19
Oil pressure switch
1.0
7.2
10
Front case,
Plug
2.4
17.4
24
doil pan
Flange bolt
3.7
26.8
36
Relief plug
45
32.5
44
Oil filter bracket
1.9
13.7
19
Oil pump cover bolt
1.7
12.3
17
Oil pump cover screw
1.0
7.2
10
Front case bolt
2.4
17.4
24
Piston, Connecting rod bearing nut connecting rod. Flywheel bolt
Crankshaft, cylinder block
13.5
97.6
132
0.9
6.5
9
6.0
43.4
59
Rear plate cover
1.1
8.0
11
Oil seal case bolt
1.1
8.0
11
Rear plate bolt
Bearing cap bolt Starter motor
2.0 kg¥m(14.5 lb¥ft) [20 N¥m]+ 1/4 turn
Starter motor bolt
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
2.0 kg¥m(14.5 lb¥ft) [20 N¥m]+ 1/4 turn 2.7
19.5
10
26
General Information
General Bolts and Nuts Tightening Torque Standard Bolts and Nuts Torque, kg¥m (lb¥ft) [N¥m] Nominal diameter
Pitch
Bolt, stud, nut (with spring washer)
Flange bolt, flange nut
Head mark 4
Head mark 7
Head mark 10
Head mark 4
Head mark 7
M5
M5
-
0.5 (0.5) [3.6]
-
-
0.6 (4.3) [5.9]
M6
M6
-
0.9 (6.5) [8.8]
1.2 (8.7) [12]
-
1.0 (7.2) [9.8]
M7
M7
1.2 (8.7) [12]
2.2 (15.9) [22]
3.0 (21.7) [29]
1.3 (9.4) [13]
2.4 (17.4) [24]
M8
M8
2.5 (18.1) [25]
4.5 (32.5) [44]
6.0 (43.4) [59]
2.6 (18.8) [25]
5.0 (36.2) [49]
M9
M9
4.2 (30.4) [41]
8.6 (60.0) [81]
10.7 (77.4) [105]
4.7 (34.0) [46]
9.5 (68.7) [93]
M10
M10
7.3 (52.8) [72]
14.0 (101.3) [137]
14.5 (104.9) [142]
-
-
Tapered Threads Torque, kg¥m (lb¥ft) [N¥m] Size
Material of internal threads:
Material of internal threads:
Aluminum alloy
Cast iron or steel
NPTF 1/16
0.5 to 0.8 (3.6 to 5.8) [5 to 8]
0.8 to 1.2 (5.8 to 8.7) [8 to 11]
PT 1/8
0.8 to 1.2 (5.8 to 8.7) [8 to 11]
1.5 to 2.2 (10.8 to 15.9) [15 to 21]
PT 1/4
2.0 to 3.0 (14.5 to 21.7) [20 to 29]
3.5 to 4.5 (25.3 to 32.5) [34 to 44]
NPTF 1/4
2.0 to 3.0 (14.5 to 21.7) [20 to 29]
3.5 to 4.5 (25.3 to 32.5) [34 to 44]
PT 3/8
4.0 to 5.5 (28.9 to 39.8) [39 to 59]
5.5 to 7.5 (39.8 to 54.2) [54 to 73]
PT 1/2
7.0 to 10.0 (50.6 to 72.3) [69 to 98]
12.0 to 16.0 (86.8 to 115.7) [118 to 156]
New Tightening Method-By Use of Bolts to be Tightened in Plastic Area A new type of bolts, to be tightened in plastic area, is currently used in some parts of the engine. The tightening method for the bolts is different from the conventional one. Be sure to observe the method described in the text when tightening the bolts. Service limits are provided for the bolts. Make sure that the service limits described in the text are strictly observed. where the bolts are in use: ¥Area (1) Cylinder head bolts (2) Main bearing cap bolts (3) Connecting rod cap bolts method ¥Tightening After tightening the bolts to the specified torque, tighten them another 90¡ or 180¡ (twice 90¡). The tightening method varies on different areas. Observe the tightening method described in the text.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
11
General Information
Sealant Part to be Applied
Brand
Semi circular packing
3MTM AAD Part No.8672 or equivalent
Rocker cover
3MTM AAD Part No.8672 or equivalent
Oil pressure switch
3MTM AAD Part No.8672 or equivalent
Oil pan
Silicone RTV sealant or eguivalent
Rear oil seal case
Silicone RTV sealant or eguivalent
Rear plate bolt
3MTM AAD Part No.8672 or equivalent
Oil seal case bolt
3MTM AAD Part No.8672 or equivalent
From in Place Gasket (FIPG)
Surface preparation
The engine has several areas where the from-inplace gasket(FIPG) is in use. To ensure that gasket fully serves its purpose, it is necessary to observe some precautions when applying the gasket. Bead size, continuity and location are of paramount importance. Too thin a bead could cause leaks. Too thick a bead, on the other hand, could be squeezed out of location, causing blocking or narrowing of the fluid feed line. To eliminate the possibility of leaks from a joint, therefore, it is absolutely necessary to apply the gasket evenly without a break, while observing the correct bead size.
Thoroughly remove all substances deposited on the gasket application surfaces, using a gasket scraper or wire brush. Check to ensure that the surfaces to which the FIPG is to be applied is flat. Make sure that there are no oils, greases and foreign substances deposited on the application surfaces. Do not forget to remove the old FIPG remaining in the bolt holes. From-in-place gasket Application Applied FIPG bead should be of the specified size and without breaks. Also be sure to encircle the bolt hole circumference with a completely continuous bead. The FIPG can be wiped away unless it is hardened. While the FIPG is still moist (in less than 15 minutes), mount the parts in position. When the parts are mounted, make sure that the gasket is applied to the required area only.
Since the FIPG used in the engine hardens as it reacts with the moisture in the atmospheric air, it is normally used in the metallic flange areas. Disassembly The parts assembled with the FIPG can be easily disassembled without use of a special method. In some cases, however, the sealant between the joined surfaces may have broken by lightly striking with a mallet or similar tool. A flat and thin gasket scraper may be lightly hammered in between the joined surfaces. In this case, however, care must be taken to prevent damage to the joined surfaces. For removal of the oil pan, the special tool ÒOil Pan RemoverÓ (MD998727) is available. Be sure to use the special tool to remove the oil pan.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
The FIPG application procedure may vary on different areas. Observe the procedure described in the text when applying the FIPG.
12
General Information
Specifications General Specifications Engine model Item
G420
Type
Water-cooled, 4-cycle, gasoline-powered and L.P.G.-powered
No. of cylinders and arrangement
4, in-line
Combustion chamber type
Semi-spherical
Valve mechanism
OHC
Total displacement, cm3(cc) [cu in.]
1997 (1997) [122]
Bore x stroke, mm (in.)
85 B 88 (3.35 B 3.46)
Dry weight, kg (lb)
143 (315)
Compression ratio
8.5
Compression pressure, kPa (kgf/cm2) [psi]
Valve timing
1128 (11.5) [163.5]
Intake
Open
12¡ BTDC
valve
Close
40¡ ABDC
Exhaust
Open
54¡ BBDC
valve
Close
6¡ ATDC
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Ignition timing, BTDC/rpm
4¡/740 (gasoline), 9¡/740 (L.P.G.)
Fuel pump
Gasoline
Mechanical (diaphragm type)
Carburetor
Down-draft type
Governor
Air flow type
Lubrication system
Pressure feed, full-flow filtration type
Oil pump
Gear, driven by timing belt
Oil filter
Filter paper, cartridge type
Cooling system
Water-cooled, forced circulation
Water pump
Centrifugal, driven by V-belt
Thermostat
Wax type
Electrical system
12V DC, negative ground
Alternator, (12V-50A)
Alternator current, built-in fan and regulator
Starter motor, (12V-1.2kW)
Reduction drive
Distributor
Equipped with automatic timing controller, breaker less type
Spark plug (NGK)
Gasoline
BPR4ES
L. P. G.
BPR5ES
3
Quantity of lubricating oil, cm (liter) [U.S.gal]
4000(4.0) [1.06 ]( including 300 cm3(0.3 liter)[0.08 U.S.gal ]in oil filter
Quantity of coolant, cm3 (liter) [U.S.gal] IDLE RPM
3100 (3.1) [0.82] (in engine proper)
LOW (RPM)
750 L 25
HIGH (RPM)
2450 L 50
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
13
Specifications
Service Specifications Unit : mm(in.) Standard value
Item Flatness of gasket surface
0.2 (0.008)
Total resurfacing depth of both cylinder head and cylinder block
89.9 to 90.1 (3.539 to 3.547)
Oversize rework dimensions of valve guide hole
0.05 (0.0020)
13.05 to 13.07 (0.5138 to 0.5146)
0.25 (0.0098)
13.25 to 13.27 (0.5217 to 0.5224)
0.50 (0.0197)
13.50 to 13.57 (0.5315 to 0.5343)
Oversize rework dimensions of valve seat ring hole
Cylinder head Camshaft
Overall height
0.30 (0.0118)
44.30 to 44.33 (1.7441 to 1.7453)
0.60 (0.0236)
44.60 to 44.63 (1.7559 to 1.7571)
0.30 (0.0118)
38.30 to 38.33 (1.5079 to 1.5091)
0.60 (0.0236)
38.60 to 38.63 (1.5197 to 1.5209)
Intake Exhaust
Cam height
Intake
41.62 (1.6386)
41.12 (1.6189)
Exhaust
41.62 (1.6386)
41.12 (1.6189)
Journal diameter
33.935 to 33.950 (1.33602 to 1.33661)
Oil clearance Overall length
0.05 to 0.09 (0.0020 to 0.0035) Intake
109.8 (4.328)
109.3 (4.3031)
Exhaust
106.6 (4.197)
106.1 (4.126)
42.05 (1.6555)
42.55 (1.6752)
Intake
7.960 to 7.975 (0.31339 to 0.31398)
Exhaust
7.930 to 7.950 (0.31220 to 0.31299)
Valve stem projection Stem diameter Valve
Remarks
0.03 (0.0012)
Grinding limit
Piston Valve seat Valve guide Valve spring
Limit
Face angle
45¡ to 45.5¡
Thickness of valve
Intake
1.2 (0.047)
head (margin)
Exhaust
2.0 (0.079)
Stem-to-guide
Intake
0.025 to 0.058 (0.00098 to 0.00228)
clearance
Exhaust
0.050 to 0.088 (0.00197 to 0.00346)
Free height
48.0 (1.89)
Load/installed height
176.5N (18kg) [39.7lbf]/40.4 (1.591)
Out-of-squareness
2¡ or less Intake
Overall length Inner diameter Valve contact width
4¡
47 (1.85)
Exhaust
52 (2.05) 8.000 to 8.018 (0.31496 to 0.31567) 0.9 to 1.3 (0.035 to 0.051)
Sinkage
0.2 (0.008)
Outside diameter
84.97 to 85.00 (3.3453 to 3.3465)
Piston clearance
0.02 to 0.04 (0.0008 to 0.0016)
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
47.0 (1.85)
14
Specifications
Unit : mm(in.) Item No. 1 ring
0.25 to 0.40 (0.0098 to 0.0157)
0.8 (0.031)
0.45 to 0.60 (0.0177 to 0.0236)
0.8 (0.031)
Oil ring
0.20 to 0.60 (0.0079 to 0.0236)
1.0 (0.039)
Ring-to-ring groove
No. 1
0.02 to 0.06 (0.0008 to 0.0024)
clearance
No. 2
0.02 to 0.06 (0.0008 to 0.0024)
Piston ring Piston pin Connecting rod Crankshaft Cylinder block
Outside diameter
Oil pump
Remarks
22.002 to 22.005 (0.86622 to 0.86634)
Press-in load
7350 to 17160
(at room temperature),
(750 to 1750)
N (kg) [lbf]
[1650 to 3860]
Big end center-to small end center
149.9 to 150.0 (5.902 to 5.906)
length Bend
0.05 (0.0020)
Twist
0.10 (0.0039)
Big end thrust clearance
0.10 to 0.25 (0.0039 to 0.0098)
End play
0.05 to 0.18 (0.0020 to 0.0071)
Journal outside diameter
56.982 to 57.000 (2.24338 to 2.24409)
Pin Outside diameter
44.985 to 45.000 (1.77106 to 1.77165)
Out-of-roundness and taper of journal and pin Concentricity journal and pin
0.005 (0.00020) 0.03 (0.0012)
Oil clearance of journal
0.02 to 0.04 (0.0008 to 0.0016)
Oil clearance of pin
0.02 to 0.05 (0.0008 to 0.0020)
Cylinder inner diameter
85.00 to 85.03 (3.3465 to 3.3476)
Flatness of gasket surface
0.05 (0.0020) Total resurfacing depth of both 0.2 (0.008) cylinder head and cylinder block
Grinding limit Overall height
Drive belt
Limit
No. 2 ring
End gap
Carburetor
Standard value
Side clearance Deflection
283.9 to 284.1 (11.177 to 11.185) Drive gear
0.08 to 0.14 (0.031 to 0.0055)
Drive gear
0.06 to 0.12 (0.0024 to 0.0047)
New belt
7.0 to 10.0 (0.28 to 0.39)
Used belt
10 (0.39)
Throttle bore diameter
32 (1.26)
Outer venturi diameter
24 (0.94)
Inner venturi diameter
9 to 12 (0.35 to 0.47)
Main jet size symbol
130
Main air jet diameter
0.9 (0.035)
Pilot jet diameter
0.55 (0.0217)
Pilot air jet diameter
1.6 (0.063)
Primary throttle valve to throttle bore clearance
1.1(0.043)
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
15
Specifications
Unit : mm(in.) Item
Standard value
Starter motor
Nominal output, kW No-load characterstics
Commutator
11.0
Current, A
90 or less
Speed, rpm
3000
Outer diameter
29.4 (1.16)
28.8 (1.13)
Runout
0.05 (0.0020)
0.1 (0.0039)
Undercut
0.5 (0.020)
0.2 (0.008)
0.5 to 2.0 (0.020 to 0.079)
Tahermostat Spark plug Ignitio n coil Distributor
Brush length
Wear limit line
Centrifugal advance crank
Start
0¡/1000
angle/engine speed, ¡/rpm
End
20¡/5000
Vacuum advance crank
End
0¡/80
angle/vacuum, ¡/mmHg
Start
23¡/280
Primary coil resistance, ½
1.08 to 1.32
Secondary coil resistance, ½
22.1 to 29.9
Plug gap
0.7 to 0.8 (0.028 to 0.031)
Valve opening temperature, ¡C (ûF)
82 (180)
Fully opening temperature, ûC (ûF)
95 (203)
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Remarks
1.2 Voltage, V
Pinion gap
Valve lift
Limit
8 (0.31) or more
16
Specifications
Removal and Installation Ignition System Removal and Installation
6EN1891
Removal steps 1. Drive belt 2. Water pump pulley 3. Crankshaft pulley 4. Spark plug cable 5. Spark plug 6. High tension cable
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
A
17
7. Vacuum hose 8. Ignition coil 9. Harness 10. Distributor
Removal And Installation
Inspection High voltage terminal
Ignition Coil Perform the following measurements. Replace the ignition coil if the standard values are not met.
Ð
+
1EN0393
(1) Measure the resistance values of the primary and secondary coils and of the external resistor with a tester. If the readings are within the standard limits, it follows that there is no short or open circuit in the ignition coil. Standard value: Primary coil resistance value: 1.08 to 1.32 ½ Secondary coil resistance value: 22.1 to 29.9½
Spark Plug Cable/High Tension Cable (1) Check the caps and covering for cracks. (2) Measure the resistance values: Standard value: 16 k½/m
Installation Service Points A Gear mating mark Housings mating mark
Distributor installation
(1) Turn the crankshaft so that the No.1 cylinder is at top dead center. (2) Align the distributor housing and gear mating marks.
6EN0598
(3) Install the distributor to the engine while aligning the fine cut (groove or projection) of the distributorÕs installation flange with the center of the distributor installation stud.
Stud HousingÕs mating mark
6EN0599
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
18
Removal And Installation
Timing Belt Removal and Installation
A
B C D
H G G G F E
Removal steps 1. Timing belt front cover upper 2. Timing belt front cover lower 3. Timing belt 4. Tensioner spacer 5. Tensioner spring 6. Tensioner pulley 7. Oil pump sprocket 8. Crankshaft bolt 9. Crankshaft washer 10. Crankshaft sprocket 11. Flang
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
E F
D C
G B H
19
A
12. Tensioner B 13. Timing belt B 14. Counterbalance shaft sprocket 15. Spacer 16. Crankshaft sprocket B 17. Crankshaft key 18. Engine support bracket 19. Camshaft sprocket bolt 20. Camshaft sprocket 21. Timing belt rear cover
Removal And Installation
Removal Service Points A
Timing belt removal
(1) When the timing belt is to be re-used, make an arrow mark on the back surface on the belt to indicate the rotating direction with a chalk or the like so that the belt can be installed in the same direction. (2) Move the timing belt tensioner upward and temporarily tighten the tensioner lock bolt. (3) Remove the timing belt. 6EN0716
6EN0884
B
Screw driver
Oil pump sprocket removal
(1) Remove the plug on the left side of cylinder block. (2) Insert a screwdriver (shank diameter 8 mm[0.31 in.]) to block the counterbalance shaft. (3) Remove the nut. (4) Remove the oil pump sprocket.
6EN0663
C
Crankshaft bolt removal
(1) Hold the flywheel with the special tool as shown. (2) Remove the crankshaft bolt.
MD998781
6EN0868
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
20
Removal And Installation
D MD998778
Crankshaft sprocket removal
(1) If it is difficult to remove the sprocket, use the special tool.
6EN0642
E
Timing belt ÒBÓ removal
(1) Make a mark on the back of the timing belt indicating the direction of rotation so it may be reassembled in the same direction if it is to be reused. NOTE: Water or oil on the belt shortens its life drastically, so the removed timing belt, sprocket, and tensioner must be free from oil and water. These parts should not be washed. Replace part if seriously contaminated. 6EN1322
(2) If there is oil or water on each part check front case oil seals, camshaft oil seal and water pump for leaks.
F
Counterbalance shaft sprocket removal
(1) Set the special tool as shown to prevent the counterbalance shaft sprocket from turning together. (2) Loosen the bolt and remove the sprocket. MD998785
6EN0636
G MD998778
Crankshaft sprocket ÒBÓ removal
(1) If it is difficult to remove the sprocket, use the special tool.
6EN0637
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
21
Removal And Installation
H MB990767
Crankshaft sprocket removal
(1) Using the special tool show in the illustration, lock the camshaft sprocket in position. (2) Loosen the camshaft sprocket bolt.
MD998719 6EN0668
Inspection 1. Timing Belt Replace belt if any of the following conditions exist. (1) Hardening of back rubber. Back side is glossy without resilience and leaves no indent when pressed with fingernail. 8EN0066
Cracks
Peeling
Cracks
(2) Cracks on rubber back. (3) Cracks or peeling of canvas. (4) Cracks on tooth bottom. (5) Cracks on belt sides.
Cracks
Cracks
8EN0044
(6) Abnormal wear of belt sides. NOTE: The sides are normal if they are sharp as if cut by a knife.
Rounded edge
Abuormal wear (Flutty strand) 8EN0067
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
22
Removal And Installation
(7) Abnormal wear on teeth Earlier stage: Canvas worn (canvas fibers napped, rubber lost, discolored whitish, and unclear canvas texture) Latter stage: Canvas lost, rubber exposed (tooth width thinner) (8) Missing tooth
Rubber exposed
Tooth missing
8EN0068
Installation Service Points A
Camshaft sprocket installation
(1) Using the special tools show in the illustration, lock the camshaft sprocket in position. (2) Tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt to the specified torque.
MB990767
MD998719 6EN0669
B
Engine support bracket installation
(1) Coat the bolts illustrated with sealant before tightening. Specified sealant: 3MTM AAD Part No. 8762 or equivalent
6EN0739
C
MD998785
Counterbalance shaft sprocket installation
(1) Install the counterbalance shaft sprocket and screw the bolt. (2) Install special tool as shown in the illustration to lock the counterbalance shaft. (3) Tighten the bolt, and then remove the special tool.
6EN0636
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
23
Removal And Installation
D Timing marks (on fron case)
timing marks
Timing belt ÒBÓ installation
(1) Align timing mark on the crankshaft sprocket ÒBÓ and counterbalance shaft sprocket with the marks on the front case respectively. (2) Install the timing belt ÒBÓ on the crankshaft sprocket ÒBÓ and counterbalance shaft sprocket. There should be no slack on the tension side.
DEN0602
(3) Make sure that the relationship between the tensioner pulley center and the bolt center is as shown in the illustration.
Tensioner ÒBÓ
Center of tensioner paller
Center of bolt 6EN0571
(4) Move the tensioner ÒBÓ in the direction of arrow while lifting with a finger to give a sufficient tension to the tension side of timing belt. In this condition, tighten bolt to secure tensioner ÒBÓ. When the bolt is tightened, use care to prevent shaft from turning together. If shaft is turned together, belt will be over tensioned.
6EN0572
Timing marks
(5) Check to ensure that timing marks on sprockets and front case are in alignment. (6) Press with index finger the center of span on the tension side of timing belt ÒBÓ. The belt must deflect 5 to 7 mm. [0.196 to 0.276 in].
Belt deflection
timing marks
6EN0573
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
24
Removal And Installation
E
Crankshaft bolt installation
(1) Using the special tool, hold the flywheel. (2) Install the crankshaft pulley in position.
MD998781 6EN0634
F
Oil pump sprocket installation
(1) Insert a phillips screwdriver (shank diameter 8 mm[0.31 in.] shaft) through the plug hole on the left side of the cylinder block to the left counterbalance shaft. (2) Install the oil pump sprocket. (3) Apply a proper amount of engine oil to the bearing surfaces of the nuts. (4) Tighten the nuts to the specified torque. Screw driver
6EN0564
G Spring end Tensioner spring Spring end
Crankshaft bolt installation
(1) Hook the tensioner spring end to the water pump body projection and tensioner bracket. (2) Move the tensioner fully toward the water pump and tighten the bolt and tensioner spacer.
Bolt Water pump
Tensioner
6EN0555
H
Timing belt installation
(1) Align the timing mark on the camshaft sprocket with that on the cylinder head. Timing mark
6EN0670
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
25
Removal And Installation
(2) Align the timing mark on the crankshaft sprocket with that on the front case. Timing mask
6EN0671
(3) Align the timing mark on the oil pump sprocket with its mating mark.
Timing mark
6EN0672
Tensioner spacer
6EN0015
Timing mark
(4) Install the timing belt on the crankshaft sprocket, oil pump sprocket and camshaft sprocket in that order. There should be no slack on the tension side. (5) Apply a reverse direction (counterclockwise) force to the camshaft sprocket to make the tension side of the belt ÒtightÓ. In that state, recheck that all the timing marks are in alignment. (6) Loosen a turn or two the tensioner bolt and nut that were temporarily tightened to hold the tensioner on the water pump side. This gives tension to the belt by the action of the tensioner spring. (7) Rotate the crankshaft by the amount equivalent to two camshaft sprocket teeth in the forward (clockwise) direction. Since this step is intended for giving the timing belt proper tension, do not attempt rotate the crankshaft in the reverse (counterclockwise) direction or press the belt to check the tension.
Two teeth
Timing mark Timing belt
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
6EN0562
26
Removal And Installation
(8) Apply force to the tensioner in the direction shown by arrow to make the belt engage completely with each sprocket.
Tensioner
6EN0017
(9) Tighten the tensioner attaching bolt to the specified torque. (10) Tighten the tensioner spacer to the specified torque.
Tensioner spacer
NOTE: If the nut is tightened first, the tensioner may also turn together with the nut and loose tension of the belt may result. Always tighten the bolt (at the bottom of the tensioner) first and then tighten the nut (at the top of the tensioner). Tensioner
6EN0015
(11) Hold the center of the tension side span of the timing belt (between the camshaft and oil pump sprockets) between your thumb and index finger as shown. Then, make sure that the clearance between the belt back surface and cover meets the standard value. Standard value: 14 mm (0.55 in.)
14mm (0.55in)
6EN0616
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
27
Removal And Installation
Fuel System Removal and Installation Carburetor
6EN1893
A
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Removal steps 1. Return set hose assembly 2. Oil seal 3. Air horn 4. Gasket 5. Carburetor 6. Air governor 7. Gasket
B
28
A
8. Fuel pipe 9. Fuel hose 10. Fuel pipe 11. Fuel pump 12. Gasket 13. Insulator 14. Push rod
Removal And Installation
Removal Service Points A
Carburetor removal
(1) Hold the carburetor in a level position while using care not to let fuel spill, remove it from the intake manifold. (2) Turn the carburetor upside down on a pan to drain fuel.
B
Fuel pump removal
Placing the piston in No.1 cylinder at TDC on the compression stroke makes the fuel pump stroke lift the smallest, allowing easy removal of the pump.
Installation Service Points
Arm pin Arm
A
Rod spring Rod
Cam shaft Push rod
Breather hose Diaphragm spring Diaphragm
Pump body Pump cover
IN
OUT 6EN0841
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Fuel pump installation
(1) Bring the piston in No.1 cylinder to TDC on the compression stroke. This provides the smallest lift of the eccentric cam, allowing easy installation of the fuel pump. (2) Apply engine oil to the surface of the push rod and insert it into the hole in the cylinder head. Make sure that the push rod sides smoothly. (3) Install the fuel pump on the cylinder head with the insulator and a new gasket in between, and tighten the bolts completely.
29
Removal And Installation
Removal and Installation LPG Carburetor
6EN1890
Removal steps 1. Throttle return spring 2. Accel wire assembly 3. Return spring support 4. LPG carburetor 5. Throttle chamber gasket
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
6. Throttle body 7. Carburetor gasket 8. Air governor 9. Air governor gasket 10. Fuel pump cover
30
Removal And Installation
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
6EN1894
Removal steps 1. Water outlet 2. Gasket 3. Thermostat
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
4. Engine hanger 5. Intake manifold 6. Gasket
31
Removal And Installation
Intentional blank
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
32
Removal And Installation
Exhaust Manifold and Water Pump Removal and Installation
6EN1895
Removal steps 1. Oil level gauge 2. Oil level gauge guide 3. O-ring 4. Heat protector A 5. Heat protector B 6. Engine hanger
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
A A
33
7. Exhaust manifold 8. Gasket 9. Water inlet pipe 10.O-ring 11. Water hose 12. Water pump 13. Gasket
Removal And Installation
A
O-ring and water pipe installation
Replace the water inlet pipe O-ring with a new one. Apply water to the outer circumference of the O-ring for easier insertion into the water pump and thermostat housing. Caution: 1) Never apply engine oil or any other oil or grease to the O-ring. 2) Fasten the water pipe after the thermostat housing has been installed.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
34
Removal And Installation
Rocker Arms And Camshaft Removal and Installation
6EN1896
G A
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Removal steps 1. Breather hose 2. P.C.V. hose 3. P.C.V. valve 4. Oil filler cap 5. Rocker cover 6. Gasket 7. Semi-circular packing 8. Rocker arms and rocker shafts 9. Rear bearing cap 10. Rear arm D 11. Spring
35
D D D C B B E F A
12. Bearing cap No. 4 13. Rocker arm C 14. Bearing cap No. 3 15. Bearing cap No. 2 16. Wave washer 17. Right rocker shaft 18. Left rocker shaft 19. Front bearing cap 20. Lash adjuster 21. Oil seal 22. Camshaft
Removal And Installation
Removal Service Points
MD998443
A
Rocker arm and rocker shaft removal
Caution: If the lash adjuster is re-used, clean the lash adjuster.
6EN0569
(1) Fit the lash adjuster onto the rocker arm without allowing diesel fuel to spill out. Fit. Special tool MD998443 to prevent the lash adjuster coming free and falling to the floor.
Inspection 1. Camshaft Measure the cam height and if the limit is exceeded, replace. Standard value: 41.62 mm (1.6386 in.) Limit: 41.12 mm (1.6189 in.)
9EN0058
2. Lash Adjuster Caution: ¥The lash adjusters are precision-engineered mechanisms. Do not allow them to become contaminated by dirt or other foreign substances. ¥Do not attempt to disassemble the lash adjusters. ¥Use only fresh diesel fuel to clean the lash adjusters
Cutside cleaning
Inside cleaning
Filling with diesel fuel
A
B
C
(1) Prepare three containers and approximately five liters of diesel fuel. Into each container, pour enough diesel fuel to completely cover a lash adjuster when it is standing upright. Then, perform the following steps with each lash adjuster.
6EN1698
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
36
Removal And Installation
(2) Place the lash adjuster in container A and clean its outside surface. NOTE: Use a nylon brush if deposits are hard to remove.
Diesel fuel 6EN1699
(3) While gently pushing down the internal steel ball using special tool MD998442, move the plunger through five to ten strokes until it slides smoothly. In addition to eliminating stiffness in the plunger, this operation will remove dirty oil. Caution: The steel ball spring is extremely weak, so the lash adjusterÕs functionality may be lost if the air bleed wire is pushed in hard.
Diesel fuel MD998442 6EN1808
NOTE: If the plunger remains stiff or the mechanism appears otherwise abnormal, replace the lash adjuster.
(4) Remove the lash adjuster from the container. Then, push down the steel ball gently and push the plunger to eliminate diesel fuel from the pressure chamber.
MD998442 Diesel fuel
6EN1809
(5) Place the lash adjuster in container B. Then, gently push down the internal steel ball using special tool MD998442 and move the plunger through five to ten strokes until it slides smoothly. This operation will clean the lash adjusterÕs pressure chamber.
MD998442
Caution: The steel ball spring is extremely weak, so the lash adjusterÕs functionality may be lost if the air bleed wire is pushed in hard.
Diesel fuel 6EN1808
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
37
Removal And Installation
(6) Remove the lash adjuster from the container. Then, push down the steel ball gently and push the plunger to eliminate diesel fuel from the pressure chamber.
MD998442 Diesel fuel
6EN1809
(7) Place the lash adjuster in container C. Then, gently push down the internal steel ball using special tool MD998442.
MD998442
Caution: Do not use container C for cleaning. If cleaning is performed in container C, foreign matter could enter the pressure chamber when the chamber is filled with diesel fuel. Diesel fuel 6EN1810
(8) Stand the lash adjuster with its plunger at the top, then push the plunger downward firmly until it moves through its greatest possible stroke. Return the plunger slowly, then release the steel ball and allow the pressure chamber to fill with diesel fuel.
MD998442
Diesel fuel 6EN1811
(9) Remove the lash adjuster from the container, then stand the lash adjuster with its plunger at the top. Push the plunger firmly and check that it does not move. NOTE: If lash adjuster contracts, perform the operations (7) through (9) again to fill it with diesel fuel completely. Replace the lash adjuster if it still contracts after performing these steps.
6EN1704
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
(10) Stand the lash adjuster upright to prevent diesel fuel spilling out. Do not allow the lash adjuster to become contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Fit the lash adjuster onto the engine as soon as possible.
38
Removal And Installation
Installation Service Points A
Camshaft installation
Apply engine oil to the journals and cams of the camshafts. Install the camshaft on the cylinder head.
B
Notch
Rocker shaft installation
Insert the rocker shafts into the front bearing cap so that the notches on the shafts face up, and insert the installation bolts without tightening them.
Frout bearing cap
6EN0575
C
Wave washer
Wave washer installation
Install the wave washer in correct direction as shown.
Front bearing cap
No.1 intake side rocker arm
6EN0576
D Rocker cover
Mounting bolt hole
Bearing cap
(1) No.3 bearing cap looks very similar to No.2 and No.4 bearing caps. NOTE: No.2 bearing cap is the same as No.4 bearing cap.
Front mark No.2
Indentification No.3
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Mark No.4
(2) Install the bearing caps with their front marks pointing to the camshaft sprocket side. 6EN0024
39
Removal And Installation
E
MD998443
Lash adjuster installation
Caution: If the lash adjuster is re-used, clean the lash adjuster. (1) Set special tool MD998443 to prevent the lash adjuster coming free and falling to the floor.
6EN0569
F
Camshaft oil seal installation
(1) Apply engine oil to the lip area of the oil seal and the camshaft front end outer diameter. (2) Using special tool, install the camshaft oil seal.
MD998713
6EN0650
G Apply sealant
Semi-circular packing installation
(1) Apply sealant to the location shown in the illustration. Specified sealant: 3MTM AAD Part No. 8672 or equivalent.
DEN0053
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
40
Removal And Installation
Cylinder Head And Valves Removal and Installation
6EN1897
A
B
D
C B
B
C B
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Removal steps 1. Cylinder head bolt 2. Cylinder head assembly 3. Cylinder head gasket 4. Retainer lock 5. Valve spring retainer 6. Valve spring 7. Intake valve 8. Retainer lock 9. Valve spring retainer 10. Valve spring
41
C
A
C
A
11. Exhaust valve 12. Valve stem seal 13. Valve spring seat 14. Valve stem seal 15. Valve spring seat 16. Intake valve guide 17. Exhaust valve guide 18. Intake valve seat 19. Exhaust valve seat 20. Cylinder head
Removal And Installation
Removal Service Points A
MB991654
Cylinder head bolt removal
Using special tool, loosen the cylinder head bolts. Loosen each bolt evenly, little by little, by two or three steps.
6EN0717
B MD998772
Retainer lock removal
Store removed valves, springs and other parts, tagged to indicate their cylinder No. and location for reassembly.
6EN0652
C
Valve stem seal removal
Caution: Do not reuse removed valve stem seal.
Inspection 1. Cylinder Head 6EN0718
6EN0719
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
(1) Check the cylinder head for water leaks, gas leaks, damage or cracks before cleaning. (2) Thoroughly remove oil, water scale, sealant, carbon deposit, etc. After the oil passages have been cleaned, blow air to make sure that they are clean. (3) Check the cylinder head gasket surface for flatness by using straightedge and thickness gauge. If the service limit is exceeded, correct to meet the specification. Standard valve: 0.03 mm (0.0012 in.) or less. Limit: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) Grinding limit: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) Cylinder head height (when new): 89.9 to 90.1 mm (3.539 to 3.547 in.) NOTE: Grinding the cylinder head is permitted as long as the total thickness of the metal removed from the cylinder head and the cylinder block does not exceed 0.2 mm (0.008 in.). 42
Removal And Installation
2. Valve
Valve seat contact Margin
6EN0542
(1) Check the valve face for correct contact. If incorrect, reface. Valve seat contact should be maintained uniform at the center of valve face. (2) If the margin exceeds the service limit, replace the valve: Standard value: Intake 1.2 mm (0.047 in.) Exhaust 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) Limit: Intake 0.7 mm (0.028 in.) Exhaust 1.5 mm (0.059 in.) (3) Measure the valveÕs total length. If the measurement is less than specified, replace the valve. Standard value: 4G63 Intake 109.8 mm (4.328 in.) Exhaust 108.7 mm (4.280 in.) 4G64 Intake 106.6 mm (4.197 in.) Exhaust 105.2 mm (4.142 in.) Limit: 4G63 Intake 109.3 mm (4.3031 in.) Exhaust 108.2 mm (4.260 in.) 4G64 Intake 106.1 mm (4.177 in.) Exhaust 104.7 mm (4.122 in.)
3. Valve Spring Out of squareness
Free height
(1) Measure the free height of spring and, if it is smaller than the limit, replace. Standard value: 48.0 mm (1.89 in.) Limit: 47.0 mm (1.85 in.) (2) Measure the squareness of the spring and, if the limit is exceeded, replace. Standard value: 2 degrees or less Limit: 4 degrees
1EN0264
4. Valve Guide Measure the clearance between the valve guide and valve stem. If the limit is exceeded, replace the valve guide or valve, or both.
Valve guide
Guide I.D.
Stem I.D.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
1EN0279
43
Removal And Installation
Valve stem end
Valve Projection
Spring seating surface
5. Valve Seats (1) Assemble the valve, than measure the valve stem projection between the end of the valve stem and the spring seating surface. If the measurement exceeds the specified limit, replace the valve seat. Standard value: 42.05 mm (1.6555 in.) Limit: 42.55 mm (1.6752 in.)
DEN0212
0.9 (0.0 to 1.3 35 t o 0. 05
Unit : mm(in)
1)
60û
Valve Seat Reconditioning Procedure
) o 1.3 .051 0.9 0t 35 to 0 (0.
60û
25û 43.5û to 44û
(1) Before correcting the valve seat, check for clearance between the valve guide and valve and, if necessary, replace the valve guide. (2) Correct to obtain the specified seat width and angle. (3) After correction, valve and valve seat should be lapped with a lapping compound.
43.5û to 44û 25û 1EN0105
0.5 to 1.0 Unit : mm(in) (0.020 to 0.039)
Valve Seat Replacement Procedure (1) Cut the valve seat to be replaced from the inside to thin the wall thickness. Then, remove the valve seat.
Cut away
0.5 to 1.0 (0.020 to 0.030)
1EN0274
(2) Rebore the valve seat hole in the cylinder head to a selected oversize valve seat diameter. (3) Before fitting the valve seat, cool the valve seat in liquid nitrogen, to prevent the cylinder head bore from galling. (4) Using a valve seat cutter, correct the valve seat to the specified width and angle. See ÒValve Seat Reconditioning ProcedureÓ.
Height of valve seat
Over size I.D 1EN0275
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
44
Removal And Installation
Valve Guide Replacement Procedure (1) Using a press, remove the valve guide toward the cylinder block side. (2) Rebore the valve guide hole to the new oversize valve guide outside diameter. NOTE: Do not install a valve guide of the same size again. Valve guide hole diameter. 0.05 O.S. 13.05 to 13.07 mm (0.5138 to 0.5146 in.) 0.25 O.S. 13.25 to 13.27 mm (0.5217 to 0.5224 in.) 0.50 O.S. 13.50 to 13.52 mm (0.5315 to 0.5323 in.)
Press
(3) Press in the valve guide to the position shown in the illustration. Standard value: 11.5 mm (0.453 in.)
Press
11.5mm (0.453 in)
Push rod Valve guide Removal
Valve guide
Installation 6EN0543
NOTE: 1) Press-fit the valve guide, working from the cylinder head top surface. 2) Note that the intake and exhaust side valve guides are different in length. 3) After installing valve guides, insert new valves in them to check for sliding condition.
Installation Service Points
MD998729
A
Valve stem seal installation
(1) Install the valve spring seat. (2) Using special tool, install the new valve stem seat to the valve guide.
6EN0743
Caution: 1) Do not reuse removed valve stem seal. 2) The special tool must be used to install the valve stem seal. Improper installation could result in oil leaking past the valve guide.
B Indentification color
Spring retainer
Valve spring installation
Direct the valve spring end with identification color toward the rocker arm.
Stem seal Spring seat 6EN0437
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
45
Removal And Installation
C MD998772
Retainer lock installation
The valve spring, if excessively compressed, causes the bottom end of the retainer to be in contact.
6EN0652
D
Cylinder head bolt installation
(1) When installing the cylinder head bolts, check that the shank length of each bolt meets the limit is exceeded, replace the bolt. Standard value: 120.4 mm (4.740 in.) (2) Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and washers.
Shank length
6EN0782
8
10
6
4
1
2
3
5
9
7 6EN0694
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
(3) According to the tightening sequence, tighten the bolts to 8.0 kg¥m (57.9 lb¥ft)[80 N¥m]. (4) Loosen the bolts completely. (5) Torque the bolts to 2.0 kg¥m (14.5 lb¥ft)[20 N¥m]. (6) Tighten the bolts 1/4 turns (90¡) more. (7) Tighten the bolts 1/4 turns (90¡) additionally. Caution: 1) If the bolt is turned less than 90¡, proper fastening performance may not be expected. When tightening the bolt, therefore, be careful to give a sufficient turn to it. 2) If the bolt is over tightened, loosen the bolt completely and then retighten it by repeating the tightening procedure from step (1).
46
Removal And Installation
Front Case And Oil Pan Removal and Installation
6EN1898
N M
A
L K
B
J
C
I
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Removal steps 1. Oil filter 2. Oil pressure switch 3. Drain plug 4. Drain plug gasket 5. Oil pan 6. Oil screen 7. Oil screen gasket 8. Plug 9. O-ring 10. Flange bolt 11. Relief plug 12. Gasket 13. Relief spring 14. Relief plunger 15. Oil filter bracket 16. Oil filter bracket gasket
H G G G F E D
D E E
47
C B A
17. Oil pump case assembly 18. Front case gasket 19. Oil pump cover 20. Oil pump drive gear 21. Oil pump driven gear 22. Crankshaft front oil seal 23. Oil pump oil seal 24. Counterbalance shaft oil seal 25. Front case 26. Counterbalance shaft, left 27. Counterbalance shaft, right 28. Counterbalance shaft, front bearing 29. Counterbalance shaft, rear bearing,left 30. Counterbalance shaft, rear bearing, right
Removal And Installation
Removal Service Points MD998727
A
Oil pan removal
(1) Remove the all oil pan bolts. (2) Drive in the special tool between the cylinder block and oil pan (3) Side the tool by striking the edge of the special tool to separate the oil pan from the cylinder block. 6EN0698
B MD998162
Plug removal
(1) Fit special tool MD998162 on the plug, then hold it in position with special tool MD998783. (2) Loose the plug.
MD998783 6EN0909
C
Oil pump oil seal installation
(1) Remove the plug on the side of cylinder block. (2) Insert a phillips screwdriver(shank diameter 8mm[0.31 in.]) into the plug hole to lock the counterbalance shaft.
Screw driver Plug 6EN1026
(3) Loosen the flange bolt.
6EN0565
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
48
Removal And Installation
D
Counterbalance shaft front bearing removal
(1) Using the special tool, remove the counterbalance shaft front bearing from the cylinder block. NOTE: Be sure to remove the front bearing first. If it has not been removed, the rear bearing puller cannot be used.
MD998371
Front bearing 3EN0166
E MB991603
Counterbalance shaft rear bearing removal
(1) Using the special tool, remove the counterbalance shaft rear bearing from the cylinder block. NOTE: When removing the left counterbalance shaft bearing, install the special tool (MB991603) in front of the cylinder block.
MD998372 6EM0207
Inspection 1. Front Case (1) Check oil holes for clogging and clean if necessary. (2) Check the left counterbalance shaft front bearing section for wear, damage and seizure. If there is anything wrong with the section, replace the front case. (3) Check the front case for cracks and other damage. Replace cracked or damaged front case. 2. Oil Seal (1) Check the oil seal lip for wear and Replace oil seal if necessary. (2) Check the oil seal lip for deterioration. Replace oil seal if necessary. 3. Counterbalance Shaft (1) Check oil hole for clogging. (2) Check journals for seizure, damaged and contact with bearing. If there is anything wrong with the journal assembly.
DEN0711
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
49
Removal And Installation
4. Oil Pump
6LU0013
(1) Assemble the oil pump to the front case and rotate it to ensure smooth rotation with no looseness. (2) Check the side clearance using a thickness gauge. (3) Check the side clearance Standard value: 0.08 to 0.14 mm (0.0031 to 0.0055 in.) Drive gear 0.06 to 0.12 mm (0.0024 to 0.0047 in.) Driven gear
Installation Service Points A
Right counterbalance shaft rear bearing installation
(1) Apply engine oil to the outer surface of bearing. (2) Using special tools, install right rear bearing. Make sure that oil hole of bearing is aligned with oil hole of cylinder block.
MD998705
MD998705
Cylinder block 6EN1034
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
50
Removal And Installation
B MB991603
Left counterbalance shaft rear bearing installation
(1) Install the special tool (Guide Plate) to cylinder block. (2) Apply engine oil to the rear bearing outer circumference and bearing hole in the cylinder block. (3) Using the special tool, install the rear bearing. NOTE: The left rear bearing has no oil holes.
MD998705
6EN0208
Rear bearing
MB991603
MD998705 6EN0557
C
Counterbalance shaft front bearing installation
(1) Using the special tool, install the rear bearing.
MD998705
MD998705
Bearing
Cylinder block 6EN1035
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
51
Removal And Installation
D Socket wrench
Oil seal
Counterbalance shaft oil seal installation
(1) Using a suitable socket wrench, install the counterbalance shaft oil into the front case.
Front case
6EN0580
E
Oil pump oil seal installation
(1) Using a suitable socket wrench, install the oil pump oil seal into the front case.
Socket
Oil seal Front case
6EN0494
F
MD998375
Crank shaft front oil seal installation
(1) Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front oil seal into the front case.
Oil seal Front case
6EN0579
G
Alignment mark
Oil pump driven gear/oil pump drive gear installation
(1) Apply engine oil amply to the gears and line up the alignment marks.
6LU0015
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
52
Removal And Installation
H
Front case installation
(1) Set the special tool on the front end of the crankshaft and apply a thin coat of engine oil to the outer circumference of the special tool to install the front case.
MD998285
6EN0746
(2) Install the front case assembly through a new front case gasket and temporarily tighten the flange bolts(other than those for tightening the filter bracket).
MD998285
6EN0747
I
Flange bolt installation
(1) Insert a Phillips screwdriver into a hole in the left side of the cylinder block to lock the counterbalance shaft.
Screw driver
6EN0564
(2) Secure the oil pump driven gear onto the left counterbalance shaft by tightening the flange bolt to specified torque.
6EN0565
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
53
Removal And Installation
J MD998162
Plug installation
(1) Install a new o-ring to the groove of the front case. (2) Install a plug to the front case. (3) Fit the special tool MD998162 on the plug, and then hold in position with special tool MD998783. (4) Tighten the plug to the special tool MD998783. (5) Remove the special tools MD998783 and MD998162.
MD998783 6EN0909
K
FIPG
Oil pan installation
(1) Clean both mating surface of the oil pan and cylinder block. (2) Apply a 4 mm (0.16 in.) wide bead of FIPG to the entire circumference of the oil pan flange. The oil pan should be installed in 15 minutes after the application of FIPG. Specified FIPG: 3MTM AAD Part No.8672 or equivalent
Groove portion
Bolt hole portion
6EN0213
(3) Note the difference in bolt lengths at the location shown. Crank pulley side
8mm bolts
Oil pan viewed from lower side
6EN0449
Drain plug
L
Drain plug gasket installation
(1) Install the drain plug gasket in the direction shown. Caution: Fitting the gasket in a wrong way will result in oil leakage.
Oil seal Gasket Oil pan side
7EN0179
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
54
Removal And Installation
M
Oil pressure switch installation
Specified sealant: 3MTM AAD Part No. 8672 or equivalent Sealant
Caution: 1) Keep the end of threaded portion clear of sealant. 2) Avoid an over tightening.
9EN0094
N Bracket side
Oil filter installation
(1) Clean the installation surfaces of the filter bracket. (2) Apply engine oil to the o-ring of oil filter. (3) Screw the oil filter in until the o-ring contacts the bracket.
Engine Oil
6EN0591
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
55
Removal And Installation
Piston And Connecting Rod Removal and Installation
6EN1899
A
G F E D E C
Removal steps 1. Nut 2. Connecting rod cap 3. Connecting rod bearing 4. Piston and connecting rod assembly 5. Connecting rod bearing 6. Piston ring No. 1
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
56
B
C B A
7. Piston ring No. 2 8. Oil ring 9. Piston pin 10. Piston 11. Connecting rod 12. Bolt
Removal And Installation
Removal Service Points A Cylinder number
Connecting rod cap removal
Mark the cylinder number on the side of the connecting rod big end for correct reassembly.
DEN0050
unit:mm(in)
Push rod
Guide B
Guide C
Base
Guide A 17.9(0.705)
B
Piston pin removal
The special tool, Piston Pin Setting Tool (MD998780), consists of the parts shown in the illustration at the left.
Guide A 18.9(0.744)
Guide A 20.9(0.823)
Guide A 21.9(0.862) 7EN0431
Push rod
Front mark Front mark
(1) Insert the special tool, Push Rod, into the piston from the side on which the front mark is stamped in the piston head, and attach the guide C to the push rod end. (2) Place the piston and connecting rod assembly on the special tool, Piston Pin Setting Base, with the front mark facing upward. (3) Using a press, remove the piston pin. NOTE: Keep the disassembled piston, piston pins and connecting rods in order according to the cylinder number.
Guide C
Base
7EN0390
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
57
Removal And Installation
Inspection 1. Piston Ring
7EN0475
Press down ring with piston
Piston ring
End gap
(1) Check for the clearance between the piston ring and ring groove. If the limit is exceeded, replace the ring or both piston and ring. (2) Install the piston ring into the cylinder bore. Force it down with a piston, its crown being in contact with the ring, to correctly position it at right angles to the cylinder wall. Then, measure the end gap with a feeler gauge. If the ring gap is excessive, replace the piston ring. Standard value: No.1 0.25 to 0.40 mm (0.0098 to 0.0157 in.) No.2 0.45 to 0.60 mm (0.0177 to 0.0236 in.) Oil 0.20 to 0.60 mm (0.0079 to 0.0236 in.) Limit: No.1, No.2 0.8 mm(0.031 in.) Oil 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
7EN0476
2. Crankshaft Pin Oil Clearance (Plastic Gauge Method)
1EN0246
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
(1) Remove oil from the crankshaft pin and the connecting rod bearing. (2) Cut the plastic gauge to the same length as the width of the bearing and place it on the crankshaft pin in parallel with its axis. (3) Install the connecting rod cap carefully and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. (4) Remove the bolt and carefully remove the connecting rod cap. (5) Measure the width of the plastic gauge at its widest part by using the scale printed on the plastic gauge package. Standard value: 0.02 to 0.05 mm (0.0008 to 0.0020 in.) Limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
58
Removal And Installation
Piston
Installation Service Points A
Connecting rod Piston pin
A7EN0432
Piston pin installation
(1) Measure the following dimensions of the piston, piston pin and connecting rod. A: Piston pin insertion hole length B: Distance between piston bosses C: Piston pin length D: Connecting rod (2) Obtain dimension L (to be used later) from the above measurements by using by following formula. (A - C) - (B - D) L= 2 (3) Insert the special tool, Push Rod, into the piston pin and attach the guide A to the push rod end. (4) Assemble the connecting rod in the piston with their front marks facing the same direction. (5) Apply engine oil to the entire periphery of the piston pin. (6) Insert the piston pin, push rod and guide A assembly having assembled in stop (3) from the guide A side into the piston pin hole on the front marked side. (7) Screw the guide B into the guide A until the gap between both guides amounts to the value L obtained in step (2) plus 3 mm (0.12 in.)
3mm (0.12in) +L2
Guide B
Guide A 7EN0433
Push rod Piston pin Front mark Front mark
(8) Place the piston onto the piston setting base with the front marks directed upward. (9) Press-fit the piston pin using a press. If the press-fitting force required is less than the standard value, replace the piston and piston pin set or/and the connecting rod. Standard value: 750 to 1750 kgf (1654 to 3859 lbf) [7350 to 17160 N]
Guide A
Base
Guide B
7EN0391
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
59
Removal And Installation
B Side rail
Spacer
6EN0585
Oil ring installation
(1) Fit the oil ring spacer into the piston ring groove. First, install the upper side rail, and then install the lower side rail. NOTE: 1) The side rails and spacer may be installed in either direction. 2) The new spacers and side rails are painted in the following colors to identify their sizes. Size
Identification color
STD
No color
0.50 mm (0.020 in.) O.S.
Blue
1.00 mm (0.040 in.) O.S.
Yellow
(2) To install the side rail, first fit one end of the rail into the piston groove, then press the remaining portion into position by finger. See illustration.
Side rail gap
Caution: The side rail could be broken if it is expanded with a piston ring expander in the same way as with a compression ring. (3) Make sure that the side rails move smoothly in either direction. 7EN0451
Identification Identification Size mark mark
C
Piston ring No.2/piston ring No.1 installation
(1) To prevent wrong installation, check the identification mark of each piston ring. The installation mark is stamped near the ring gap. NOTE: Size mark on piston ring are as follows.
9EN0524
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Size
Size mark
STD
Paint red
0.50 mm (0.020 in.) O.S.
50
1.00 mm (0.040 in.) O.S.
100
60
Removal And Installation
(2) Using piston ring expander, fit No.2 and then No.1 piston ring into position. NOTE: Install piston ring with identification mark facing up, to the piston crown (3) Install the No.1 piston ring in the same manner as step 2.
7EN0452
D Upper side rail
No.1
Piston pin
No.2 ring gap and space gap
Lower side ral 6EN0549
Piston and connecting rod installation
(1) Liberally coat engine oil on the circumference of the piston, piston ring, and oil ring. (2) Arrange the piston ring and oil ring gaps (side rail and spacer) as shown in the illustration. (3) Insert the piston and connecting rod assembly from above the cylinder in such a way that the front mark(arrow) on the top of the piston will be directed toward the camshaft sprocket.
(4) Insert the piston and connecting rod assembly with the piston rings held firmly with a ring band. Forcing it by pounding should be avoided because damage to the piston rings or crank pin could result.
9EN0072
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
61
Removal And Installation
E
No.1 No.4
Connecting rod bearing installation
When the bearings are replaced, select and install them according to the identification colors on the crankshaft and identification marks stamped on the connecting rod bearing. Crankshaft Pin
No.2 No.3 6EN0700
Pin O.D.
Identification
Thickness,
identification mm (in.)
mark or color
mm (in.)
color
Yellow
44.995 to 45.000 (1.77145 to 1.77165)
1 or Yellow
None
44.985 to 44.995 (1.77106 to 1.77145)
2 or None
White
44.980 to 44.985 (1.77086 to 1.77106)
3 or Blue
Identfication mark 6AE0115
1.487 to 1.491 (0.05854 to 0.05870) 1.491 to 1.495 (0.05870 to 0.05886) 1.495 to 1.499 (0.05886 to 0.05902)
Connecting rod inside diameter: 48.000 to 48.015 mm (1.88976 to 1.89035 in.)
F
Cylinder No.
Connecting rod bearing
Connecting rod cap installation
(1) Verifying the mark made during disassembly, install the bearing cap to the connecting rod. If the connecting rod is new with no index mark, make sure that the bearing locking notches come on the same side as shown.
Notches DEN0051
(2) Make sure that connecting rod big end side clearance meets the specification. Standard value: 0.10 to 0.25 mm (0.0039 to 0.0098 in.) Limit: 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)
6EN0621
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
62
Removal And Installation
G
Connecting rod cap nut installation
(1) Since the connecting rod bolts and nuts are torque using a plastic area tightening method, they should be examined BEFORE reuse. If the bolt threads are Ònecked downÓ, the bolts should be replaced. Necking can be checked by running a nut with fingers to the full length of the boltÕs thread. If the nut does not run down smoothly, the bolt should replaced. (2) Before installing the nuts, the threads should be oiled with engine oil. (3) Install both nuts on the bolts finger tight, then alternately torque each nut to assemble the cap properly. (4) Tighten the nuts to 2.0 kg¥m (14.5 lb¥ft) [20 N¥m] and plus 1/4 (90¡) turn. Caution: 1) If the nut is turned less than 90¡, proper fastening performance may not be expected. When tightening the nut, therefore, be careful to give a sufficient turn to it. 2) If the nut is over tightened (exceeding 100¡), loosen the nut completely and then retighten it by repeating the tightening procedure from step (1).
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
63
Removal And Installation
Crankshaft And Cylinder Block Removal and Installation
6EN1900
F E D C
Removal steps 1. Flywheel bolt 2. Flywheel 3. Rear plate 4. Rear plate cover 5. Oil seal case 6. Oil seal 7. Crankshaft bearing cap bolt
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
C B B B
64
8. Crankshaft bearing cap 9. Crankshaft bearing lower 10. Crankshaft 11. Crankshaft bearing upper 12. Thrust bearing 13. Cylinder block
Removal And Installation
Inspection
Plastic gauge
1. Crankshaft Oil Clearance (Plastic Gauge Method) Use of the plastic gauge can facilitate the oil clearance measurement work. To use the plastic gauge, proceed as follows:
6EN0703
(1) Remove oil from the crankshaft journal and crankshaft bearing. (2) Install the crankshaft. (3) Cut the plastic gauge to the same length as the width of the bearing and place it on the journal in parallel with its axis. (4) Install the crankshaft bearing cap carefully and tighten the bolts to specified torque. (5) Remove the bolt, and carefully remove the crankshaft bearing cap. (6) Measure the width of the plastic gauge at its widest part by using a scale printed on the plastic gauge package. Standard value: 0.02 to 0.04 mm (0.0008 to 0.0016 in.) Limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
6EN0623
2. Cylinder Block (1) Visually check for scratches, rust, and corrosion. Use also a flaw detecting agent for the check. If defects are evident, correct, or replace. (2) Using a straightedge and feeler gauge, check the block top surface for warpage. Make sure that the surface is free from gasket chips and other foreign matter. Standard value: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in.) Limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) 9EN0074
6EN0553
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
(3) Check the cylinder walls for scratches and seizure. If defects are evident, correct (bored to oversize) or replace. (4) Using a cylinder gauge, measure the cylinder bore and cylindricity. If worn badly, rebore all cylinders to an oversize and replace piston rings. Measure at the points shown in the illustration. Standard value: Cylinder I.D. 4G63 85.00 to 85.03 mm (3.3465 to 3.3476 in.) 4G64 86.50 to 86.53 mm (3.4055 to 3.4067 in.) Cylindricity 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) 65
Removal And Installation
3. Cylinder Boring
Thrust direction
Piston O.D 6En0554
(1) Oversize pistons to be used should be determined on the basis of largest bore cylinder. (2) Oversize pistons are available in four size 0.50 mm (0.0197 in.), and 1.00 mm (0.0394 in.). Rebore the cylinder to a diameter that matches the selected piston outside diameter that matches the selected piston outside diameter with the specified clearance. The reference piston outside diameter measuring point is shown in the illustration. (3) Based on the measured piston O.D. calculate the boring finish dimension. Boring finish dimension = Piston O.D. + 0.02 to 0.04 mm (0.0008 to 0.0016 in.) (clearance between piston O.D. and cylinder ) - 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) (honing margin) (4) Bore all cylinders to the calculated boring finish dimension. Caution: To prevent distortion that may result from temperature rise during boring, bore cylinders, working from No.2 to No.4 to No.1 to No.3. (5) Hone to the final finish dimension (piston O.D. + clearance between piston O.D. and cylinder). (6) Check the clearance between the piston and cylinder. Standard value: Clearance between piston and cylinder 0.02 to 0.04 mm (0.0008 to 0.0016 in.)
Installation Service Points A
Crankshaft thrust bearing installation
(1) Install the two thrust bearing in the No.3 bearing bore in the cylinder block. For easier installation, apply engine oil to the bearings, this will help fold them in position. (2) The thrust bearings must be installed with their groove side toward the crankshaft web. Groovers 6EN1557
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
66
Removal And Installation
B
Crankshaft bearing installation
(1) From the following table, select a bearing whose size is appropriate for the crankshaft journal outside diameter.
Crankshaft journal outside diameter
Cylinder Crankshaft block bearing bearing for No.3 bore
Identification mark or color
Identification
Size
Identification Identification Identification
color
mm (in.)
mark
Yellow
56.994 to 57.000 (2.2439 to 2.2241)
None
White
56.988 to 56.994 (2.2436 to 2.2439) 56.982 to 56.988 (2.2434 to 2.2436)
mark or color mark or color 0
1 or Green 0 or Black
1
2 or Yellow 1 or Green
2
3 or None 2 or Yellow
0
2 or Yellow 1 or Green
1
3 or None 2 or Yellow
2
4 or Blue
0
3 or None 2 or Yellow
1
4 or Blue
3 or None
2
5 or Red
4 or Blue
3 or None
6EN0705
If the crankshaft journal outside diameter ID color is ÒyellowÓ and the cylinder block bearing bore ID mark is Ò1Ó for example, select a bearing whose ID mark is Ò2Ó or ID color is ÒyellowÓ for No. 1, 2, 4 and 5, and a bearing whose ID mark is Ò1Ó or ID color is ÒgreenÓ for No. 3. Bearing bore identification mark
If there is no ID color paint on the crankshaft, measure the journal outside diameter and select a bearing appropriate for the measured value.
Cylinder inner diameter size mark
Bottom of cylinder block
Rear face of cylinder block
6EN1632
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
67
Removal And Installation
Crankshaft journal Identification color
Cylinder block bearing support section
O.D. mm (in.)
Yellow
Crankshaft bearing
Identification mark
I.D. mm (in.)
Identification mark
Thickness mm(in.)
0
61.000 to 61.006
1
1.988 to 1.991
(2.40157 to 2.40181) 56.994 to 57.000
1
(2.24385 to 2.24409)
61.006 to 61.012
(0.07827 to 0.07839) 2
(2.40181 to 2.40204) 2
61.012 to 61.018
(0.07839 to 0.07850) 3
(2.40204 to 2.40228) None
0
61.000 to 61.006
1
(2.24362 to 2.24189)
61.006 to 61.012
2
61.012 to 61.018
3
0
61.000 to 61.006
4
1
(2.24338 to 2.24362)
61.006 to 61.012
3
61.012 to 61.018 (2.40204 to 2.40228)
1.994 to 1.997 (0.07850 to 0.07862)
4
(2.40181 to 2.40204) 2
1.997 to 2.000 (0.07862 to 0.07874)
(2.40157 to 2.40181) 56.982 to 56.988
1.994 to 1.997 (0.07850 to 0.07862)
(2.40204 to 2.40228) White
1.991 to 1.994 (0.07839 to 0.07850)
(2.40181 to 2.40204) 2
1.994 to 1.997 (0.07850 to 0.07862)
(2.40157 to 2.40181) 56.988 to 56.944
1.991 to 1.994
1.997 to 2.000 (0.07862 to 0.07874)
5
2.000 to 2.003 (0.07874 to 0.07886)
Identification mark of color 6EN1096
Groove
(2) Install the bearing having an oil groove to the cylinder block. (3) Install the bearing having no oil groove to the bearing caps.
for upper for lower 6EN1558
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
68
Removal And Installation
C
8
4
1
5
9
7
3
2
6
10
6EN0624
Bearing cap/bearing cap bolt installation
(1) Install the bearing caps so that their arrows are positioned on the timing belt side. (2) When installing the bearing cap bolts, check that the shank length of each bolt meets the limit. If the limit is exceeded, replace the bolt. Limit: Max. 71.1 mm (2.799 in.) (3) Torque the bearing cap bolts to 2.5 kgf¥m (18.1 lb¥ft)[25 N¥m] and, from that position, retighten them 1/4 (90¡) turns more. Caution: 1) If the bolt is turned less than 90¡, proper fastening performance may not be expected. When tightening the bolt, therefore, be careful to give a sufficient turn to it. 2) If the bolt is over tightened (exceeding 100¡), loosen the bolt completely and then retighten it by repeating the tightening procedure from step (1).
(4) After installing the bearing caps, make sure that the end play is correct. If the end play exceeds the limit, replace the crankshaft bearings. Standard value: 0.05 to 0.25 mm (0.0020 to 0.0098 in.) Limit: 0.4 mm (.016 in.)
6EN0625
D MB990938
Oil seal installation
(1) Using the special tool, knock, the oil seal into the oil seal case.
MD998776
6EN0709
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
69
Removal And Installation
E
Sealant application to oil seal case
Specified sealant: Silicone RTV sealant or equivalent. Seal ant
NOTE: 1) Be sure to install the case quickly while the sealant is wet(within 15 minutes). 2) After installation, keep the sealant area away front the oil and coolant for approx. one hour. 6EN0626
F
Rear plate installation
(1) Be sure install the spring washers and special washers in correct position. Spring washer
Special washer 6EN1919
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
70
Removal And Installation
Carburetor Disassembly and Reassembly
A A B
C C
C C D
B B A
Disassembly steps 1. Throttle return spring 2. Damper spring 3. Choke rod 4. Screw 5. Float chamber cover 6. Float chamber cover gasket 7. Cover 8. Packing 9. Bimetal 10. O-ring 11. Accelerator wire bracket 12. Float pin 13. Float 14. Needle valve assembly 15. Packing 16. Filter 17. Weight 18. Ball 19. Main jet 20. Screw 21. Screw 22. Accelerator pump cover 23. Diaphragm 24. Spring 25. Fuel cut solenoid 26. O-ring 27. Enrichment 28. Enrichment jet 29. Speed adjust screw 30. Pilot jet 31. Choke lever 32. Spring 33. Main body 34. Insulator gasket 35. Throttle lever 36. Throttle control lever 37. Mixture adjusting screw 38. Throttle body
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
6En0850
71
Removal And Installation
Service Points of Disassembly The following parts must not be disassembled at the time of disassembly. (1) Choke valve and choke shaft (2) Inner venturi (3) Throttle valve and throttle shaft
A
Return spring/choke rod removal
(1) When the spring is removed, avoid prying it with undue force or any other attempt that can cause damage to it. (2) Press the end of the choke rod to force the rod out. Avoid applying a strong force to the plastic grommet of the rod fit-in hole.
B
Float chamber cover removal
(1) Since the screws require great force to loosen, use a Phillips screwdriver that exactly fits in the cross recess in the screw heads. (2) To remove the float chamber cover, slowly lift it, while using care not to give damage to the float. DonÕt tilt the main body, as the pump discharge weight and the related parts may come out and could be lost. 6EN0851
C
Pump weight/ball
Turn the main body upside down to remove the weight and ball.
D
Main jet
Main jet removal
To remove the main jet, be sure to use a screwdriver whose tip exactly fits in the slot of the jet.
6EN0852
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
72
Removal And Installation
Inspection 1. General Inspection Check the following and repair or replace parts if faulty. (1) Check fuel passages (jets) and air passages (jets or orifices) for clogging. If clogged, wash thoroughly with cleaning solvent or detergent and remove dirt by compressed air. Do not use wire or other metal pieces. (2) Check diaphragms, O-rings and springs for damage and cracks. (3) Check that needle valve operates lightly. If the valve is hard to operate or is binding, repair or replace. If there is overflow, poor valve to seat contact is suspected. Check thoroughly. (4) Check the fuel inlet filter (located above the needle valve) for clogging and damage. (5) Check the float operation. Check float and lever for deformation and damage and replace if necessary. (6) Check operation of the throttle valve, choke valve and link. If they do not operate lightly, wash well and apply engine oil sparelingly to their shaft. (7) Check the float chamber cover and main body for damage and cracks.
2. Fuel Cut Solenoid Valve Operation Check (1) Connect the battery directly to the body and terminal of the fuel cut solenoid valve to apply the voltage. Caution: Use care not to short-circuit the battery. (2) Listen to a click which should be heard when the valve operates normally at the moment the battery is connected.
12V
6EN0853
3. Fuel Cut Solenoid Valve Resistance Check Measure the resistance between the body and the terminal of the fuel cut solenoid valve with a tester. Standard value: Approx. 90½ [at 20¡C (68¡F)]
6EN0854
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
73
Removal And Installation
4. Inspection of Mixture Adjusting Screw (MAS) Check tapered end of mixture adjusting screw (MAS) for damage from over tightening, etc.
Check for damage 6EN1888
5. Throttle Body Check Make sure that the throttle shaft moves smoothly. If any sticky movement is found, thoroughly clean the shaft, and then coat it with a small amount of engine oil. Do not disassemble the shaft unnecessarily.
6EN0855
Service Points of Reassembly For reassembly, reverse the order of disassembly while paying much attention to the following: (1) Clean every parts with clear cleaning oil before reassembly. Check all passages for clogging. (2) Replace all the removed packings and gaskets. (3) Make sure the throttle and choke linkage operates smoothly. If any sticky movement is found, clean or replace the linkage, and make sure that the carburetor operates without any problem.
A
Main jet
Installation of main jets
(1) When replacing a main jet, the oil jet and the new jet must be of the same size, because the jet is selected after exact flow measurement by factory. (A size symbol is stamped on each jet.)
6EN0852
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
74
Removal And Installation
(2) Main jets have size symbols stamped on their ends for identification. Size symbols G420 130
130 Size symbol
6EN0869
B
Weight Check ball
Check ball/weight installation
Install the acceleration check ball and weight.
C
Float/float pin installation
After the float and float pin have been installed, make sure that the float is in a level position.
6EN0856
Hole A 3rd Stage 2nd stage
¥ Strangler spring setting positions Spring Setting Positions Hole B
If the strangler spring of the choke valve shaft is out of position, set it correctly in the positions shown in the illustration.
1st stage Hole C
6EN0858
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
75
Removal And Installation
Choke shaft
Inspection and Adjustment After Reassembly
Choke lever
1. Fast Idle Opening (1) Move the choke lever to place the choke valve in fully closed position.
6EN0859
(2) Measure the clearance ÒAÓ (primary throttle valve to throttle bore).
Primary throttle valve
NOTE: Refer to the table in SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS for the clearance.
Clearance ÒAÓ (drill bit diameter) 6EN1889
Fastidle adjusting screw
(3) If the clearance ÒAÓ is out of specifications, adjust to the standard value by the fast idle adjusting screw. Screw direction of rotation
Clearance
Remarks
Clockwise
Increases
Fast idle speed increases
Counterclockwise Decreases
Fast idle speed decreases
6E0860
2. Choke valve Operation (1) With the choke valve lever set to its full position, move the choke valve with a finger to make sure that the choke valve shaft has not an excessive play and the valve moves smoothly without sticking. (2) If the choke valve can not be moved smoothly, clean the choke valve and the area around it. (3) If the play of the choke valve shaft is excessive, replace the float chamber cover.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
76
Removal And Installation
3. Ports (1) Connect a hand vacuum pump and check each port for clogging. (2) If clogged, clean the port and then blow air into it.
6EN0861
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
77
Removal And Installation
Air Governor Disassembly and Reassembly
6EN0862
A A
A B
Disassembly steps 1. Ventilation hose 2. Gasket 3. Sealing cap 4. Cover plate assembly 5. Gasket 6. Adjusting nut 7. Adjusting screw 8. Plate assembly 9. Valve assembly 10. Valve shaft assembly 11. Piston cover 12. Gasket 13. Stabilizer piston 14. Piston shaft 15. Governor body
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Disassembly Service Points Caution: Since the air governor has been adjusted and sealed in the manufacturerÕs factory to conform to the specifications, it should not be disassembled in general cases. Like any other sealed components, the air governor should not be disassembled anywhere except the locations where a warranty claim decision is authorized. In addition, the cam on the throttle valve shaft should never be removed. 78
Removal And Installation
Inspection
Piston shaft
Stabilizer piston
Valve
1. Check the plate assembly (9) composed of a ribbon spring and coil spring for cracks and any other damage. 2. Check the valve shaft for wear, and also make sure that it rotates smoothly when mounted in the body. 3. Check the piston for damage. Check also the valve fit-in section of the shaft for damage. 4. Grease packed needle bearings are press-fitted at both ends of the valve shaft hole of the governor body. Avoid cleaning the body in gasoline or any other solvent.
Section A-A Valve
Shaft
Screw
Adjusting nut
Reassembly Service Points Caution: Thoroughly clean all component parts before installation. Do not apply grease or oil anywhere in the body except the needle bearings (grease packed) in the throttle valve shaft hole.
A
Adjusting screw and nut setting
When assembling the air governor separately from the engine, temporarily assemble it so that the throttle valve will be in the fully opened position.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
79
Removal And Installation
Starter Motor Removal and Installation
Removal steps 1. Bolt 2. Starter
6EN0867
Inspection Pinion Gap Adjustment (1) Disconnect the field coil wire from terminal M of the magnetic switch. (2) Connect a 12 V battery between terminal S and starter motor body (positive terminal to terminal S).
S
Stopper Pinion gap Pinion
6EN1918
Caution: This test must be performed quickly (in less than 10 seconds) to prevent the coil from burning out. (3) Set switch to ÒONÓ, and pinion will move out. (4) Check pinion to stopper clearance (pinion gap) with a thickness gauge. Pinion gap: 0.5 to 2.0 mm (0.0197 to 0.0787 in.)
(5) If the pinion gap is out of specification, adjust by adding or removing gaskets between magnetic switch and front bracket.
1EN0301
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
80
Removal And Installation
Pull-in Test of Magnetic Switch S
(1) Disconnect field coil wire from terminal M of magnetic switch. (2) Connect a 12V battery between terminal S and terminal M.
M
Battery 12V
Caution: This test must be performed quickly (in less than 10 seconds) to prevent coil from burning.
Disconnect connector
6EN0871
(3) If pinion moves out, then pull-in coil is good. If it doesnÕt. replace magnetic switch.
Hold-in Test of Magnetic Switch (1) Disconnect field coil wire from terminal M of magnetic switch. (2) Connect a 12V battery between terminal S and body.
S Battery 12V
Caution: This test must be performed quickly (in less than 10 seconds) to prevent coil from burning. Disconnect connector 6EN0872
(3) Manually pull out the pinion as far as the pinion stopper position. (4) If pinion remains out, everything is in order. If pinion moves in, hold-in circuit is open. Replace magnetic switch. Return Test of Magnetic Switch (1) Disconnect field coil wire from terminal M of magnetic switch. (2) Connect a 12V battery between terminal S and body.
M Battery 12V
Caution: This test must be performed quickly (in less than 10 seconds) to prevent coil from burning. Disconnect connector 6EN0873
(3) Pull pinion out and release. If pinion quickly returns to its original position, everything is in order. If it doesnÕt, replace magnetic switch. Caution: Be careful not to get your fingers caught when pulling out the pinion.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
81
Removal And Installation
Free Running Test Variable resistance M Ammeter Starter motor
Battery 12 Voltmeter 6EN0874
(1) Place starter motor in a vise equipped with soft jaws and connect a fully-charged 12-volt battery to starter motor as follows: (2) Connect a ammeter (100-ampere scale) and carbon pile rheostat in series with battery positive post and starter motor terminal. (3) Connect a voltmeter (15-volt scale) across starter motor. (4) Rotate carbon pile to full-resistance position. (5) Connect battery cable from battery negative post to starter motor body. (6) Adjust the rheostat until the battery voltage shown by the voltmeter is 11V. (7) Confirm that the maximum amperage is within the specifications and that the starter motor turns smoothly and freely. Current: max. 60 amps
Symptom
Possible cause
Current is too large, and starter motor rotates at too low speeds. ( Motor output torque is insufficient.)
¥Contaminated or oil stained metal ¥Friction between armature core and pole piece ¥Armature coil and/or field coil not properly grounded ¥Armature coil short-circuited
Current is too large, and motor does not rotate at all.
¥Electromagnetic switch not properly grounded ¥Armature coil and/or field coil not properly grounded ¥Seizure of metal
No current is available, and motor does not rotate.
¥Armature coil and/or field coil open-circuited ¥Brush and/or pigtail open-circuited ¥Poor contact of brush and commutator due to contaminated commutator, high mica, etc.
Current is too small, and motor rotates at low speed. (Motor output torque is insufficient.)
Loose field coil connections (If the shunt coil alone is open-circuited or loosely connected, the motor will rotate at a high speed.)
Current is too large, and motor rotates at too high speeds. (Motor output torque is insufficient.)
Field coil short-circuited
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
82
Removal And Installation
Disassembly And Reassembly
6EN1917
A
B B
Disassembly steps 1. Screw 2. Magnetic switch 3. Screw 4. Screw 5. Rear bracket 6. Brush holder 7. Brush 8. Rear bearing 9. Armature 10. Yoke assembly 11. Ball
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
C C
83
A A
12. Packing A 13. Packing B 14. Plate 15. Planetary gear 16. Lever 17. Snap ring 18. Stop ring 19. Overrunning clutch 20. Internal gear 21. Planetary gear holder 22. Front bracket
Removal And Installation
Maguetic switch
Disassembly Service Points
ÒSÓ teminal
A ÒBÓ terminal
ÒMÓ terminal Fieldcoid wire 6EN0610
Disconnect the field coil wire from terminal M of the magnetic switch
B
Armature/ball removal
Caution: When removing the armature, take care not to lose the ball (Which is used as a bearing) in the armature end.
C
Socket
Magnetic switch removal
Snap ring/stop ring removal
(1) Press stop ring off snap ring with a suitable socket. Stop ring Pinion gear
Armature
Overrunning clutch
6EN0611
(2) Remove snap ring with snap ring pliers and then remove stop ring and overrunning clutch.
Snap ring Pinion gear Overrunning clutch
Snap ring pliersa
Armature 6EN0612
Cleaning of Starter Motor Parts Do not immerse the parts in cleaning solvent. Immersion of the yoke, field coil assembly and/or armature will damage to insulation. Do not immerse the drive unit cleaning solvent. Overrunning clutch is pre-lubricated at the factory and solvent will wash lubricant form clutch. The drive may be cleaned with a brush moistened with cleaning solvent and wiped dry with a cloth.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
84
Removal And Installation
Inspection 1. Commutator (1) Place the armature on a pair of V-blocks and check the runout using a dial gauge. Standard value: 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) Limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
1EN0298
(2) Check the outer diameter of the commutator. Standard value: 29.4 mm (1.16 in.) Limited: 28.8 mm (1.13 in.)
1EN0302
(3) Check depth of the undercuts between the segments. Standard value: 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) Limited: 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
Under cut Segment
Mica 1EN0296
2. Overrunning Clutch Check (1) While holing clutch housing, rotate the pinion. Drive pinion should rotate smoothly in one direction, but should not rotate in opposite direction. If clutch does not function properly, replace overrunning clutch assembly. (2) Inspect pinion for wear or burrs. If pinion is worn or burred, replace overrunning clutch assembly. If pinion is damaged, also inspect ring gear for wear or burrs.
Free
3. Front And Rear Bracket Bushing Check
Lock 1EN0293
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Inspect bushing for wear or burrs. If bushing is worn or burred, replace front bracket assembly or rear bracket assembly.
85
Removal And Installation
4. Brush
Wear limit line
(1) Brushes that are worn beyond wear limit line, or oil soaked, should be replaced. (2) When replacing ground brush, side the brush from brush holder by prying retainer spring back.
1EN0292
5. Armature Coil Short Circuit Test (1) Place armature on a growler. (2) Hold a thin steel blade parallel and just above while rotating armature slowly in growler. A shorted armature will cause blade to vibrate and be attracted to the core. Replace shorted armature.
6EN0600
6. Armature Coil Ground Test Check the insulation between ground commutator segment and the armature coil core. If there should be no continuity.
6EN0601
7. Armature Coil Open Circuit Check Check the continuity between segments. If there should be continuity.
1EN0299
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
86
Removal And Installation
Reassembly Service Points A Stop ring
Stop ring/snap ring Installation
Using a suitable pulling tool, pull overrunning clutch stop ring over snap ring.
Overrunning Stop ring clutch
Snap ring
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
1EN0316
87
Removal And Installation
Distributor Disassembly and Reassembly
A
Disassembly steps 1. Distributor cap 2. Rotor 3. Cover 4. Signal rotor 5. Pickup coil assembly 6. Ignitor 7. Heat sink
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
8. Breaker assembly 9. Snap ring 10. Vacuum control 11. Connector assembly 12. O-ring 13. Distributor housing
88
Removal And Installation
Inspection Pickup Coil (1) Using a tester, check the resistance of the pickup coil. Standard value: 420 to 540½
1EL0052
(2) Check to make sure the pointer of the tester oscillates when the tip of a screwdriver is moved past by the core of the pickup col assembly.
1EL0053
Signal rotor
Reassembly Procedure A
Pickup coil assembly installation
Check the air gap between the signal rotor and pickup assembly. Standard value: 0.35 to 0.45 mm (0.0138 to 0.0177 in.)
Air gap
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
1EL0054
89
Removal And Installation
System Operation Engine
The cylinder blocks are made of the special cast iron and employ 5-bearing, deep skirt system. The cylinder heads have hemisphere combustion chambers, are of cross flow type arranged with Vtype valves and high efficient combustion is intended.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
The camshaft is located on the top of the cylinder heads and driven by cog type timing belt. Dual type exhaust manifold is employed in order to reduce output loss by exhaust interference.
90
System Operation
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
91
System Operation
Timing System
The timing belt is meshed with the sprockets, the crankshaft sprocket becomes the drive sprocket, and thus functions to drive the camshaft and oil pump.
Timing belt The timing belt is the cogged type, using rubber as its basic material, and it employs a high-strength glass fiber core which does not expand or contract. The features of the cogged-type belt compared to a chin are no expansion/contraction, low noise level, no necessity for lubrication, light weight, etc.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
92
System Operation
Silent Shaft Mechanism
The silent shaft mechanism function mainly to eliminate, by the action of the silent shafts incorporated at both sides of the cylinder block, the vertical vibromotive force of the engine as well as the vibromotive moment in the rolling direction, thus making possible quieter operation of the vehicle. The two silent shafts are arranged as shown in the
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
figure below. The right silent shaft rotates in the same direction as the crankshaft, and the left silent shaft rotates in the opposites direction. Both of these silent shafts rotate at speed twice that of the crankshaft. Right silent shaft is driven by timing belt B, and the left silent shaft is driven by drive gear.
93
System Operation
Auto Lash Adjuster Construction
These engines have auto lash adjusters that eliminate the need for valve clearance adjustment and reduce noises of the valve system. The auto lash adjuster automatically absorbs change in the valve clearance caused by engine temperature change or wear of parts and adjusts the valve clearance always to zero. Operation of Auto Lash Adjuster (1) At Start of Valve Lift When the cam lifts up the rocker arm, the hydraulic pressure immediately forces the ball in the high pressure chamber against the seat, closing the high pressure chamber.
(2) During Valve Lift A small amount of oil leaks from the high pressure chamber through a clearance between the body inside and the plunger outside.
(3) At end of Valve Lift The plunger spring forces the body back to the initial position and oil is supplied to the high pressure chamber to make up for the leaked oil.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
94
System Operation
Lubrication System
Lubricating system is the full-flow filtered pressurefeed oil system and the oil reserved in the oil pan is fed with pressure to each part of engine. After the oil pressure is adjusted through the relief valve, the oil is fed to the cylinder blocks and cylinder head. In the cylinder head the oil is forcibly fed to the camshaft journals, rocker arm pivots and further cam surfaces.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
95
System Operation
Oil Filter
Fuel System Gasolin
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
96
System Operation
Construction of Carburetor (1) Float. (2) Front chamber cover. (3) Primary inner venturi. (4) Choke valve. (5) Accelerator pump nozzle. (6) Idle compensator. (7) Membrane cover. (8) Enrichment jet. (9) Plug. (10) Throttle body. (11) Primary throttle valve. (12) Mixture adjusting screw. (13) Bypass screw. (14) Primary main jet. (15) Body. (16) Pump inlet ball. (17) Pump lever. (18) Fuel cutoff solenoid. (19) Pump outlet ball. (20) Primary pilot jet. (21) Valve weight. (22) Needle valve. (23) Fuel screen.
The carburetor is of the two-barrel, downdraft type which performs well in every engine operation ranging from slow idle to full speed.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
97
System Operation
1. Air system Air passed through the air cleaner flows through the choke bore and venturi into the clearance of the throttle valve and supports idle running of the engine. When engine speed increases to off-idle and more, intake air is metered by the venturi. Air flow to be fed to the cylinders is controlled by the throttle valve.
Float System
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
2. Float system The float maintains a constant fuel level in the float chamber. Fuel from the fuel tank is pumped out by the fuel pump and filtered by the strainer. Then, fuel enters the float chamber through a needle valve. With entrance of fuel in the float chamber, the float moves up gradually. At last, the float pushes the needle valve to shut off the fuel inlet. When the fuel level lowers, the float moves down and releases the needle so that the fuel inlet is opened. With repetition of up-and-down movement of the float, fuel in the float chamber is kept at an almost constant level during engine operation.
98
System Operation
3. Idle system
This system provides adequate air-fuel-mixture richness for smooth engine running ranging from slow-idle to light-load operation. Fuel from the float chamber is sent through the main jet to the pilot jet where metering of fuel is made. On the other hand, air entering the venturi air leak and that entering the pilot air jet No.2 join at the pilot air jet No.1 where metering of air is made. As a result of metering, fuel mixes with air and flows through the air-fuel-mixture passage to the pilot outlet. The flow of air-fuel-mixture is adjusted properly by the bypass screw and enters the air horn through the bypass hole or the pilot outlet. It mixes with the small amount of air that gets past the closed or slightly opened throttle valve. The final mixture flows into the engine cylinders.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
The mixture adjusting screw is used for adjusting the richness of air-fuel-mixture necessary for good idling. The bypass screw is for the purpose of adjusting the flow of primary air-fuel-mixture to the bypass hole so as to provide sufficient mixture richness mainly for engine operation ranging from Òoff idlingÓ to a part of medium-load operation. The fuel cutoff solenoid in the idle system functions as follows : When the key switch is turned to ON, the solenoid attracts the needle valve to open the fuel feed line. When the key switch is turned to OFF, the needle valve protrudes to cut off the fuel feed line, thus preventing spontaneous running of the engine which is overheated.
99
System Operation
Idle Compensator
Main Metering System
The idle compensator uses a bimetal. When the carbretor ambient temperature rises during idle or Òoff idleÓ running, the bimetal bends enough to open the compensator valve. Now additional air from the choke bore can flow through the auxiliary air passage to the intake manifold directly. It leans out the mixture enough to make up for the proper richness.
Fuel metered by the main jet is bled by air from the main air jet and enters the bleed pipe through its holes. The fuel is discharged from the main nozzle and sucked by engine cylinders. If percolation of fuel arises along the main well, gasoline vapor can escape from the main air jet through the relatively wide outside of the bleed pipe. This prevents liquid fuel from spurting from the main nozzle, thus assuring stable engine operation and easy restarting. To prevent percolation due to conduction of heat from the engine, sufficient cooling of the float chamber periphery is taken into consideration in design of the carburetor.
4. Main metering system The wider the throttle valve opens, the faster the air flow in the venturi and the greater the vacuum in the inner venturi will be. As the vacuum becomes greater, additional fuel is discharged from the main nozzle. The main metering system is provided with the bleed valve press-fitted to the inner venturi and the main air jet.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
100
System Operation
5. Enrichment system
Enrichment and Accelerator-Pump systems
The enrichment system provides additional fuel feed to the main metering system during highspeed large-torque operation. This system use the membrane (diaphragm) which is actuated by the intake manifold vacuum and membrane spring to open or close the fuel feed line. During partial-throttle operation, a large manifold vacuum is applied to the vacuum chamber through the vacuum line and acts on the membrane to close the valve against the membrane spring force. When the throttle is opened wide, manifold vacuum decreases. This allows the membrane spring to open the valve. Now, more fuel from the float chamber is metered by the enrichment jet and can flow through the valve into the primary main line leading to the main metering system.
When the engine is accelerated quickly, the membrane is pushed by the pump lever linked to the throttle valve and forces fuel to flow under pressure. When the engine is decelerated, the membrane is pushed back by the spring and the pump chamber is refilled with fuel. Pump delivery decreases with engine speed from which acceleration is starred. It does not deliver fuel at all when the angle of throttle valve from the idling position exceeds the preset angle. 7. Stating system The starting system consists of the choke valve, lever assembly, choke connecting rod, and choke operating lever. This system is provided for feeding a very rich air-fuel mixture to the engine when the engine is started (until the engine warms up) or when a temporary increase of output is needed during engine operation. When the engine is cold, some throttle opening must be maintained so that the engine idles faster then it would when warm. This is done with Òfast idle.Ó With the fast idle, the choke valve is closed while the throttle valve is held at a partially opened position most suitable to warming-up run.
6. Accelerator-pump system Rapid opening of the throttle for acceleration allows a sudden inrush of air. Thus there is a sudden demand for additional fuel. To provide this extra fuel, the accelerator-pump system can feed fuel immediately under pressure. Fuel from the inlet check valve is sent to the pump nozzle through the outlet check valve by reciprocating movement of the membrane. The fuel is then injected into the main bore.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
101
System Operation
LPG
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
102
System Operation
Carburetor (1) Cover. (2) Air-gas valve assÕy. (3) Valve spring. (4) Gas-metering valve. (5) Air passage. (6) Diaphragm. (7) Idle screw. (8) Gas regulating valve. (9) Throttle valve. (10) Air governor valve.
The carburetor for LPG engines is a combination of the carburetor upper body and adapter. Like the carburetor on gasoline engines, this carburetor is mounted on the throttle body on the air governor. The carburetor consists of a converter (vaporizer) and a mixer (carburetor). The converter which serves only to vaporize liquefied petroleum does not require external adjustment.
3. Gas metering valve 4, provided in the air-gas valve, varies its opening with movement of air-gas valve diaphragm so that adequate gas flow passes through it and mixes with air.
1. When the cylinder piston is in down stoke, vacuum created over the top of piston connects through air passage 5 in air-gas valve 2 to the cavity over diaphragm 6. Accordingly, atmospheric pressure pushes the diaphragm up against the force of spring 3.
5. Gas regulating valve 8 serves to keep the air-gas ratio suited to the maximum engine output when the engine runs under load. This valve is effective only in nearly full-load condition of the engine.
4. Idle screw 7 serves to meter the air-gas mixture necessary for maintaining slow-idle run of the engine.
2. Degree of vacuum pressure which is imposed on the diaphragm depends upon speed of the engine and degree of opening of throttle valve 9 . The airgas valve acts exactly, in response to variations in speed of the engine and in opening of the throttle valve, so that adequate air flow to the engine can be obtained.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
103
System Operation
Air Governor
Sectional View of Air Governor (1) Body. (2) Stabilizer rod. (3) Stabilizer piston. (4) Throttle plate. (5) Throttle plate shaft. (6) Bearing. (7) Nipple. (8) Spring. (9) Bush nut. (10) Adjusting screw. (11) Plate. (12) Cam
The air governor is located to the underside of the carburetor. It serves to protect the hydraulic pump, to limit the maximum traveling speed of the vehicle, and to prevent excessive increase of engine speed.
2. Auxiliary operation The throttle plate opening angle of this governor is set under the full-open condition of the carburetor. Accordingly, when the carburetor throttle valve is operated in the direction of closing, governor pressure applied to the throttle plate decreases and, therefore, the throttle plate is rotated by the spring in the direction of opening. As a result, engine speed increases. To prevent this, the governor is provided with a stabilizer piston.
1. Governing operation The throttle plate shaft is offset from the center of the governor bore. Also, the full-open position of the throttle plate does not coincide with the truly full-open position, but rather leans to the closing side. Therefore, the pressure of mixture flow acts on the throttle plate to rotate it in direction of closing, causing a torque to its shaft.
The stabilizer piston acts to close the throttle plate when a large vacuum pressure is developed on the upper side of the throttle plate, so that proper opening of the throttle plate can be maintained in combination with the opening of the carburetor throttle valve. With the help of this auxiliary operation, the governing operation can follow up the variations of load quickly.
The torque stretches the return spring attached to the cam on the throttle plate shaft until the torque balances the tension of the spring, and the throttle plate is maintained at that open angle. This is governing operation. That is, a balance between the pressure applied to the throttle plate, which depends on vacuum pressure, and the spring tension keeps the throttle plate at position between the full-open position and the full-close position to control the amount of mixture flowing into the engine. G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
104
System Operation
Cooling System
The cooling system is of the cooling water forcedcirculation type. The water pump, at the center in front of the cylinder block, is driven by the V-belt together with the alternator by the crankshaft pulley. The thermostat which controls coolant temperature is contained in the thermostat housing which is positioned in the inlet manifold.
Thermostat The thermostat is the wax pellet type. A jiggle valve (which improves air bleeding during water supply) is provided on the flange part. When the thermostat is closed, the circulation of coolant is stopped, thereby making warm-up faster.
Operation When the temperature of the coolant is low, the valve is closed by the spring, with the result that the coolant circulates within the engine, without passing through the radiator. When the temperature of the coolant rises and reaches a certain specified temperature, the valve opens and the coolant also circulates through the radiator. When the temperature increases further and reaches a certain specified temperature, the valve opens fully, allowing even more coolant to circulate through the radiator. Thus, in this way the degree of valve opening is varied according to the temperature of the coolant, and the temperature of the coolant is adjusted by varying the amount of coolant caused to circulate through the radiator.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
105
System Operation
Intake and Exhaust System
The intake manifold employs the shape having good intake performance. The exhaust manifold employs a dual type and intend the reduction of output loss due to exhaust interference.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
106
System Operation
Electrical System Wiring Diagram
Stating motor is of the gear reduction type. Distributor is of a breakerless type and employs the ignition advancer which uses jointly centrifugal type and vacuum type.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
107
System Operation
Starter Motor Planetary Gear Reduction Drive Type
The starter motor is small in size light weight and high-output type. Rotation of the motor are reduced by the reduction gear, and high torque is transmitted to the pinion gear.
Operation 1. When the ignition key (IG-SW) is turned to the ÒSTÓ position, current flows from the S terminal of the magnetic switch to the pull-in coil and the holding coil. Current from the pull-in coil passes through the M terminal, flows to the starterÕs brush, commutator, and armature, and then the armature begins to gently turn.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
108
System Operation
2. The plunger of the magnetic switch is then attracted, and the pinion is pushed out by the shift lever, meshing with the ring gear. As a result of the movement of the plunger, the contacts of the magnetic switch close, and, as a result, the starter is turned by the high current from the battery directly to the B terminal, and the engine is activated. When the contacts closes, the current flowing to the pullin coil stops flowing, and the magnetic force decreases. At this time, what prevents the pinion from being returned by the return spring is the magnetic force of the holding coil. When the engine starts and the pinion is caused to rotate by the ring gear, there is a possibility of damage, and for that reason an over-running clutch is provided so that the rotation from the engine is not transmitted.
3. Because the contacts are still closed at the moment when the ignition key is turned to OFF, current from the battery flows in the reverse direction from the M terminal and through the pull-in coil, thus offsetting the magnetic force of the holding coil, with the result that the pinion is returned by the return spring, and the contacts are opened.
Construction of planetary gear type reduction drive This reduction drive consists of a gear on the front end of the armature shaft, three pinion gears, a gear shaft that supports three pinion gears and work as the output shaft and the internal gear that is fixed to the starter motor body. The unit is called the simple planetary gear set.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
109
System Operation
When the internal gear is fixed as in the case of the starter motor, the carrier rotates in the same direction as the sun gear. This may be used to determine the reduction ratio easily. . Namely, the carrier reduction ratio = (43 + 11) / 11 =. 4.9
Permanent magnet pole Conventionally, the field coil wound around the pole is energized to generate magnetic fluxes. This system uses a permanent magnet (ferrite magnet) for the pole, eliminating the field coil and reducing the size and weight. The auxiliary pole helps generation of magnetic fluxes to ensure stable rotation and output characteristics.
Distributor
The distributor is the contactless type and is equipped with a centrifugal advancer and vacuum advancer. The distributor is installed at the front side surface of the cylinder head, and is driven directly by the camshaft. G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
110
System Operation
Governor advance mechanism
In the figure below, pin A rotates together with the shaft. A governor weight is installed to this pin A. There is a pin B on the governor weight which fits into the oblong hole in the cam base. The governor spring is attached to the spring hook of the governor weight, pulling the governor weight to the fully closed position. When the rotation speed increases, the governor weight is subjected to centrifugal force which causes it to open outward. When the centrifugal force becomes stronger than the tensile force of the spring, the weight opens, as shown by (b) in the figure below, thus maintaining a balance with the force of
the spring. Because pin B of the weight is fit into the oblong hole In the cam base, the movement of pin B becomes rotation of the cam in the direction of rotation. In other words, the cam advances in relation to the shaft. When the rotation speed becomes sufficiently high, pin B contacts the outer side of the oblong hole in the cam base, and the weight opens no further. This position is the fully advanced condition. When the rotation speed decreases, the centrifugal force of the weight becomes weaker and the weight is closed by the force of the spring, thus returning to the original condition.
The advance characteristic of the centrifugal-advance device employed by the governor is as shown in the figure at the left. Point A is the beginning of advance, and point B shows the rotation speed at full advance.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
111
System Operation
Vacuum advance mechanism
There is a diaphragm within the vacuum controller, with a spring at the negative-pressure (vacuum) side which pressure against the diaphragm. A link is attached to the diaphragm and is connected to the pickup plate. The pickup assy is installed on the pickup plate, and can rotate together with the pickup plate. The negative pressure (vacuum) side of the vacuum controller is connected to the vacuum port of the carburetor by a tube. When the throttle valve of the carburetor is closed, the engine is in the idling condition, and there is no vacuum inside the tube at this time. When the throttle valve is partially open, the air within the tube
is drawn out by the air/fuel mixture flowing near the vacuum port, thus resulting in a negative-pressure (vacuum) condition. Because the tube is connected to the negative-pressure (vacuum) port of the vacuum controller, the diaphragm pressure against the spring, and it moves in the direction of the arrow. Then the link rotates the pickup plate and, because the position of the pickup changes, the timing also changes. The direction is the direction opposite to the direction of signal rotor rotation, so that the projection of signal rotor will pass the pickup quickly. In this way, then, the ignition timing advances.
The figure at the left shows the advance characteristic curve of the vacuum-advance mechanism. Point A is the start of the advance, and point B is the end of the advance. Because the magnitude of the degree of advance determined by balance of the strength of the vacuum and the pressure of the spring, if the spring is weak the degree of advance will be great at a small vacuum.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
112
System Operation
Adjusting And Troubleshooting Engine Adjustment Adjustment The following is the method of adjustment of the carburetor and pneumatic governor on a reassembled engine. Caution: (1) The pneumatic governor has been properly adjusted and sealed in the factory before shipping. Never break the seal unless it is necessary during engine overhaul. (2) If the pneumatic governor is readjusted, seal it again and advise your user that he should not break the seal. 1. Valve Clearance Adjustment Being adjusted automatically with a lash adjuster, the valve clearance needs no adjustment.
2. Ignition Timing Adjustment (1) Let the engine warm up until engine coolant temperature rises to 80~95ûC. (2) Set engine speed at 740 rpm. (3) Remove the vacuum hose(from throttle body to distributor) at throttle body side and plug open end of nipple with something like rubber cab. 6EN0870
(4) Check that the ignition timing is as indicated when the engine is running at idling speed. Standard value: Gasoline 4 BTDC/740rpm LPG 9 BTDC/740rpm (5) If the ignition timing does not conform to the standard value, adjust by moving the distributor. (6) Remove rubber cap and connect the vacuum hose as it was. (7) Reconfirm engine speed. 3. Idling Speed Adjustment
SAS
MAS
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
6EN0834
(1) Let engine warm up until the engine coolant temperature rises to 80 to 95¡C (176 to 203¡F). (2) Back off the mixture adjusting screw (MAS) 3.5 L 0.5 turns (3) Adjust the engine speed to the specified low idling speed with the speed adjusting screw(SAS). (4) Slowly turn down the mixture adjusting screw(MAS) to a point where the engine speed begins to decrease. Standard value: OPS/700 L 25 rpm (5) After racing the engine two or three times (at approx. 2500 rpm), re-adjust the speed adjusting screw to the point at which the engine rust at the specified idling speed.
113
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
4. Air Governor Adjustment High speed adjustment
Screw
Adjusting nut 6EN0835
5. Anti-Hunting Adjustment
Governor Characteristics
Out put (PS)
Larger spring rigidity Smaller spring rigidity
Engine Speed (rpm)
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
(1) Place all the hydraulic levers in the neutral position. (2) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way. (The carburetor throttle valve will open fully.) (3) While holding the adjust screw to prevent it from turning, rotate the adjusting nut either clockwise or counterclockwise to make the engine run at 2700 L 50 rpm. Adjusting nut: Clockwise rotation Increases the engine speed (increases the installed load of spring). Counterclockwise rotation Decreases the engine speed (decreases the engine installed load of spring).
6EN0836
(1) Place all the hydraulic levers or power train in the neutral position. (2) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way. (The carburetor throttle valve will open fully.) (3) Slowly rotate the adjusting screw clockwise until hunting disappears. Adjusting screw: Clockwise rotation Increases spring tension (reduces the number of active turns of spring). Counterclockwise rotation Reduces spring tension (increases the number of active turns of spring). Increasing the spring tension will eliminate hunting, but an excessively high tension will change the governor characteristics and produce some effects on the output characteristics of the engine. It is, therefore, imperative to limit the movement of the adjusting screw to less than two turns from the standard position. (4) Clockwise rotation of the adjusting screw raises the engine maximum speed. Rotate the push nut counterclockwise to reduce the speed. (5) Repeat anti-hunting adjustment two or three times by alternately adjusting the push nut and the adjusting screw until the best result is obtained. (6) The number of active turns of spring should not be less than 11 when the adjustment is finished.
114
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Abnormal combustion
Loose connection in ignition system wiring
ÐCheck connections and retighten.
Defective spark plug
ÐReplace spark plug.
Incorrect ignition timing
ÐAdjust ignition timing.
Defective carburetor
ÐRepair or replace carburetor.
Contaminated or clogged fuel filter element and pipe
ÐClean fuel filter element and pipe.
Entry of air from carburetor or intake manifold
ÐRetighten set bolts or replace heat insulator and/or intake manifold gasket.
Valves and related components
Defective valves and related components
ÐAdjust or repair valves and related components.
Cylinder head
Carbon deposited in combustion chamber
ÐDisassemble and clean.
Clogged cylinder head water tube
ÐClean or replace water tube.
Cylinder gasket blow-by
ÐReplace gasket.
Ignition system out of adjustment
Incorrect ignition timing
ÐAdjust ignition timing.
Defective spark plug
ÐReplace spark plug.
Insufficient fuel
Defective carburetor
ÐRepair or replace carburetor.z
Damaged cylinder head gasket, etc.
ÐReplace gasket.
Clogged fuel pipe
ÐClean pipe.
Clogged fuel filter
ÐClean or replace.
Air in fuel system
ÐCheck connections and retighten.
Damaged fuel pipe
ÐReplace pipe.
Fuel pump not functioning properly
ÐRepair or replace.
Ignition system
Carburetion related components
Insufficient output
Insufficient intake air in carburetor
Overheating
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Damaged diaphragm
ÐReplace.
Defective valve
ÐReplace.
Clogged air cleaner element
ÐClean or replace element.
Carburetor choke always in operation
ÐRepair or replace carburetor.
Air governor malfunction
ÐRepair or replace air governor.
Insufficient coolant
ÐAdd coolant and check for leaky points.
Leaks from radiator
ÐRepair or replace radiator.
Loosened or damaged radiator hose connection
ÐRetighten clamp or replace hose.
Leaks from water pump
ÐReplace.
Coolant leaks from cylinder head gasket
ÐRetighten cylinder head bolts or replace gasket.
Cracks in cylinder head or block
ÐReplace.
115
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
Insufficient output
Poor acceleration
Excessive fuel consumption
Excessive engine oil consumption
Loose fan belt tension
ÐAdjust or replace.
Worm or damaged fan belt
ÐReplace.
Oil on fan belt
ÐClean.
Thermostat not functioning properly
ÐReplace.
Water pump not functioning properly
ÐReplace.
Clogged radiator
ÐClean radiator and coolant passages.
Incorrect ignition timing
ÐAdjust ignition timing.
Improper engine oil
ÐRefer to lubrication table and replace oil with a recommended one.
Too lean mixture
ÐRepair or replace carburetor.
Incorrect valve clearance adjustment
ÐMake measurements on or replace autolash adjuster.
Insufficient compression pressure
Engine out of order
ÐRefer to p. 92 and make repairs.
Overcooling (Coolant temperature does not rise.)
Defective thermostat
ÐReplace thermostat.
Extremely low atmospheric temperature
ÐPlace cover or anything proper on the front of radiator.
Engine
Engine out of order
ÐRefer to p. 92 and make repairs.
Carburetor
Carburetor out of order
ÐReplace or replace distributor.
Ignition system
Defective distributor
ÐRepair or replace distributor.
Defective spark plug
ÐReplace spark plug.
Engine
Engine out of order
ÐAdjust of repair valves.
Carburetor
Defective carburetor
ÐRepair or replace carburetor.
Clogged air bleeder
ÐClean or replace.
Damaged gaskets
ÐReplace.
Improper idling speed
ÐAdjust idling speed.
Ignition system
Incorrect ignition timing
ÐAdjust ignition timing.
Excessive engine oil consumption
Engine out of order
ÐRefer to p. 92 and make repairs.
Oil leaks
Engine out of order
ÐRefer to p. 92 and make repairs.
Overheating
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
116
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
Engine, Carburetor and Electrical Components Troubleshooting Engine
Valves and related components
Poor idling
Abnormal combustion
Insufficient output Excessive fuel consumption
Engine
Poor startability
Poor acceleration
Excessive fuel consumption
Insufficient output
Incorrect valve clearance
ÐCleaned or replace auto-lash adjuster.
Valve not in close contact with valve seat
ÐReface seat surface.
Excessive clearance between valve stem and valve guide
ÐReplace valve and valve guide.
Incorrect valve clearance
ÐCleaned or replace auto-lash adjuster.
Valve binding
ÐDisassemble, correct or replace.
Deteriorated valve spring
ÐReplace spring.
Incorrect valve clearance
ÐCleaned or replace auto-lash adjuster.
Pressure leaks from valve seal
ÐReface.
Valve stem seizure
ÐRepair or replace.
Deteriorated or broken valve spring
ÐReplace spring.
Valve damaged by heat
ÐReface or replace valve.
Intake manifold gasket not tight enough
ÐRetighten set bolts or replace gasket.
Cylinder head gasket blow-by
ÐReplace gasket.
Valve damaged by heat or not properly serviced
ÐAdjust or replace.
Insufficient compression pressure
ÐDisassemble and repair engine.
Cylinder head gasket blow-by
ÐReplace gasket.
Pressure leaks from cylinder head gasket Piston ring binding or worn
ÐRetighten cylinder head bolts and replace gasket. ÐReplace ring.
Piston ring or ring worn
ÐDisassemble and repair engine.
Oil leaks Excessive oil consumption
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Loose oil drain plug
ÐRetighten plug.
Loose oil pan set bolts
ÐRetighten set bolts.
Damaged oil pan gasket
ÐReplace gasket.
Loose timing gear cover or damaged gasket
ÐRetighten set bolts or replace gasket.
Defective crankshaft front oil seal
ÐReplace oil seal.
Defective crankshaft rear oil seal
ÐReplace oil seal.
Damaged cylinder head gasket
ÐReplace gasket.
Loose oil filter set bolt.
ÐRetighten set bolts or replace oil filter gasket.
117
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
Oil working its way up Engine
Excessive oil consumption
Piston ring gaps in improper positions
ÐAdjust ring gap positions.
Piston rings or ring grooves worn or rings
ÐReplace piston or rings.
seized in grooves Carbon deposit in oil return hole of oil ring
ÐReplace rings.
Worn piston and cylinder
ÐRebore and hone cylinder and install oversize piston.
Excessive quantity of oil in oil pan
ÐOil quantity: 4.0 liter (1.1 U.S. gal).
Oil working its way down
Excessive engine noise
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Worn valve stem and valve guide
ÐReplace valve and guide.
Defective valve stem oil seal
ÐReplace oil seal
Excessive oil clearance due to worn crankshaft bearing
ÐReplace bearing.
Fusion in crankshaft bearing
ÐReplace bearing and check lubrication system.
Worn connecting rod bearing
ÐReplace bearing.
Bent connecting rod
ÐRepair bent connecting rod or replace.
Fusion in connecting rod bearing
ÐReplace bearing and check lubrication system.
Excessive clearance due to worn cylinder
ÐRebore and hone cylinder and install oversize piston.
Worn piston or piston pin
ÐReplace piston and piston pin.
Piston seizure
ÐReplace piston.
Broken piston ring
ÐReplace piston ring.
Excessive camshaft end play
ÐReplace camshaft thrust plate.
Worn crankshaft thrust bearing
ÐReplace bearing.
Worn timing gears
ÐReplace.
Excessive valve clearance
ÐCleaned or replace auto-lash adjuster.
118
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
Poor engine startability
Poor idle
Carburetor
Abnormal combustion
Poor acceleration
Insufficient output
Excessive fuel consumption
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Needle valve and valve seat not seating properly
ÐClean or replace
Incorrect float level
ÐAdjust
Worn float lip
ÐReplace
Worn float level pin and related components
ÐReplace level pin and its related parts
Malfunction choke valve
ÐRepair
Idle rpm set out of adjustment
ÐAdjust idling speed
Damaged idle adjust screw
ÐReplace adjust screw
Clogged idle passage or idle port
ÐClean
Clogged bypass screw
ÐClean jet
Worn throttle shaft
ÐReplace shaft
Loose vacuum pipe union
ÐRetighten union
Idling circuit not airtight
ÐClean
Incorrect float level
ÐReplace
Too lean mixture
ÐClean or replace
Inner dirty carburetor
ÐClean carburetor
Defective float level
ÐAdjust float
Defective accelerating pump plunger
ÐDisassemble or replace
Clogged pump jet
ÐClean or replace
Defective accelerating linkage
ÐReplace linkage
Malfunction power piston
ÐReplace power piston
Malfunction power valve
ÐReplace
Clogged power jet
ÐClean or replace
Float level too low
ÐAdjust float
Throttle valve not opening completely
ÐAdjust valve
Clogged main jet
ÐClean
Incorrect float level
ÐAdjust float
Malfunction power piston
ÐReplace power piston
Malfunction power valve
ÐReplace power valve
Worn throttle shaft
ÐReplace shaft
Throttle valve not opening completely
ÐAdjust valve
Choke valve stuck close
ÐRepair or replace
Float level too high
ÐAdjust float
Defective power valve
ÐReplace valve
Choke valve not opening completely
ÐCheck linkage, replace
Improper idling speed
ÐAdjust idling speed
119
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
Electrical components Distributor
Poor engine starting
Cracked distributor cap and burnt or contaminated cord insertion hole
ÐClean or replace.
Poor engine acceleration
Centrifugal and vacuum advance device malfunction
ÐRepair or replace.
Improper spark plug gap
ÐAdjust or replace.
Carbon deposit in spark plug
ÐClean or replace.
Improper heat range of spark plug
ÐReplace spark plug with proper one.
Loose or defective plug cord
ÐRepair or replace.
Defective ignition coil
ÐReplace ignition coil.
Improperly connected terminals
ÐRepair.
Switch contacts in loose contact
ÐReplace switch
Magnet switch contact plate burnt or in loose contact
ÐGrind or replace contact plate.
Magnet switch pull-in coil opencircuited
ÐReplace.
Magnet switch holding coil opencircuited
ÐReplace.
Brush in loose contact with commutator as a result of wear
ÐReface.
Commutator burnt with consequent poor conduction of electricity
ÐExchange or replace commutators.
High mica of commutator
ÐPerform under-cutting
Field coil not properly grounded or short-circuited
ÐReplace.
Field coil not properly soldered
ÐRepair.
Armature not properly grounded
ÐReplace.
Armature short-circuited
ÐRewind or replace.
Brush spring broken or with inadequate tension
ÐReplace spring.
Insufficient engine output
Excessive fuel consumption
Spark plug
Poor engine starting
Abnormal combustion in engine
Poor engine acceleration
Insufficient engine output Ignition coil
Poor engine staring
Poor engine acceleration
Starter
Starter does not rotate
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
120
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
Starter
Starter does not rotate.
Starter rotates but slowly and irregularly.
Pinion does not engage with ring gear.
Motor continues to rotate and does not stop.
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Brush holder not properly insulated
ÐClean brush or replace holder.
Worn bearing bushing
ÐReplace bushing.
Wires of armature coil about to be shortcircuited or grounded
ÐRewind or replace.
Field coil not properly connected or about to be short-circuited
ÐRepair connections.
Commutator heat-damaged with consequent poor conduction
ÐReplace armature.
Brush movement due to damaged or worn commutator
ÐRepair or replace.
Commutator vibrating, causing brush to move
ÐRepair or replace.
Lifted mica between commutator segments causing brush to move
ÐPerform under-cutting
One or two commutator segments lifted causing brush to move
ÐRepair or replace.
Commutator in loose contact due to worn brush
ÐRepair or replace.
Chipped brush
ÐRepair or replace.
Worn starter clutch pinion end
ÐReplace.
Clutch rotates always freely
ÐReplace.
Deteriorated clutch drive spring
ÐReplace.
Does not rotate in overrunning direction
ÐReplace.
Poor sliding of splined section
ÐRub surfaces smooth, clean and repair.
Worn bushing
ÐReplace.
Improper projecting position of magnet switch pinion
ÐAdjust with stud bolt.
Worn bearing bushing
ÐReplace.
Magnet switch coil layer shorted-circuited
ÐReplace.
Magnet switch contact plate seizure
ÐReplace.
Starter switch does not return properly
ÐReplace switch.
121
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
Battery
Run-down battery
Drive belt slipping
ÐAdjust belt.
Alternator Stator coil grounded or open-circuited
ÐReplace or repair.
Rotor coil open-circuited
ÐReplace.
Brush and slip ring not properly connected (Brush does not properly come down)
ÐReplace brush if worn. (Clean holder.) ÐPolish slip ring.
Diode short-or open-circuited
ÐReplace rectifier assembly.
Battery Short or improper electrolyte
ÐAdd electrolyte and adjust specific gravity.
Defective plates (internal short circuit)
ÐReplace.
Terminals in loose contact
ÐClean and then retighten.
Wiring
Overcharged battery
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Open circuit or loose contact between key switch and alternator terminals L and R
ÐRepair.
Burnt fuse of above-mentioned circuits or holder in loose contact
ÐReplace fuse and repair contacting section of holder.
Open circuit or loose contact between battery and alternator terminal B
ÐReplace.
Burnt fuse of above-mentioned circuits or holder in loose contact
ÐReplace fuse and repair contacting section of holder.
Defective IC regulator
ÐReplace.
122
Adjusting And Troubleshooting
SPECIAL TOOLS Style
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Tool No.
Tool name
Use
MD998781
Flywheel stopper
Holding flywheel
MD998785
Sprocket stopper
Holding counterbalance shaft sprocket
MD998778
Crankshaft spocket puller
Removal of crankshaft sprocket
MB990767
End yoke holder
Holding camshaft sprocket (Use with MD998719)
MD998719
Pulley holding pins
Holding camshaft sprocket when loosening or torquing bolt (Use with MB990767)
MD998443
Lash adjuster holder
Retainer for holding lash adjuster in rocker arm at timer of removal and installation of rocker arm and rocker shaft assembly
MD998442
Air bleed wire
Air bleeding of lash adjuster
MD998713
Camshaft oil seal installer Installation of oil seal
MB991654
Cylinder head bolt wrench(12)
123
Removal and installation of cylinder head bolt
Special Tools
Style
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Tool No.
Tool name
MD998772
Valve spring compressor
Compression of valve spring
MD998729
Valve stem seal installer
Installation of valve stem seal
MD998727
Oil pan remover
Removal of the oil pan
MD998162
Plug wrench
Removal and installation of front case cap plug
MD998783
Plug wrench retainer
Removal and installation of front case cap plug (Use with MD998162)
MD998375
Crankshaft front oil seal installer
Installation of crankshaft front oil seal
MD998285
Crankshaft front oil seal guide
Guide for installation of crankshaft front oil seal
MD998705
Silent shaft bearing installer
Installation of counterblance shaft front and rear bearing
MD998371
Silent shaft bearing puller
Removal of counterblance shaft front bearing
124
Use
Special Tools
Style
G420 LP/Gasoline Engine
Tool No.
Tool name
MD998372
Silent shaft bearing puller
Removal of counterbalance shaft rear bearing
MD998780
Piston pin setting tool
Removal and installation of piston pin
MD998776
Crankshaft rear oil seal installer
Installation of crankshaft rear oil seal
MB990938
Handle
Installation of crankshaft rear oil sear (Use with MD998776)
125
Use
Special Tools
SB2012E02 Oct. 2000
Service Manual Diesel Engine DC24 (2.4 Liter)
Important Safety Information
Most accidents involving product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly. Improper operation, Iubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death. Do not operate or perform any Iubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, Iubrication, maintenance and repair information. Safety precautions and warnings are provided in this manual and on the product. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or other persons. In this manual, the following symbols are used to indicate the type of service operations to be performed.
Removal
Adjustment
Installation
Cleaning
Disassembly
Pay close attention-Important
Reassembly
Tighten to specified torque
Align the marks
Use special tools
Directional Indication
Lubricate with oil
Inspection
Lubricate with grease
Measurement
If you have any question or recommendation in connection with this manual, please do not hesitate to contact our head office, dealers or authorized service shops.
Vehicle Systems
-1-
Specifications
Index 1. General Informations ...........................................................................................................................................5 1.1. General Repair Instructions 1.2. Engine Model and Serial Number 1.3. Engine Specifications 1.4. Engine Assembly
2. Preventive Maintemance ...................................................................................................................................11 2.1. Preventive Maintenance 2.2. Torque Specifications
3. Major Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................16 3.1. Major Parts Fixing Bolts 3.3. Repair
3.2. Engine Repair Kit
4. Engine Disassembly and Reassembly ............................................................................................................26 4.1. External Parts 4.3. Inspection and Repair
4.2. Internal Parts 4.4. Reassembly
5. Lubricating System............................................................................................................................................59 5.1. General description 5.3. Oil Filter
5.2. OIl Pump 5.4. Oil Cooler
6. Cooling System ..................................................................................................................................................64 6.1. General Description 6.3. Thermostat
6.2. Water Pump
7. Fuel System ........................................................................................................................................................68 7.1. General Description 7.3. Injection Pump Calibration
7.2. Injection Nozzle
8. Intake and Exhaust System ..............................................................................................................................74 8.1. Intake Manifold
8.2. Exhaust Manifold
9. Special Tool List.................................................................................................................................................75
Appendix - Engine Assembly (ELFFO)
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
-3-
General Informations
1. General Informations 1.1. General Repair Instructions 1. For safty, park the truck on even ground or work station and fix the wheels using wedges or hand brake during operation 2. Before performing service operation, disconnect the grounding cable form the battery for reduce the chance of cable damage and burning due to short-circuliting. 3. Before performing service operation release the air pressure in the machine air line machine air line system for safty. To not do so in extremely dangerous. 4. Use covers for prevention the components from damage or pollution. 5. Brake oil and anti-freeze solution must be handled with reasonable to efficient and reliable service operation. 6. The use of proper tools and special tools where specificed is important to efficient and reliable service operation. 7. Use genuine DAEWOO parts necessarily. 8. Used cotter pins, gaskets, O-rings, oil seals, lock washer and self-lock nuts should be discarded and new ones should be prepared for installation as normal function of the parts can not be maintained if these parts are reused. 9. To facilitate proper and smooth reassembly operation, keep disassembled parts neatly in groups. Keeping fixing bolts and nut separate is very improtant as they vary in hardness and design depending on position of installation. 10. Clean the parts before inspection or reassembly. Also clean oil ports, etc. usig compressed air to make certain they are free form restrictions. 11. Lubricate rotation and sliding faces of parts with oil or grease before installation. 12. When necessary, use a sealer on gaskets to prevent leakage. 13. Carefully observe all specifications for bolts and nuts torques. 14. When service operation is completed, make a final check to be sure service has been done propery.
1.2. Engine Model and Serial Number The engine model and serial number is located on the engine as illustrated. These numbers are required when requesting warranty and ordering parts. They are also referred to as engine model and serial number because of their location.
Serial number
Engine serial No. (example 1 : DC24) DC24 O 00001 FO Suffix (ELFFO) Serial No. Production Year(2000) Engine Model
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
-5-
General Informations
1.3. Engine Specifications 1.3.1. Specification Engine Model
DC24
Items
ELFFO / N / L / E
Engine type
ELFFA / D / I / J
4 cycle in-line, Water-cooled type Naturally aspirated
Combustion chamber type
Swirl chamber
Cylinder liner type
Replaceable dry liner
Timing gear system
Gear driven type
No. of piston ring
Compression ring 2, oil ring 1
No. of cylinder-bore x stroke
(mm)
4 - 86 x 102
Total piston displacement
(cc)
2,369
Compression ratio
20 : 1
Engine dimension (length x width x height)
(mm)
702 x 559 x 677
Engine weight
(kg)
245
Rotating direction (viewed from flywheel)
Counter clockwise
Fuel injection order
1-3-4-2
Fuel injection timing (B.T.D.C static)
13û
Injection pump type Governor type Injection nozzle type
VE type
Zexel in-line ÒAÓ type
Mechanical governor
Mechanical governor type(RSV)
Throttle type
Fuel injection pressure
(kg/cm2)
120
Compression pressure
(kg/cm2)
28 (at 200 rpm)
Intake and exhaust valve clearance (at cold) Intake valve Exhaust valve
(mm)
0.45
Open at
11û (B.T.D.C)
Close at
40û (A.B.D.C)
Open at
51û (B.B.D.C)
Close at
9û (A.T.D.C)
Lubrication method
Full forced pressure feed type
Oil pump type
Rotor type driven by camshaft
Oil filter type
Full-flow, cartridge type
Lubricating oil capacity (oil pan)
(lit)
6.5
Oil cooler type
Water cooled
Water pump
Centrifugal type driven by belt
Cooling Method
Fresh water forced circulation
Cooling water capacity (engine only)
(lit)
5.2
Thermostat type
Wax pallet type (76.5 ~ 90 Cû)
Alternator voltage - capacity
(V - A)
12 - 50
Starting Motor voltage - output
(V - kW)
12 - 2.2
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
-6-
General Informations
1.3.2. Engine Power Production tolerance : ±5% Engine Model
Performance
Model
Suffix
Power (PS/rpm)
Torque (kg.m/rpm)
Low idle (rpm)
High idle (rpm)
DC24
Base
56/3,000
15/2,000
-
-
ELFFA
44/2,300
14.5/2,000
850-900
2,600-2,650
ELFFD
49~53/2,900
12.7~14.2/2,200
600-750
3,170-3,250
ELFFE
44~48/2,400
14.5/2,000
775-825
2,600-2,700
ELFFI
44/2,300
14.5/2,000
850-950
2,600-2,650
ELFFJ
49/2,650
14.5/2,000
600-700
2,920 L 50
ELFFL
46.2/2,400
14.5/2,000
775-825
2,650-2,700
ELFFN
45/2,400
14.5/2,000
775-825
2,650-2,700
ELFFO
44/2,250
14.5/1,800
775-825
2,500-2,600
* Note : All data are based on operation without cooling fan at KS-R1004
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
-7-
General Informations
1.3.3. Engine Performance 1) Engine suffix : ELFFO
Performance
KS-R1004
Power (max.)
44 PS/2,250 rpm
Maximum torque
14.5 kg.m/1,800 rpm
Fuel consumption rating (min.)
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
200 g/PS.h
-8-
General Informations
2) Engine suffix : ELFFN
Performance
KS-R1004
Power (max.)
45 PS / 2,400 rpm
Maximum torque
14.5 kg.m / 2,000 rpm
Fuel consumption rating (min.)
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
200 g / PS.h
-9-
General Informations
1.4. Engine Assembly 4
5
6
7
21
8
3
20
2 1
9
12 13
14
15
11
10
16
17
18
22
24
19
1. Fly wheel. 2. Rear plate. 3. Oil filter. 4. Nozzle holder assÕy. 5. Fuel injection pipe. 6. Oil filler cap. 7. Water outlet 8. Cooling fan. 9. Crank shaft pulley. 10. Injection pump. 11. Oil pan. 12. Oil pressure switch. DC24 (2.4 Liter)
23
13. Alternator. 14. Exhaust manifold. 15. Oil level gauge. 16. Intake manifold. 17. Lifting hook. 18. Power take off. 19. Starter. 20. Water pump assÕy. 21. Intake stake. 22. Breather hose. 23. Cylinder head cover. 24. Pre heater plug. - 10 -
General Informations
2. Preventive Maintenance 2.1. Preventive Maintenance The preventive maintenance means that the operator performs the servicing of engine to obtain long life and best performance from DAEWOO diesel engine.
2.1.1. Cooling Water =Regarding the cooling water that is to be used for engine, the soft water not the hard water must be used. =The engine cooling water can be used diluting it with antifreezing solution 40% and the additive for rust prevention (DCA4) 3 ~ 5%. =The density of above solution and additive must be inspected every 500 hours to maintain it properly. NOTE : The proper density control of antifreezing solution and rust preventing additive will be able to prevent the rusting effectively and maintain the stable quality of engine.
=Since DC24 diesel engine cylinder liner is dry type, particularly the cooling water control should be applied thoroughly. =The density of antifreezing solution and additive for rust prevention is able to be confirmed by the cooling water test kit. (Fleetguard CC260M or DAEWOO 60.99901-0038) =How to use the cooling water test kit (1) When the cooling water temp of engine is in the range of 10 ~ 55 ûC, loosen the plug for cooling water discharge and fill the plastic cup about a half. NOTE : In taking the cooling water sample, if the water in auxiliary tank were taken, it is hard to measure the accurate density. Take the cooling water sample necessarily loosening the cooling water discharge plug. (2) At the state of a test paper soaked in the sampled water, after taking the paper out through water agitation, shake off the water. (3) Wait for about 45 sec. till the color change of test paper. NOTE : However, it should not elapse longer than 75 sec, and if it did, the hue would change. (4) Make the numerical value by comparing the test paper which hue has changed with the color list of label on storage bottle. (5) By comparing thehue changed into yellowish green or so with the green color indication of test paper storage bottle, confirm the density. (Then, the density indication must be in the hue range of 33% to 50%). (6) The brown at the middle of test paper and the lower pink color indication represent the additive state for rust prevention, and the proper range is that the meeting numerical value of brown (vertical) and pink color (horizontal) locates in the range of 0.3 to 0.8 at the color list of label on the test paper storqge bottle. (7) In case of less than 0.3, replenish the additive for rust prevention (DCA4), and in case of more than 0.8, pour out the cooling water about 50% and then readjust the density after refilling with clean fresh water.
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 11 -
General Informations
=Amount of Anti-freze in winter Ambient Temperature (¡C)
Cooling water (%)
Anti-freeze (%)
Over -10 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -40
85 80 73 67 60 56 50
15 20 27 33 40 44 50
2.1.2. Fan Belt = Use a fan belt of specified dimensions, and replace if damaged, frayed, or deteriorated. = Check the fan belt for belt tension. If belt tension is lower than the specified limit, adjust the tension by relocating the alternator. (specified deflection : 10 ~ 15 mm when pressed down with thumb)
2.1.3. Engine Oil = Check oil leel with the oil level gauge and replenish if necessary. = Check the oil level with the engine cooled. If the engine is warm, allow time for 5 ~ 10 minutes for oil drain into the crankcase before checking oil level. The oil level must be between Max and Min. lines on the gauge. = Engine oil should be changed at the specified intervals. Oil in the oil filter should be changed simultaneously. = Engine oil change interval : at least 2 times/year First oil change
After the first
1,000km (50hr)
Every 3,000km (250hr)
= Suggested engine oil Engine model
DC24
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
Recommend engine oil SAE No.
API No.
Remark
SAE 15W40
API CD grade or CE grade above
-
SAE 15W40 SAE 10W40
ACEA-E2 or ACEA-E3 (APICH-4)
Bellow 0.05% sulfur
- 12 -
General Informations
2.1.4. Oil Filter = Check for oil pressure and oil leaks, and repair or replace the oil filter if necessary. = Change the oil filter cartridge simultaneously at every replacement of engine oil.
2.1.5. Fuel Filter = The fuel filter should be replaced at every 18,000km (1,200hr)
2.1.6. Air cleaner = In case that elements are deformed, damaged or if the air cleaner has a crack, replace it. = By the definite interval, the elements must be cleaned and replaced.
2.1.7. Valve Clearance Adjust Procedure = After the first 1,000km(50 hr) operation. = When doing engine overhaul or dismantling Cylinder Head off the block. = When Abnormal sound from the valve train is noticed. = When Poor operation condition continues inspite of faultless fuel system. = Valve clearance(with engine cooled) : 0.45 mm for both intake and exhaust.
2.1.8. Cylinder Compression Pressure = Stop the engine after warming up, and take out nozzle holder assembly. = Install the special tool (compression gauge adapter) at the nozzle holder hold, and connect the compression pressure gauge thers. Standard valure
28 kg/cm2 over
Limit value
24 kg/cm2
Difference between each cylinder
Within ± 10 %
¥ Testing conditions : coolant temperature 20¡C, Engine rpm 200rpm (10 turns)
2.1.9. Injection Nozzle = Install a nozzle on the nozzle tester = If the inspected injection pressure is less than the specified value, adjust using the adjusting shims. Engine Model
DC24
Opening pressure
120 kg/cm2
= Check the atomizing state and replace it if abnormal.
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 13 -
General Informations
2.1.10. Fuel Injection Pump = Check the housing crack, damage etc. and replace it if abnormal. = Check if the idle operation and speed regulating leverÕs sealing is removed. = The adjustment and testing of fuel injection pump should necessarily be done at the test bench.
2.1.11. Battery = Inspect for any leakage of electrolytic solution owing to battery crack, and replace the battery in case of poor condition. = Inspect for amount of electrolytic solution, and replenish if insufficient. = Measure the gravity of electrolytic solution, if less than specified value (1.12 ~ 1.28), replenish.
2.1.12. Air removal of Fuel System The suction room of fuel injection pump has the function of air removal continuously during the operation through a relief valve. In case that the suction room lacks fuel at all, for instance, in case of new installation of injection pump, after loosening the air removing screws of cartridge filter respectively, remove the air by operating the manual pump of fuel supply pump until bubble will disappear.
2.1.13. Fuel Supply Pump Every time of engine oil replacement, the fuel strainer installed at the fuel supply pump should be removed and cleaned.
2.1.14. Starting Motor In case of engine maintenance, clean pinion and ring gear thoroughly putting in the fuel, and coat them with grease. Also, In case of washing engine (room) and so forth, inspect the wiring state being careful for water not to get in.
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 14 -
General Informations
2.2. Torque Specifications Standards bolts The torque values given in the following table should be applied where a particular torque is not specified.
Bolt identification
4T Low carbon steel
7T High carbon steel
6 x 1.0
0.4 - 0.8
0.5 - 1.0
-
8 x 1.25
0.8 - 1.8
1.2 - 22
1.7 - 3.1
10 x 1.25
2.1 - 3.5
2.8 - 4.7
3.8 - 6.4
✽10 x 1.5
2.0 - 3.5
2.8 - 4.7
3.8 - 6.4
Bolt diameter x pitch
9T Alloy steel
12 x 1.25
5.0 - 7.5
6.2 - 9.3
7.7 - 11.6
✽12 x 1.75
4.6 - 7.0
5.8 - 8.6
7.3 - 10.9
14 x 1.5
7.8 - 11.7
9.5 - 14.2
11.6 - 17.4
✽14 x 2.0
7.3 - 10.9
9.0 - 13.4
10.9 - 16.3
16 x 1.5
10.6 - 16.0
13.8 - 20.8
16.3 - 24.5
✽16 x 20
10.2 - 15.2
13.2 - 19.8
15.6 - 23.4
18 x 1.5
15.4 - 23.0
19.9 - 29.9
23.4 - 35.2
20 x 1.5
21.0 - 31.6
27.5 - 41.3
43.3 - 64.9
22 x 1.5
25.6 - 42.2
37.0 - 55.5
43.3 - 64.9
24 x 2.0
36.6 - 55.0
43.9 - 72.5
56.5 - 84.7
The ✽ indicates that the bolts used for female-threaded parts that are made of soft materiails such casting, etc.
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 15 -
General Informations
3. Major Maintenance 3.1. Major Parts Fixing Bolts 3.1.1. Cylinder Head and Block (kg.m)
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 16 -
General Informations
3.1.2. Crankshaft and Camshaft (kg.m)
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 17 -
General Informations
3.1.3. Injection Pump and Other
(kg.m)
3.1.4. In-line Injection Pump Type
(kg.m)
3.1.5. VE Injection Pump Type
(kg.m)
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 18 -
General Informations
3.2. Engine Repair Kit
1. Gasket : Cylinder head. 2. Gasket : Cylinder head cover. 3. Gasket : Intake and exhaust manifold. 4. Gasket : Joint bolt 5. Seal : Crankshaft(Rear). 6. Gasket : Front plate. 7. Gasket : Drain plug. 8. Gasket : Oil pan. 9. Gasket : Oil pan to bearing cap 10. Gasket : Tappet chamber cover. 12. Gasket : Gear case. 13. Oil Seal.
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
14. Gasket : Gear case. 15. Gasket : Water pump to cylinder block. 16. Gasket : Outlet pipe. 17. Gasket : Housing cylinder head. 18. Seal Ring 19. Gasket : Oil filter to block. 20. Seal Ring. 22. Seal Ring. 23. Seal Ring. 25. Gasket : Bracket to front plate 27. Gasket : Head cover bolt. 28. Repair Kit : Top overhaul kit
- 19 -
General Informations
3.3. Repair 3.3.1. Cylinder Head Bolt Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence as shown in the figure. Torque(kg¥m)
8.0 L 0.5
3.3.2. Valve Clearance Adjust the valve clearance in the following manner using a feeler gauge. Standard (in cold) Intake and exhaust (mm)
0.45
Feeler gauge
EA0O4014
1. Bring the piston in either the No.1 cylinder or the No.4 cylinder to top dead center on the compression stroke by turning the crankshaft until the TDC notched line on the crankshaft pulley is aligned the timing pointer. 2. Check to see if there is play in the No.1 intake and exhaust valve rocker arms. If the No.1 cylinder intake and exhaust valve rocker arms are deprssed, the No.4 piston is at TDC on the compression stroke.
T 13° 18° D C EA0O4011
Adjust the clearances of valves marked with an arrow. Rocker arm screw lock nut torque (kg¥m)
2.5
<------ Front side
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 20 -
Rear side ----->
General Informations
After adjusting the valve clearances referring to the figure, turn the crankshaft one full turn in the rotative direction and align the TDC mark with the pointer, then adjust the remaining valve clearances.
<------ Front side
Rear side ----->
3.3.3. Injection Timing 1) In-Line Injection Pump Timing
13¡ ± 1¡ T 13° 18° D C EA0O4011
Check the notched line on the injection pump is in alignment with the notched line on the injection pump bracket.
2) VE Injection Pump =Turn the crank pulley until No. 1 piston is placed in the ÒTDCÓ position of notch marks on the crank pulley, and then turn again the crank pulley clockwise until showing the notch mark of the right figure corresponding to the injection timing is aligned with the pointer ( ) on the crank pulley. DC24 Fuel injection timing (B.T.D.C static)
T 13° 18° D C EA0O4011
13¡
=Check the alignment of the notched lines injection pump and timing flange =Loosen 2 fixing bolts of the injection pump. =Turn the injection pump until the notch mark of the injection pump attached to the fuel injection pump flange is aligned with the notch mark of the flange. =Tighten the fixing bolts to specified torque. Torque (kg¥m) DC24 (2.4 Liter)
3.5 ~ 4.5 - 21 -
General Informations
3.3.4. Compression Pressure Remove the glow plugs from all cylinders, then check the comprssion pressure in each cylinder with a compression gauge by engaging starter. (kg/cm2, 200rpm) Standard
Limit
28
22.0 - 23.0 EA0O4015
3.3.5. Fuel System Injection nozzle Check the spraying condition and injection starting pressure Injection starting pressure (kg/cm2)
120
EA0M3002
Adjustment Adjust the injection starting pressure with the adjusting screw using a nozzle tester
EA0M3003
Air Bleeding of the Fuel System
Bleeder screw
1) In-Line Injection Pump Bleed the system by manually operating the priming pump with the fuel filter outlet joint bolt and injection pump bleeder screw loosened.
Priming pump EA0O4010
2) VE Injection Pump After the cleaning of the fuel filter or after the engine stop by the lack of fuel, the bleeding of the fuel system must be executed by all means. Bleed the system by manually operating the priming pump with fuel injection pipe nut and filter bleeder screw loosened. ¥ Press the priming pump cap repetitively until the fuel without bubbles comes out from the bleeding screw ¥ After the whole air is pulled out, close the screw of the fuel filter and fuel injection pipe nut. DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 22 -
General Informations
Feed pump strainer Remove the strainer using a screw driver. Wash the stainer in clean diesel fuel.
Strainer
EA0O4008
Fuel filter replacement Remover and installer(filter wench)
EA3M1031
Apply diesel fuel to o-ring. Turn in filter until sealing face is brought into contact with the o-ring. Further tighten 2/3 of a turn.
EA0M3005
Fuel sedimentor (if eguipped) Removal steps Disconnect water separator sensor wiring at the connector. Remove the filter using filter wrench.
EA3M1031
Installation steps Install the water separator sensor in the new filter. Apply diesel fuel to o-ring.
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 23 -
General Informations
Fill the filter sufficiently with diesel fuel before installing it in the housing. Apply diesel fuel to o-ring. Turn in filter until sealing face is brought into contact with the o-ring. Further tighten 2/3 of a turn.
3.3.6. Lubricating System Main oil filter replacement
Cartridge (Oil filter)
Remove the filter cartridge using filter wrench
Oil filter head
EA0M3006
3.3.7. Fan Belt
Depress here Fan pulley
Adjust belt tension by moving generator pulley. Specified belt deflection(mm)
about 10mm
10 Generator pulley
EA0M3009
Crank pulley
3.3.8. Pre-Heating System Q.O.S System Q.O.S System makes the pre-heating time short and easy start.
Acc "OFF"
"ON"
1
ST Stater S/W
Batt DC 12V
IND. Lamp
3
4
2
9
Relay
Glow plug
5 Thermo O/N 60°C
EA0M3010
Thermo Switch Operating temperature Operating temperature
15¡C
EA0M3011
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 24 -
General Informations
Glow Plug Check the continuity across the plug terminals and body.
EA0M3012
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
- 25 -
General Informations
4. Engine Disassembly and Reassembly 4.1. External Parts
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
26
Engine Assembly
4.2. Internal Parts (Timing gear train) 4.2.1. Major Components
3
2
1
4 5 EA0M4003
EA0M4003
<Disassembly steps> 1. Pulley. 2. Timing gear case cover.
3. Injection pump gear. 4. Idle gear.
Important Operations
Injection pump assembly Inspect the following items before timing gear removal. Backlash (Crankshaft gear, camshaft gear, injection pump gear) Standard
Limit
0.10-0.17 mm
0.3 mm
EA0M4004
Idle gear end play Standard
Limit
0.07 mm
0.2 mm
EA0M4004
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
27
Engine Assembly
4.2.2. Cylinder head
<Disassembly steps> ▲ 1. Spring seat and valve cotter 2. Valve spring 3. Valve
Important Operation =Spring seat and valve cotter (1) : Valve spring compressor
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
28
Engine Assembly
4.2.3. Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly
1
4
3 2
5
EA0M4008
<Disassembly steps> ▲ 1. Piston ring 2. Snap ring ▲ 3. Piston pin
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
4. Piston 5. Connecting-rod
29
Engine Assembly
Important Operation Piston ring : Remover
EA0M4009
Piston pin Remove the piston pin snap ring using a snap ring plier. Drive out the piston pin using a brass rod at normal temperature.
Piston Pin
4.2.4. Rocker Arm and Shaft Assembly
<Disassembly steps> 1. Rocker arm (A) 2. Rocker arm shaft bracket 3. Rocker arm (B)
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
4. Rocker arm shaft bracket 5. Rocker arm shaft
30
Engine Assembly
4.3. Inspection and Repair Make necessary corrction or parts replacement if wear, if wear, damage or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection.
4.3.1 Cylinder Body and Liner Cylinder body warpage
Overall length Thickness (H)
Standard
Limit
0.05 mm
0.2 mm
247.97-248.03 mm 247.7 mm EA0M4012
Grade datermination Take an average of 3 values obtained by measuring the diameters shown in the right. 90
Measunng point : Approx. 90 mm from the upper face. The mark on the upper face should be neglected in case of Engine overhaul.
= Cylinder block (steel liner)
1
bore dia Liner outer dia
¯88
¯88
EA0M4013
Grade tolerance
Standard
Cylinder
(mm)
2
Projection
3
4
¯88.010 ¯88.020 ~ ~
¯88.030 ~
¯88.040 ~
¯88.001 ¯88.011
¯88.021
¯88.031
¯88.020 ¯88.030 ~ ~ ¯88.011 ¯88.021
¯88.040 ~ ¯88.031
¯88.050 ~ ¯88.041
Straight edge
Feeler gage
= Cylinder block (cast liner) Standard
EA0M4014
(mm) Grade tolerance 1
2
Cylinder bore dia
¯90
¯90.010 ~ ¯90.001
¯90.020 ~ ¯90.011
Liner outer dia
¯90
¯89.984 ~ ¯89.995
¯89.995 ~ ¯90.006
Amount of projection
(mm) Standard
Steel liner
-0.015~0.115 mm
Cast liner
0.008~0.070 mm
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
31
Engine Assembly
Cylinder liner replacement : Remover : Liner grip
Installer Wipe clean the cylinder liner and cylinder body to remove oil, then install the cylinder liner into cylinder bore using a bench press. The use of dry ice to cool the cylinder liner will invite contraction, facilitating smooth installation of the cylinder liner. Tightness
Bench press Installer
0 - 0.02 mm EA0M4016
4.3.2. Crankshaft and Bearing A
Crankshaft journal and pin diameter B
Standard Journal
¯ 69.92 - ¯ 69.932 mm
Pins
¯ 52.918 - ¯ 52.930 mm
Undersize bearings are available in 4 different sizes which include 0.25, 0.5, 0.75 and 1.0 mm undersizes.
A
EA0M4017
Crankshaft diameter when using undersize bearing Journal
Pin
U/S 0.25 ¯ 69.67-¯ 69.68 mm ¯ 52.67-¯ 52.68 mm U/S 0.50 ¯ 69.42-¯ 69.43 mm ¯ 52.42-¯ 52.43 mm U/S 0.75 ¯ 69.17-¯ 69.18 mm ¯ 52.17-¯ 52.18 mm U/S 1.00 ¯ 68.92-¯ 68.93 mm ¯ 51.92-¯ 51.93 mm
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
32
Engine Assembly
Uneven wear
Fillet section
Standard
Limit
Journal
0.001 mm
0.05 mm
Pin
0.001 mm
0.05 mm
Fillet section
Wear
Curvature of the fillet section on the crankshaft journals and pins should be finished as shown bellow.
Wear
EA0M4018
Standard Journal
R3.3 - R3.7 mm
Pin
R3.3 - R3.7 mm
When regrinding the crank shaft, the fillet section should be correctly finished. Avoid stepped portion or rough surface on it.
Clearance between crankshaft journal and bearing
Clearance
Standard
Limit
0.018-0.065 mm
0.12 mm
Crankshaft bearing cap bolt Torque(kg¥m)
18.5
Clearance between crank pin and connecting-rod bearing Standard
Limit
0.029-0.082 mm
0.12 mm
Crankshaft bearing cap bolt Torque(kg¥m)
8-9
EA0M4020
Bearing clearance Measurement Measure the clearance using plastic gauge.
EA0M4021
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
33
Engine Assembly
Bearing spread Limit Crankshaft bearing
74.5 mm
Connecting-rod bearing
56.5 mm
EA0M4022
Run-out Standard
Limit
0.03 mm
0.06
EA0M4023
Crankshaft gear replacement Removal : Remover
Remover
EA0M4024
Installation : Installer
Installer
EA0M4025
Pilot bearing replacement : Remover
EA0M4026
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
34
Engine Assembly
4.3.3. Flywheel Inspect the following parts for wear, damage or other abnormal conditions.
EA0M4027
Ring gear replacement Remove the ring gear from the flywheel by tapping around the side face of the gear with a brass bar.
EA0M4028
Heat the ring gear evenly with a gas burner(Max. temperature 200¡C) to invite volumetric expansion. Install the ring gear on the flywheel when it is sufficently heated.
EA0M4029
4.3.4. Maintenance of cylinder block, cylinder liner and piston To maintain the engine in optimum condition and retain maximum performance for a long time, the cylinder block, cylinder liner and piston which have the same grade marking number (the same size tolerance) should be assembled. The marking number (the partÕs grade) and marking position is as follows.
Marking
= Cylinder block a) Marking number ; 1 or 2 (Size grade for of cylinder bore diameter) b) Marking position ; Middle of the cylinder block side surface. Piston grade of cylinder No.4
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
35
Cylinder block grade
Engine Assembly
lCylinder liner a) Marking number ; 1A, 1B, 2A or 2B 1A Can used the piston A grade Can used the cylinder block 1 grade b) Marking position ; Cylinder liner lower surface
lPistion a) Marking number ; A or B (Size grade for piston outer diameter) b) Marking position ; Center of the piston upper surface
Marking
EA4M2021
Assembly process of cylinder block, cylinder liner and piston (1) Check the marking number (1 or 2) of cylinder block. (Middle of side surface) (2) Then assemble the liner whose first digit of the marking (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B) is just the same with it on the cylinder block. (3) Assemble the piston whose marking is just same with the second digit (A or B) of the assembled cylinder linerÕs marking.
4.3.5. Piston Piston clearance Piston outside diameter Take measurement in direction at a right angle to the piston pin hole. Grading position ; 14mm. The piston grade should be selected by referring to the following table, so that specified piston clearance can be obtained.
EA0M4030
=Piston grade for steel liner Piston grade
Standard
A
¯ 85.970 mm ~ ¯ 85.985 mm
B
¯ 85.980 mm ~ ¯ 85.996 mm
C
¯ 85.990 mm ~ ¯ 86.006 mm
D
¯ 86.000 mm ~ ¯ 86.016 mm
= Piston grade for cast liner Piston grade
Standard
A
¯ 85.970mm ~ ¯ 85.985mm
B
¯ 85.980mm ~ ¯ 85.996mm
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
36
Engine Assembly
Cylinder inside diameter (mm)
Cylinder inside diameter
Grade
A
B
Cast liner
¯86.020 ~ ¯86.031
¯86.031 ~ ¯86.042
Steel liner
¯86.020~¯86.060
Piston clearance
0.035~0.062
Piston pin outside diameter Standard
Limit
¯26.995-¯27.0 mm
¯26.96 mm
Fitting interference between piston pin and piston Standard
0.004 - 0.015mm EA0M4031
Clearance between piston ring and ring groove Standard
Limit
1st compression ring
0.085 - 0.115mm
0.2mm
2nd compression ring
0.05 - 0.085mm
0.15mm
Oil ring
0.03 - 0.065mm
0.15mm
EA0M4032
Piston ring gap Standard
Limit
1st compression ring
0.20 - 0.40mm
1.5mm
2nd compression ring
0.20 - 0.40mm
1.5mm
Oil ring
0.10 - 0.30mm
1.5mm
Feeler Gouge
EA0M4033
4.3.6. Connecting Rod Connecting-rod Distortion and parallelism Standard
Limit
Distortion
0.05 mm
0.20 mm
Parallelism
0.05 mm
0.15 mm EA0M4034
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
37
Engine Assembly
Bushing Clearance between bushing and piston pin Standard
Limit
0.008 - 0.02mm
0.05mm
EA0M4035
Bushing Replacement Removal : Remover Installation : Installer
The inner face of the bushing must be finished with a reamer after installation of the bushing. Inside diameter
27.008 - 27.015 mm
EA0M4036
4.3.7. Cylinder Head H
Cylinder head warpage Standard
Limit
Overall length
0.05 mm
0.2 mm
Thickness (H)
91.95-92.05mm
91.75 mm EA0M4038
Depression of hot plug Check the amount of depression of swirl chambers on No.1 through No.4 cylinder using a feeler gauge, with a straight edge held against the swirl chamber face. Limit
0.02 mm
EA0M4039
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
38
Engine Assembly
Swirl chamber Replacement Remove the hot plug in the following manner ; Insert a suitable round bar sizing 3 to 5mm in diameter into nozzle holer fitting hole to touch the swirl chamber, then drive out the swirl chamber using a hammer.
EA0M4040
Heat shield replacement Remove the heat shield using a brass bar and a hammer.
EA0M4041
Installation of new swirl chamber Install lock ball into groove in swirl chamber. Drive the swirl chamber into cylinder head by aligning lock ball in swirl chamber with groove in cylinder head.
EA0M4042
Press the swirl chamber into position by applying 4,500 to 5,000 kg pressure using a bench press with a piece of metal fitted against the swirl chamber face for protection. After installation, grind the face of swirl chamber flush with the face of the cylinder head.
EA0M4043
Installation of new heat shield Install the heat shield with the flanged side up on the cylinder head by tapping on the flange lightly with a brass bar.
EA0M4044
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
39
Engine Assembly
4.3.8. Valve and Valve Seat Insert Valve stem diameter Standard
Limit
Intake valves
¯7.946 - ¯7.961mm
¯7.88mm
Exhaust valve
¯7.921 - ¯7.936mm
¯7.85mm
I
III
II
EA0M4045
Depression Standard
Limit
Intake valves
0.65mm
2.5 mm
Exhaust valve
0.65mm
2.5 mm
Depression
EAOM4046
Contact width Standard
Limit
1.06mm
3.6 mm Contact width
EAOM4047
Valve seating angle Valve seating angle
45¡
B
EA0M4048 EA0M4048
Valve thickness Standard
Limit
Intake valve
1.3 mm
1.0 mm
Exhaust valve
1.3 mm
1.0 mm Thickness
EA0M4049
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
40
Engine Assembly
Valve seat replacement Arc-weld excess metal around inner face of the valve seat and allow to cool off a few minutes, then pull out the valve seat with vibration hammer
Valve seat
Cylinder head
Welding bead
Press a new valve seat insert into the bore using a bench press. After installation of the valve seat insert, grind finish the seating face with a seat grinder carefully noting the seating angle, contact width and depression. Lap the valve and seat as te final step.
EA0M4051
4.3.9. Valve Guide Clearance between valve stem and valve guide Standard
Limit
Intake valve
0.039 - 0.071 mm
0.20 mm
Eahaust valve
0.064 - 0.096 mm
0.25 mm EA0M4052
Valve guide replacement Removal : Remover
EA0M4053
Installation ; Valve guide installer. Apply engine oil to the outer circumference of the valve guide. Set the installer to the valve guide, then the guide into position from the upper face of the cylinder head a hammer.
EA0M4054
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
41
Engine Assembly
Height of valve guide upper end
Intake
12.5 ± 0.2mm
from cylinder head upper face
Exhaust 12.5 ± 0.2mm
Discard used oil seals and install new ones.
4.3.10. Valve Spring Inclination
Free lenght and inclination Standard
Limit
lnner
47.9mm
46.5mm
Outer
47.3mm
45.8mm
lnner
-
1.0mm
Outer
-
1.0mm
Set length
Standard
Limit
Ineer
37.0 mm
5.55 - 6.25 kg
5.02 kg
Outer
39 mm
19.65 - 22.15 kg
18.1 kg
Free length
Inclination
Free Length
Square
EA0M4055 EA0M40
Free lenght and inclination
EA0M4056
4.3.11. Rocker Arm and Rocker Arm Assembly Run-out Limit
0.4 mm
EA0M4057
Rocker arm shaft diameter Standard
Limit
¯18.98 - ¯19.00 mm
¯18.85 mm
EA0M4058
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
42
Engine Assembly
Rocker arm Clearance between rocker arm shaft and rocker arm Standard
Limit
0.020 - 0.070 mm
0.2 mm
If the amount of wear is beyond the limit, replace either the shaft or rocker arms depending on the condition of wear.
EA0M4059
It is necessary to drill an oil port in the new rocker arm bushing as it is not provided with the oil port.
EA0M4060
4.3.12. Camshaft Assembly
EA0M4061
Camshaft diameter and height of cam lobe Standard Journal diameter Height of cam lobe
Limit
¯47.945 - ¯47.975mm ¯47.6mm 40.568mm
40.2mm I II
A C
B D
I II
B
EA0M4062
A
Clearance between camshaft and bearing Camshaft bearing
Standard
Limit
0.05 mm
0.12 mm
EA0M4063
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
43
Engine Assembly
Cam bearing replacement Removal : remover and installer
Remover and installer EA0M4064
Installation : remover and installer The oil port in the cylinder body must be aligned with that in the camshaft bearing.
Align oil port
Run-out Standard
Limit
0.05 mm
0.1 mm
EA0M4066
End play Standard
Limit
0.05-0.11mm
0.2 mm
EA0M4067
Camshaft gear replacement Removal : remover
EA0M4068
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
44
Engine Assembly
Installation Drive the gear to the shaft, aligning the key groove on the gear with the key on the shaft.
EA0M4069
Tappet Inspect tappet for wear, damage or other abnormal condition. Pitting
Crack
Normal contact
Irregular contact
EA0M4070
Diameter Standard
Limit
¯12.977-¯12.990mm
¯12.95 mm
Clearance between tappet and cylinder body Standard
Limit
0.03 mm
0.1 mm
EA0M4072
4.3.13. Push Rod Run-out Limit
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
0.4 mm
45
Engine Assembly
4.3.14. Idle Gear and Shaft Idle gear shaft Standard
Limit
¯44.945 - ¯44.975mm
¯44.845 mm
EA0M4074
Clearance between shaft and idle gear Standard
Limit
0.025-0.085mm
0.2 mm
EA0M4075
Timing gear case cover oil seal replacement Removal : Remover
EA0M4076
Installation : Installer
EA0M4077
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
46
Engine Assembly
4.4. Reassembly 4.4.1. Minor Components = Cylinder Head
EA0M4078
<Reassembly steps> 1. Valve ▲2. Valve spring
3. Retainer and valve cotter
Important operations = Valve spring (2) Install the valve spring with the painted end down.
Painted portion EA0M4079
= Retainer and valve cotter (3) : Compressor
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
47
Engine Assembly
=Rocker arm and shaft assembly
3 21 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 14
15
16 EA0M4080
<Ressembly steps> 1. Rocker arm shaft 2. Waving washer 3. Snap ring ▲ 4. Rocker arm (A) 5. Rocker arm shaft bracket ▲ 6. Rocker arm (D) 7. Spring ▲ 8. Rocker arm (C) 9. Rocker arm shaft bracket ▲ 10. Rocker arm (D)
11. Spring ▲ 12. Rocker arm (C) 13. Rocker arm shaft bracket ▲ 14. Rocker arm (D) 15. Spring ▲ 16. Rokcer arm (C) 17. Rocker arm shaft bracket ▲ 18. Rocker arm (B) 19. Waving washer 20. Snap ring
Important operations = Rocker arm (A) (4) = Rocker arm (C) (8, 12, 16) Difference between rocker arm (A) and (C)
Rocker arm(B)
Rocker arm(D)
EA0M4081 EA M
=Rocker arm (B) (18) =Rocker arm (D) (6, 10, 14) Difference between rocker arm (B) and (D)
Rocker arm(C)
Rocker arm(A)
EA0M4081
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
48
Engine Assembly
= Piston and connecting-rod assembly
<Reassembly steps> 1. Piston and connecting-rod 2. Piston pin
3. Snap ring 4. Piston ring
Important operations = Piston and connecting-rod Install the piston on the connecting-rod, so that combustion chamber on piston head is on the same side with the cylinder number mark side (side with bearing stopper) of the connecting-rod big-end. Daewoo mark on the connecting-rod should be on the same side of the front mark on the piston head.
= Piston pin Install the piston pin after heating the piston to about 100¡C
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
49
Engine Assembly
= Snap ring Install the snap ring into the piston using snap ring pliers, then check to make certain the snap ring is fitted properly into the groove. Snap ring
Piston ring Use piston ring installer. Install the 1st and 2nd compression rings with manufacturerÕs mark turned up. Oil ring can be installed on the piston with either side up. Piston ring gaps should be positioned as shown in the figure.
2nd Ring
3
1
2
4
5
6
Use Cr-coating piston ring for cast liner and nominal piston ring for steel liner. 120
EA0M4090
Important operations =Crankshaft and bearing Journal diameter
Fit correctly
With oil hole and groove
¯70 mm
Install the crankshaft after applying engine oil to the face of the bearing in contact with the crankshaft. EA0M4083
Cap side
Block
The bearings should be installed correctly in their respecive position. Install the thrust bearing with the oil grooved side turned outward.
EA0M4106
= Installation of bearing cap arch gaskets. Install the arch gasket on the No.1 and No.5 bearing caps. No. 5
Amount of projection of gasket
0 - 0.05 mm
Arch gasket
0-0.05
No. 1 0-0.05
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
50
EA0M4084
Engine Assembly
Apply a coat of silicon gasket evenly to the joining faces of the No.5 bearing cap and cylinder block. The No.1 and No.5 bearing caps should be installed flush with the face of the cylinder Block.
No. 5 bearing cap
EA0M4085
Install front and rear side thrust bearings with the oil groove turned to the timing gear and flywheel, respectively.
EA0M4086
Tighten crankshaft bearing cap bolts in numerical order. Torque (kg-m)
18.5
Bolt lenght
89 mm
Apply engine oil
= Rear oil seal Apply engine oil to the lipped portion of the rear oil seal, then install it in position using installer.
EA0M4087
Cylincer block Oil seal Crankshaft Installer
Engine oil
Hammer
EA0M4088
Flywheel Tighten the bolts in the numerical order as the illustration Torque (kg-m)
3
1
2
4
5
12.0
6
EA0M4089
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
51
Engine Assembly
= Piston and connecting-rod Lightly oil the piston rings fitted to the piston, then position piston ring gaps as illustrated in the drawing.
2nd Ring
1st Ring
Oil Ring 120
EA0M4090
Piston ring compressor Install the piston and connecting-rod with mark turned to the front of engine. Use the piston sleeve.
EA0M4091
Install the connecting-rod bearing caps by matching numbers. Torque (kg-m)
8.0 - 9.0
Matching number EA0M4092
= Oil jet pipe Tighten the oil jet pipe fixing bolts in the order.
EA0M4093
Inspect the gap between oil Jet pipe and piston.
Oil jet pipe
EA0M4094
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
52
Engine Assembly
Liquid gasket applying portion
Rubber gasket Liquid gasket applying portion 45
45
= Crank case Apply liquid gasket to the arch gasket fitting face of the No.1 and No.5 bearing caps.
Crankshaft EA0M4095
4.4.2. Internal Parts (Timing gear train) = Major components : Gear drive type
2
3
4
1
EA0M4096
<Reassmbly steps> ▲1. Idle gear assembly ▲2. Injection pump gear
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
▲3. Timing gear case cover ▲4. Crank shaft pulley
53
Engine Assembly
Important operations = Idle gear (1) Install the idel gear, so that the oil port in the idle gear shaft is turned to the crankshaft gear side and bolt holes are aligned.
Oil port
Align the marks on the camshaft gear, idle gear and crankshaft gear.
EA0M4098
=Injection pump gear (2) Install the injection pump gear together with injection pump by aligining the mark with that on the camshaft.
EA0M4099
=Timing gear case cover (3) Check to make sure the o-ring is fitted properly into ring groove in the timing gear case cover.
EA0M4107
Crank shaft pulley (4) Bolt
Torque (kg-m)
19.0
EA0M4100
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
54
Engine Assembly
=Adjustment of injection timing 1) In-Line Injection pump Bring the piston in No.1 cylinder to the injection timing before T.D.C on compression stroke so that T.D.C line on the pulley is aligned with the point. Timing
T 13° 18° D C EA0M4011 EA0O4
13¡ ± 1¡
Bring the mark on the injection pump housing with the mark on the injection pump backet.
2) VE Injection pump =Turn the crank pulley until No. 1 piston is placed in the ÒTDCÓ position of notch marks on the crank pulley, and then turn again the crank pulley clockwise until showing the notch mark of the right figure corresponding to the injection timing is aligned with the pointer ( ) on the crank pulley. T 13° 18° D C
DC24 Fuel injection timing (B.T.D.C static)
EA0O4011
13¡
=Check the alignment of the notched lines injection pump and timing flange =Loosen 2 fixing bolts of the injection pump. =Turn the injection pump until the notch mark of the injection pump attached to the fuel injection pump flange is aligned with the notch mark of the flange. Tighten the fixing bolts to specified torque. Torque (kg.m)
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
3.5 ± 4.5
55
Engine Assembly
4.4.3. Internal Components
<Reassembly steps> ▲ 1. Cylinder head gasket ▲ 2. Cylinder head
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
▲ 3. Rocker arm shaft assembly 4. Water pump
56
Engine Assembly
Important operations = Cylinder head gasket (1) Install head gasket on the cylinder block with ÒTOPÓ mark side up.
"TOP" 0048
"TOP" mark
EA0M4102
=Cylinder head (2) Tighten cylinder head bolts in numerical sequence.
1st step
2nd step
New bolt
6.5 kg.m
8.0 kg.m
Reused bolt
6.5 kg.m
10.0 ± 0.5 kg.m
=Rocker arm shaft assembly (3) Tighten rocker arm shaft bolts in numerical sequence. Rocker arm bracket torque
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
1.3 - 2.3 kg.m
57
Engine Assembly
4.4.4. External Components
Important operations
Depress here Fan pulley
= Fan belt (6) Specified belt deflection Fan belt
about 10mm
Generator pulley
10 mm
Crank pulley
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
58
EA0M3009
Engine Assembly
5. Lubricating System 5.1. General Description Oil filter assembly Relief valve
War ning lamp
Batter y Oil filter
Cylinder block main oil galler y
Regulation valve
Crankshaft bear ing
Camshaft bear ing
Connectingrod bear ing
Cylinder head valve mechanism
Timing gear
Piston Oil jet
Oil pump
Piston
EA0M5001
5.2. Oil Pump Disassembly =Rotor type
3
1
2 4
EA0M5002
<Disassembly steps> 1. Oil pipe 2. Strainer DC24 (2.4 Liter)
3. Pump cover 4. Vane 59
Lubricating System
Inspection and repair Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection. Clearance between vane and body Standard
Limit
0.02 - 0.07 mm
0.15 mm
Clearance between rotor and vane Standard
Limit
0.02 - 0.13 mm
0.15 mm
Clearance between vane and pump body
Standard
0.2 - 0.27 mm
Clearance between rotor shaft and pump body Standard
Limit
0.04 mm
0.2 mm
Pinion replacement Removal File off caulked end of the pinion stopper, then drive out the pin toward opposite side.
Installation Install a new stopper pin and caulked end of the pin after installation.
EA0M5006
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
60
Lubricating System
Rotor replacement Removal Drive out the pin from one side.
EA0M5008
Installation When the pin is installed, check to make sure the end of the pin is not projected from the end of rotor.
EA0M5009
Reassembly To assemble, follow the disassemble procedure in reverse order.
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
61
Lubricating System
5.3. Oil Filter =Without oil cooler type
4
6
2 3 5 1 EA0M5010
<Disassembly steps> 1. Drain plug 2. Plug screw 3. Plug screw
4. Oil filter cartridge 5. Relief valve assÕy 6. Oil filter housing
Inspection and repair Make necessary correction or parts replacement if damage or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection. Reassembly To assemble, follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order.
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
62
Lubricating System
5.4. Oil Cooler 5.4.1. Oil Jet Pipe and Oil Pressure Regulating Valve Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage or any other abmormal conditions are found through inspection.
= Oil jet pipe Inspect for wear or any other abmormal conditions.
EA0M5015
Inspect the regulating valve moving smoothly when it is pressed using a screw driver.
EA0M5016
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
63
Lubricating System
6. Cooling System 6.1. General Description
Thermostat
By-pass
Car heater
Radiator
Cylinder head
Cylinder block
Water pump
EA0M6001
6.2. Water Pump Disassembly
<Disassembly steps> 1. Cover 2. Set screw ▲ 3. Hub DC24 (2.4 Liter)
▲ 4. Impeller and mechanial seal 5. Unit bearing
64
Lubricating System
Important operation = Hub (3)
EA0M6003
= Impeller and Mechanical seal Heat the pump body in hot water (80-90¡C). (For aluminum body only.)
EA0M6004
Remove impeller using a bench press and a suitable bar.
EA0M6005
Inspection and repair Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection. Check the bearing for abmormal noise, binding and other abnormal conditions.
EA0M6006
2.4 Liter (DC24)
65
Cooling System
Reassembly
<Reassembly steps> ▲ 1. Unit bearing 2. Set screw ▲ 3. Impeller and Mechanical seal
4. Cover ▲ 5. Hub
Important operations = Unit bearing (1) Press the unit bearing into place by aligning set screw hole in bearing with that in the pump body, then secure the unit bearing in position with the screws. Set screw hole
EA0M6008
= Impeller and Mechanial seal (3) Apply thin coat of liquid gasket (Belco bond No.4) to the outer periphery of Mechanial seal before installing the Mechanial seal.
Apply liquid gasket here EA0M6009
2.4 Liter (DC24)
66
Cooling System
Install the impeller in position using bench press, so that the specified clearance is provided between the impeller and pump body. Clearance
0.3 - 0.6 mm
EA0M6010
After installation, check that rear face of the impeller is indented from the face of the pump body. Depth
1.0 mm
EA0M6011
= Fan center (5) Distance between fan fitting face and rear face of the rear cover Distance
110.7 - 111.3 mm
EA0M6012
6.3. Thermostat
Thermometer
Inspection and repair Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage or any other abmormal conditions are found through inspection. Valve opening Temperature
Valve lift at testing Temperature
82 ¡C
8 mm(at 95¡C)
Rule
Wood piece
EA0M6013
EA0M6013
2.4 Liter (DC24)
67
Cooling System
7. Fuel System 7.1. General Description 1) In-Line Injection pump
Nozzle holder Fuel filter
Injection pump
Fuel tank
EA0M7001
2) VE Injection pump
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
68
Lubricating System
=With the VE type injection pump, the number of the plungers has no relationship to the number of engine cylinders, and there is only one plunger. =This single plunger reciprocates while rotating, and fuel oil is injected into each cylinder through the injection pipes in accordance with the engine`s firing order.
2.4 Liter (DC24)
69
Fuel System
7.2. Injection Nozzle Disassembly
7
3
2 6
1 5 4
<Disassembly steps> 1. Cap nut 2. Nut 3. Adjusting screw 4. Nozzle spring 5. Push rod
6. Nozzle nut ▲7. Nozzle 8. Nozzle holder screw 9. Connector
Important operations =Nozzle (7) After removal of nozzle assembly from the nozzle body, keep them separate to maintain proper needle valve to body combinations.
Reassembly To reassemble, follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order. Refer to ÒFUEL SYSTEMÓ in general information for injection of spraying condition and injection starting pressure adjustment.
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
70
Lubricating System
7.3. Injection Pump Calibration 7.3.1. VE Injection pump (ELFFO/FFN/FFL/FFE) (1) Injection pump
65.11101 - 7329 (104780 - 9340 ZEXEL) - ELFFO 65.11101 - 7665 (104780 - 7120 ZEXEL) - ELFFN / L / E (2) Nozzle & holder assÕy ALTERNATIVE =Nozzle & holder assÕy : 65.10101 - 7075A (DOOWON) Nozzle ass`y 65.10102 - 6012 (105000 - 1740) =Nozzle & holder assÕy 65.10101 - 7076A (LUCAS) Nozzle ass`y 65.10102 - 6030 (9135-173) (3) Injection pipe: 65.10301 - 6301 (4) Injection order: 1-3-4-2 (5) Injection timing: BTDC 13 ± 1¡ (A) Test condition for injection pump
Nozzle
105000-2010
Opening pressure: 150 kg/cm2
Holder AssÕy
105780-2080
-
Injection pipe(IDxOD-L) Test oil (B) Engine stan dard parts
Nozzle & holder AssÕy
Injection pipe(ID x L)
-
¯2.0 x ¯6.0-840 mm
ISO4113
Temperature: 40 ± 5 ¡C
65.10101-7075A (DOOWON)
Nozzle (¯1.0)
65.10101-7076A (LUCAS)
Opening pressure: 120 kg/cm2
65.10301-6301
¯2.0 x 500 mm
INJECTION SYSTEM Plunger diameter
¯10
Plunger spring
k=7.25 kg/mm
Delivery valve spring
k=0.48 kg/mm
Damping valve spring
k=0.182 kg/mm
4.4¡/600 ~ 1,125 rpm
Timer spring
TIMER SYSTEM Timer advance ELFFO characteristic
ELFFN/L/E 4.4¡/600 ~ 1,200 rpm
Advance angle/Piston stroke
ELFFO
k=2,05 kg/mm
ELFFN/L/E
k=1.9 kg/mm
ELFFO
k=0.03 kg/mm
1¡/0.82
GOVERNOR SYSTEM Governor
ELFFO
k=0.104 kg/mm
spring
ELFFN/L/E k=0.122 kg/mm
Idle spring constant I
Idle spring constant II ELFFN/L/E
k=0.23 kg/mm
FUEL CUT MAGNET VALVE Rated voltage
12 V
Power consumption
16 W
Starting voltage
bellow 6.5 V
Holding voltage
above 2.5V
Opening voltage
0.5 V
at Full load
bellow 3.0kg
CONTROL LEVER REACTION FORCE at Idle
2.4 Liter (DC24)
above 0.3kg
71
Fuel System
6) Injection pump calibration (DC24 : ELFFO) (1) Governor adjustment Pump speed (rpm)
Average quantity Max. various between cylinder (mm3/stroke) (mm3/stroke)
500
(41.0 ± 2.0)
900
41.0 ± 1.0
1125
(41.0 ± 1.0)
Governing
1285
9.0 ± 3.0
Idling
425
7.5 ± 2.0
Start (idling)
100
(60.0 ± 20)
Full load
3.0
2.0
Adjust Remark
✻
Full load
✻
Governing
✻
Idling
(2) Timer and pump adjustment Pump speed (rpm)
Pressure of pump camber (kg/cm2)
Timer stroke (mm)
700
(3.4 ± 0.3)
(0.6 ± 0.4)
900
4.0 ± 0.2
1.8 ± 0.4
1125
(4.7 ± 0.3)
3.4 ± 0.4
Adjust
Remark Check point
✻
Adjust of pump and timer Check point
7) Injection pump calibration (DC24 : ELFFN / L / E) (1) Governor adjustment
Pump speed (rpm)
Average quantity (mm3/stroke)
500
(34.5 ± 2.0)
900
35.5 ± 1.0
1200
(36.0 ± 1.0)
Governing
1320
8.5 ± 3.0
Idling
425
7.5 ± 2.0
Start (idling)
100
(60.0 ± 20)
Full load
Max. various between cylinder (mm3/stroke)
Adjust Adjust
Remark
3.0
✻
Full load
✻
Governing
✻
Idling
2.0
(2) Timer and pump adjustment Pump speed (rpm)
Pressure of pump camber (kg/cm2)
Timer stroke (mm)
700
(3.2 ± 0.3)
(0.4 ± 0.4)
900
3.8 ± 0.2
1.3 ± 0.4
1200
(4.6 ± 0.3)
3.4 ± 0.4
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
72
Adjust
Remark Check point
✻
Adjust of pump and timer Check point Lubricating System
7.3.2. In-line Injection pump (ELFFA / FFD / FFI / FFJ) 1) Injection pump assÕy - Fuel injection pump - Governor - Timer - Feed pump 2) Nozzle & holder assÕy : =Nozzle & holder assÕy : Nozzle ass`y =Nozzle & holder assÕy Nozzle assÕy 3) Injection pipe: 4) Injection order: 5) Injection timing: (A) Test condition for injection pump
65.11101 - 7289 (101441 - 9830 ZEXEL) 101044 - 9160 (NP - PES4A65C312LS2000) 105419 - 2610 (NP - EP/RSV200 - 1600A021A301) 105621 - 0370 (NP - EP/SCD500 - 1750A6LN106) 105200 - 6450 (NP - FP/KS - A) ALTERNATIVE 65.10101 - 7075A (DOOWON) 65.10102 - 6012 (105000 - 1740) 65.10101 - 7076A (LUCAS) 65.10102 - 6030 (9135 - 173) 65.10301 - 6172 1-3-4-2 BTDC 13 ± 1¡
Nozzle
105780-0000
Opening pressure: 175 kg/cm2
Nozzle & holder AssÕy
105780-8140
-
Injection pipe(IDxOD-L)
(B) Engine standard parts
-
¯6.0 x ¯2.0 - 600 mm
Test oil
ISO4113
Temperature: 40 ± 5 ¡C
Nozzle & holder AssÕy
65.10101-7075A (DOOWON)
Nozzle (¯1.0)
65.10101-7076A (LUCAS)
Opening pressure: 120 kg/cm2
65.10301-6172
¯2.0 x 334 mm
Injection pipe(ID x L) Rack diagram and setting valve at each point Check Rack Point position
Pump speed
(mm)
(rpm)
(A) Test condition for inj. pump
(B) Engine standard parts
(mmHg)
A
12.5
750
37 ± 1.6
-
-
B
12.0
1200
38.5 ± 1.0
-
-
C
8.2
350
8 ± 1.1
-
-
18+30 RACK CAP:APPROX15.0
Injection Q`ty on RIG (mm3 / 1,000st)
Press.
A 12.2 12.0 11.2
0
C
0.5 +0.1
8.2 6.9
B
1325 +10 350 (1000) 1:00 1200+90 -10 (1160)
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
73
Lubricating System
8. Intake and Exhaust System 8.1. Intake Manifold Intake manifold Check intake manifold head side for flatness. Limit
0.4 mm
EA0M8006
Reassemble To reassemble, follow the disassembly procedure in reverse.
8.2. Exhaust Manifold Inspection and repair Make necessary correction or parts replacement if wear, damage or any other abnormal conditions are found through inspection. Limit
0.4 mm
Check manifold head side for flatness
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
74
Lubricating System
9. Special Tool List No.
Part No.
1
EF.122-254
Oil seal insert assÕy (Front)
2
EF.122-256
Oil seal insert assÕy (Rear)
3
EF.122-252
Pilot bearing puller
4
EF.122-250
Pilot bearing punch
5
EF.122-249
Valve spring press
6
EF.122-264
Crank gear punch
7
EF.122-177
Valve stem seal punch
8
EU.2-0525
Cylinder pressure tester adapter
9
EF.122-266
Piston sleeve
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
Figure
75
Tool Name
Lubricating System
No.
Part No.
10
EF.122-260
Cylinder liner insert
11
EF.122-258
Cylinder liner puller
12
EU.2-0131
Valve clearance adjust assÕy
13
60.99901-0027
Feeler gauge
14
T7610001E
Snap ring plier
15
T7621010E
Piston ring plier
DC24 (2.4 Liter)
Figure
76
Tool Name
Lubricating System
Appendix - Engine Assembly(ELFFO)
SB2007E01 M a y. 1 9 9 8
Service Manual Delce Remy CS-121 Series Alternators
Important Safety Information Most accidents involving product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly. Read and understand all safety precautions and warnings before operating or performing lubrication, maintenance and repair on this product. Basic safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the Service or Technical Manual. Additional safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the owner/operation/maintenance publication. Specific safety warnings for all these publications are provided in the description of operations where hazards exist. WARNING labels have also been put on the product to provide instructions and to identify specific hazards. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or other persons. Warnings in this publication and on the product labels are identified by the following symbol.
WARNING Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death. Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information. Operations that may cause product damage are identified by NOTICE labels on the product and in this publication. DAEWOO cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the product are therefore not all inclusive. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not specifically recommended by DAEWOO is used, you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures you choose. The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information available at the time it was written. The specifications, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can affect the service given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before starting any job. DAEWOO dealers have the most current information available.
1
Index Specifications Alternator................................................................. 5
Systems Operation Alternator................................................................. 6 CS-121 Alternator Operation ........................... 6 Alternator Components ............................ 7 Alternator Operation Schematic ............... 9 Introduction ...................................................... 6
Testing And Adjusting Alternator ............................................................... 11 Alternator Output Test ............................ 11 Machine Test .......................................... 11 Troubleshooting..................................................... 10 Troubleshooting Problem List ................ 10 Troubleshooting Problems ..................... 10
Delco Remy Alternators
3
Index
Specifications Alternator DELCO REMY ALTERNATOR COVERAGE CHART DAEWOO Delco Remy Series Voltage Part No. Part No. 8C5510
1101291
CS-121
BAT
12V
IDAS012B
CS-121 Alternator End View
ALTERNATOR SPECIFICATIONS DAEWOO Part No. Delco Remy Series Voltage Rating Polarity Rotation Test Speed Rated Output (Cold) Output Voltage
2 IDAS011B
Rotor Field Winding Resistance [At 27C(80¡F)] Field Current [At 14.0V or 27.5V and 27C(80¡F)] Stator Winding Resistance Turn On Speed (Max.) Slip Rings (3) : Maximum Runout (TIR) Minimum Diameter Brush Length (Measured On Longest Side) : New Minimum Pulley Nut (2) Torque
CS-121 Alternator Cross-Sectional View
Thru Bolt (1) Torque Terminal Torques : Bat Gnd
Delco Remy Alernators
5
8C5510 CS-121 12V Neg. Gnd. CW 6500 rpm 61A 14.0L0.5V -
100 L 7 N I m (75 L lb I ft) 3.6 L 0.8 N I m (32 L 7 lb I in) -
Specifications
Systems Operation The alternator converts mechanical and magnetic energy to alternating current (AC) and voltage. This process is done by rotating a direct current (DC) electromagnetic field (rotor) inside a three phase stator. The alternating current and voltage (generated by the stator) are changed to direct current by a three phase, full wave rectifier system using six silicone rectifier diodes. This alternator does not have a diode trio. A solid state regulator is installed in the back of the alternator. Two brushes conduct current through two slip rings to the field coil on the rotor.
Alternator Introduction The CS-121 Delco Remy Alternators have three phase, full-wave, rectified output.
CS-121 Alternator Operation
There is also a capacitor mounted in the back of the alternator. The capacitor protects the rectifier from high voltages. It also suppresses electrical noise through a radio, if equipped. The alternator is connected to the battery through terminal ÒLÓ and the ignition or key start switch for alternator turn-on. Therefore, alternator excitation occurs when the switch is turned on.
IDAS001C
Delco Remy CS-121 Alternator
The alternator is an electrical and mechanical component driven by belt rotation from the engine. It is used to charge the storage battery during engine operation. This alternator is cooled by two fans that are a part of the alternator. The external fan is mounted behind the pulley. The fan pulls air through holes in the back of the alternator. The air exits the front of the alternator, cooling it in the process. The internal fan is mounted on the rotor. This fan pulls air through the holes in the back of the alternator to cool the rectifier bridge and regulator. The air exits the front of the alternator.
Delco Remy Alternators
6
Systems Operation
Alternator Components 2
1
2
3
4
5
9
6 7 10
IDAS002C
Alternator Components-Inside View of Rear Frame (2) Rear frame. (7) Brush holder. (9) Regulator. (10) Rectifier.
7 The major components of the alternator are stator (4), rotor (3), rectifier (10), regulator (9), brush holder (7) and frames (2) and (5). The CS-121 alternators feature a high ampere output per pound of weight, with a totally new and different regulator. A diode trio is not used. A delta wound stator, rectifier bridge, rotor with slip rings and brushes are electrically similar to the SI series. alternators. The CS stands for Charging System. The 121 denotes the outside diameter in millimeters of the stator laminations. This series of alternators has two fans for cooling the alternator.
8 IDAS013B
Alternator Components-Cross-Sectional View (1) Slip rings. (2) Rear frame. (3) Rotor. (4) Stator. (5) Drive end frame. (6) External fan. (7) Brush holder. (8) Internal fan.
4
IDAS014B
Stator (4) Stator.
Stator (4) consists of a stator core and coils. As the rotor turns, its varying magnetic field causes the stator coil to produce three phase alternating current (AC).
Delco Remy Alternators
7
Systems Operation
1
10
3
IDAS003C
8
Rotor (1) Slip rings. (3) Rotor. (8) Internal fan.
Rotor (3) consists of a core, coils and slip rings (1). The rotor provides the magnetic field between the rotor field winding and the stator. Slip rings (1) provide the surfaces for brush contact. Internal fan (8) pulls air through the rear frame to cool the rectifier bridge and regulator.
IDAS016B
Rectifier (10) Rectifier.
Rectifier (10) contains three positive (+) and three negative (-) diodes to form the full wave rectifier bridge which is connected to the stator. Rectifier (10) changes or rectifies three phase AC to DC.
11
9
IDAS015B
7
Brush Holder (7) Brush holder. (11) Brushes.
Brush holder (7) contains two brushes (11). They contact the two rotating slip rings on the rotor. Current flows to the rotor coil through the brushes and slip rings. There is one positive (+) and one negative (-) brush. The brush material is copper graphite.
IDAS017B
Regulator (9) Regulator.
Regulator (9) controls alternator output. Most regulators limit the alternator voltage to a preset value by controlling the field current. It operates electronically to alternately "turn off" and "turn on" the voltage across the field winding. This regulator switches the field current on and off at fixed frequency of about 400 cycles per second. By varying the on-off time, the correct average field current for proper system voltage control is obtained. The regulator is mounted in the back of the alternator.
Delco Remy Alternators
8
Systems Operation
Alternator Operation Schematic
The field current is sufficient to cause the alternator to turn on when the engine is started. At engine idle speeds, voltage induced in the stator will cause the stator to supply field current and also output voltage and current at the Bat terminal for the vehicle electrical system.
The integral charging system schematic and explanation that follow indicate the terminals and basic circuitry for the CS-121 series alternator.
SWITCH
INDICATOR LAMP
On some models, a resistor is used in parallel with the indicator lamp. This feature insures alternator turn-on in the event the lamp burns out. The zener diodes in the rectifier bridge protect the system against high voltages in the stator.
BATTERY
RESISTOR
The regulator switches the field voltage on and off at a fixed frequency of about 400 cycles per second. Voltage control is obtained by varying the "on-off" time of the field current. Thus, at low speeds, the field may be turned on 90 percent of the time and off 10 percent of the time. This results in a relatively high average field current, which, when combined with the low alternator speed, produces the desired system voltage.
BAT P
L
I
S
As alternator speed increases, less field current is needed to generate the desired system voltage. The duty cycle changes to reduce the average field current. For example, at high engine speeds, the regulator may be on only 10 percent of the time and off 90 percent of the time. This duty cycle will change as operating factors change to provide just the right amount of voltage.
TR1 REGULATOR
FIELD RECTIFIER BRIDGE
Most regulators are temperature compensated to provide the maximum voltage needed for battery charging. As the temperature increases, the voltage setting will decrease. Under cold weather conditions, the regulator will operate at a higher voltage setting to provide the higher voltage required by the battery for charging under these conditions.
STATOR
IDAS018B
The regulator circuitry is designed to perform a special function in the charging system called Load Response Control. Without this function, a change in engine speed may occur at low engine speeds when an electrical load is added to the system. This can happen when the engine is low idle and a fan blower is turned on.
CS-121 Integral Charging System Schematic
When the switch is closed, the indicator lamp turns on and a voltage is applied to the regulator at the "L" terminal to cause transistor TR1 to rapidly "turn on" and "turn off". The transistor will be turned on about 30 percent of the time and turned off 70 percent of the time. The battery will supply field current which will flow into the alternator output or Bat terminal and then through TR1 and the field coil to ground. Field current does not flow through the indicator lamp.
Delco Remy Alternators
Load Response Control Causes the field current and the alternator output current to increase gradually. This avoids changes in engine speed. Instead of instantly supplying the added amperes needed to operate the blower motor, the alternator provides these added amperes over a period of a few seconds. At first, the battery supplies the added load, which is then gradually transferred to the alternator.
9
Systems Operation
Problem 2: Alternator Charge Rate Is Low Or Not Regular
Testing And Adjusting
Probable Cause:
Troubleshooting
1. Loose Drive Belt For Alternator: Adjust the alternator drive belt. 2. Loose Alternator Drive Pulley: Check the pulley for wear. If it is worn, install a new pulley. Tighten the pulley nut to the correct torque shown in Specifications.
Troubleshooting can be difficult. On the page that follows is a list of possible problems. To make a repair to a problem, make reference to the probable cause. This list of problems and probable causes will only give an indication of where a possible problem can be and what repairs are needed. Sometimes more or other repair work is needed beyond the recommendations in the list. Remember that a problem is not normally caused by one part, but by the relation of one part with other parts. This list cannot give all possible problems and probable causes. The serviceman must find the problem and its source, then make the necessary repairs.
5. Rectifier Is Defective: Replace the rectifier.
Troubleshooting Problem List
6. Brushes Are Worn Or Dirty: Install a new brush holder.
1. Alternator Does Not Charge.
Problem 3: Alternator Charges Too Much
2. Alternator Charge Rate Is Low Or Not Regular.
Probable Cause:
3. Alternator Charges Too Much.
1. Alternator Or Regulator Has Loose Connections: Tighten all connections to alternator or regulator.
3. Charging Or Ground Return Circuit Or Battery Connections Defective: Inspect all cables and connections. Clean and tighten all connections. Replace defective parts. 4. Regulator Is Defective: Replace the regulator.
4. Alternator Is Noisy.
2. Regulator Is Defective: Install a new regulator.
Troubleshooting Problems
Problem 4: Alternator Is Noisy
Problem 1: Alternator Does Not Charge
Probable Cause:
Probable Cause:
1. Drive Belt For Alternator Is Worn Or Defective: Install a new drive belt for the alternator.
1. Loose Drive Belt For Alternator : Adjust the alternator drive belt.
2. Loose Alternator Drive Pulley: Check the pulley for wear. If it is worn, install a new pulley. Tighten the pulley nut to the correct torque shown in Specifications.
2. Loose Alternator Drive Pulley : Check the pulley for wear. If it is worn, install a new pulley. Tighten the pulley nut to the correct torque shown in Specifications.
3. Drive Belt And Drive Pulley For Alternator Are Not In Alignment: Make an adjustment to put the drive belt and drive pulley in correct alignment.
3. Charging Or Ground Return Circuit Or Battery Connection Are Defective: Inspect all cables and connections. Clean and tighten all connections. Replace defective parts.
4. Alternator Bearings Are Worn: Install new bearings in the alternator.
4. Rotor Field Winding Or Regulator Is Defective: Install a new rotor or regulator.
Delco Remy Alternators
10
Testing and Adjusting
Alternator Alternator Output Test NOTE: If the CS-121 alternator fails this test, it must be replaced. It is only serviced as a complete unit.
Tools Needed Digital Multimeter or Equivalent AC/DC Clamp-On Ammeter
1 1
Machine Test 1. Put the multimeter positive (+) lead on the Bat terminal of the alternator. Put the negative (-) lead on the ground terminal or the frame of the alternator. Put the clamp-on ammeter around the positive output wire of the alternator. 2. Turn off all electrical accessories. With the fuel off, crank the engine for 30 seconds. Wait two minutes to let the starter cool. If the system appears to be up to specifications, crank the engine again for 30 seconds. NOTE: Cranking the engine for 30 seconds partially discharges the batteries in order to do a charging test. If the battery is already low in charge, skip this step. Jump-start engine or charge as required. 3. Start the engine and run at approximately 1/2 throttle. 4. Immediately check output current. This initial charging current should be equal to or greater than the full output current shown below: 5. Within approximately 10 minutes at 1/2 throttle (possible longer, depending upon battery size, condition and alternator rating), the alternator output voltage should be as follows to indicate the alternator is performing within spec. See the Fault Conditions And Possible Causes Chart. 12V System ................................. 14.0L0.5V 6. The charging current during this period should taper off the less than approximately 10 Amps, depending again upon battery and alternator capacities. See the Fault Conditions And Possible Causes Chart.
Delco Remy Alternators
11
Testing and Adjusting
FAULT CONDITIONS AND POSSIBLE CAUSES CHART Current At Start-Up
Voltage After About 10 Min. Is Below Spec.
Voltage After About 10 Min. Is In Spec.
Below Specification.
Repair alternator (defective regulator, open stator phase, and/or rectifier). Check ignition or key start switch circuit.*
Reached Specification and then tapered off.
Repair alternator (defective regulator).
Turn on all accessories. If voltage drops below spec., repair alternator (open rectifier and/or stator phase). Alternator and battery in spec. Turn on all accessories to verify. Voltage must stay in spec. Alternator in spec. Check battery.
Exceeds Specification Check battery. and stays high.
Voltage After About 10 Min. Is Above Spec. -
Repair alternator (shorted regulator). Repair alternator (shorted regulator). Also check battery for possible damage.
* Some models that have the CS-121 alternator do not have a resistor in the ignition of key start switch circuit, if the indicator lamp is burned out, the alternator cannot turn on. Also, if a machine is jump started because the battery is too low, the alternator may not have any output. This is because the battery may be too low to send current to the alternator. The alternator needs current to start the charging process.
Delco Remy Alternators
12
Testing and Adjusting
SB4050E00 Oct. 2000
Service Manual CS-105D Series Alternator
Important Safety Information Most accidents involving product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly. Read and understand all safety precautions and warnings before operating or performing lubrication, maintenance and repair on this product. Basic safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the Service or Technical Manual. Additional safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the owner/operation/maintenance publication. Specific safety warnings for all these publications are provided in the description of operations where hazards exist. WARNING labels have also been put on the product to provide instructions and to identify specific hazards. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or other persons. Warnings in this publication and on the product labels are identified by the following symbol.
WARNING Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death. Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information. Operations that may cause product damage are identified by NOTICE labels on the product and in this publication. DAEWOO cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the product are therefore not all inclusive. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not specifically recommended by DAEWOO is used, you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures you choose. The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information available at the time it was written. The specifications, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can affect the service given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before starting any job. DAEWOO dealers have the most current information available.
1
Index Specifications Alternator................................................................. 5
Systems Operation Alternator................................................................. 6 CS-105D Alternator Operation......................... 6 Alternator Components ............................ 7 Alternator Operation Schematic ............... 9 Introduction ...................................................... 6
Testing And Adjusting Alternator ............................................................... 11 Alternator Output Test ............................ 11 Machine Test .......................................... 11 Troubleshooting..................................................... 10 Troubleshooting Problem List ................ 10 Troubleshooting Problems ..................... 10
CS-105D Alternator
3
Index
Specifications Alternator DELCO REMY ALTERNATOR COVERAGE CHART DAEWOO Supplier Series Voltage Part No. Part No. A274017
219299
CS-105D
12V
CS-105D Alternator End View
ALTERNATOR SPECIFICATIONS DAEWOO Part No. Series Voltage Rating Polarity Rotation Test Speed Rated Output (Cold) Output Voltage Rotor Field Winding Resistance [At 27¡C(80¡F)] Field Current [At 14.0V or 27.5V and 27¡C(80¡F)] Stator Winding Resistance Turn On Speed (Max.) Slip Rings (3) : Maximum Runout (TIR) Minimum Diameter Brush Length (Measured On Longest Side) : New Minimum Pulley Nut (2) Torque
CS-105D Alternator View
5
2.97 ~ 3.05 OHMS 0.08 17.0 L 0.3 mm
Thru Bolt (1) Torque
100 L 10 N I m (900 L 90 lb I in) -
Terminal Torques : Bat
10 L 1.0 N I m (90 L 10 lb I in)
Gnd
CS-105D Alternator
A274017 CS-105D 12V Neg. Gnd. CW 6500 rpm 50A 14.5 L 0.3V
-
Specifications
Systems Operation The alternator converts mechanical and magnetic energy to alternating current (AC) and voltage. This process is done by rotating a direct current (DC) electromagnetic field (rotor) inside a three phase stator. The alternating current and voltage (generated by the stator) are changed to direct current by a three phase, full wave rectifier system using six silicone rectifier diodes. This alternator does not have a diode trio. A solid state regulator is installed in the back of the alternator. Two brushes conduct current through two slip rings to the field coil on the rotor.
Alternator Introduction The CS-105D Alternators have three phase, full-wave, rectified output.
CS-105D Alternator Operation
There is also a capacitor mounted in the back of the alternator. The capacitor protects the rectifier from high voltages. It also suppresses electrical noise through a radio, if equipped. The alternator is connected to the battery through terminal ÒLÓ and the ignition or key start switch for alternator turn-on. Therefore, alternator excitation occurs when the switch is turned on.
CS-105D Alternator
The alternator is an electrical and mechanical component driven by belt rotation from the engine. It is used to charge the storage battery during engine operation. This alternator is cooled by two fans that are a part of the alternator. The external fan is mounted behind the pulley. The fan pulls air through holes in the back of the alternator. The air exits the front of the alternator, cooling it in the process. The internal fan is mounted on the rotor. This fan pulls air through the holes in the back of the alternator to cool the rectifier bridge and regulator. The air exits the front of the alternator.
CS-105D Alternator
6
Systems Operation
Alternator Components 10 7
2 9
P0004349
Alternator Components-Inside View of Rear Frame (2) Rear frame. (7) Brush holder. (9) Regulator. (10) Rectifier.
The major components of the alternator are stator (4), rotor (3), rectifier (10), regulator (9), brush holder (7) and frames (2) and (5). The CS-105D alternators feature a high ampere output per pound of weight, with a totally new and different regulator. A diode trio is not used. A delta wound stator, rectifier bridge, rotor with slip rings and brushes are electrically similar to the SI series. alternators. The CS stands for Charging System. The 105 denotes the outside diameter in millimeters of the stator laminations. This series of alternators has two fans for cooling the alternator.
Alternator Components-Cross-Sectional View (1) Slip rings. (2) Rear frame. (3) Rotor. (4) Stator. (5) Drive end frame. (6) External fan. (7) Brush holder. (8) Internal fan.
4
IDAS014B
Stator (4) Stator.
Stator (4) consists of a stator core and coils. As the rotor turns, its varying magnetic field causes the stator coil to produce three phase alternating current (AC).
CS-105D Alternator
7
Systems Operation
8
10 1 3
P0004350
P0004349
Rotor (1) Slip rings. (3) Rotor. (8) Internal fan.
Rectifier (10) Rectifier.
Rotor (3) consists of a core, coils and slip rings (1). The rotor provides the magnetic field between the rotor field winding and the stator. Slip rings (1) provide the surfaces for brush contact. Internal fan (8) pulls air through the rear frame to cool the rectifier bridge and regulator.
Rectifier (10) contains three positive (+) and three negative (-) diodes to form the full wave rectifier bridge which is connected to the stator. Rectifier (10) changes or rectifies three phase AC to DC.
9
7
P0004349
Regulator (9) Regulator.
Regulator (9) controls alternator output. Most regulators limit the alternator voltage to a preset value by controlling the field current. It operates electronically to alternately "turn off" and "turn on" the voltage across the field winding. This regulator switches the field current on and off at fixed frequency of about 400 cycles per second. By varying the on-off time, the correct average field current for proper system voltage control is obtained. The regulator is mounted in the back of the alternator.
11 IDAS015B
Brush Holder (7) Brush holder. (11) Brushes.
Brush holder (7) contains two brushes (11). They contact the two rotating slip rings on the rotor. Current flows to the rotor coil through the brushes and slip rings. There is one positive (+) and one negative (-) brush. The brush material is copper graphite.
CS-105D Alternator
8
Systems Operation
Alternator Operation Schematic The field current is sufficient to cause the alternator to turn on when the engine is started. At engine idle speeds, voltage induced in the stator will cause the stator to supply field current and also output voltage and current at the Bat terminal for the vehicle electrical system.
The integral charging system schematic and explanation that follow indicate the terminals and basic circuitry for the CS-105D series alternator.
On some models, a resistor is used in parallel with the indicator lamp. This feature insures alternator turn-on in the event the lamp burns out. The zener diodes in the rectifier bridge protect the system against high voltages in the stator. The regulator switches the field voltage on and off at a fixed frequency of about 400 cycles per second. Voltage control is obtained by varying the "on-off" time of the field current. Thus, at low speeds, the field may be turned on 90 percent of the time and off 10 percent of the time. This results in a relatively high average field current, which, when combined with the low alternator speed, produces the desired system voltage. As alternator speed increases, less field current is needed to generate the desired system voltage. The duty cycle changes to reduce the average field current. For example, at high engine speeds, the regulator may be on only 10 percent of the time and off 90 percent of the time. This duty cycle will change as operating factors change to provide just the right amount of voltage.
CS-105D Integral Charging System Schematic
When the switch is closed, the indicator lamp turns on and a voltage is applied to the regulator at the "L" terminal to cause transistor to rapidly "turn on" and "turn off". The transistor will be turned on about 30 percent of the time and turned off 70 percent of the time. The battery will supply field current which will flow into the alternator output or Bat terminal and then through transistor and the field coil to ground. Field current does not flow through the indicator lamp.
CS-105D Alternator
Most regulators are temperature compensated to provide the maximum voltage needed for battery charging. As the temperature increases, the voltage setting will decrease. Under cold weather conditions, the regulator will operate at a higher voltage setting to provide the higher voltage required by the battery for charging under these conditions.
9
Systems Operation
Problem 2: Alternator Charge Rate Is Low Or Not Regular
Testing And Adjusting
Probable Cause:
Troubleshooting
1. Loose Drive Belt For Alternator: Adjust the alternator drive belt. 2. Loose Alternator Drive Pulley: Check the pulley for wear. If it is worn, install a new pulley. Tighten the pulley nut to the correct torque shown in Specifications.
Troubleshooting can be difficult. On the page that follows is a list of possible problems. To make a repair to a problem, make reference to the probable cause. This list of problems and probable causes will only give an indication of where a possible problem can be and what repairs are needed. Sometimes more or other repair work is needed beyond the recommendations in the list. Remember that a problem is not normally caused by one part, but by the relation of one part with other parts. This list cannot give all possible problems and probable causes. The serviceman must find the problem and its source, then make the necessary repairs.
5. Rectifier Is Defective: Replace the rectifier.
Troubleshooting Problem List
6. Brushes Are Worn Or Dirty: Install a new brush holder.
1. Alternator Does Not Charge.
Problem 3: Alternator Charges Too Much
2. Alternator Charge Rate Is Low Or Not Regular.
Probable Cause:
3. Alternator Charges Too Much.
1. Alternator Or Regulator Has Loose Connections: Tighten all connections to alternator or regulator.
3. Charging Or Ground Return Circuit Or Battery Connections Defective: Inspect all cables and connections. Clean and tighten all connections. Replace defective parts. 4. Regulator Is Defective: Replace the regulator.
4. Alternator Is Noisy.
2. Regulator Is Defective: Install a new regulator.
Troubleshooting Problems
Problem 4: Alternator Is Noisy
Problem 1: Alternator Does Not Charge
Probable Cause:
Probable Cause:
1. Drive Belt For Alternator Is Worn Or Defective: Install a new drive belt for the alternator.
1. Loose Drive Belt For Alternator : Adjust the alternator drive belt.
2. Loose Alternator Drive Pulley: Check the pulley for wear. If it is worn, install a new pulley. Tighten the pulley nut to the correct torque shown in Specifications.
2. Loose Alternator Drive Pulley : Check the pulley for wear. If it is worn, install a new pulley. Tighten the pulley nut to the correct torque shown in Specifications.
3. Drive Belt And Drive Pulley For Alternator Are Not In Alignment: Make an adjustment to put the drive belt and drive pulley in correct alignment.
3. Charging Or Ground Return Circuit Or Battery Connection Are Defective: Inspect all cables and connections. Clean and tighten all connections. Replace defective parts.
4. Alternator Bearings Are Worn: Install new bearings in the alternator.
4. Rotor Field Winding Or Regulator Is Defective: Install a new rotor or regulator.
CS-105D Alternator
10
Testing and Adjusting
Alternator Alternator Output Test NOTE: If the CS-105D alternator fails this test, it must be replaced. It is only serviced as a complete unit.
Tools Needed Digital Multimeter or Equivalent AC/DC Clamp-On Ammeter
1 1
Machine Test 1. Put the multimeter positive (+) lead on the Bat terminal of the alternator. Put the negative (-) lead on the ground terminal or the frame of the alternator. Put the clamp-on ammeter around the positive output wire of the alternator. 2. Turn off all electrical accessories. With the fuel off, crank the engine for 30 seconds. Wait two minutes to let the starter cool. If the system appears to be up to specifications, crank the engine again for 30 seconds. NOTE: Cranking the engine for 30 seconds partially discharges the batteries in order to do a charging test. If the battery is already low in charge, skip this step. Jump-start engine or charge as required. 3. Start the engine and run at approximately 1/2 throttle. 4. Immediately check output current. This initial charging current should be equal to or greater than the full output current shown below: 5. Within approximately 10 minutes at 1/2 throttle (possible longer, depending upon battery size, condition and alternator rating), the alternator output voltage should be as follows to indicate the alternator is performing within spec. See the Fault Conditions And Possible Causes Chart. 12V System ................................. 14.5 ± 0.3V 6. The charging current during this period should taper off the less than approximately 10 Amps, depending again upon battery and alternator capacities. See the Fault Conditions And Possible Causes Chart.
CS-105D Alternator
11
Testing and Adjusting
FAULT CONDITIONS AND POSSIBLE CAUSES CHART Current At Start-Up
Voltage After About 10 Min. Is Below Spec.
Voltage After About 10 Min. Is In Spec.
Below Specification.
Repair alternator (defective regulator, open stator phase, and/or rectifier). Check ignition or key start switch circuit.*
Reached Specification and then tapered off.
Repair alternator (defective regulator).
Turn on all accessories. If voltage drops below spec., repair alternator (open rectifier and/or stator phase). Alternator and battery in spec. Turn on all accessories to verify. Voltage must stay in spec. Alternator in spec. Check battery.
Exceeds Specification Check battery. and stays high.
Voltage After About 10 Min. Is Above Spec. -
Repair alternator (shorted regulator). Repair alternator (shorted regulator). Also check battery for possible damage.
* Some models that have the CS-105D alternator do not have a resistor in the ignition of key start switch circuit, if the indicator lamp is burned out, the alternator cannot turn on. Also, if a machine is jump started because the battery is too low, the alternator may not have any output. This is because the battery may be too low to send current to the alternator. The alternator needs current to start the charging process.
CS-105D Alternator
12
Testing and Adjusting
SB4018E01 Oct. 2000
Specifications Systems Operation Testing & Adjusting Disassembly & Assembly Lift Trucks Power Train D15S-2, D18S-2, D20SC-2 G15S-2, G18S-2, G20SC-2
Important Safety Information Most accidents involving product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly. Read and understand all safety precautions and warnings before operating or performing lubrication, maintenance and repair on this product. Basic safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the Service or Technical Manual. Additional safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the owner/operation/maintenance publication. Specific safety warnings for all these publications are provided in the description of operations where hazards exist. WARNING labels have also been put on the product to provide instructions and to identify specific hazards. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or other persons. Warnings in this publication and on the product labels are identified by the following symbol.
WARNING Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death. Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information. Operations that may cause product damage are identified by NOTICE labels on the product and in this publication. DAEWOO cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the product are therefore not all inclusive. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not specifically recommended by DAEWOO is used, you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures you choose. The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information available at the time it was written. The specifications, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can affect the service given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before starting any job. DAEWOO dealers have the most current information available.
1
Index Specifications Final Drives And Wheels .......................................... 7 Torque Converter ...................................................... 5 Transmission............................................................. 6 Wheel Bearing Adjustment ....................................... 8
Systems Operation Differential And Drive Axles .................................... 22 General Information .................................................. 9 Torque Converter .................................................... 10 Transmission General Information.......................... 12 Transmission Hydraulic System ............................. 14 Transmission Power Flows..................................... 13
Testing and Adjusting Transmission Tests And Adjustments ..................... 26 Converter Stall Test ............................................27 Differential Bearing And Gear Clearance Adjustment..........................................................30 Electric Control System Tests.............................32 Pinion Bearing Adjustment .................................29 Pinion Depth Check............................................30 Pinion Installation ...............................................29 Transmission Adjustments..................................28 Transmission Pressure Tests..............................26 Troubleshooting ...................................................... 23 Differential.......................................................... 25 Checks During Operation .................................. 23 Visual Checks .................................................... 23
Disassembly & Assembly Clutch Pack Assembly .............................................43 Control Valve ...........................................................52 Differential................................................................49 Drive Axle.................................................................54 Special Service Tools and Jigs ................................58 Torque Converter .....................................................35 Transmission............................................................40
Power Train
3
Index
Specifications Torque Converter 2 1
(1) Torque for bolts (plate to torque converter) ......................................22 L 3 N¥m (16 L 2 lb¥ft) (2) Torque for bolts (plate to flywheel) ..................................... 28 L 7 N¥m (20 L 5 lb¥ft)
Power Train
5
Specifications
Transmission
6
1
5
2
4
6
3
(1) Torque for bolts sealing cap ............98 to 123 N¥m (72 to 90 lb¥ft)
(7) Ring gear runout measured on back ........................................0.1 mm (0.0039 in) T.I.R
(2) Torque for bolts that hold plate (Apply Loctite No. 271).........27 to 34 N¥m (20 to 25 lb¥ft)
(8) Backlash of spiral bevel gear.......0.15 to 0.23 mm (0.006 to 0.009 in)
(3) Torque for Lock nut .......................314 to 441 N¥m (231 to 325 lb¥ft)
(9) Rolling torque of ring gear for complete assembly ..............................31 to 57 N¥m (276 to 507 lb¥in)
(4) Torque for bolts that hold case cover (Apply Loctite No. 271).........25 to 39 N¥m (19 to 28 lb¥ft)
See Transaxle in Testing and adjusting for the complete adjustment procedure.
(5) Torque for bolts that hold cap (Apply Loctite No. 271) ............147 to 167 N¥m (109 to 123 lb¥ft) (6) Torque for bolts that hold case........98 to 123 N¥m (72 to 90 lb¥ft)
Power Train
6
Specifications
Final Drives And Wheels 4 3
2
1
(1) Torque for bolts that hold brake assembly to drive axle arm ............... 176 L 29 N¥m (130 L 21 lb¥ft) (2) Tighten nut slowly until torque required to turn bearings is .... 2.45 L 0.49 N¥m (1.80 L 0.35 lb¥ft) (3) Torque for bolts that hold drive shaft to hub ................................ 71 L 12 N¥m (52.5 L 9 lb¥ft) (4) Torque for drive wheel mounting nuts ..............................176 L 20 N¥m (130 L 14 lb¥ft)
Power Train
7
Specifications
Wheel Bearing Adjustment
1
2
3
(1) Hub. (2) Bolt. (3) Nut.
(1) Tighten nut (3) slowly until torque required to turn bearings is 2.5 N¥m (1.8 lb¥ft), while hub (1) is turned to put the bearings in position. (2) Tighten the bolts to hold the nut in position. (Apply Loctite No. 272) Tightening Torque..........................7.9 to 11.7 N¥m (5.8 to 8.6 lb¥ft)
Power Train
8
Specifications
Systems Operation General Information
4
3
2
5
1
(1) Engine. (2) Torque Converter. (3) Power Shift Transmission. (4) Drive Axle. (5) Adapter Housing.
The basic components of the power train are engine (1), torque converter (2), power shift transmission (3), drive axle (4), adapter housing (5) and the wheels.
Power from either clutch pack is sent through an output gear and a spiral bevel gear to the differential. The differential sends power out through the axles to the final drives and wheels.
A transaxle contains a power shift transmission and a differential. Two axle shafts connect the differential to two final drives. The drive wheels are mounted to the final drives. Power from the engine flywheel goes from the torque converter to the input shaft of the transaxle. The transaxle has two hydraulically operated clutch packs that are spring released. The transaxle has one speed in forward and one speed in reverse.
Power Train
9
Systems Operation
Torque Converter
AA BB CC
2 1
3
4 6
5
Torque Converter AA. Components Turned by Engine Flywheel. BB. Components Turned by (AA). CC. Stationary components. (1) Transmission Input Shaft. (2) Pump Stator Support. (3) Stator. (4) Turbine. (5) Housing. (6) Impeller.
The torque converter hydraulically connects the engine to the transaxle. There is no direct mechanical connection between the engine and the transaxle. When the machine works against a load, the torque converter can multiply the torque from the engine and send a higher torque to the transaxle.
Power Train
The torque converter has four main parts : housing (5), impeller (6), turbine (4), and stator (3). The housing and impeller turn with the engine. The turbine turns transmission input shaft (1), and the stator is held stationary.
10
Systems Operation
The transmission pump sends oil through a small passage in stator support (2). The oil flows around the shaft of the stator support and into the converter. Impeller (6) turns with housing (5) at engine speed and makes the oil go toward the outside of the impeller, around the inside of the housing and against the blades of the turbine. The oil that hits the turbine blades causes turbine (4) and the transmission input shaft to turn. This gives power to the transaxle. After the oil hits the turbine blades, it goes toward the inside of the turbine. As the oil goes from the turbine, it moves in a direction opposite to the direction of impeller rotation. When the truck is moved at low speed, the torque converter one-way clutch holds the stator in place. The stator causes the oil to change direction and go back into the impeller in the direction of rotation. This gives an increase to the impeller oil output which gives an increase to the torque output from the turbine.
Power Train
11
Systems Operation
Transmission General Information
6
5
4
3
11 12
13 14
1
2
7
8 9
10
(1) Toruqe Converter. (2) Input Shaft. (3) Clutch Cylinder. (4) Piston (Forward). (5) Forward Clutch Pack. (6) Gear (forward). (7) Gear. (8) Gear. (9) Output Gear. (10) Pinion. (11) Piston (Reverse). (12) Reverse Clutch Pack. (13) Gear (Reverse). (14) Pump.
The transaxle is a single speed transaxle. The forward and reverse directional controls are changed manually. Power is transmitted by constant mesh helical gears and multiple-disc clutch packs. In reverse, power is sent from a gear at the reverse clutch to an output gear which is on the pinion shaft. In forward, power is sent from a gear at the forward clutch to idle gear and then to the output gear. The transmission control valve is installed on the top of the transmission housing. A hydraulic shiftting is done by the manually operated directional valve.
Power Train
12
Systems Operation
Transmission Power Flows Neutral With the control for the transaxle in neutral position and the engine running, power will flow from the engine flywheel through torque converter (1) to the input shaft (2) that turns the clutch cylinder (3) in the same direction as the flywheel. Forward clutch pack (5) and reverse clutch pack (12) are installed in the clutch cylinder (3). As long as the transaxle is in neutral position, clutch packs (5) or (12) cannot connect gear (6) or reverse gear (13). The power cannot flow through the output shaft and into the differential.
Forward Direction When the transaxle is in forward, forward clutch pack (5) is applied and locks gear (6) to gear (7). Power will flow from input shaft (1) through forward clutch pack (5), gear (6) gear (7), gear (8) and out put gear (9). Output gear (9) is splined to pinion (10). Pinion (10) is in mesh with gear which is mounted to differential. Power will flow through pinion (10), gear, differential to the final drives and wheels. The truck will move in a forward direction.
Reverse Direction When the transaxle is in reverse, reverse clutch pack (12) is applied and locks gear (13) to gear (9). Power will flow from input shaft (1) through clutch cylinder (3), reverse clutch pack (12), gear (13) and output gear (9). Output gear (9) is splined to pinion (10). Pinion (10) is in mesh with gear which is mounted to differential. Power will flow through pinion (10), gear, differential to the final drives and wheels. The truck will move in a reverse direction.
Power Train
13
Systems Operation
Hydraulic System
Power Train
14
Systems Operation
Transmission Hydraulic System (1) Pump. (2) Main Relief Valve. (3) Inching Valve. (4) Modulating Valve. (5) Directional Valve. (6) Forward Clutch. (7) Reverse Clutch. (8) Torque Convertor. (9) TC-in Relief Valve. (10) TC-out Relief Valve. (11) Oil Cooler. (12) Cooler Relief Valve. (13) Reservoir. (14) Suction Filter. (15) Shuttle Valve. (16) Solenoid Valve-Forward. (17) Solenoid Valve-Reverse.
Main Relief Valve Oil from the pump flows to the main relief valve (2). The regulator valve relieves the oil pressure produced by the charging pump of the torque convertor at the specified pressure to protect the valve and torque convertor oil cooler.
Transmission Hydraulic System
Inching valve (3)
The hydraulic circuit consists of the torque converter charging pump which generates the hydraulic pressure, and the control valve which transmits the hydraulic pressure to the multi-disc clutch inside the transmission. The control valve contains a built-in modulating valve which reduces the shock when the F-R lever is moved.
Oil from the pump also goes to inching valve (3) which modulates the pressure being fed to the selector valve (4). As the inching valve moves out, pressure will drop. When completely out, clutch feed pressure will drop to zero. Through the use of the inching valve, the lift truck can move slowly while the engine is at higher speeds. This lets the operator move the lift truck slowly up to a load while the mast is raised rapidly.
Oil Flow 1. When the engine starts, the charging pump is driven and the oil inside the transmission case is pumped through a strainer.
Directional Valve The selector valve controls oil flow to the forward and reverse clutch packs.
2. The oil from the pump (1) passes through the main relief valve (2) and goes towards the inlet port of the torque converter (8). The main relief valve (2) acts to raise the pressure of the oil until it is high enough to operate the clutch and to send the oil to the control valve. The oil pressure at the inlet port of the torque converter (8) has no relation with the pressure of the relief valve.
Modulating Valve The modulating valve is a device to modulate the fluid. It reduces the shock when gear shift lever is operated, when the truck starts suddenly or when inching operations are being used.
3. The torque converter inlet port relief valve (9) is located at the torque converter inlet, and acts to suppress the increased pressure in the torque converter to approx. max. 686 Kpa (99psi). 4. The oil which was circulated through the torque converter (8) is drained from the torque converter outlet port and flows to the torque converter outlet relief valve (10). The torque converter outlet relief valve acts to raise the pressure within the torque converter approx. min. 196 Kpa (28 psi) and it is regularly opened after the engine is started. 5. The oil pressure passing through the torque converter outlet port goes towards the torque converter cooler (11), lubricates all parts, then returns to the transmission case.
Power Train
15
Systems Operation
Hydraulic System
Power Train
Neutral Position 7
4
PUMP PRESSURE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE
15
CLUTCH PRESSURE CONVERTER INLET PRESSURE CONVERTTER OUTLET & LUBRICATION PRESSURE
5 17
16
6
10 16
3 1
2
P
12 14
T S
13
Systems Operation
11 9
8 10
Transmission Hydraulic System (1) Pump. (2) Main Relief Valve. (3) Inching Valve. (4) Modulating Valve. (5) Directional Valve. (6) Forward Clutch. (7) Reverse Clutch. (8) Torque Convertor. (9) TC-in Relief Valve. (10) TC-out Relief Valve. (11) Oil Cooler. (12) Cooler Relief Valve. (13) Reservoir. (14) Suction Filter. (15) Shuttle Valve. (16) Solenoid Valve-Forward. (17) Solenoid Valve-Reverse.
Neutral Position When the transaxle is in NEUTRAL position, with the engine running, oil is pulled from reservoir (13), through the suction filter (14) to pump (1). From there, pump oil flows through passage to main relief valve (2). Oil from main relief valve (2) flows through passage to torque converter (8). Oil from torque converter (8) flows to oil cooler (11). Oil then flows through passage to cool and lubricate the clutches and shaft bearings. Pump pressure is directed to the inching valve (3) which reduces pressure prior to being fed to the modulating valve (4). With the inching valve not in use (inching pedal up), oil from inching valve (3) flows through passage to modulating valve (4). In NEUTRAL position, pump oil flow is blocked at the directional valve (5). Oil cannot flow through passage to the reverse clutch (7). Likewise, oil cannot flow through passage to the forward clutch (6).
Power Train
17
Systems Operation
Hydraulic System
Power Train
Forward Position 4
7 PUMP PRESSURE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE
15
CLUTCH PRESSURE CONVERTER INLET PRESSURE CONVERTTER OUTLET & LUBRICATION PRESSURE
5 17
16
6
18
3 1
2
T
P
12 14
S
13 Systems Operation
11 9
8 10
Transmission Hydraulic System (1) Pump. (2) Main Relief Valve. (3) Inching Valve. (4) Modulating Valve. (5) Directional Valve. (6) Forward Clutch. (7) Reverse Clutch. (8) Torque Convertor. (9) TC-in Relief Valve. (10) TC-out Relief Valve. (11) Oil Cooler. (12) Cooler Relief Valve. (13) Reservoir. (14) Suction Filter. (15) Shuttle Valve. (16) Solenoid Valve-Forward. (17) Solenoid Valve-Reverse.
Forward Direction When the transaxle is in FORWARD, the oil from the reservoir, through the pump, torque converter and oil cooler circuits will be the same as explained in NEUTRAL position. Oil will flow from the inching valve through passage and modulating valve (4) to directional valve (5). In FORWARD, the directional spool in the directional valve is in the position shown. Oil flows through passage to forward clutch (6). Forward clutch (6) will fill with pump oil.
Power Train
19
Systems Operation
7
4
PUMP PRESSURE ACCUMULATOR PRESSURE
15
CLUTCH PRESSURE CONVERTER INLET PRESSURE CONVERTTER OUTLET & LUBRICATION PRESSURE
5 17
16
6
20
3 1
2
T
P
12 14
S
13 Systems Operation
11 9
8 10
Hydraulic System
Power Train
Reverse Position
Transmission Hydraulic System (1) Pump. (2) Main Relief Valve. (3) Inching Valve. (4) Modulating Valve. (5) Directional Valve. (6) Forward Clutch. (7) Reverse Clutch. (8) Torque Convertor. (9) TC-in Relief Valve. (10) TC-out Relief Valve. (11) Oil Cooler. (12) Cooler Relief Valve. (13) Reservoir. (14) Suction Filter. (15) Shuttle Valve. (16) Solenoid Valve-Forward. (17) Solenoid Valve-Reverse.
Reverse Direction When the transaxle is in REVERSE, the oil from the reservoir, through the pump, torque converter and oil cooler circuits will be the same as explained in NEUTRAL position. Oil will flow from the inching valve through passage and modulating valve (4) to directional valve (5). In REVERSE, the directional spool in the directional valve is in the position shown. Oil flows through passage to reverse clutch (7). Reverse clutch (7) will fill with pump oil.
Power Train
21
Systems Operation
Differential And Drive Axles
1 3
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
(1) Spider. (2) Pinion. (3) Gear. (4) Differential case. (5) Nut. (6) Tube. (7) Drum. (8) Hub. (9) Shaft.
The location of the differential is in the front of the lift truck. The differential is a part of the transaxle. It is a single reduction unit with a differential drive gear (3) fastened on the differential case (4).
During a turn, the force (traction) that is on the drive wheels is different. These different forces are also felt on opposite sides of the differential and cause pinions (2) to turn. The rotation of pinions (2) stops or slows the inside wheel and lets the outside wheel go faster. This moves the machine through a turn under full power.
The differential is used to send the power from the transaxle to the wheels. When one wheel turns slower than the other, the differential lets the inside wheel stop or turn slower in relation to the outside wheel.
The differential gets lubrication from oil thrown about inside the housing.
Case (4) has four differential pinion (2). The pinions are engaged with two side gears. The side gears are splined to the axle shafts (9). When the lift truck moves in a forward direction and there is same traction under each wheel, there is also the same torque on each axle and pinions (2) are stopped. This gives the same effect as if both wheels were on the same axle.
Power Train
The differential turns axle shaft (9). Tube (6) which is pressed into axle housing is used as a support for hub (8). The hub (8) and bearings are turned by axle shaft (9) through a direct connection between the hub and axle shaft. The drive wheel is fastened to hub (8) and turns with the hub.
22
Systems Operation
Checks During Operation
Testing And Adjusting Troubleshooting
NOTICE Before these checks are started, fill the transmission with oil to the correct level.
Troubleshooting can be difficult. A list of possible problems and corrections is on the pages that follow. This list of problems and corrections will only give an indication of where a problem can be and what repairs are needed. Normally, more or other repair work is needed beyond the recommendations on the list. Remember that a problem is not necessarily caused only by one part, but by the relation of one part with other parts. This list can not give all possible problems and corrections. The serviceman must find the problem and its source, then make the necessary repairs. Always make visual checks first. Check the operation of the machine and then check with instruments.
Power Shift Transmission With the engine running and brakes on, move the selector lever to all positions. The detents must be felt in each position. Operate the machine in each direction. Make note of all noises that are not normal and find their sources. If the operation is not correct, make reference to the CHECK LIST DURING OPERATION for ÒproblemsÓ and Òprobable causesÓ. Check List During Operation
WARNING Problem: Transmission does not operate in either direction or does not engage (slips) in all directions.
When testing and adjusting the power train, move the machine to an area clear of obstructions, and with safe ventilation for the exhaust. When drive wheels are off the ground for testing, keep away from wheels that are in rotation.
Probable Cause : 1. Low oil pressure caused by : a. Low oil level. b. Inching control valve linkage loose, broken or adjustment not correct. c. Failure of the oil pump. d. Leakage inside the transmission. e. Pressure regulator valve stuck.
Visual Checks 1. Check the oil level in the transmission. 2. Check all oil lines, hoses and connections for leaks and damage. Look for oil on the ground under the machine.
2. Mechanical failure in transmission.
3. Move the lever for the direction control to REVERSE and FORWARD positions. The detents must be felt in each position.
3. Failure of the bevel pinion or the ring gear.
4. Check the oil in the transmission for loose particles.
Probable Cause:
Problem: Transmission does not shift.
1. Low oil pressure.
a. Bronze-colored particles give an indication of a clutch failure. b. Shiny steel particles in the filter give an indication of a pump failure. c. Rubber particles give an indication of a seal failure or hose failure.
2. Pressure regulator valve will not move (stuck). 3. Control linkage worn, broken or adjustment is not correct.
If you find metal or rubber particles, all components of the hydraulic and lubrication systems must be washed clean. Do not use parts with damage. Use new parts.
Power Train
23
Testing And Adjusting
Problem: Transmission gets hot.
Problem: Transmission operates in reverse only.
Probable cause:
Probable Cause :
1. Restriction in cooling lines.
1. Discs and plates have too much wear in forward direction clutch.
2. Oil level too high or too low. 2. Leakage at the seals. 3. Core of the oil cooler not completely open. 3. Forward clutch components have damage. 4. Air mixed in the oil. Air leak on intake side of pump.
4. Control linkage has damage or wrong adjustment. Problem: Low stall speed.
5. Low oil flow through converter because converter regulator valve is stuck.
Probable Cause: 6. Wrong application for vehicle, (loads are too heavy for the lift truck).
1. Engine performance is not correct. 2. The one-way clutch of the torque converter does not hold.
Problem: Loss of power during or after a shift. Probable Cause:
Problem: High stall speed in both directions. 1. Cold oil. Probable Cause: 2. Low converter pressure. 1. Low oil level. Problem: Pump noise not normal. 2. Air in the oil. Probable Cause: 3. Clutches slip(clutch plates slide in relation to one another).
1. A loud sound at short time periods gives an indication that foreign material is in the transmission hydraulic system.
4. Torque converter failure. Problem: High stall speed in one direction.
2. A constant loud noise is an indication of pump failure.
Probable Cause: Problem: Noise in the transmission which is not normal.
1. There is a leak in that clutch circuit.
Probable Cause:
2. There is a failure of the clutch in that direction.
1. Parts have wear or have damage.
Problem: Clutch engagement is slow and makes rough shifts.
Problem: Transmission operates in forward only. Probable Cause: Probable Cause: 1. Shift linkage adjustment is not correct. 1. Discs and plates have too much wear in reverse direction clutch.
2. Inching valve adjustment is not correct. 3. Inching valve is not completely closed.
2. Leakage at the seals.
4. Low main pressure. 3. Reverse clutch components have damage. 5. Internal oil leaks. 4. Control linkage has damage or wrong adjustment.
Power Train
6. Valve spool springs are weak or have damage.
24
Testing And Adjusting
Problem: Low pressure to FORWARD and REVERSE clutches.
Problem: Transmission does not operate in forward or reverse.
Probable Cause:
Probable Cause:
1. Inching valve stuck.
1. Clutch discs and plates have too much wear.
2. Linkage adjustment is not correct.
2. Leakage at the seals.
Problem: Pressure to one clutch is low.
3. Forward and reverse clutch components have damage.
Probable Cause: 1. Clutch piston seal alignment is not correct, oil leaks through.
Differential Problem: Constant noise in differential.
2. Seal rings on shaft or on clutch piston seals are broken or worn.
Probable Cause: Problem: Low converter pressure. 1. Lubricant not to the specific level. Probable Cause: 2. Wrong type of lubricant. 1. Low oil level. 3. Wheel bearings out of adjustment or have a defect.
2. Pressure regulator valve is not free.
4. Drive gear and pinion not in adjustment for correct tooth contact.
3. Transmission pump is worn. 4. Converter regulator valve stuck open. Problem: Low main pressure.
5. Teeth of drive gear and pinion have damage or wear.
Probable Cause:
6. Too much or too little pinion to gear backlash.
1. Low oil level.
7. Loose or worn pinion bearings.
2. Pressure regulator valve is not free.
8. Loose or worn side bearings.
3. Transmission pump is worn.
Problem: Noise at different intervals.
4. Inner oil leakage.
Probable Cause:
Problem: Clutch pressure and main pressure are high.
1. Ring gear does not run even. a. Bolts on drive gear not tightened correctly. b. Drive gear has a defect(warped).
Probable Cause:
2. Loose or broken differential bearings.
1. Pressure regulator valve is not free. Problem: Vehicle operates in one direction and creeps in that direction in neutral. Engine stalls when shifted to the other direction. Probable Cause: 1. Failure of direction clutch in the direction the vehicle will move. Power Train
25
Testing And Adjusting
Problem: Noise on turns only. Probable Cause:
Transmission Tests And Adjustments
1. Differential pinion gears too tight on the spider or the pinion shaft.
Transmission Pressure Tests
2. Side gears tight in differential case.
WARNING
3. Differential pinion or side gears have a defect.
To prevent personal injury, when the transaxle is tested, move the truck to a clear area, that is level. Keep all other personnel away from the lift truck. Use lifting equipment or a safe method to lift the front of the lift truck until the drive wheels are off the floor. Put wood blocks or jack stands of the correct capacity under it to hold it in this position while pressure tests are performed.
4. Thrust washers worn or have damage. 5. Too much clearance (backlash) between side gears and pinions. Problem: Leakage of lubricant. Probable Cause: 1. Loss through axle shafts.
When the transmission tests are made, the transmission oil must be at the correct level. The pressures give in the chart are taken with the transmission oil temperature at 49û to 71ûC (120û to 160ûF). If the oil temperature is lower than 49 ûC (120ûF) the oil pressure will be higher than that shown. If the oil temperature is higher than 71ûC (160ûF), the pressure will be lower than that shown.
a. Lubricant above specification level. b. Wrong kind of lubricant. c. Restriction of axle housing breather. d. Axle shaft oil seal installed wrong or has damage. 2. Loss at pinion shaft.
Raise the front of the lift truck off the floor. Put wood blocks or jack stands of the correct capacity under it to hold it in this position while pressure tests are performed.
a. Lubricant above specification level. b. Wrong kind of lubricant. c. Restriction of axle housing breather. d. Pinion oil seal worn or not installed correctly. Problem: Drive wheels do not turn
WARNING
Probable Cause:
Before any pressure tap plugs or connections are removed, the engine must be stopped with the transaxle controls in NEUTRAL. This will release hydraulic pressure in the transaxle.
1. Broken axle shaft. a. Loose wheel bearings. b. Axle shaft too short. c. Loose flange studs or nuts. d. Bent housing.
For more identification of Transmission problems, the pressures that follow can be checked.
2. Side gear or differential pinion broken.
a. Pump pressure in neutral. b. Forward clutch pressure in forward. c. Reverse clutch pressure in reverse. d. Converter charge pressure in neutral. e. Converter outlet or cooler inlet pressure in neutral.
3. Differential pinion shaft or spider broken.
Power Train
26
Testing And Adjusting
Most problems in the hydraulic circuit can normally be found when the pump pressure is checked. If more information is necessary, gauges can be installed at each pressure tap location. Locations of the pressure taps and procedures for testing are given as follows. If any of the pressures are not correct, refer to Troubleshooting For Problems and Probable Causes.
Converter Stall Test The converter stall test is a test to check engine power. It can also be used to locate a problem in the transmission when the condition of the engine is known. An engine which does not have correct performance will give an indication of a stall speed that is not correct. If the engine performance is correct, and the stall speed is not correct, the problem in the converter or transmission can be found with this test.
1. Be sure the transmission control adjustments are correct before tests are made. 2. Install a tachometer on the engine to show engine speed during the test.
The test checks the maximum RPM that the engine, at full throttle, can turn the converter with the turbine held stationary. To hold the converter turbine, engage the brakes with the transmission in either FORWARD or REVERSE.
3. Put a thermistor probe in place of the dipstick in the transaxle oil reservoir. 4. Remove each of the following pressure tap plugs in the order shown and install the pressure gauge. After the pressure check is done, remove the gauge and install the plug again.
The drive wheels must not turn during the stall test. Put a heavy load on the forks and put the truck in position against a solid object that will not move (such as a loading dock). Engage the parking brake. When the tests are made, the wheel brakes must be engaged with the left foot ; the accelerator pedal can be operated with the right foot. Make sure that the transmission oil is at the correct temperature for operation before tests are made. Check the high idle setting before the stall test is made. The high idles on G420 engine and DC24 engine are as follows. G420 LPG engine DC24 Diesel engine
2
3
4
: 2450 ± 50 : 2520 ± 50
WARNING
1
Make tests in a clear level area only. There must be one operator. Keep all other personnel away from the lift truck. Check the operation of the brakes before the tests are made.
5 1. Start the engine and move the control lever to the FORWARD direction.
Pressure Tap Location (1) Converter Out Pressure Tap. (2) Main Line Pressure Tap. (3) Reverse Clutch Pressure Tap. (4) Forward Clutch Pressure Tap. (5) Lubrication Pressure Tap.
2. Engage the wheel brakes and push the accelerator pedal down completely. Read the RPM on the tachometer, then release the accelerator pedal.
Transmission Pressure Chart Engine RPM
Unit
Clutch Pressure
T/C out
Low idle Kpa(psi) 1060~1550 (154~226) 220-390(32-56) 1800
Kpa(psi) 1140~1550 (165~226) 220-390(32-56)
Power Train
27
Testing And Adjusting
Transmission Adjustments NOTICE To make sure that the transmission oil does not get hot, do not hold the transmission in a stall condition for more than ten seconds. After the transmission is stalled, put the controls in NEUTRAL and run the engine at 1200 to 1500 RPM to cool the oil.
3
3. Repeat the procedure above for the REVERSE direction. 4. The stall speeds for G420 engine and DC24 engine are as follows. G420 LPG engine DC24 diesel engine
1 2
: 1725 ± 75 : 1950 ± 75 (1) Pinion Gear. (2) Shim Pack. (3) Bearing Cone.
Stall speeds that are low are an indication that the engine performance is not correct or the one-way clutch of the torque converter does not hold in reverse direction. If the one-way clutch has a defect, the stall speed will probably be more than 800 RPM low.
Spiral bevel gears and pinions are available in sets that are machined for each other and must never by installed separately. The same identification mark of letters and numbers is put on both the pinion and gear. The spiral bevel gear is marked on the flat face, the pinion is marked on the diameter behind the teeth. Make sure they have the same identification mark before going to the procedures that follow.
The stall speed must be the same in FORWARD and REVERSE. If the stall speed is high in FORWARD and REVERSE, check the followings :
The distance from the centerline of spial bevel gear to the flat end of pinion (1) is 128.25 mm (5.049 in). The end of pinion has a mark of mounting distance for adjusting the depth of the pinion in the carrier. The dimension is controlled by shim pack (2) behind inner bearing cone (3).
a. Check for air in the oil. b. Check the torque converter and the clutch pressures according to Transaxle Pressure Tests in Testing And Adjusting. c. If clutch pressure is correct, make an inspection of the clutch assembly for that direction for possible damage to clutch components.
Power Train
If a pinion has a mark of 128.15, it needs 0.10mm more shims than a pinion with mark of 128.25.
28
Testing And Adjusting
Pinion Installation
Pinion Bearing Adjustment
3 7 510
B
9
5
2
X
3
1 4 1 2
4
8
6
11
A
(1) Pinion Gear. (2) Shim Pack. (3) Bearing Cone. (4) Bearing Cup. (5) Bearing Cone. (6) Bearing Cup. (7) Race B. (8) Race A. (9) Shim Pack. (10) Race. (11) Nut.
Pinion Bearing Preload Adjustment. (1) Bearing. (2) Bearing. (3) Race B. (4) Race A. (5) Shim Pack.
1. Install the taper roller bearing (1), race A (4) race B (3), taper roller bearing (2) on the Jig A and Jig B.
1. If the original spiral bevel gear and pinion set is to be used again, measure old shim pack (2) and make a new shim pack with the same thickness. If a new spiral bevel gear and pinion set is used, then the original shim pack should be changed. If three or more shims are used, the smaller shims are to be put in the center of the shim pack.
2. Tighten the Jig B to a torque of 15 to 20 N¥m (11 to 15 lb¥ft). 3. Measure the distance X from the surface of the Jig A to the outer race of the taper roller bearing (2).
EXAMPLE: If the old pinion has a mark of (128.15) and the new pinion has a mark of (128.00) add 0.15 mm (.006 in) shims to the original shim thickness.
4. The theoretical dimension of X is 55.95. If the measured distance of X is 55.85, then the deviation (D) of the bearing is (D) = 55.95 - 55.85 = 0.1 mm
2. Install bearing cone (3) on pinion shaft (1) with new shim pack (2) behind bearing cone (3).
5. Install the shim behind the bearing cone (1).
3. Put the taper roller bearing assembly (3~9) and race (10) into the pinion shaft. Tighten nut (11) to a torque of 32 to 45 N¥m (23 to 33 lb¥ft) while rotating the pinion.
6. Tighten the Jig B to torque of 15 to 20 N¥m (11 to 15 lb¥ft) again. 7. Check the rolling torque of the taper roller bearing. It must be 2 to 5 N¥m (1.5 to 3.7 lb¥ft). If the torque is not correct, add or remove shim (5) until it is correct.
4. If the taper roller bearing and/or housing is changed, then see pinion Depth check and pinion bearing adjustment.
Power Train
29
Testing And Adjusting
Pinion Depth Check
Differential Bearing and Gear Clearance (Backlash) Adjustments Tools Needed: Dial Indicator Group (A)
X Z
D
H
5 Y
C
4 3 1
2
Pinion Depth Check. (1) Housing.
1
1. Put the Jig C and Jig D on the housing as shown.
7 6
2. Measure the gap (X) between Jig C and Jig D. If the height of (Y) is 135.5mm, and distance of (Z) is 48.5 mm, the gap (X) is. gap (X) = 184.5 - (Z + Y) = 0.5 mm
Backlash Adjustment (1) Bearing Cone. (2) Spiral Bevel Gear. (3) Bolt. (4) Bearing Cup. (5) Bearing Cap. (6) Locknut. (7) Plate.
3. Read the mark of the pinion shaft. If the mark is 128.00 mm, then the deviation of the mounting distance (M) is deviation (M) = 128.25 - 128.00 = 0.25 mm.
1. Install bearing cones (1) on the differential case.
4. Required shim of the pinion is as follows. Required shim (S) = gap (X) + deviation (D) + deviation (M)
2. Put spiral bevel gear (2) on the differential case and tighten eight bolts (3) to a torque of 110 L 5 N¥m (82 L 5 lb¥ft). Put bearing cups (4) on bearing cones (1). 3. Put the carrier assembly in position in the housing assembly. Install bearing caps (5) and four bolts. Tighten bolts to a torque 150 L 15 N¥m (113 L 12 lb¥ft.) 4. Install locknuts (6). Use tooling (A) to check gear clearance (backlash) between spiral bevel gear (2) and pinion. Adjust locknuts (6) until the clearance is 0.18 to 0.23 mm (.007 to .009 in.). Adjust the clearance by turning one locknut (6) in and the other locknut out an equal amount.
Power Train
30
Testing And Adjusting
5. Tighten locknuts (8) equally to preload the differential case bearings. Proper bearing preload of the gear is 3.1 to 4.8 N¥m (27 to 42 lb¥in). 6. Measure backlash again. After backlash and preload are correct, install a plate (7) into each locknut to hold them in position.
IBPS012B Short Heel Contact Setting
c. If spiral pinion shaft is too far away from spiral bevel gear, short toe contact will be the result as shown. The teeth of pinion will be in contact with toe ends of convex faces (part that makes a curve toward the outside), and top edge of heel end of concave faces (part that makes a curve toward the inside). To correct this, add shims under pinion bearing cone. After this is done, check gear clearance (backlash) and tooth contact again.
IBPS010B Correct Tooth Contact Setting.
7. Check the tooth contact pattern as follows. Check the tooth contact setting between the spiral bevel gear and pinion after the gear clearance (backlash) and bearing preload adjustments have been made as follows.
d. If spiral pinion shaft is too near to center of spiral bevel gear, short heel contact will be the result as shown. The teeth of pinion will be in contact with the toe ends of concave faces (part that makes a curve toward the inside) and the heel ends of convex faces (part that makes a curve toward the outside). To correct this, remove shims from under pinion bearing cone. After this is done, check gear clearance(backlash) and tooth contact again.
a. Put a small amount of Prussian blue, red lead or paint on the spiral bevel gear teeth. Turn the pinion in both directions and check the marks made on the hypoid gear teeth.
NOTE : Several adjustments of both pinion and bevel gear can be needed before correct tooth contact and gear clearance (backlash) is made. Always remember that a change to gear clearance (backlash) will also change the tooth contact. Therefore, be sure gear clearance (backlash) is in correct adjustment before tooth contact is checked. e. After gear clearance (backlash) and tooth contact are correct, remove extra Prussian blue, red lead or paint from spiral bevel gear and pinion.
IBPS011B Short Toe Contact Setting
b. With no load, correct tooth contact setting will be as shown. The area of contact starts near the toe of the gear and goes 50 to 70% up the length of the tooth. With this setting, when a load is put on the gear, the load will be over the correct area of the teeth.
Power Train
31
Testing And Adjusting
Power To Directional Control Switch Check
Electric Control System Tests
1. Put the directional control lever in neutral. Remove the cover from the front side of the steering support assembly.
Tools Needed Digital Multimeter
1 2. Disconnect harness connector (2) from directional control switch connector(1).
NOTE : Refer to Schematic. Checks on the transmission directional control electrical circuit can be done with a Digital Multimeter. All voltage checks are made at the wiring harness connectors with the ignition switch ON, DO NOT start the engine. All continuity checks are done with the ignition switch OFF.
1
A beginning check of the direction control system should be performed before testing the individual components and wiring harness. When the direction solenoids are energized they become magnetized. By holding a metal screwdriver next to the solenoids it can be determined whether they are energized or not.
2
Directional Control Switch Connector (1) Directional Control Switch Connector. (2) Harness Connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON, DO NOT start the engine. Release the parking brake. Place the direction control switch in forward and check the forward solenoid for magnetism. Do the same for the reverse direction.
3. Engage the parking brake and turn the ignition switch ON, DO NOT start the engine. Put the multimeter on the 20 volt range.
¥ If the solenoids didnÕt energize begin testing the control system with step 1. ¥ If the solenoids did energize, go to step 10.
2
Power To Directional Control Switch Check (2) Harness Connector.
4. Put the (-) probe on a good ground. Put the (+) probe on socket 1 of harness connector (2). a. If the indication is battery volts, do Step 5. b. If the indication is 0 volts, check the Forward/Reverse fuse (No.3) located in the fuse box and check the connecting wires for continuity.
Power Train
32
Testing And Adjusting
Directional Control Switch Check
Transmission Control Harness Check
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and put the multimeter on the 200 ohm range. 6. Check continuity between pins 4 and 7 of connector (1) with the switch in neutral, forward and then reverse positions. There should be continuity in neutral and no continuity in forward and reverse.
3 5
a. If the above checks are correct, do Step 7. b. If any of the above checks are not correct, replace the directional control switch. Transmission Control Harness. (3) Harness. (5) Connector.
9. Disconnect the connector (5) of Engine harness from the connector of transmission harness. Check continuity of socket 6, 9 of engine harness (3) from one end to the other. Repair or replace the wiring harness if there is no continuity.
1
Transmission Solenoids Visual Check 10. A visual check can be done to see if the solenoid plungers are moving.
Directional Control Switch Continuity Check (1) Directional control switch connector.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON, DO NOT start the engine. Release the parking brake.
7. Check continuity between pins 1 and 2 of connector (1) in forward and then neutral position. There should be continuity in forward and no continuity in neutral. While the continuity is checked in forward position, move the lever back and forth (but stay in forward position) to see if the resistance goes up or down. The resistance should be constant.
12. Put the directional control switch in neutral.
¥ Both solenoid plungers should be flush with the solenoid.
13. Put the directional control switch in forward and then reverse.
a. If the above checks are correct, do step 8.
¥ The plunger of the solenoid that is activated should
b. If the above checks are not correct, replace the directional control switch.
move in approximately 3.18mm(.125 in).
14. If the solenoid plungers do not move as explained in Steps 12 and 13, replace the defective solenoid.
8. Check continuity between pins 1 and 3 of connector (1) in reverse and then neutral positions. There should be continuity in reverse and no continuity in neutral. While the continuity is checked in reverse position, move the lever back and forth (but stay in reverse position) to see if the resistance goes up or down. The resistance should be constant.
15. If the solenoid plungers are good, the modulating valves could be stuck or there is mechanical failure in the transmission.
a. If the above checks are correct, do Step 9. b. If any of the above checks are not correct, replace the directional control switch. Power Train
33
Testing And Adjusting
Transmission Directional Control Schematic (1) Directional Switch Connector. (2) Connector-Instrument Harness (3) Main Connector-Instrument Harness (4) Main Connector-Engine Harness
Power Train
34
Testing And Adjusting
Disassembly & Assembly Torque Converter
3
Disassembly 1. Drain the transmission oil and disconnect the torque converter assembly (housing + torgue converter) from the transmission.
IBPD103P
4
IBPD104P
IBPD101P
4. Remove the flexible plate(2) , pilot boss (3), and O-ring (4).
2. Drain oil in the torque converter.
5
2
6 1
IBPD102P IBPD105P
3. Loosen the bolts (1).
Power Train
5. Remove the snap ring (5) and shims (6) .
35
Disassembly & Assembly
10
9
IBPD106P
IBPD109P
6. Remove the torque converter
9. Install 2 jackbolts (9) and remove the oil pump (10).
ATTENTION : Canting the torque converter can cause damage of pump oil seal. 11
12
7
IBPD110P IBPD107P
10. Install 2 jackbolts (11) and remove the stator shaft (12).
7. Check sealing ring (7) and replace if necessary.
8
IBPD108P
8. Loosen the bolts (8).
Power Train
36
Disassembly & Assembly
Assembly 13
The assembly procedure is the reverse order of removal, but requires additional care as noted below.
IBPD111P
IBPD114P
1. Apply semi-drying liquid gasket (Three Bond No. 1211 or 1104 for example) to the circumference of oil seal and install oil seal on the pump case. Put gear on the pump case. Check the gear action. If the gears do not rotate smoothly, disassemble the pump and start again.
IBPD112P
11. Remove the snap ring (13) and extract the turbine shaft.
IBPD115S
2. Make sure that the valves go back into the proper holes. Tighten plugs to a torque of 35 to 44 N¥m (26 to 32 lb¥ft)
IBPD113S
12. Remove the two plugs and then the springs and pistons. Label the two sets (the springs especially -so that they do not get confused).
Power Train
37
Disassembly & Assembly
6
IBPD116P
IBPD119P
3. Install bearing on the turbine shaft. Install snap ring.
6. Lightly grease the pump casing with lithium grease and Install pump (6).
2
1
7 3
IBPD112P
IBPD108P
4. Make sure that the sealing ring (1) is completely inside before inserting the shaft. Install terbine shaft (2) on the housing (3).
7. Tighten the bolts (7) to a torque of 19 to 24 N¥m (14 to 18 lb¥ft).
4
5
IBPD121P IBPD118P
8. Fill the oil seal lip cavity one-third to one-half full with lithium grease or coat the surface with clean transmission oil.
5. Install location bolts (4) and then put gasket (5).
Power Train
38
Disassembly & Assembly
10
8
IBPD107P
IBPD105P
9. Install sealing ring (8).
12. Install snap ring (10).
11
12
IBPD106P
IBPD104P
10. Install torque converter.
13. Assemble O-ring (11) on the pilot boss (12) and then install pilot boss on the torque converter.
9
13
14
IBPD122P IBPD108P
11. Select shim thickness to have 0.2~0.4mm (.0079~.0157 in ) of axial clearance between torque converter and turbine shaft and then install shims (9).
Power Train
14. Install the flexible plate (13) and tighten the bolts (14) to a torque of 19 to 25 N¥m (14 to 18 lb¥ft).
39
Disassembly & Assembly
2
IBPD101P
IBPD124P
15. Tighten drain plug.
3. Remove gasket (2).
16. Conndet the torque converter assembly (housing + torque converter) to the transmission.
Transmission Disassembly 1. Drain the transmission oil. IBPD125P
4. Remove the control valve assembly.
1
3
IBPD123P
2. Remove axle housing (1). Before removing axle housing, remove torque shaft, hub, brake and support arm in the axle assembly first.
IBPD126P
5. Mark differential caps for the purpose of reassembly. Loosen the bolts (3).
Power Train
40
Disassembly & Assembly
8 4
IBPD127P
IBPD130P
6. Remove differential assembly (4) from housing.
5
6
IBPD131P IBPD128P
9. Loosen bolts and remove the plate (8). Tap pinion shaft from the opposite side of pinion head and remove pinion shaft.
7. Loosen the bolts (5) and remove side cover (6) and then remove gasket.
7
IBPD132P IBPD129P
10. Loosen bolt. 8. Remove the plate (7).
Power Train
41
Disassembly & Assembly
9
12
13
IBPD133P
IBPD136P
11. Remove the sealing cap (9) by using tool.
14. Loosen the bolts (12) and remove the plate (13).
ATTENTION : pull out the cap straight without twisting it. 14
10
IBPD137P
15. Remove the spacer (14).
IBPD134P
12. Remove the snap ring (10).
11
IBPD138P
16. Remove idle shaft assembly.
IBPD135P
13. Extract the F.R clutch pack assembly (11).
Power Train
42
Disassembly & Assembly
Clutch Pack Assembly Disassembly-Forward
5 4
IBPD142P
4. Remove the ball (4) and washer (5).
1
IBPD139P
1. Remove the sealing rings (1) from the clutch shaft. 6
IBPD143P
5. Remove the forward gear (6). 2
IBPD140P 7
2. Remove spring (2).
3
IBPD144P
6. Remove snap ring (7).
IBPD141P
3. Remove the spacer (3).
Power Train
43
Disassembly & Assembly
12 8
IBPD145P
IBPD148P
7. Remove the needle bearing (8).
10. Remove the snap ring (12) while pressing the return spring on the spring retainer with a hydraulic press. 9
Disassembly-Reverse. 10
IBPD146P
8. Remove the spacer (9) and ball (10). 1
IBPD149P
11
1. Disassemble the spring (1) from the shaft.
IBPD147P 2
9. Remove plates (11) and discs.
IBPD150P
2. Remove the spacers (2).
Power Train
44
Disassembly & Assembly
3
5
8 4
IBPD151P
IBPD154P
3. Remove the spacer (3), ball (4) and washer (5).
6. Remove the snap ring (8), plates and discs. 7. Remove snap ring while pressing the return spring on the spring retainer with a hydraulic press.
6
Install the cluch pack assembly in the reverse order of removal. - Coat the ball with oil and then fix it to the hole of shaft. Match the notch of the spacer with the ball and insert.
IBPD152P
4. Remove the reverse gear (6).
IBPD139P
- Coat sealing rings with clean transmission oil. Install sealing rings. 7
- After assembling clutch pack assembly, check piston operation by air.
IBPD153P
5. Remove the washer (7).
Power Train
45
Disassembly & Assembly
Assembly-Transmission.
1
4
IBPD138P
3. Insert bush (4).
IBPD155P
1. Put the output gear (1) into the transmission housing.
2
3
IBPD157P
4. Install idle shaft bearing. IBPD156P
6
5
IBPD136P IBPD138P
5. Place the plate (5) on the shaft. Tighten bolts (6) to a torque of 27.5 to 34.0 N¥m (20.3 to 25.3 lb¥ft)
2. Fit bearing (2) on the idle shaft (3). Install the idle shaft into the transmission housing.
Power Train
46
Disassembly & Assembly
9 10
IBPD159P
IBPD162P
6. Install bearing.
7
IBPD132P IBPD135P
9. Install O-ring (9) on the sealing cap (10). Coat O-ring with rransmission oil and then insert sealing cap. Tighten the bolt.
7. Install clutch pack assembly (7) into the transmission housing.
8
IBPD163P IBPD134P
10. Apply liquid gasket to the circumference of oil seal. Mount oil seal on the housing.
8. Assemble snap ring (8).
Power Train
47
Disassembly & Assembly
IBPD164P
IBPD129P
11. Install bearing.
14. Place the plate (12). Tighten the bolts to a torque of 24.5 to 39.2 N¥m (18.1 to 28.9 lb¥ft). 11
15. Install differential assembly. Refer to Differential Assembly and Disassembly about backlash and torque value. 13
IBPD165P
12. Mount pinion shaft assembly into the housing. Place the plate (11) on the shaft. IBPD166P
16. Install the gasket (13).
IBPD130P
13. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 27.5 to 34.0 N¥m (20.3 to 25.3 lb¥ft) IBPD125P Typical Example
17. Place the control valve (14) on the top of transmission. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 27.5 to 34.0 N¥m (20.3 to 25.3 lb¥ft).
Power Train
48
Disassembly & Assembly
Differential Disassembly 5 2
1
6
7
IBPD169P
IBPD167P
1. Remove the plate (1) from the differential cap (2).
IBPD170P
3. Loosen the bolts (5) and disassemble differential assembly completely. 4. If needed, loosen the bolts (6) and disassemble ring gear (7). IBPD168P
4
2
3
IBPD126P
2. Loosen adjusting screw with special tool (Ref.No.:1) on both side. Mark differential caps (2) and housing for the purpose of reassembly. Loosen the bolts (3) and remove the differential assembly (4).
Power Train
49
Disassembly & Assembly
Assembly The assembly procedure is the reverse order of removal, but requires additional care as noted below.
2
IBPD168P
IBPD127P
1. Install differential assembly into housing.
1
IBPD173P
3. Install adjusting screws (2) Adjust gear clearance (backlash) by turning one adjusting screw in and the other screw out an equal amount. Rotate the axle drive through 100¡ and check the tooth backlash at several points of the ring gear using a dial gauge. The tooth backlash should be 0.18 to 0.23mm (0.007 to 0.009 in).
IBPD172P
2. Tighten the bolts (1) to a torque of 147 to 167 N¥m (108.8 to 123.6 lb¥ft).
Power Train
50
Disassembly & Assembly
4. Adjusting tooth contact
5. Correct tooth contact
a. Coat the tooth face of the bevel pinion lightly with red lead (minimum). b. Rotate the bevel gear forward and backward. c. Inspect the pattern left on the teeth. (Shown in diagram below.) Correct tooth contact (No load)
IBPD175P
a. Increase the shim thickness at the pinion shaft to move the pinion in direction A. The move the bevel gear away from the pinion gear in direction B. Adjust the backlash again.
REVERSE side
6
Heel
4
40
-75
%
FORWARD side
IBPD176P
Toe IBPD174P
b. Reduce the shim thickness at the pinion shaft to move the pinion in direction A. Then move the bevel gear closer to the pinion gear in direction B. Adjust the backlash again.
¥ Tooth contact should be checked with no load on the bevel pinion. The tooth contact pattern should cover about 40-75% of the lenght of the tooth, with weak contact at both ends. d. If the result of the inspection shows that the correct tooth contact is not being obtained, adjust again as follows. Adjust shims at pinion shaft Adjust backlash of bevel gear ¥The tooth contact should be correct on both the FORWARD and REVERSE side of the teeth. However, if it is impossible to adjust both sides correctly, the FORWARD side must be correct.
IBPD177P
c. Reduce the shim thickness at the pinion shaft to move the pinion in direction A. Then move the bevel gear closer to the pinion gear in direction B. Adjust the backlash again.
Power Train
51
Disassembly & Assembly
Control Valve Disassembly/ Assembly
IBPD178P
d. Increase the shim thickness at the pinion shaft to move the pinion in direction A. Then move the bevel gear away from the pinion gear in direction B. Adjust the backlash again.
P0003064
1. Dismount/mount the solenvid valves of the forward and reverse clutch.
IBPD167P
6. Tighten the bolts (3) to a torque of 7.9 to 11.7 N¥m (5.8 to 8.6 lb¥ft). Secure adjusting screw with lock plate (4).
P0003063
2. Dismount/mount the shuttle valve.
P0003062
3. Dismount/mount the screw.
Power Train
52
Disassembly & Assembly
P0003059
P0003055
4. Dismount/mount the slector valve.
7. Dismount/mount the inching valve.
P0003058
P0003054
5. Dismount/mount the accumlator varve.
8. Dismount/mount the lubrication relief valve.
P0003057
P0003053
6. Dismount/mount the cooling adapters.
9. Dismount/mount the main relief valve.
Power Train
53
Disassembly & Assembly
Drive Axle Disassembly 4
1. Drain the drive axle oil.
IBPD186P
1
Typical Example
5. Loosen lock nut and remove the plate (4). (Tool Ref. No. : 2)
IBPD183P
5
Typical Example
2. Loosen the bolts (1).
2
IBPD187P Typical Example
6. Remove bearing cone (5) from the hub.
6
IBPD184P Typical Example
3. Remove the drive shaft (2).
3
IBPD188P Typical Example
7. Remove the hub and drum (6) from the drive axle.
IBPD185P Typical Example
4. Loosen the bolts from the lock nut (3).
Power Train
54
Disassembly & Assembly
12
IBPD189P
IBPD194P Typical Example
11. Loosen the bolts (12) and remove the drive axle housing by using lifting device.
8. Remove bearing cone and cup from the hub and drum.
Assembly The assembly procedure is the reverse order of removal, but requires additional care as noted below.
7
IBPD190P
9. Remove the retainer (7) from the axle tube.
8
IBPD195P 9
1. Install bearing cup and oil seal.
IBPD191P
10. Loosen the bolts (8) and remove brake assembly (9). IBPD196P Typical Example
2. Fill 50~70% of space between bearings with Lithium grease.
Power Train
55
Disassembly & Assembly
IBPD191P
IBPD188P
3. Install brake assembly. Tighten the bolts to a torque of 147 to 205 N¥m (109 to 151 lb¥ft).
5. Coat rib of oil seal with lithium grease. Install the hub and drum. NOTE : Remove dirt or oil in the inside surface of the brake drum completely.
IBPD190P
1
IBPD200P Typical Example
6. After installing plate and lock nut, check bearing rolling torque. The torque value is 6.0 to 14.7 N¥m (4.4 to 10.8 lb¥ft).
IBPD199P
4. Install O-ring on the retainer. Insert the retainer (1) into the axle tube.
Power Train
56
Disassembly & Assembly
IBPD185P Typical Example
7. Lock the nut with the bolts. Tightening torque is 7.9 to 11.7 N¥m (5.8 to 8.6 lb¥ft).
IBPD184P Typical Example
8. Coat mating surface of hub with liquid gasket.
IBPD203P Typical Example
9. Install the drive shaft and tighten the bolts to a torque of 58.8 to 83.3 N¥m (43.4 to 61.4 lb¥ft). 10. Fill the drive axle housing with oil. NOTE : All bolts should be coated with Loctite #271 thread lock when installing.
Power Train
57
Disassembly & Assembly
Special Service Tools and Jigs Ref.No.
Tool/Jig Name
Jig A
Pinion Bearing Adjustment Jig
Illustration
* Locally Manufactured
Jig B
Pinion Bearing Adjustment Jig
* Locally Manufactured
Jig C
Pinion Depth Check Jig
* Locally Manufactured Power Train
58
Disassembly & Assembly
Ref.No.
Tool/Jig Name
Jig D
Pinion Depth Check Jig
Illustration
* Locally Manufactured
45 40
Differential Screw Installer
92
C1
1
8
5 15
-0.2
Drive Axle Hub Nut Installer
0 109 -0.5
2
55 -0.4
* Locally Manufactured
0 30 -0.8
90 +0.8 +0.4
* Locally Manufactured Power Train
59
Disassembly & Assembly
SB4019E01 Oct. 2000
Specifications Systems Operation Testing & Adjusting Lift Trucks Vehicle Systems D15S-2, D18S-2, D20SC-2 G15S-2, G18S-2, G20SC-2
Important Safety Information
Most accidents involving product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly. Read and understand all safety precautions and warnings before operating or performing lubrication, maintenance and repair on this product. Basic safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the Service or Technical Manual. Additional safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the owner/operation/maintenance publication. SpeciÞc safety warnings for all these publications are provided in the description of operations where hazards exist. WARNING labels have also been put on the product to provide instructions and to identify speciÞc hazards. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or other persons. Warnings in this publication and on the product labels are identiÞed by the following symbol.
WARNING Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death. Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information. Operations that may cause product damage are identiÞed by NOTICE labels on the product and in this publication. DAEWOO cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the product are therefore not all inclusive. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not speciÞcally recommended by DAEWOO is used, you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures you choose. The information, speciÞcations, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information available at the time it was written. The speciÞcations, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can affect the service given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before starting any job. DAEWOO dealers have the most current information available.
1
Index SpeciÞcations Brakes......................................................................12 Forward And Reverse Control Group ......................12 Hydraulic Control Valve .............................................5 Hydraulic Pump .........................................................6 Lift Cylinders ..............................................................7 Priority Valve............................................................10 Sideshift Cylinder.......................................................6 Steer Wheel Axles ...................................................12 Steering Unit ............................................................11 Steering Wheel ........................................................10
Systems Operation Brakes System.........................................................25 Control Valve ...........................................................15 Hydraulic System.....................................................13 Steering System ......................................................22 Steering Unit ............................................................23
Testing And Adjusting Brake System ..........................................................37 Brake Adjustment ...............................................37 Brake System Air Removal.................................37 Inching Pedal Adjustment ...................................40 Parking Brake Adjustment ..................................39 Parking Brake Test .............................................39 Pedal Adjustment................................................38 Hydraulic System.....................................................32 Lift Cylinders Air Removal ..................................34 Relief Valve Pressure Check ..............................32 Steering System ......................................................35 Steer Axle Stop Adjustment ................................35 Steering System Air Removal.............................35 Steering System Pressure Check ......................36 Troubleshooting .......................................................27 Brake System .....................................................31 Hydraulic System And Mast ...............................28 Performance Tests..............................................27 Steering System .................................................31 Visual Checks .....................................................27
Vehicle Systems
3
Index
SpeciÞcations Hydraulic Control Valve
3
2 1
3
Control Valve Main Relief Valve Pressure Model
D/G15S-2 D/G18S-2 D/G20SC-2
Auxiliary Relief Valve Pressure
Mast
STD FFL FFT
+ 500 - 0 kPa
+ 70 psi -0
+ 500 - 0 kPa
+ 70 psi -0
17600 19860 21550
2550 2880 3125
13790
2000
(1) Torque for nuts that hold control valve sections together .......26 to 32 N¥m (19 to 23 lb¥ft) (2) Torque for nuts that hold control valve sections together ......24 to 29 N¥m (18 to 21 lb¥ft) (3) Torque for main and auxiliary relief valve ..................................44 to 49 N¥m (32 to 36 lb¥ft)
Vehicle Systems
5
SpeciÞcations
Hydraulic Pump
Sideshift Cylinder
1
Rotation is counterclockwise when seen from drive end. Type of pump : Gear For test, use SAE 10W oil at 65¡C (150¡F) Pump output.......................19.5 cm3/rev (1.19 in3/rev)
2
EHCS003B
(1) Torque for head .............................270 L 35 N¥m (200 L 25 lb¥ft) (2) Torque for piston nut ......................260 L 25 N¥m (190 L 20 lb¥ft)
Vehicle Systems
6
SpeciÞcations
Lift Cylinders Full Free Triple Lift and Full Free Lift Primary
Standard
1 1
EHCS004B
EHCS005B
(1) Put Pipe Sealant on the last three threads of bleed screw and tighten to a torque of .......................................6 L 1 N¥m (53 L 9 lb¥in)
(1) Put Pipe Sealant on the last three threads of bearing. Put Pipe Sealant of the last three threads of bleed screw(not shown) and tighten to a torque of .............................................6 L 1 N¥m (53 L 9 lb¥in)
NOTE : All seals to be lubricated with hydraulic oil.
NOTE : All seals to be lubricated with hydraulic oil.
Vehicle Systems
7
SpeciÞcations
Full Free Lift Secondary
1
Full Free Triple Lift Secondary
1
2
2
EHCS006B
EHCS007B
(1) Put Pipe Sealant on the last three threads of bearing.
(1) Put Pipe Sealant on the last three thread of bearing.
(2) Put Pipe Sealant on the last three threads of bleed screw and tighten to a torque of .......................................6 L 1 N¥m (53 L 9 lb¥in)
(2) Put Pipe Sealant on the last three thread of bleed screw and tighten to a torque of .......................................6 L 1 N¥m (53 L 9 lb¥in)
NOTE : All seals to be lubricated with hydraulic oil.
NOTE : All seals to be lubricated with hydraulic oil.
Vehicle Systems
8
SpeciÞcations
Tilt Cylinders
1
2
3
4
Z X-closed, Y-open
IMCS003I
Tilt Angle Degrees
Cyl. Closed Ð X
Forward
Backward
mm
in
mm
in
mm
in
A251983
6¡
8¡
402.8
15.9
474.3
18.7
71.5
2.8
A251985
6¡
5¡
418.4
16.5
474.3
18.7
55.9
2.2
A251986
6¡
3¡
428.8
16.9
474.3
18.7
45.5
1.8
A251987
10¡
8¡
402.8
15.9
494.0
19.5
91.2
3.6
A251988
10¡
5¡
418.4
16.5
494.0
19.5
75.6
3.0
A251989
10¡
3¡
428.8
16.9
494.0
19.5
65.2
2.6
Tilt Group
Cyl. Open Ð Y
Stroke Ð Z
(1) Adjust pivot eye to dimension(Y) with cylinder open(extended) (2) Torque for bolt ......... 95 L 15 N¥m (70 L 10 lb¥ft) (3) With mast at tilt back position shim as required to permit no gap between eye(1) and spacer. Torque for head.... 270 L 35 N¥m (200 L 25 lb¥ft) (4) Torque for jam nut ............................. 260 L 25 N¥m (190 L 20 lb¥ft)
Vehicle Systems
9
SpeciÞcations
Steering Wheel
Priority Valve 1
Flow .......................................................Load sensing Relief valve (no adjustment) opens at: ..............................8285 L 350 kPa (1200 L 50 psi)
2
IDCS206S
(1) Torque for steering wheel nut .............80 L 6 N¥m (60 L 4 lb¥in) (2) Torque for setscrews...................2.25 L 0.25 N¥m (20 L 2 lb¥in)
Vehicle Systems
10
SpeciÞcations
Steering Unit
2
1
3 VIEW C - C TIGHTENING SEQUENCE FOR BOLTS
VIEW B - B
A
4
C
A
SECTION A - A
5
C
IDCS180S
(1) Pin(1) in the body must be aligned with internal pump gear (gerotor) (2) and drive (3) as shown. (4) Tighten bolts in sequence shown. Tighten to a Þrst torque of ...........................14.1 L 2.8 N¥m (125 L 25 lb¥in) Tighten to a Þnal torque of ...........................28.2 L 2.8 N¥m (250 L 25 lb¥in) (5) Torque for plug ......................11.3 N¥m (100 lb¥in) Plug to be ßush (even) with or below mounting surface.
Vehicle Systems
11
SpeciÞcations
Forward And Reverse Control Group 1
Brakes
2
IMCS004S
(1) Torque for bolts (four) .....................3.4 to 3.9 N¥m (30 to 34.5 lb¥in)
IMCS006S
(2) Torque for bolts (two) ......................2.8 to 3.4 N¥m (25 to 30 lb¥in)
(1) Torque for wheel cylinder bolts (not shown) .........................................8 to 12 N¥m (6 to 9 lb¥ft)
Steer Wheel Axles
(2) Brake drum inside diameter(not shown) .........................254.1 ± 0.1 mm (10.004 ± .004 in) Maximum total diameter brake drums can be machined from the original diameter ...................................................1.52 mm (.060 in)
1
2
IMCS051S
(1) Tighten nut (1) slowly to 133 N¥m (98 lb¥ft) while turning the wheel. (2) Loosen nut (1) completely, retighten nut (1) to a torque of 50 ± 5 N¥m (37 ± 4 lb¥ft). Bend lock (2) to hold nut (1) in position.
Vehicle Systems
12
SpeciÞcations
Systems Operation Hydraulic System
1
1 2
3
4 6
5 8
9
7
10 11 12
13
14
15
16
IHCS102I Basic Hydraulic Schematic With Standard Lift (1) Lift cylinders. (2) Excess ßow protector. (3) Sideshift cylinder(option). (4) Flow regulator. (5) Hydraulic control valve. (6) Tilt cylinders. (7) Relief valve (lift and tilt). (8) Relief valve (sideshift). (9) Hydraulic oil Þlter. (10) Hydraulic oil tank. (11) Priority valve. (12) Oil line. (13) Hydraulic strainer. (14) Hydraulic pump. (15) Oil line to steering unit. (16) Oil line.
The hydraulic system has hydraulic oil tank (10), which holds the oil for gear type hydraulic pump (14). Hydraulic pump (14) sends pressure oil to hydraulic and steering systems. Pump oil ßows from pump (14) to priority valve (11) where the oil ßow divides to the steering unit through line (15). Oil also ßows to hydraulic control valve (5) and back to hydraulic tank (10).
The return hydraulic oil from the cylinders ßows through hydraulic control valve (5), line (12), into Þlter (9) and hydraulic tank (10). Relief valve (7) in the control valve body will make the ßow control valve release extra pressure to the hydraulic tank when the pressure in the lift or tilt circuits goes higher than relief valve pressure shown in the control valve section of SpeciÞcations. Relief valve (8) does the same thing for the sideshift circuit when it goes higher than the auxiliary relief valve pressure shown in the control valve section of SpeciÞcations.
The control valve levers move the valve spools in control valve (5) to let the pump oil in the control valve go to lift cylinders (1) and/or (18), tilt cylinders (6) or sideshift cylinder (3).
Vehicle Systems
13
Systems Operation
17
18
1 1 2
3
4 5 6 8
7
9 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
IHCS103I Basic Hydraulic Schematic With Full Free Lift Or Full Free Triple Lift (1) Lift cylinders. (2) Excess ßow protector. (3) Sideshift cylinder(option). (4) Flow regulator. (5) Hydraulic control valve. (6) Tilt cylinders. (7) Relief valve (lift and tilt). (8) Relief valve (sideshift). (9) Hydraulic oil Þlter. (10) Hydraulic oil tank. (11) Priority valve. (12) Oil line. (13) Hydraulic strainer. (14) Hydraulic pump. (15) Oil line to steering unit. (16) Oil line. (17) Excess ßow protector. (18) Lift cylinder(primary).
The maximum speed when the lift cylinders are lowered is controlled by ßow regulator (4). Excess ßow protectors (2) and (17) will act as ßow regulator if an oil line between them and ßow regulator (4) is broken when the mast is raised or lowered. This prevents a sudden fall of the mast or carriage if an oil line is broken.
Vehicle Systems
14
Systems Operation
Control Valve Lift Valve Neutral Position
2
3
4
5
6 7
1
10 8
9
ICCS009S Control Valve for Lift (Shown In NEUTRAL Position) (1) Spool. (2) Outlet To Head End Of Lift Cylinders. (3) Load Check Valve. (4) Passage. (5) Inlet Passage For Pump Oil. (6) Chamber. (7) Passage For Return Oil. (8) Passage. (9) Chamber. (10) Spring.
Oil from pump enters the valve through a passage in the inlet section. From there it goes to both chamber (6) and chamber (9). Since spool (1) is in the NEUTRAL position, the only path the oil can take is from chamber (9) into the tilt valve. It would go out through passage (8). The mast can be stopped and held in any position when the lift control valve is in neutral. This is because the ßow to and from the cylinders is stopped by spool (1). In the NEUTRAL position, oil can not ßow from passage (4) to outlet (2) or back.
Vehicle Systems
15
Systems Operation
Lift Position
2
3
4
5
6 7
1
10 8
9
ICCS010S Control Valve for Lift (Shown In LIFT Position) (1) Spool. (2) Outlet To Head End Of Lift Cylinders. (3) Load Check Valve. (4) Passage. (5) Inlet Passage For Pump Oil. (6) Chamber. (7) Passage For Return Oil. (8) Passage. (9) Chamber. (10) Spring.
When the control lever is moved to the LIFT position, lift spool (1) is moved into the valve. Movement of spool (1) opens a path for oil to ßow from chamber (6) through load check valve (3) into passage (4). From passage (4) the oil goes to outlet (2) and then to the lift cylinders. Pressure oil to the head end of the lift cylinders moves the rod up and the mast will raise.
Vehicle Systems
16
Systems Operation
Lower Position
2
3
4
5
6 7
1
10 8
9
ICCS011S Control Valve For Lift (Shown In LOWER Postion) (1) Spool. (2) Outlet To H ead End Of Lift Cylinders. (3) Load Check Valve. (4) Passage. (5) Inlet Passage For Pump Oil. (6) Chamber. (7) Passage For Return Oil. (8) Passage. (9) Chamber. (10) Spring.
When the control lever for lift is moved to the LOWER position, lift spool (1) moves until a path is opened between outlet (2) and passage for return oil (7).
Vehicle Systems
17
Systems Operation
Tilt Neutral Position
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
13 9
10
14
16
15 11
12
ICCS012S Tilt Spool In Neutral Position (1) Spool. (2) Outlet To Rod End Of Tilt Cylinders. (3) Load Check Valve. (4) Passage. (5) Inlet Passage For Pump Oil. (6) Chamber. (7) Outlet To Head End of Tilt Cylinders. (8) Passage For Return Oil. (9) Spring. (10) Spool. (11) Passage. (12) Chamber. (13) Spring. (14) OriÞce. (15) OriÞce. (16) Passage.
Oil from lift valve goes to both chamber (6) and (12). Since spool (1) is in the NEUTRAL position, the only path the oil can take is from chamber (12) to tank through passage (11). The mast can be stopped and held in any position when the tilt control valve is in neutral. This is because the ßow to and from the tilt cylinders is stopped by spool (1). In the NEUTRAL position, oil can not ßow from passage (4) to outlet (2) or (7).
Vehicle Systems
18
Systems Operation
Tilt Forward Position
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
13 9
14
10
16
15 11
12
ICCS013S Tilt Spool In Forward Position (1) Spool. (2) Outlet to Rod End Of Tilt Cylinders. (3) Load Check Valve. (4) Passage. (5) Inlet Passage For Pump Oil. (6) Chamber. (7) Outlet To Head End Of Tilt Cylinders. (8) Passage For Return Oil. (9) Spring. (10) Spool. (11) Passage. (12) Chamber. (13) Spring. (14) OriÞce. (15) OriÞce. (16) Passage.
When the control lever for tilt is moved to TILT FORWARD position, spool (1) is moved until a path is opened between passage (4) and outlet (7) and oil ßow from chamber (12) to passage (11) is stopped. This causes the oil pressure to increase and open load check valve (3). The pressure oil from the pump can now ßow from passage(4) to outlet (7). It then ßows to the head end of the tilt cylinders and the mast tilts forward. Return oil from the rod end of the tilt cylinders ßows into the valve through outlet (2) in to passage (8) and then to tank.
Vehicle Systems
As tilt spool (1) is moved to the TILT FORWARD position, two paths are opened for the ßow of oil to the tilt cylinders. One is from passage (4) to outlet (7), which allows pressure oil to go to the head end of the tilt cylinders. The other path is for return oil from the rod end of the tilt cylinders. As spool (1) moves, oriÞce (15) moves into position to send pressure oil to the chamber behind spool (10). Spool (10) moves against the force of spring (9) and opens a path for return oil between passage (16) and oriÞce (14). This has the effect of slowing down the ßow of oil from the rod end of the tilt cylinders and preventing cavitation in the head end. If pump ßow (pressure) is lost, for any reason, spool (10) will return to the NEUTRAL position and the path for return oil is closed.
19
Systems Operation
Tilt Back Position
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
13 9
10
14
16
15 11
12
ICCS014S Tilt Spool In Tilt Back Position (1) Spool. (2) Outlet To Rod End Of Tilt Cylinders. (3) Load Check Valve. (4) Passage. (5) Inlet Passage For Pump Oil. (6) Chamber. (7) Outlet To Head End Of Tilt Cylinders. (8) Passage For Return Oil. (9) Spring. (10) Spool. (11) Passage. (12) Chamber. (13) Spring. (14) OriÞce. (15) OriÞce. (16) Passage.
When the control lever for tilt is moved to TILT BACK position, tilt spool (1) is moved until a path is opened between passage (4) and outlet (2), and oil ßow from chamber (12) to passage (11) is stopped. This causes the oil pressure to increase and open load check valve (3). The pressure oil from the pump can now ßow from passage (4) to outlet (2). It then ßows to the rod end of the tilt cylinders and the mast tilts back. Return oil from the head end of the tilt cylinders ßows into the valve through outlet (7) into passage (8) and then to tank.
Vehicle Systems
20
Systems Operation
If the control lever is held in LIFT or TILT position after the cylinder rod is fully extended or retracted, the ßow of oil from outlet port to the cylinders is stopped. The oil under pressure must be released. The pressure oil ßows through piston(11) of the main relief valve. The pressure oil opens pilot valve (14). This lets the oil ßow go through spring chamber (13) to passage (7). The oil then returns to tank. When the pilot valve opened, it caused a decrease in the pressure in spring chamber (13) that let piston (11) move against the force of the spring in spring chamber (13). This stops the ßow of oil around the pilot valve to passage (7) and moves piston (12) down until a path is open for pump ßow to go to the tank through passage (7). This action will continue until the control lever is moved to NEUTRAL position.
Relief Valve
13
14
7
12 11
IHCS104S Relief Valve (7) Passage for return oil. (11) Piston. (12) Dump valve. (13) Spring chamber. (14) Pilot valve.
Vehicle Systems
21
Systems Operation
Steering System Hydraulic Operation
3
4
6
7
5 2
1
8
L
T P R
LS
9
13
10
11
12
IBCS036B Steering System Schematic (1) Steering Unit. (2) Hose (to hydraulic tank). (3) Priority Valve. (4) Hose (from hydraulic pump). (5) Hose (to control valve). (6) Hose. (7) Hose. (8) Steering Cylinder. (9) Check Valve (in steering unit). (10) Hose (from priority valve). (11) Hydraulic Pump. (12) Hydraulic Tank. (13) Hose (load sensing).
The steering system is a load sensing closed center type and uses hydraulic oil for its operation. Oil ßow through the steering system is closed unless the steering wheel is turned. The ßow through the steering gear is sensed by the priority valve, which then allows additional oil ßow to the steering system. Hydraulic oil is pulled from hydraulic tank (12) through a strainer to hydraulic pump (11). The pump sends the oil through hose (4) to priority valve (3).
hose (10) than to hose (5). The priority valve metering spool will shift back and forth to meet the steering ßow demand while maintaining the Load Sensing Pressure between load sense hose (13) and the priority valve internal sensing line. At times ßow to hose (5) will be closed completely. The combination of ßow restrictors in the lines and spring tension on the priority valve metering spool work together to maintain this balance.
When the steering gear is in NEUTRAL position, pressure in hose (10) and the priority valve internal sensing line rises. When this pressure rises more than load sensing signal hose (13) the priority valve metering spool shifts to stop oil ßow to the steering unit. Oil ßows hose (5) to the hydraulic control valve. When the steering unit is moved, oil starts to ßow to steering cylinder (8). The pressure in line (10) and the priority valve internal sensing line will drop. As pressure drops in these lines, the priority valve metering spool will shift to meet the ßow demand. As the metering spool shifts, more oil ßow is diverted to
Check valve (9) is in the steering unit to prevent oil ßow back to priority valve (3), which could cause a sudden jerk of the steering wheel.
Vehicle Systems
Relief valve in priority valve body will open if the steering pressure goes above 8275 kPa (1200 psi).
22
Systems Operation
Steering Unit
1 A 2
B
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
IDCS113S Steering Gear (1) Spool. (2) Sleeve. (3) Outlet (to tank). (4) Inlet (for pump oil). (5) Internal pump gear. (6) External pump gear. (7) Centering springs. (8) Pin. (9) Left turn port. (10) Right turn port. (11) Body. (12) Drive. (A) Control section. (B) Metering section.
Lift trucks use the load sensing, closed center (oil ßow to steering unit only when needed) steering unit.
Oil from the priority valve goes through inlet (4) into the control section of the steering unit. When the steering wheel is turned, the control section sends the oil to and from the metering section and also to and from the steering cylinder.
All lift truck hydraulic lines serve a dual purpose in that they serve both the steering and cylinder hydraulics through the use of a priority valve. The priority valve sends oil to the steering unit before the needs of the cylinder hydraulics are met.
The metering section is a small hydraulic pump. It controls (meters) the oil that goes to the steering cylinder. As the steering wheel is turned faster, there is an increase in the ßow of oil to the steering cylinder. This increased ßow causes the main valve spool to move farther. As the spool moves farther, more oil can ßow from the priority valve or power steering pump to the steering cylinder, and a faster turn is made.
The steering unit has two main sections: control section (A), and pump or metering section (B). These two sections work together to send oil to the steering cylinder.
Vehicle Systems
23
Systems Operation
Oil Flow The oil from the priority valve ßows through inlet (4). When the steering wheel is stationary (NEUTRAL), the oil is stopped by spool (1). The oil can not ßow through the steering unit to the steering cylinder until the steering wheel is turned.
5
The steering wheel is connected to spool (1) by a shaft assembly and splines. When the steering wheel is turned, spool (1) turns a small amount until springs (7) are compressed. Then, sleeve (2) starts to turn. As long as the steering wheel is turned, the spool and sleeve both turn as a unit, but they turn a few degrees apart. When the spool and sleeve are a few degrees apart, oil passages are opened between them. This lets the pump oil from inlet (4) ßow through passages in body (11) to the metering section. When the steering wheel is turned, pin (8) turns with the sleeve and causes drive (12) to turn also. The drive causes a rotation of gear (5) inside gear (6). This rotation of the gear sends a controlled (metered) ßow of pilot oil back through body (11). This oil ßows to port (9) or (10) and then to the steering cylinder. Port (9) or (10), that is not used for pressure oil to the steering cylinder, is used for return oil from the other end of the steering cylinder
6
8
12 IDCS114S Pump Gears In Metering Section (5) Internal pump gear. (6) External pump gear. (8) Pin. (12) Drive.
If the steering wheel rotation is stopped, springs (7) will move sleeve (2) back in alignment with spool (1) (NEUTRAL position). This will close passages between the metering section and control section and the steering unit will be in the NEUTRAL position. When the engine is off, the steering unit can be manually operated. The control section will work as a pump. The oil that is returned from the steering cylinder is not returned to the tank. The suction of the control section will open an internal check valve and let return oil from the steering cylinder go to the inlet side of the control section. During power operation, supply pressure keeps the check valve closed.
Vehicle Systems
24
Systems Operation
Brake System
Brake ßuid from remote reservoir (1) to replenish master cylinder (2).
Master Cylinder
The master cylinder has a piston which pushes brake liquid into the brake lines. The reservoir, located on the cowl, is connected to inlet of master cylinder. The supply lines keep master cylinder (2) Þlled so no air enters the system. Reservoir (1) supplies brake liquid to the system.
1
When the brake pedal is Þrst pushed, the piston moves into the master cylinder and push brake liquid through outlet into the brake lines. When ßoating piston seats on seal, the liquid that is pushed by piston goes around cup seal, out through loading piston and outlet. This action continues until the liquid pressure in piston bore reaches the pressure that opens relief valve. The liquid, being pushed by piston, now returns to reservoir(1). Cup seal, seals and the liquid inside piston is pushed through piston and outlet. The liquid pushed through outlet goes through the brake lines to wheel cylinders (3). Check valve in the master cylinder keeps a small amount of pressure in the brake lines and wheel cylinders (3) when the pedal is released. This small amount of pressure helps the wheel cylinder piston cup seal seat, which keeps air out of the brake system.
2
3
IBCS043B Master Cylinder And Wheel Cylinder (1) Master cylinder reservoir. (2) Master cylinder. (3) Wheel cylinder.
4
Remote Reservoir (4) Remote reservoir.
Vehicle Systems
25
Systems Operation
Automatic Adjustment
Shoe Type Brakes 2
Brakes with automatic adjustment are adjusted on the reverse braking action. In this example the drum rotation is counterclockwise (in reverse) which causes a counterclockwise rotation of the brake shoes. Secondary shoe (4) moves away from cylinder (2) that causes link (1) to move toggle lever (6) in a clockwise rotation. Link (8) is connected to the lower part of toggle lever (6) and to adjustment lever (9). By this connection, adjustment lever (9) is moved in a counterclockwise rotation.
3
4
5
1 6
When the brakes are released at the end of a reverse brake application, adjustment spring (11) puts adjustment lever (9) into its original position. If the brake shoe lining has worn enough to let lever (9) engage, a tooth on adjustment screw (10), lever (9) will rotate screw (10) to put the brakes into the correct adjustment.
7 8 11
10
9
Parking Brake
IBCS044B Brakes With Automatic Adjustment (Right Side Shown) (1) Upper adjustment link. (2) Cylinder assembly. (3) Piston. (4) Secondary shoe. (5) Primary shoe. (6) Toggle lever. (7) Support plate. (8) Lower adjustment link. (9) Adjustment lever. (10) Adjustment screw. (11) Adjustment spring.
1
When the brake pedal is pushed down, the master cylinder sends brake ßuid to wheel cylinder (2). Wheel cylinder pistons (3) are pushed out and move primary shoe (5) and secondary shoe (4). The brake shoes move until they make contact with the brake drum.
2
When the brake action Þrst starts, primary shoe (5) comes in contact with the brake drum as it is in rotation. This contact of the primary shoe puts some force on secondary shoe (4) to help put it in position against the drum.
PARKING-2
Parking brakes use the shoe brake system described above. The brakes are activated mechanically istead of hydraulically. The brakes are designed to hold the truck positively for sure parking. Using parking lever (1) and cables (2).
Vehicle Systems
26
Systems Operation
Performance Tests
Testing And Adjusting
The performance tests can be used to Þnd leakage in the system. They can also be used to Þnd a bad valve or pump. The speed of rod movement when the cylinders move can be used to check the condition of the cylinders and the pump.
Troubleshooting Before any test is made, visually inspect the complete hydraulic system for leakage of oil and for part that have damage.
Lift, lower, tilt forward and tilt back the forks several times.
WARNING
1. Watch the cylinders as they are extended and retracted. Movement must be smooth and regular.
To prevent personal injury, when testing and adjusting the hydraulic system, move the machine to a smooth horizontal location and lower the mast and carriage to the ground. If the mast and carriage can not be on the ground, make sure they are blocked correctly to keep them from a fall that is not expected. Move away from machines and personnel that are at work. There must be only one operator. Keep all other personnel away from the machine, or where the operator can see the other personnel.
2. Listen for noise from the pump. 3. Listen for the sound of the relief valve . It must not open except when the cylinders are fully extended or retracted, when the forks are empty.
Hydraulic Oil Temperature (Too Hot) When the temperature of hydraulic oil gets over 98.8 ûC (210 ûF), polyurethane seals in the system start to fail. High oil temperature causes seal failure to become more rapid. There are many reasons why the temperature of the oil will get this hot.
Before any hydraulic plug, line or component is removed, make sure all hydraulic pressure in the system is released.
1. Hydraulic pump is badly worn.
Visual Checks
2. Heavy hydraulic loads that cause the relief valve to open.
A visual inspection of the hydraulic system and its components is the Þrst step when a diagnosis of a problem is made. Lower the carriage to the ßoor and follow these inspections:
3. The setting of the relief valve is too low. 4. Too many restrictions in the system.
1. Measure the oil level. Look for air bubbles in the oil tank.
5. Hydraulic oil level in the tank is too low. 6. High pressure oil leak in one or more circuits.
2. Remove the Þlter element and look for particles removed from the oil by the Þlter element. A magnet will separate ferrous particles from non ferrous particles(piston rings, O-ring, etc).
7. Very dirty oil. 8. Air in the hydraulic oil.
3. Check all oil lines and connections for damage or leaks.
NOTE : If the problem is because of air in the oil, it must be corrected before the system will operate at normal temperatures. There are two things that cause air in the oil (aeration).
4. Check all the lift chains and mast carriage welds for wear or damage.
a. Return oil to the tank goes in above the level of the oil in the tank. b. Air leaks in the oil suction line between the pump and the tank.
Vehicle Systems
27
Testing And Adjusting
Hydraulic System and Mast
Probable Mechanical Cause:
During a diagnosis of the hydraulic system, remember that correct oil ßow and pressure are necessary for correct operation. The output of the pump (oil ßow) increases with an increase in engine speed (rpm) and decreases when engine speed (rpm) is decreased. Oil pressure is caused by resistance to the ßow of oil. Visual checks and measurements are the Þrst step when troubleshooting a possible problem. Then do the operation checks and Þnally, do instrument test with pressure gauges.
1. The mast is not in alignment with the other lifting components and does not move freely. 2. Not enough lubricant on the parts of the mast that move. 3. The carriage or mast rollers and bearings are worn and do not move (seized). Problem: Lift cylinder extends too slowly. Probable Hydraulic Cause:
Use the Fittings Group, a stop watch, a magnet, a thermometer, and an inch (mm) ruler for basic tests to measure:
1. Not enough oil supply to lift cylinder. 2. Defective lift cylinder seals.
1. The pressure of the oil to open the relief valve. Relief valve pressures that are too low will cause a decrease in the lift and tilt characteristics of the lift truck. Pressures that are too high will cause a decrease in the life of hoses and components.
Probable Mechanical Cause: 1. The mast is not in alignment with the other lifting components and does not slide freely. 2. Not enough lubricant on the parts of the mast that move.
2. Drift rates in the cylinders. Cylinder drift is caused by a leakage past cylinder pistons, O-ring seals in the control valve, check valves that do not seat correctly or poor adjustment or Þt in the control valve spools.
3. The carriage or mast rollers and bearings are worn and do not move (sized).
3. Cycle times in the lift and tilt circuits: Cycle times that are too long are the result of leakage, pump wear and/or pump speed (rpm).
Problem: Mast does not move smoothly. Probable Hydraulic Cause: 1. Air in the hydraulic system.
Hydraulic System And Mast 2. Relief valve sticks or defective. Problem: The hydraulic system will not lift the load. 3. Damaged cylinders. probable Hydraulic Cause: Probable Mechanical Cause: 1. There is an air leak, which lets air into the hydraulic system on the inlet side of the hydraulic pump.
1. Not enough lubricant on the parts of the mast that move.
2. The relief valve opens at low oil pressure.
2. Load rollers defective or not adjusted correctly.
3. The hydraulic pump has too much wear.
Problem: Mast will not lower completely or will not lower at all.
4. The priority valve does not work correctly. Probable Hydraulic Cause: 1. Lift cylinder damaged or bent.
Vehicle Systems
28
Testing And Adjusting
Probable Mechanical Cause:
Problem: The lift or tilt cylinders do not hold their position with the valve control levers in neutral position.
1. Load rollers defective or not adjusted correctly. 2. Not enough lubricant on the parts of the mast that move.
Probable Cause: 1. The valve spools do not hold their positions because the springs for the valve spools are weak or broken.
Problem: The mast does not tilt correctly or moves too slowly.
2. Control valve leakage caused by worn valve spools. Probable Hydraulic Cause: 3. The load check valves in the control valve are bad. 1. There is an air leak, which lets air into the hydraulic system on the inlet side of the hydraulic pump.
4. Leakage of the cylinder lines or piston seals. 5. There is foreign material in the control valve.
2. The relief valve opens at low oil pressure. 3. The hydraulic pump has too much wear.
Hydraulic Gear Pump
4. The internal valve of the tilt spool is stuck.
Problem: Noise in the pump.
5. Control valve tilt spool has a restriction.
Probable Cause:
6. The priority valve does not work correctly.
1. The oil level is low.
Probable Mechanical Cause:
2. The oil is thick (viscosity too high).
1. Damage or failure of the tilt cylinders.
3. The pump inlet line has a restriction in it. 4. Worn parts in the pump.
Problem: The carriage will not lower correctly.
5. Oil is dirty. Probable Hydraulic Cause:
6. Air leaks into the inlet line.
1. There are restrictions in the lift line. Problem: The oil temperature is too high.
2. The lift spool in the control valve has a restriction caused by foreign material and does not operate freely.
probable Cause: 1. The oil level is low.
3. The lift cylinder ßow regulator valve has a restriction.
2. There is a restriction in an oil passage. 3. The relief valve setting is too low.
4. Air in the hydraulic system.
4. The oil is too thin. Probable Mechanical Cause: 5. There is air leakage in the system. 1. The mast is not in alignment with the other lifting components and does not move freely.
6. The pump has too much wear. 7. The system operates at too high a pressure.
2. Carriage chains need an adjustment.
a. Relief valve setting too high.
3. Not enough lubricant on the part of the mast that moves.
b. Attachment components cause a restriction during movement.
4. The carriage or mast rollers and bearings are worn and do not move (seized).
c. Restrictions in ßow regulator valve, load check valve and in oil lines.
Vehicle Systems
29
Testing And Adjusting
Problem: Control valve spools have leakage around the seals.
Problem: Leakage on the shaft seal. Probable Cause:
Probable Cause: 1. The shaft seal is worn. 1. There is foreign material under the seal. 2. There is a broken gasket behind the seal. 2. The valve spools are worn. 3. The inner parts of the pump body are worn. 3. The seal plates are loose. Problem: There is failure of pump to deliver ßuid. 4. The seals have damage or are badly worn. Probable Cause: Problem: The load lowers when the lift spool is moved from the neutral position to the raise position.
1. Low Level of the oil in the tank. 2. There is a restriction in the pump inlet line.
Probable Cause: 3. There is air leakage in the pump inlet line. 4. The viscosity of the oil is wrong.
1. There is foreign material in the load check valve area.
5. The pump has too much wear.
2. The load check valve and seat show wear.
6. Failure of the pump shaft or coupling.
3. Sudden loss of pump oil pressure.
7. The bolts of the pump do not have the correct torque.
4. Damage to the relief valve which causes low oil pressure.
Hydraulic Control Valve
Lift and Tilt Cylinders
Problem: The control spools do not move freely.
Problem: Leakage around the piston rod.
Probable Cause:
Probable Cause:
1. The temperature of the oil too high.
1. Cylinder head (bearing) seals are worn.
2. There is foreign material in the ßuid.
2. Piston rod is worn, scratched or bent.
3. The Þtting connections in the valve body are too tight.
Problem: There is leakage of oil inside the cylinder or loss of lift or tilt power.
4. The mounting bolts of the valve assembly do not have the correct torque and have twisted the body.
Probable Cause: 1. The piston seals are worn and let oil go through.
5. Linkage of the lift and tilt levers does not operate smoothly.
2. Cylinder has damage.
6. Bent lift or tilt spools.
Problem: The piston rods show wear.
7. Damage to the return springs of the spools.
Probable Cause:
8. The valve is not at normal temperature for operation.
1. The cylinders are not in correct alignment. 2. Oil is dirty.
Vehicle Systems
30
Testing And Adjusting
Problem: foreign material behind the wiper rings causing scratches on the cylinder rod.
Problem: Loose movement of the steering wheel and linkage.
Probable Cause:
Probable Cause:
1. The wiper rings show wear and do not remove dirt and foreign material.
1. Loose steering knuckle king pins. 2. Loose wheel bearings. Problem: The temperature of the oil is too hot.
Steering System Probable Cause: Problem: Too much force needed to turn steering wheel.
1. The viscosity of the oil is wrong.
Probable Cause:
2. Air mixed with the oil.
1. Priority valve releases pressure oil at a low setting.
3. The relief valve is set too high (priority valve).
2. Pump oil pressure is low, worn pump.
4. There is a restriction in line circuit.
3. Metering pump (steering) timing is not correct.
Brake System 4. Priority valve spool is held in one position. Problem: Brakes make noise or pull(grab). 5. Low ßuid level in the hydraulic supply tank. Probable Cause: 6. Linkage needs lubrication. 1. Brake shoe adjustment not correct. Problem: Oil leakage at the pump. 2. Lining surface looks like glass (glazed) or is worn. Probable Cause: 3. Oil or brake ßuid is on the lining. 1. Loose hose connections. 4. Dirt on the brake drum lining surface. 2. Bad shaft seal. 5. Brake drum is badly worn or has grooves (scored). Problem: Low oil pressure. 6. Restriction in the brake line. Probable Cause: 7. Brake drum is out of round. 1. Low oil level. Problem: Both brake shoes will not release all the way (drag).
2. Priority valve relief valve spring weak. 3. Relief valve (priority valve) will not move from the open position.
Probable Cause: 1. Brake shoe adjustment not correct.
4. Oil leakage inside or outside of the system. 2. Brake pedal adjustment not correct. 5. Bad pump. 3. Mechanical resistance at the pedal or shoe. 4. Restriction in brake line. 5. Bad wheel cylinder.
Vehicle Systems
31
Testing And Adjusting
Problem: Pedal resistance is not solid (spongy).
5. Bad master cylinder.
Probable Cause:
6. Linkage is not in correct adjustment, or is bent.
1. Leakage or low ßuid level.
Problem: Not braking evenly, or rough feeling of braking (chatter).
2. Air in the brake hydraulic system. Probable Cause: 3. Loose master cylinder mounting. 1. Lining surface looks like glass (glazed), or worn. Problem: Hard pedal.
2. Oil or brake ßuid is on the lining.
Probable Cause:
3. Bad contact between the lining and drum.
1. Mechanical resistance on the pedal or shoe.
4. Loose lining.
2. Brake shoe adjustment not correct.
5. Brake drum out of round. 6. Loose wheel bearing.
3. Restriction in the brake line.
7. Bad wheel cylinder. 4. Bad master cylinder. 5. Lining surface looks like glass (glazed), or is worn.
Hydraulic System
Problem: Pedal gradually goes to the ßoor. Probable Cause:
Relief Valve Pressure Check
1. Leakage or low ßuid level.
Lift and Tilt Relief Valve Pressure Check
2. Bad master cylinder.
WARNING
Problem: Extra (excessive) pedal travel.
Hydraulic oil, under pressure can remain in the hydraulic system after the engine and pump have been stopped. Personal injury can be caused if this pressure is not released before any work is done on the hydraulic system. To prevent possible injury, lower the carriage to the ground, engine off and move control levers to make sure all hydraulic pressure is released before any Þtting, plug, hose or component is loosened, tightened, removed or adjusted. Always move the lift truck to a clean and level location away from the travel of other machines. Be sure that other personnel are not near the machine when engine is running and tests or adjustments are made.
Probable Cause: 1. Leakage or low ßuid level. 2. Air in the brake hydraulic system. 3. Bad master cylinder. 4. Lining surface looks like glass (glazed), or worn. 5. Operation of brake adjuster is not correct. Problem: Brake will not make application. Probable Cause: 1. Leakage or low ßuid level. 2. Lining surface looks like glass (glazed), or worn. 3. Oil or brake ßuid is on the lining. 4. Air in the brake hydraulic system.
Vehicle Systems
32
Testing And Adjusting
2
1
3
4
5
IHCS105S
2
Relief Valve Adjustment (2) Control valve. (3) Screw. (4) Jam nut. (5) Acorn nut.
4. If an adjustment to the relief valve setting is necessary, do the steps that follow: a. Stop the engine. b. Remove acorn nut (5) and loosen jam nut (4). c. Turn Screw (3) either clockwise for an increase or counterclockwise for a decrease. d. Hold screw (3) and tighten jam nut (4). Install acorn nut (5).
IMCS053I Control Valve Pressure Check (1) Check Fitting. (2) Control Valve.
1. With the engine off, install a pressure gauge to the check Þtting (1). 2. Start the engine and tilt the mast back to the end of its travel. 3. With the engine at high idle, hold the tilt control lever in the TILT BACK position and watch the gauge. The indication of the gauge is the pressure of the oil that opens the relief valve. For the correct pressure setting, see the topic Control Valve in SpeciÞcations.
Vehicle Systems
33
Testing And Adjusting
Lift Cylinders Air Removal After the lift cylinder has been disassembled and then assembled again, it may be necessary to remove the air (bleed) from the cylinder.
24
1. With no load, lift and lower the mast and carriage through one complete cycle. 2. With the forks on the ßoor, check the oil level in the hydraulic tank. Add oil (if necessary)to bring the oil level to the full mark.
EHCS009C Lift Cylinder Air Removal (FFTL - Secondary Cylinders) (24) Bleed Screw.
3. With no load, left and lower the mast and carriage again through four complete cycles.
5. Open bleed screws (23 and 24) no more than one turn. The weight of the carriage will force air and hydraulic oil out of the cylinders through the bleed screws. Close the bleed screws before all the pressure is out of the cylinders. This will prevent air from entering back through the bleed screws.
WARNING The oil will have high pressure present. To prevent personal injury, do not remove the bleed screws completely . Keep hands and feet away from any parts of the truck that move, because the forks will lower when the bleed screw is loose.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until there is no air bubbles at the bleed screws. 7. After all the air is removed, tighten the bleed screws. 8. Fill the hydraulic tank to the full mark.
4. Lift the forks high enough to put a load on all stages of the lift cylinders. (The illustrations shown are of a full free triple lift mast.).
9. Lift and lower the mast and carriage again through one complete cycle. If the mast does not operate smoothly, repeat Step 3 through 9.
23
EHCS008C Lift Cylinder Air Removal (FFTL - Primary Cylinder) (23) Bleed Screw.
Vehicle Systems
34
Testing And Adjusting
Steering System
Steering System Air Removal
Steer Axle Stop Adjustment
1. Fill the hydraulic Tank or reservoir nearly full. Be ready to add oil when the engine is started. Do not let oil level go below the outlet to the pump. 2. Start the engine and keep at low idle. Add oil immediately to the tank or reservoir as needed.
A
NOTE : This oil will now ßow from the pump, the priority valve and the steering gear, then back to the priority valve, hydraulic control valve, hydraulic tank and Þnally to the pump again. When no more oil can be added and oil is clear, do the procedure that follows :
2 1
3. Lift a capacity load to take the weight off of the steer axle. Turn the steering wheel as rapidly as possible to remove the air in the steering cylinder and lines. 4. Add oil immediately when the valve spool is activated to replace oil that ßows through the circuit.
NOTICE Be sure to keep the oil level in the hydraulic tank above the outlet to the pump. Do not hold steer wheels against stops for an extended period of time. This will cause the oil to get hot and damage the components.
IMCS054S Steer Axle End. (1) Bolt. (2) Nut. (A) 80ûangle.
5. Turn the steer wheels until they have reached the stop in one direction, then quickly turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction to the opposite stop.
Use the procedure that follows to make an adjustment to the steer axle turning angle.
6. This procedure must go on approximately 15 to 20 times, to remove the air from the system. Add oil as required.
1. Adjust the cylinder rod extension so it is equal on both sides of the axle. 2. Loosen nuts (2).
NOTE : The oil in the lines to the steering cylinder stops at the piston. The oil in the cylinder does not ßow in a circuit. As the piston moves backward and forward, the oil moves backward and forward in the lines. Air in these lines, and in the cylinder, may move slowly into the steering control valve and then to the tank.
3. Turn the steer wheel one direction until the steering cylinder internal stop is reached. 4. Adjust stop bolt (1). 5. Tighten nut (2). Turn the steer wheel the opposite direction and do the same procedure for the opposite stop bolts. This will give a maximum cramp angle of 80û.
WARNING Personal injury can result if loss of steering occurs. Do not operate the vehicle until the air is removed.
7. When the oil in the tank is clear (not cloudy), the system is free of air. 8. Fill the tank to the recommended level. Vehicle Systems
35
Testing And Adjusting
5. The indication on the pressure gauge must be the priority valve relief setting of 8275 L 350 kPa (1200 L 50 psi). If the indication is correct and a problem exists, then there is possibly a mechanical failure in the steering system.
Steering System Pressure Check If the steering system does not work correctly, check the hydraulic tank for the correct oil level and the hoses and connections for leakage. If all these items are correct, use the Pressure Gauge Kit to check the steering hydraulic system and its relief pressure setting.
6. If the indication is not correct, then there is steering hydraulic failure in the components.
(6) 1
IDCD066P Hydraulic Steering Gear (1) Elbow (Pressure line from priority valve).
WARNING
(5)
Hydraulic pressure can cause personal injury. Before any steering system hydraulic lines or components are disconnected, make sure all hydraulic pressure is released in the steering system. Move the steer wheels to the left and right and then to the straight forward direction.
(4) Check steering system relief pressure as follows:
IDCS134S
1. Turn the engine off.
(4) Pressure-Checking Adapter. (5) Pressure-Tube. (6) Pressure Gauge.
2. Remove plug from elbow(1) Install pressure-checking adapter(4) and connect pressure-tube (5) and pressure gage (6). Pressure gage(6) has a range of 28000 kpa (4000psi). 3. Move the seat to the normal position for operation, turn the key switch to the ON position and activate the hydraulic controls until the oil is at a temperature for normal operation.
a. With the engine running, turn the steer wheels in any directions and read the indication on pressure gauge (6). b. If the indication is approximately the pressure shown in Step 5, then the steering gear has a hydraulic failure. c. If the indication is too low or too high, then the priority valve or its components must be replaced.
4. Turn the steer wheels to the left or right against the stops and make a note of the indication on the pressure gauge.
7. If the steering unit and the priority valve are working properly, the steering cylinder is defective and must be repaired. 8. Correct the problem and check steering relief valve pressure again.
Vehicle Systems
36
Testing And Adjusting
Brake System
Brake Adjustment
Brake System Air Removal
The brakes make an adjustment automatically when an application is made in reverse. With each reverse brake application there will be an adjustment made, until the lining-to-drum clearance is made small enough to stop the movement of the automatic adjustment linkage.
Systems With Remote Reservoir
1
Manual brake adjustment is necessary only when new brake shoes are installed and the automatic adjustment has been moved. To make a manual adjustment to the brakes:
WARNING IMCS052P
Wood blocks or jack stands of the correct capacity must be used under the machine to prevent the machine from a fall that is not expected. Failure to do so can result in injury or death.
Remote Reservoir Location (1) Remote reservoir.
When the brake pedal resistance is spongy (not solid) it is usually an indication that there is air in the brake hydraulic system. The cause may be low ßuid or oil level, leakage in the system, a broken brake line or a brake line that is not connected.
1. Put wood blocks or jack stands of the correct capacity under the machine. 2. Remove the plugs from wheel brake plate.
To remove air from the brake system, do the procedure that follows :
3. Put a brake adjustment tool through hole and into a tooth on the adjustment screw (3).
1. Fill remote reservoir (1) with the correct brake ßuid to 12.7 mm (.50 in) from the Þller cap. See the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the correct brake ßuid. 2. Put pressure on the brake pedal and open bleed screw to let air out of the system. Close bleed screw while pressure is still on the brake pedal ; then let the pedal return to the original position. 3. Do Step 2 again as many times as necessary until the brake ßuid is free of air. 4. Use the procedure in Steps 2 and 3 again, except this time use the right bleed screw. 5. Fill remote reservoir (1) again, with the correct ßuid, to the level explained in Step 1.
Vehicle Systems
37
Testing And Adjusting
Pedal Adjustment The brake pedal must have enough free play to let the master cylinder piston return to the release position and open the relief outlet. Hydraulic pressure in the brake lines goes back through the relief opening and releases the brakes. If there is no pedal free play, the pressure can not go back through the relief opening, and the brakes will tighten and not release. If there is too much free play, the brake pedal will be low even with the correct brake adjustment. The master cylinder push rod must be adjusted so the brake pedal has 3.0 to 8.0 mm (.118 to .315 in) of free play from the pedal stop to the push rod contact point with the master cylinder piston.
4
3 IBCS056B
If the pedal free play adjustment is not correct, do the procedure that follows :
Brake Assembly (3) Adjustment screw. (4) Adjustment lever.
4. Turn adjustment screw (3) up until a heavy resistance (drag) is felt on the brake shoes as the drum is turned. 5. Put a thin blade screwdriver into hole and hold adjustment lever (4) away from the adjustment screw.
5 4 3–8mm
NOTE : The adjustment lever must be held away from the adjustment screw when the adjustment screw is turned backwards.
7 6
6. Put the brake tool through hole into a tooth on the adjustment screw and turn screw (3) backward until the brake shoes are free of resistance (drag).
3 8 (110 mm)
7. Do steps 3 through 6 to adjust the other brake lining to drum clearance. 8. Install the plugs. Test the brakes to be sure both wheels stop evenly when a brake application is made.
1 9
93.5mm
2
IMCS055S
Location of master cylinder and brake pedal adjustment. (1) Clevis. (2) Boot. (3) Inching & Brake pedal. (4) Bolt. (5) Nut. (6) Bolt. (7) Nut. (8) Rod. (9) Yoke.
Vehicle Systems
38
Testing And Adjusting
1. Adjust master cylinder clevis (1) to 93.5mm. The push rod should be free on piston rod (1mm gap between the rod and piston)
Parking Brake Adjustment
2. Adjust pedal height both inching and brake to 110 mm from top of ßoorplate to pedal (3) using adjusting bolt (4) and nut (5). 3. Adjust rod (8) until there is the correct amount of free play (3-8mm).
2
VIEW A-A
Parking Brake Test 1 3 4
WARNING To prevent personal injury, the operator must be ready to use the service brake if the parking brake is not adjusted correctly and the lift truck starts to move.
PARKING-1
1. Drive the fully loaded lift truck up a 15% incline. 2. Half way up the incline, stop the lift truck with the service brakes. Apply the parking brake.
1. Put the parking brake control in the released position.
3. If the parking brake has the correct adjustment, the lift truck will be held in this position.
2. Make sure cables (1) and (2) are loosened. 3. Loosen nut (4) and adjust the cables (1), (2) by nut (3).
4. If the parking brake does not hold, do the steps in parking Brake Adjustment.
4. Tighten nut (4).
Vehicle Systems
39
Testing And Adjusting
Inching Pedal Adjustment
WARNING
To check the inching valve adjustment and operation, do the procedure that follows :
To prevent personal injury, when the inching pedal is adjusted, move the truck to a clear area that is level. Keep all other personnel away from the lift truck. Use lifting equipment or a safe method to lift the front of the lift truck until the drive wheels are off the ßoor. Put wood blocks or jack stands of the correct capacity under it to hold it in this position while the inching pedal is adjusted.
WARNING When this procedure is used, the lift truck must be in an area clear of obstructions. There must be one operator with all other personnel away from the lift truck. Check the operation of the brakes before the test is made.
2. Raise the front of the lift truck off the ßoor. Put wood blocks or jack stands of the correct capacity under it while the inching pedal is adjusted.
1. With the engine at idle speed, put the transmission in FORWARD.
2 4 3 1 1
IMCS056S Inching Operation Test (1) Inching pedal.
2. Slowly push down on inching pedal (1) until the movement of the brake pedal causes the brake shoes to make contact (small drag) with the brake drums. IMCS056S
3. Increase the engine speed to high idle. The truck must not move.
Inching Pedal Adjustement (1) Inching pedal. (2) Lug. (3) Bolt. (4) Nut.
If the operation of the inching valve is not correct, do the procedure that follows.
3. Start the engine and put the transmission FORWARD.
1. Adjust and bleed the wheel brakes as shown in the Vehicle Systems module.
4. With the drive wheels turning, depress inching pedal (1) until the drive wheels stop. 5. Now depress the brake pedal until shoe contact is felt. 6. Loosen nut (4) and adjust bolt (3) to contact lug (2) that rotates the brake control cross shaft. Tighten nut (4). 7. Check the inching valve operation again.
Vehicle Systems
40
Testing And Adjusting
SB4020E01 Oct. 2000
Disassembly & Assembly Lift Trucks Vehicle Systems D15S-2, D18S-2, D20SC-2 G15S-2, G18S-2, G20SC-2
Important Safety Information
Most accidents involving product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly. Read and understand all safety precautions and warnings before operating or performing lubrication, maintenance and repair on this product. Basic safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the Service or Technical Manual. Additional safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the owner/operation/maintenance publication. Specific safety warnings for all these publications are provided in the description of operations where hazards exist. WARNING labels have also been put on the product to provide instructions and to identify specific hazards. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or other persons. Warnings in this publication and on the product labels are identified by the following symbol.
WARNING Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death. Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information. Operations that may cause product damage are identified by NOTICE labels on the product and in this publication. DAEWOO cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the product are therefore not all inclusive. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not specifically recommended by DAEWOO is used, you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures you choose. The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information available at the time it was written. The specifications, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can affect the service given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before starting any job. DAEWOO dealers have the most current information available.
1
Index Disassembly & Assembly Air Cleaner Housing Assembly ................................47 Alternator .................................................................45 Brake Master Cylinder .............................................24 Counterweight..........................................................41 Electric Starting Motor .............................................45 Engine And Transaxle..............................................48 Fan Belt ...................................................................44 Fuel Filter.................................................................46 Hood (with seat) Assembly ........................................5 Hydraulic Control Valve............................................11 Hydraulic Pump .......................................................17 Links, Knuckles, Kingpins And Bearings .................41 Oil Filter ...................................................................47 Overhead Guard ........................................................5 Primary Lift Cylinder ..................................................9 Radiator ...................................................................43 Secondary Lift Cylinder .............................................7 Steer Axle ................................................................36 Steer Wheels & Hub ................................................34 Steering Cylinder .....................................................38 Steering Unit ............................................................26 Steering Wheel ........................................................25 Tilt Cylinder ..............................................................21
WARNING Disconnect batteries before performance of any service work.
Vehicle Systems
3
Index
Disassembly & Assembly Hood (with seat) Assembly 3
Remove & Install Hood (with seat) Assembly IMCD202P
2 1
5. Use the hoist to remove hood and seat assembly (3) 6. Install the hood and seat assembly in the reverse order of removal.
Overhead Guard
IMCD201P
Remove & Install Overhead Guard
WARNING The hood and seat assembly can fall when nut (1) is removed from the support cylinder rod. To avoid personal injury, support the seat and hood assembly before removing nut (1).
1
1. Raise the hood. Support the seat with a hoist. 2. Remove nut (1) from the support cylinder. Remove the cylinder rod from the bracket. IMCD203P
3. Remove the four bolts (2). 1. Support overhead guard (1) with lifting straps and a hoist.
4. Lower the hood.
Vehicle Systems
5
Disassembly & Assembly
2 6
5
IMCD204P
IMCD207P
5. Remove the washers, nuts, and four bolts (5). 6. Remove rear leg (6). 3
7. Install overhead guard (1) and rear leg (5) in the reverse order of removal.
IMCD205P
2. Disconnect harness (2) from the cowl. Remove the plugs, bolts (3), washers and nuts.
4
IMCD206P
3. Remove the plugs, washers, nuts (4) and bolts. 4. Remove front overhead guard (1).
Vehicle Systems
6
Disassembly & Assembly
Secondary Lift Cylinder
3
Disassemble Secondary Lift Cylinder Start By : a. Remove secondary lift cylinders. EHCD101P 1
3. Remove rod (3) from the cylinder body. 4
EHCD099P
1. Put secondary lift cylinder (1) in position as shown. EHCD102P
2
4. Remove ring (4) from the cylinder rod.
5
EHCD100P
2. Remove rod-cover assembly (2) with wrench.
6
EHCD103P
5. Remove screw bleeders (5) and steel ball (6) from the rod cover.
Vehicle Systems
7
Disassembly & Assembly
7
7
8
8
EHCD104P
EHCD104P
6. Remove O-ring seal (7) and backup ring (8) from the rod cover.
2. Install backup ring (8) and O-ring seal (7) onto the rod cover.
12 9 5 10
6 11
EHCD105P
EHCD103P
7. Remove wiper seal (9), U-packing (10), backup ring (11) and two slyd rings (12) from the rod cover.
3. Install the steel ball (6) and screw-bleeder (5) onto the rod cover.
3
Assemble Secondary Lift Cylinder 12 9
10
EHCD101P
4. Install rod (3) with a ring into the cylinder body. EHCD105P
11
1. Install two slyd rings (12), backup ring (11) Upacking (10) and wiper seal (9) on the inside of the rod cover.
Vehicle Systems
8
Disassembly & Assembly
2
3
EHCD100P
EHCD109P
3. Remove ring (3) from the cylinder rod.
5. Install rod cover assembly (2) on the cylinder and tighten using wrench. End By :
4
a. Install secondary lift cylinder.
Primary Lift Cylinder
5
Disassemble Primary Lift Cylinder EHCD110P
Start By :
4. Remove O-ring seal (4) and backup ring (5) from the head assembly.
a. Remove primary lift cylinder. 2
1 6
7
8
EHCD108P EHCD111P
1. Remove head assembly (1). 2. Remove rod (2) from the cylinder body.
Vehicle Systems
9
5. Remove wiper seal (6), backup ring (7), U-packing (8) and two slyd rings (9) from the head assembly.
9
Disassembly & Assembly
Assemble Primary Lift Cylinder
2
1
6
7
8
EHCD108P
6. Install cylinder rod (2) in the cylinder body.
9
EHCD111P
7. Install head assembly (1) on the cylinder body. Tighten the head assembly.
1. Install backup ring (7) and U-packing (8) in the head assembly.
End By :
2. Install wiper seal (6). Install the seal with the lip toward the outside.
a. Install primary lift cylinder.
3. Install two slyd rings (9) in the head assembly.
4
5
EHCD110P
NOTE : Install the back-up ring with the curved side contacting the O-ring seal. 4. Install the backup ring (5) and O-ring seal (4) on the head assembly. 3
EHCD109P
5. Install ring (3) on the cylinder rod.
Vehicle Systems
10
Disassembly & Assembly
Install Hydraulic Control Valve
Hydraulic Control Valve
2
Remove Hydraulic Control Valve
3
WARNING Before any hydraulic plug, line or component is removed, make sure all hydraulic pressure in the system is released.
IMCD209P
1. Put hydraulic control valve assembly (3) in position and install the mounting nuts and bolts (2) that hold it.
1
1
IMCD208P
1. Put identification marks on all hydraulic lines and hoses. IMCD208P
2. Disconnect all hydraulic lines and hoses (1) from the hydraulic control valves. Put plugs or caps on the lines and hoses, also on the openings on the control valves to keep out dirt and foreign material.
2. Remove the caps or plugs from the lines and hoses, also from the openings on the control valves.
2
3. Connect hydraulic lines and hoses (1) to the control valves. Be sure the lines are installed at the correct locations. 3
IMCD209P
3. Remove mounting nuts and the bolts (2). Remove hydraulic control valve assembly.
Vehicle Systems
11
Disassembly & Assembly
Disassemble Hydraulic Control Valve Start By : 6
a. Remove hydraulic control valve.
IHCD107P
5. Remove lift section assembly (6) from the valve body. 1 2 7 10
IHCD105P
8 6
NOTE : For purpose of assembly, put identification marks on all valve sections. 11
1. Remove three nuts (1) to separate the valve sections.
9
2. Remove inlet section assembly (2) from the valve body.
IHCD108P
6. Remove plug (7) and O-ring (8) from the lift section assembly (6). 4
5
3 2
7. Remove O-ring (9), poppet (10) and spring (11) from lift section assembly (6).
IHCD106P 13 12
3. Remove O-ring (3) from inlet section assembly (2). 4. Remove relief valve (4) and O-ring (5). IHCD109P
8. Remove two screws (12) and cap (13) from lift section assembly.
Vehicle Systems
12
Disassembly & Assembly
17
16
18 26
IHCD110P
IHCD112P
9. Remove two screws (16) and seal plate (17).
13. Remove tilt section assembly (26) from the valve body.
10. Remove lift spool (18). 28 26 24 19 23 29
20 25
IHCD111P
22
IHCD113P
21
27
14. Remove O-ring (27), poppet (28) and spring (29) from tilt section assembly (26).
11. Remove the wiper seals (19) and O-rings (20) from the spool. Check the condition of O-rings and wiper seals and replace with new ones if needed. NOTE : Remove the spool end (21) from the spool. The centering spring (22) has a slight preload and will extend to its free length when the spool end is removed.
30 31
12. Remove the spring seats (23 and 24), centering spring (22) and seal plate (25). IHCD114P
15. Remove two screws (30) and cap (31) from tilt section assembly.
Vehicle Systems
13
Disassembly & Assembly
15
14
44
45
33
32
43
34
IHCD115P
IHCD118P
16. Remove two screws (32), seal plate (33) and tilt spool (34).
20. Remove side shift section assembly (43) and fourth section (44) from the valve body.
17. Remove valve (14) and O-ring (15).
NOTE : Do step 7 through 12 to disassemble valve spools of side shift and fourth section assembly. 21. Remove section assembly (45).
35
46
47
45
37
36
38
IHCD116P
18. Remove the wiper seals (35) and O-rings (36). Check the condition of wiper seals and O-rings and replace with new ones if needed.
IHCD119P
22. Remove relief valve (46) and O-ring (47) from the section assembly (45).
NOTE : Remove the spool end (37) from the spool. The centering spring (38) has a slight preload and will extend to its free length when the spool end is removed.
39
38
40
37
42
41
IHCD117P
19. Remove spring seats (39 and 40), spring (38 and 42) and piston (41).
Vehicle Systems
14
Disassembly & Assembly
Assemble Hydraulic Control Valve
24 19 23
NOTICE Do not use caustic (corrosive) materials to clean any parts in this valve group. Caustic materials will cause corrosion and damage to parts.
20 25
IHCD111P
1. Make sure all valve parts are clean and free of dirt.
4
5
21
22
4. Install the spring seats (23 and 24), centering spring (22) and seal plate (25) on the lift spool.
3
5. Compress the spring with spool end (21) and tighten spool end. Torque the spool end to 8 ~ 11 N¥m (70 ~ 97 lb¥in).
2
6. Install the wiper seals (19) and O-ring (20) to the spool (18).
IHCD106P
2. Install O-ring (3) to inlet section assembly (2).
16
17 18
3. Install relief valve (4) with O-ring (5) to inlet section assembly (2). The torque for the relief valve is 44 ~ 49 N¥m (32 ~ 36 lb¥ft). IHCD110P
7. Install the spool (18), seal plate (17) and the screws (16).
Vehicle Systems
15
Disassembly & Assembly
46
45
47
13 12
IHCD109P
IHCD119P
8. Install cap (13) and two screws (12).
13. Install O-ring (47) and relief valve (46) to the section assembly (45).
7
8
10
6
11 1 9
2
IHCD108P IHCD105P
9. Install O-ring (9), poppet (10) and spring (11) to lift section assembly (6).
14. Assemble all the sections on the studs. 15. Install the nuts (1) that hold the valve sections together. Tighten the single top nut to torque of 26 ~ 32 N¥m (19 ~ 23 lb¥ft) and two bottom nuts to torque of 24 ~ 29 N¥m (18 ~ 21 lb¥ft).
10. Install O-ring (8) and plug (7) to the lift section assembly.
39
38
40
37
End By : a. Install hydraulic control valve. 42
41
IHCD117P
11. Install piston (41), spring (42), spring seats (39 and 40) and spring (38) on the tilt spool assembly. 12. Compress the spring with spool end (37). Torque the spool end to 8 ~ 11 N¥m (70 ~ 97 lb¥in). NOTE : Do step 6, 7, 8 and 9 to assemble the tilt spool to the tilt section assembly. NOTE : Do same steps to assemble the side shift section and fourth section assembly. Vehicle Systems
16
Disassembly & Assembly
For D15/18/20S(C)-2
Hydraulic Pump
Start By:
Remove & Install Hydraulic Pump
a. Remove alternator 1. Drain the hydraulic tank.
WARNING To prevent personal injury, release any pressure in hydraulic system. Slowly loosen the cap of the hydraulic tank to release any pressure in the tank. Be cautious of hot hydraulic oil when any lines are disconnected in the hydraulic system.
1
For G15/18/20S(C)-2
2 3
IBCD107
2. Remove two hydraulic hose (1) and (2) from hydraulic pump (3). 3. Support hydraulic pump (3). Remove the two bolts and pump (3).
1
3
IBCD161P
4. Install the hydraulic pump in reverse order of removal. Tightening torque for bolts that hold pump is 55 ± 10 N¥m (40 ± 4 lb¥ft).
2
1. Disconnect lines (1) from hydraulic pump (2). 2. Remove two bolts (3) that hold hydraulic pump (2) to the frame. Remove the pump.
5. Fill the hydraulic tank to the correct level with fluid. Refer to the operation and maintenance manual for further information.
3. Make a replacement of the pump gasket if necessary.
End By : a. Install the alternator.
4. Put hydraulic pump (2) in position on the frame, and install the bolts that hold it. 5. Tighten the bolts (3) to a torque of 55 ± 10 N¥m (40 ± 4 lb¥ft). 6. Connect the lines (1) to hydraulic pump (2).
Vehicle Systems
17
Disassembly & Assembly
Disassemble Hydraulic Pump Start By:
8
a. Remove hydraulic pump.
2
1
IBCD111C 3
4. Remove gears (8) from the pump body. Separate the pump sections.
IBCD108C 9 12
NOTE: Identify and mark all sections of the hydraulic pump for purposes of reassembly.
10
1. Remove four bolts (1) and washer (2) to remove pump rear cover (3).
11
IBCD112C
5. Remove O-ring (9), seal (10), back up-ring (11) and bush (12) from the pump body. Replace seals, back up-ring, O-ring with new if needed. 4
IBCD109C
13
14
2. Remove seal (4) from the pump body.
5
15 6
IBCD110C
IBCD113C
6. Remove snap ring (13) and seal (14) from the flange (15).
7
3. Remove seal (5), back up-ring (6) and bush (7) from the pump gears.
Vehicle Systems
18
Disassembly & Assembly
Assemble Hydraulic Pump 8 13
14
IBCD111C 15
3. Install gears (8) in the pump body.
IBCD113C
NOTE: When installing seal (14), make sure the lip of the seal is positioned toward the inside of the pump housing. The outer surface of seal (14) should be 6 L 0.4 mm (0.24 L 0.2 in) below the outer surface of the pump end cover.
5
1. Use tool group (A) to install seal (14) in the pump body.
6
7
IBCD110C
9 12 10
5. Install bush (7) back-up ring (6) and seal (5) in the pump body.
11
IBCD112C
2. Install bush (12), back-up ring (11), seal (10) and O-ring (9) in the pump body.
4
IBCD109C
6. Install seal (4) on the pump body.
Vehicle Systems
19
Disassembly & Assembly
2
1
3
IBCD108C
7. Install the bolts (1), washers (2) and pump rear cover (3) onto the pump body. Tighten the bolts for rear cover (3) to a torque of 39 to 40 N¥m (28 to 30 lb¥ft). End By: a. Install the hydraulic pump.
Vehicle Systems
20
Disassembly & Assembly
Tilt Cylinder
5
Remove & Install Tilt Cylinders NOTE : The procedure for removing and installing the lift cylinders is the same for both cylinders.
6
WARNING
4
IMCD212P
If both tilt cylinders are to be removed at the same time, make sure that the mast is held either by a hoist or is securely held in place by blocks.
3. Remove bolts (4), the washes. Remove rear tilt cylinder pin (5). 4. Remove tilt cylinder (6) from the lift truck.
1
5. Install the tilt cylinder in the reverse order of removal. NOTE : When installing bolts (4), apply Loctite NO.242.
Disassemble & Assemble Tilt Cylinder Start By : IMCD210P
a. Remove tilt cylinder. 1. Put identification marks on the hydraulic lines. Disconnect hydraulic lines (1) from the tilt cylinder. Put caps or plugs on the lines and the openings on the tilt cylinder to keep out dirt or foreign material. 1
2 3
EHCD113P
2
1. Use wrench to remove rod cover (1) from the cylinder body. IMCD211P
NOTICE Use extra care not to damage the highly finished surface of the cylinder rod and the bore of the cylinder body during disassembly and assembly of the tilt cylinder.
2. Remove bolts (2), washes from the cylinder eye. Remove pin (3).
2. Remove rod assembly (2) from the cylinder body. Vehicle Systems
21
Disassembly & Assembly
3
5
4
NOTICE Check the condition of all seals. If any parts are worn or damaged use new parts for replacement.
10
EHCD114P 11
3. Remove nut (3) from the cylinder rod. 4. Remove piston and seal assembly (4) from the cylinder rod. EHCD117P
5. Remove rod cover assembly (5). 9. Remove O-ring seal (10) and backup ring (11) from the rod cover. 2
6
14
12
EHCD115P EHCD118P
6. Remove spacer with a O-ring seal and shims from the cylinder rod (2) if they are installed.
10. Remove wiper seal (12) and U-packing (14) from the rod cover.
7. Loosen the nut and bolt (6) on the rod eye. Remove cylinder rod.
7
8
15
9
EHCD119P EHCD116P
11. Remove the DU-bush (15) from the rod cover. If the DU-bush has a large amount of wear, Replace the DU-bush.
8. Remove slipper seal (7) and O-ring seal (8) from the piston (9).
NOTE : Use the following steps to assemble the tilt cylinder. Vehicle Systems
22
Disassembly & Assembly
2
14
6
12
EHCD118P
EHCD115P
12. Install wiper seal (12) in the rod cover. Position the lip of the seal toward the outside of the rod cover as shown.
16. Position the cylinder rod eye in a vise as shown. 17. Install cylinder rod (2) and shims. Tighten the nut and bolt (6) on the rod eye to a torque of 95 L 15 N¥m (70 L 10 lb¥ft).
13. Install U-packing (14) in the rod cover.
18. Install the spacer with O-ring seal onto the cylinder rod if needed.
10
3
4
5
11
EHCD117P
14. Install O-ring seal (10) and backup ring (11) on the rod cover.
EHCD114P
19. Install rod cover assembly (5) on the cylinder rod. 20. Install piston assembly (4) onto the cylinder rod. The torque for the nut (3) is 260 L 25 N¥m (190 L 20 lb¥ft).
7
8
9
EHCD116P
15. Install slipper seal (7) and O-ring seal (8) on the piston (9).
Vehicle Systems
23
Disassembly & Assembly
Brake Master Cylinder Remove & Install Brake Master Cylinder
1
5
EHCD113P
2
1
2
21. Install the rod assembly (2) in the cylinder body. 22. Use wrench to tighten rod cover (1). The torque for rod cover (1) is 270 L 35 N¥m (200 L 25 lb¥ft).
IMCD213P
End By :
1. Remove the cotter pin from pin (1). Remove pin (1).
a. Install tilt cylinder.
NOTE : Plug and cap all openings to avoid contamination and debris from entering the system after removing any tubes or lines.
3
4
2. Disconnect hose (2) from master cylinder. 3. Disconnect tube (3) from master cylinder. 4. Support the brake master cylinder. Remove two bolts (4). 5. Remove the brake master cylinder (5). 6. Install the brake master cylinder in the reverse order of removal. 7. Bleed the brake system. Refer to the Testing and Adjusting Manual for further information.
Vehicle Systems
24
Disassembly & Assembly
Disassemble & Assemble Brake Master Cylinder
Steering Wheel
Start By :
Remove & Install Steering Wheel
a. Remove master cylinder. 1 4
IDCD063P 2
1
3
ILCD041P
1. Remove cap (1) from the steering wheel.
1. Remove head (1) and boot (2). 2 3
2. Remove snap ring (3) from master cylinder. 3. Remove bolt (4) from master cylinder.
3
4
8
6
10
11
IDCD064P 5
2. Remove nut (2) and up (3) from the steering wheel shaft. Put location marks on the steering wheel and the steering wheel shaft for installation purposes.
9 7
ILCD042P
12
13
3. Use plastic hammer to remove the steering wheel from the shaft.
4. Remove union (5) and washers (6). 5. Remove plate (7) and piston (8).
NOTE : Use the following steps to install the steering wheel.
6. Remove secondary cup (9) from piston.
4. Put the steering wheel on the steering wheel shaft in its original position.
7. Remove spacer (10) and primary cup (11). 8. Remove spring (12) and check valve (13).
5. Install cup (3) and nut (2). Tighten nut (2) to a torque of 80 L 7 N¥m (60 L 5 lb¥ft).
9. Assemble the master cylinder in the reverse order of disassembly.
6. Install cap (1).
End By : a. Install master cylinder.
Vehicle Systems
25
Disassembly & Assembly
Steering Unit
WARNING To prevent personal injury be sure pressure in the hydraulic system has been released before disconnecting any hydraulic lines. Slowly loosen the cap of the hydraulic tank to release any pressure in the tank. Be cautious of hot hydraulic oil when any lines are disconnected in the hydraulic system.
Remove & Install Steering Unit Start By: a. Remove steering wheel.
1
3
NOTE : Identify and mark all hydraulic hoses for purposes of reassembly. 4. Disconnect five hoses from steering unit (5).
2
NOTICE Steering unit (5) and column (2) can separate after bolts (4) have all been removed, causing unit (5) to fall. To avoid damaging components, support the steering pump while removing bolts (4).
IDCD065P
1. Open the access cover for the fuse panel. 2. Loosen four bolts (1). Slide directional control switch (3) off of steering column (2). Set switch (3) aside, clear of the steering column.
5. Support steering unit (5) while removing the remaining two bolts (4). Remove steering unit (5) and steering column (2). 6. Install the steering unit in the reverse order of removal. End By :
4
a. Install steering wheel. 5
IDCD066P
3. Remove two bolts (4).
Vehicle Systems
26
Disassembly & Assembly
Disassemble Steering Unit Cleanliness is extremely important when repairing a steering unit. Work in a clean area. Before disconnecting lines, clean port area of unit thoroughly. Use a wire brush to remove foreign material and debris from around exterior joints of the unit. Although not all drawings show the unit in a vise, we recommend that you keep the unit in the vise during disassembly. Follow the clamping procedures explained throughout the manual.
Seal
End Cap Cap Screw
Gerotor (Meter) End IDCD279S
2. Remove 5/16 inch cap screws and washers if applicable (7 each). 3. Remove end cap. 4. Remove seal from end cap.
Seal
1. Clamp unit in vise, meter end up. Clamp lightly on edges of mounting area. Use protective material on vise jaws. Housing distortion could result if jaws are overtightened.
Spacer(s)
IDCD280S
5. Remove meter. Be careful not to drop star. 6. Remove seal from meter. 7. Remove drive spacer(s).
Vehicle Systems
27
Disassembly & Assembly
Seal Gland Bushng
Spacer Plate Seal
Drive IDCD283S
IDCD281S
12. Rotate spool and sleeve until pin is horizontal. Push spool and sleeve assembly forward with your thumbs just far enough to free gland bushing from housing. Remove bushing.
8. Remove drive. 9. Remove spacer plate. 10. Remove seal from housing.
Quad Ring Seal
Control End
Dust Seal
Seal Gland Bushing
IDCD284S
13. Remove quad ring seal from seal gland bushing. 14. Use a thin bladed screwdriver to pry dust seal from seal gland bushing. Do not damage bushing. ILCD282S
11. Remove housing from vise. Place housing on a clean soft cloth to protect surface finish. Use a thin bladed screwdriver to pry retaining ring from housing.
Vehicle Systems
28
Disassembly & Assembly
Bearing Needle Race Thrust Bearing
Bearing Race IDCD285S
IDCD287S
15. Remove two bearing races and the needle thrust bearing from spool and sleeve assembly.
18. Push spool partially from control end of sleeve, then remove 4 centering springs from spool carefully by hand. 19. Push spool back through and out of sleeve. Rotate spool slowly when removing from sleeve. 20. Remove seal from housing.
Seal
Pin
Check Ball
IDCD286S
Check Ball Seat 16. Remove spool and sleeve assembly from 14 hole end of housing.
IDCD288S
Attention: Do not bind spool and sleeve in housing. Rotate spool and sleeve assembly slowly when removing from housing.
21. Remove check ball seat. 22. Tip housing to remove check ball.
17. Push pin from spool and sleeve assembly.
Vehicle Systems
29
Disassembly & Assembly
Assemble Steering Unit Check all mating surfaces. Replace any parts that have scratches or burrs that could cause leakage. Clean all metal parts in clean solvent. Blow dry with air. Do not wipe dry with cloth or paper towel because lint or other matter can get into the hydraulic system and cause damage. Do not use a coarse grit or try to file or grind these parts.
Spring Slot Control Sleeve Spring Slot Identification Control Marks Spool
NOTE: Lubricate all seals with clean petroleum jelly such as Vaseline. IDCD290S
Do not use excessive lubricant on seals for meter section. Refer to parts listings covering your steering unit when ordering replacement parts. A good service policy is to replace all old seals with new seals.
6. Assemble spool and sleeve carefully so that the spring slots line up at the same end. Rotate spool while sliding parts together. Some spool and sleeve sets have identification marks, align these marks. Test for free rotation. Spool should rotate smoothly in sleeve with finger tip force applied at splined end.
Check Ball Seat Check Ball
IDCD289S IDCD291S
1. Use a needle nose pliers to lower check ball retainer into check valve hole of housing. Make sure retainer is straight (not tilted on edge) in housing.
7. Bring spring slots of both parts in line and stand parts on end of bench. Insert spring installation tool through spring slots of both parts. Position 2 pairs of centering springs on bench so that extended edge is down and arched center section is together. In this position, insert one end of entire spring set into spring installation tool, with spring notches facing sleeve.
2. Install check ball in housing 3. Lubricate 9.3 mm [.36 in.] ID seal and 7.7 mm [.30 in.] ID seal. Install seals on check ball seat as shown.
8. Compress extended end of centering spring set and push into spool sleeve assembly withdrawing installation tool at the same time.
4. Lubricate check ball seat and seals thoroughly before installing seat in housing. When installing seat do not twist or damage seals. Install check ball seat in housing, insert open end of seat first. Push check ball seat to shoulder of hole.
9. Center the spring set in the parts so that they push down evenly and flush with the upper surface of the spool and sleeve.
5. Install set screw. Use a 1/4 inch hex key to torque set screw to 11 N¥m [100 lb¥in]. To prevent interference make sure top of set screw in slightly below housing mounting surface. Vehicle Systems
10. Install pin through spool and sleeve assembly until pin is flush at both sides of sleeve.
30
Disassembly & Assembly
Seal Gland Bushing (with seals)
Retaining Ring
Pin IDCD292S
11. Position the spool and sleeve assembly so that the splined end of the spool enters the 14 hole end of housing first.
IDCD294S
16. Install seal gland bushing over the spool end with a twisting motion. Tap the bushing in place with a rubber hammer. Make sure the bushing is flush against the bearing race.
Attention: Be extremely careful that the parts do not tilt out of position while inserting. Push parts gently into place with slight rotating action, keep pin nearly horizontal. Bring the spool assembly entirely within the housing bore until the parts are flush at the meter end or 14 hole end of housing. Do not pull the spool assembly beyond this point to prevent the cross pin from dropping into the discharge groove of the housing. With the spool assembly in this flush position, check for free rotation within the housing by turning with light finger tip force at the splined end.
Needle Thrust Bearing
Screwdriver Dust Seal Retaining Ring Seal Gland Bushing Quad Ring
Bearing Race (2)
Seal
Seal
IDCD293S IDCD295S
12. Place housing on clean lint free cloth. Install 47,5 mm [1.86 in.] ID seal in housing.
17. Install retaining ring in housing. After installing ring, tap on ring end or pry with screwdriver around entire circumference of ring to properly seat ring in groove.
13. Install 2 bearing races and the needle thrust bearing in the order shown. 14. Install 25 mm [1 in.] ID dust seal in seal gland bushing, flat or smooth side must face down towards bushing. 15. Install the quad ring seal in seal gland bushing. Smooth seal in place with your finger. Do not use any seal that falls freely into pocket of bushing. Vehicle Systems
31
Disassembly & Assembly
Port Face
Drive
Pin Parallel with Port Face
Pin IDCD296S
IDCD298S
18. Clamp housing in vise. Clamp lightly on edges of mounting area. Do not over tighten jaws.
21. Rotate spool and sleeve assembly until pin is parallel with port face. Install drive, make sure you engage drive with pin. To assure proper alignment, mark drive as shown. Note relationship between slotted end of drive to splined end of drive when marking.
Note: Check to insure that the spool and sleeve are flush or slightly below the 14 hole surface of the housing. Attention: Clean the upper surface of the housing by wiping with the palm of clean hand. Clean each of the flat surfaces of the meter section parts in a similar way when ready for reassembly. Do not use cloth of paper to clean surfaces.
Seal
IDCD299S
22. Install 73.5 mm [2.89 in.] ID seal in spacer plate or gerotor (meter). IDCD297S
19. Install 73.5 mm [2.89 in.] ID seal in housing. 20. Install spacer plate. Align bolt holes in spacer plate with tapped holes in housing.
Vehicle Systems
32
Disassembly & Assembly
Seal Groove this Side of Gerotor (meter) Star Valley
A
B Drive (Marked)
C D
Actual Displacement cm3/r(in3/r)
Spacer
45 [ 2.8]
None
60 [ 3.6]
None
75 [ 4.5]
None
95 [ 5.9]
3.56 [ .140]
120 [ 7.3]
6.10 [ .240]
145 [ 8.9]
10.29 [ .405]
160 [ 9.7]
12.19 [ .480]
185 [11.3]
15.62 [ .615]
230 [14.1]
21.97 [ .865]
295 [17.9]
28.45 [1.120]
370 [22.6]
41.15 [1.620]
460 [28.2]
53.67 [2.113]
590 [35.9]
66.37 [2.613]
740 [45.1]
91.77 [3.613]
Length mm[in.]
24. Install drive spacer (s) when used, in meter.
Pin
25. Install 73.5 mm [2.89 in.] ID seal in gerotor (meter) or end cap, see notes.
Port Face
IDCD300S
26. Install end cap on gerotor, align holes. 23. With seal side of meter toward spacer plate, align star valleys on drive. Note the parallel relationship of reference lines A, B, C, and D. Align bolt holes without disengaging meter from drive.
Seal Drive Spacer(s)
IDCD302S
27. Install 7 dry cap screws in end cap. Pretighten screws to 11-17 N¥m [100-150 lb¥in] then torque screws to specifications.
IDCD301S
Vehicle Systems
33
Disassembly & Assembly
Steer Wheels & Hub 3
Remove Steer Wheels & Hub
1
IBCD049C
4. Remove wheel cap (3). 5. Eliminate grease in the hub. IBCD047C
1. Raise the rear of the machine and support with wooden block as shown.
4
2. Remove six nuts (1).
5
IBCD050C 2
6. Bend the tap in locking washer (4) clear slot in nut. 7. Remove nut (5). Remove locking washer (4). IBCD048C
3. Remove steer wheel (2).
6
IBCD051C
7
8. Remove washer and bearing cone (6) from the hub (7).
Vehicle Systems
34
Disassembly & Assembly
7 12
8
IBCD052C
IBCD055C
9. Remove hub (7) from steering knuckle (8).
12. Remove bearing cone (12) from knuckle. NOTE: Check the condition of all seals, bearings and components. If any parts are worn or damaged, use new part for replacement.
10 9
13. Pack bearing cones (6) and (12), and lubricate the contact surfaces of the bearing cups with Multipurpose Grease.
7
14. Reverse the procedures and steps 1 through 12 to install the steer wheels and bearings. 15. Adjust the steer wheel bearings as follows:
IBCD053C
a. Tighten nut (5) to a torque of 135 L 14 N¥m (100 L 10 lb¥ft) while slowly rotating steer wheel (2). b. Loosen nut (5) completely. c. Tighten nut (5) again to a torque of 50 L 5 N¥m (37 L 4 lb¥ft). d. Greased fully inside hub.
10. Remove seal (9) and bearing cup (10) from hub (7).
11
16. Install wheel cap (3). 17. Install steer wheel (2). 18. Raise the rear of the machine and remove the wooden bolck.
IBCD054C
11. Remove bearing cup (11) from the hub.
Vehicle Systems
35
Disassembly & Assembly
Steer Axle Remove & Install Steer Axle WARNING Be sure the pressure in the hydraulic system is released before any lines or hoses have been disconnected.
3
IBCD062C
3. Support the steer axle with a floor jack. 2
1
4. Loosen rear mounting bolt (3) until approximately two bolt threads are left in the mounting boxes. 5. Lower the steer axle onto the bolt heads with the floor jack.
IBCD061C
1. Raise the rear of the lift truck and support with wooden block. 2. Disconnect hose (1) and tube (2). Plug and cap all openings to prevent contamination and debris from entering the system.
6
5
IBCD061C
6. Remove front mounting bolts (5) and mounting caps (6) from the steer axle.
Vehicle Systems
36
Disassembly & Assembly
3
IBCD177C
IBCD062C
Typical Example NOTE: Use bolts (3) and cap to align steer axle (4) with the mounting bosses while raising steer axle (4) into position with the floor jack.
7. Remove steer axle (4). NOTE: Use the following steps to install the steer axle.
9. Seat steer axle (4) as follows: a. Install bolts (5) through cap (6) and into the mounting bosses approximately two bolt threads. b. Use the floor jack to raise steer axle (4) into the mounting boss. c. Tighten bolts (5) to a torque of 270 L 40 N¥m (200 L 30 lb¥ft).
IBCD177C
Typical Example 8. Use a floor jack to position steer axle (4).
2
1
IBCD063C
10. Connect hose (1) and tube (2).
Vehicle Systems
37
Disassembly & Assembly
Steering Cylinder
3
Disassemble Steering Cylinder Start By: a. Remove steering cylinder.
IBCD062C 1
4. Remove retaining rings (3) from the cylinder rod.
4
IBCD064C
1. Put location marks on rod-cover (1) as to their position on the steering cylinder tube. IBCD163C
2. Remove rod covers (1) from the steering cylinder.
5. Remove piston (4) from the cylinder rod. 2 5
IBCD161C IBCD164C
3. Remove cylinder tube (2) from the rod assembly.
6. Remove and inspect O-ring seal (5).
Vehicle Systems
38
Disassembly & Assembly
Assemble Steering Cylinder
8
9 6
IBCD165C 7
IBCD166C
8
9 6
IBCD166C
7
7. Disassemble each rod cover as follows:
IBCD165C
a. Remove O-ring seal (6).
1. Assemble each rod cover as follows:
b. Remove wiper seal (7).
a. Install DU-bush (9).
c. Remove U-packing (8).
b. Install U-packing (8).
d. Remove DU-bush (9).
c. Install wiper seal (7). d. Install O-ring seal (6).
5
IBCD164C
2. Install O-ring seal (5) on the cylinder rod.
Vehicle Systems
39
Disassembly & Assembly
1
4
IBCD163C
IBCD064C
3. Install piston (4) on the cylinder rod.
6. Install rod cover (1) on cylinder tube (2). End By:
3
a. Install the steering cylinder.
IBCD062C
4. Install rings (3) on each side of piston.
2
IBCD161C
5. Install cylinder tube (2) on the rod assembly.
Vehicle Systems
40
Disassembly & Assembly
Links, Knuckles, Kingpins And Bearings
Counterweight Remove Counterweight
Remove & Install Links, Knuckles, Kingpins And Bearings Start By : a. Remove steer wheels and bearings. 4
1
3 5
2
IMCD214P 2 1
1. Disconnect fuel line (1).-for G15/18/20S(C)-2
1
3 4
IMCD223P
1. Remove the split pins, nuts (1) and washers from the links (2). 2. Remove the links (2). 3. Remove the bolts (3) and covers (4) from the knuckle (5).
3
2
IMCD215P
4. Remove the knuckle from the steer axle. 2. Remove bolts (3) to remove LP container mounting brackets (2) and LP tank. - for G15/18/20S(C)-2
6
4
8
7
IMCD052P 6
5. Remove the bearings (6), king pin (7) and seals (8).
IMCD216P
6. Install the links, kunckles, kingpins, and bearings in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install two suitable eyebolts (4) in the counterweight and fasten a hoist.
End by : a. Install steer wheels and bearings.
Vehicle Systems
41
Disassembly & Assembly
5
5
6
6
IMCD217P
IMCD217P
4. Remove bolts (5) from the rear of the counterweight.
3. Install bolts (5) at the rear of the counterweight. Tighten bolt to a torque of 400 L 50N¥m (300 L 37 lb¥ft).
5. Remove counterweight (6) from the frame of the lift truck.
Install Counterweight 4
3
2
IMCD215P
4. Remove the eyebolts and the hoist. Install LP container mounting brackets (2) and bolts (3) that hold it. - for G15/18/20S(C)-2
6
IMCD216P
1. Put two suitable eyebolts (4) in the counterweight, and fasten a hoist to it. 2. Put counterweight (6) in position on the lift truck frame. 1
IMCD214P
5. Connect fuel line (1) to the counterweight. - for G15/18/20S(C)-2
Vehicle Systems
42
Disassembly & Assembly
Radiator Remove & Install Radiator Start By : 5
a. Remove counterweight. 1. Drain the coolant from radiator. IMCD220P
5. Support Radiator. Remove four bolts (5), washers. Then, remove the radiator.
1
6. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. End by : a. Install counterweight. 2
IMCD218P
2. Loosen two clamps (1) and remove tube assembly from the muffler. 3. Remove two mounting bolts (2).
3
4
IMCD219P
4. Loosen clamps (3). Remove hoses (4) from the radiator.
Vehicle Systems
43
Disassembly & Assembly
For D15/18/20S(C)-2
Fan Belt Remove and Install Fan Belt For G15/18/20S(C)-2
3
1 1
IBCD162P
1. Loosen alternator bolt (1).
IMCD221P
1. Loosen four bolts (1) from pump mounting bracket.
5
2
4 2
IBCD163P
2. Loosen nut (2) and move alternator toward the cylinder head. Remove belt (3) from the pulleys.
3
3. Install the fan belt in the reverse order of removal. IMCD222P
2. Move the pump mounting bracket (2) and pump (3) backward. 3. Disconnect U-joint adapter (4) from pump spline, and remove fan belt (5). NOTE : It is easier to rework after removal of rear tires or to rework at a pit. 4. Install the fan belt in the reverse order of removal.
Vehicle Systems
44
Disassembly & Assembly
Alternator
Electric Starting Motor
Remove & Install Alternator
Remove & Install Electric Starting Motor
4
IMCD061P
1
3
2
1
IMCD063P
1. Disconnect the battery positive cable. 2. Disconnect starter wires (1) and (2). Put identification on the starter wires.
2
IMCD062P
<G15/18/20S(C)-2> 2
4
4
3
IMCD064P
3. Remove two bolts (3) and then remove starter (4) from the engine rear plate. 1
4. Install the starter in the reverse order of removal. IBCD164P
3
<D15/18/20S(C)-2> 1. Disconnect wiring harness (1) from the alternator. 2. Loosen top bolts (2) and then remove belt (3) from the pulley. 3. Support the alternator. Remove bolt (4) and washer. Remove the alternator. 4. Install the alternator in the reverse order of removal. Vehicle Systems
45
Disassembly & Assembly
Fuel Filter
3
Remove & Install Fuel Filter 2
IBCD166P
1
<G15/18/20S(C)-2> 1. Loosen hose clamp (1) and bolts (2). IBCD165P
2
3
1
2. Remove fuel filter (3).
<D15/18/20S(C)-2>
3. Install the fuel filter (3) in the reverse order of removal.
1. Loosen hose clamp (1) and disconnect connector (2). 2. Remove fuel filter element (3). 3. Check the condition of seal. Replace seal with new if worn or damaged. 4. Put new fuel element (3) in position. 5. connect connector (2) and then tighten clamp (1).
Vehicle Systems
46
Disassembly & Assembly
Oil Filter
Air Cleaner Housing Assembly
Remove & Install Oil Filter
Remove & Install Air Cleaner Housing Assembly
2
1 1
IBCD167P IBCD169P
<D15/18/20S(C)-2> 1
1. Remove clips (2) and cover (1).
IBCD168P
3
<G15/18/20S(C)-2> IBCD170P
1. Remove the oil filter housing (1) from the base.
2. Remove cover assembly (3) from the housing.
2. Install a new oil filter housing (1) on the oil filter base.
IBCD171P
5
4
3. Remove nut (4). Remove primary filter element (5) from the housing.
Vehicle Systems
47
Disassembly & Assembly
Engine and Transaxle Remove & Install Engine and Transaxle Start By: a. Remove mast. b. Remove overhead guard. c. Remove seat and hood. d. Remove steering unit. e. Remove floor plate.
7 6
IBCD172P
4. Remove nut (7). Remove secondary filter element (6).
NOTICE Put identification marks on all wiring, hoses and lines to assure proper installation.
7
8
IBCD173P
5. Loosen hose clamps (7) and pull hose off of air cleaner housing. Remove pressure indicator (8).
1
IBCD135C
1. Disconnect yoke (1) from the parking cable assembly.
9
6 2 3
IBCD174P IBCD175P
6. Remove two bolts (8) that hold air cleaner housing.
7
4
5
2. Remove nut (2) and pin (3) from the inching cable (6). Remove nut (4) and pin (5) from the accel cable (7). Remove both cables.
7. Remove air cleaner housing from the frame. 8. Install air cleaner in the reverse order of removal.
NOTICE Plug and cap all openings to avoid contamination and debris from entering the system after removing any tubes or lines.
Vehicle Systems
48
Disassembly & Assembly
8
14 11 10 9
IBCD176P
IBCD178P
3. Disconnect hoses (8) from the left hand tilt cylinder. Remove bolt (9) and clip. Disconnect two connectors (10) for solenoid valves and connector (11).
14
13
12
IBCD179P
5. Remove eight bolts (14) for cowl.
IBCD177P
4. Disconnect tube (12) for brake pressure lines and connectors (13) for horn.
15
IBCD180P
6. Remove cowl (15) from the frame.
Vehicle Systems
49
Disassembly & Assembly
19 18
16
IBCD181P
IBCD184P
9. Disconnect two hoses (18) for fuel line and air cleaner hose (19).
20
20
IBCD182P
16
7. Remove two bolts (16) and separate engine control unit from frame.
IBCD185P
21
22
10. Remove bolts (20) and disconnect hose (21) from hydraulic pump. Remove bolts (22) for exhaust tube.
23
17
IBCD174P 24
8. Disconnect wire harness (17) for fuel sender. IBCD186P
11. Disconnect connector (23) for battery and band (24) for ground.
Vehicle Systems
50
Disassembly & Assembly
26
25
IBCD187P
IBCD145C
12. Disconnect two connectors(25) from circuit breaker (26).
28
IBCD146C
IBCD188P
14. Support lift truck with wooden blocks on three places.
27
13. Disconnect connector (27) for temperature sender. Disconnect radiator hoses (28). NOTE: At this point, make a check to be sure all removals and disconnections have been made from the transaxle and engine.
IBCD147C
15. Remove drive tire from the drive axle.
Vehicle Systems
51
Disassembly & Assembly
29 30
IBCD148C
IBCD191P
16. Remove nut (29) and washers (30) from the engine mount, located on each side of the engine. For the reassembly purpose, the torque for nut (29) is 200 ± 20 N¥m (150 ± 15 lb¥ft).
19. Remove transaxle and engine assemblies from the frame. Put the transaxle and engine assemblies on the wooden block.
17. Support the engine and transaxle with a hoist.
31
IBCD192P
20. Support the engine with a hoist. Remove seven bolts and washers from the converter housing. For the reassembly purpose, the torque for the bolt is 60 ± 10 N¥m (45 ± 7 lb¥ft).
IBCD189P
21. Remove the engine from the transaxle. 22. Install the engine in the reverse order of removal. 31
End By: a. Install floor plate. IBCD190P
b. Install steering unit.
18. Remove four bolts (31) from the frame.
c. Install seat and hood.
NOTE: At this point, make a final check to be sure all removals and disconnections have been made from the transaxle and engine.
d. Install overhead guard.
Vehicle Systems
e. Install mast.
52
Disassembly & Assembly
SB2143E01 May 2000
Disassembly & Assembly Testing & Adjusting Lift Trucks Mast Systems G15S-2, GC15S-2, D15S-2, B16X, B13T-2, BC15T, B15S,
G18S-2, GC18S-2, D18S-2, B18X, B15T-2, BC18T, B18S
G20SC-2 GC20SC-2 D20SC-2 B20X B18T-2 BC20T
Important Safety Information
Most accidents involving product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly. Read and understand all safety precautions and warnings before operating or performing lubrication, maintenance and repair on this product. Basic safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the Service or Technical Manual. Additional safety precautions are listed in the ÒSafetyÓ section of the owner/operation/maintenance publication. Specific safety warnings for all these publications are provided in the description of operations where hazards exist. WARNING labels have also been put on the product to provide instructions and to identify specific hazards. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or other persons. Warnings in this publication and on the product labels are identified by the following symbol.
WARNING IImproper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death. Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information. Operations that may cause product damage are identified by NOTICE labels on the product and in this publication. DAEWOO cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the product are therefore not all inclusive. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not specifically recommended by DAEWOO is used, you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures you choose. The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information available at the time it was written. The specifications, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can affect the service given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before starting any job. DAEWOO dealers have the most current information available.
1
Index Disassembly & Assembly Forks.........................................................................5 Backrest....................................................................5 Carriage....................................................................6 Mast..........................................................................9
Testing & Adjusting Carriage Adjustment...............................................22 Chain Adjustments .................................................23 Chain Wear Test.....................................................23 Carriage and Mast Height Adjustment ........................24 Forks Parallel Check ..............................................24 Tilt Cylinder Alignment............................................25 Drift Test .................................................................25 Tilt Cylinder Adjustment..........................................26 Lift & Tilt Mounting Group Adjustment....................27 Mast mounting Group Adjustment..........................28
Lift Trucks Mast System
3
Index
Lift Trucks Mast System
4
Disassembly & Assembly
Backrest
Disassembly & Assembly
Remove & Install Backrest
Forks Remove & Install Forks
1
1
3
2
IBCD501P 2
1. Fasten a hoist to the backrest. Remove bolts(2) that fasten the backrest to the carriage.
IDCD001P
2. Remove backrest (1). Backrest weighs 32 kg (71 lb). 3. Install backrest(1) in the reverse order of removal.
IDCD002P
1. Remove stopper bolt and washer (3). 2. Lift fork pin (1). 3. Use a suitable C-clamp, strap and hoist to support the fork as shown. 4. Slide the fork to slot (2) in the middle of the carriage. 5. Remove the fork. The weight of the fork is 35 kg (77 lb). 6. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the remaining fork. 7. Install the forks in the reverse order of removal. 8. Put the forks in position. Lower both fork pins(1) to lock the forks in position. 9. Install stopper bolt and washer (3). Lift Trucks Mast System
5
Disassembly & Assembly
Carriage Remove & Install Carriage Start By: a. Remove forks. b. Remove backrest.
IBCD504P
7
6
4. Remove two nuts (6). Remove carriage stop bolt (7).
2
1 9
4 3
IBCD502P
1. Remove two bolts (1) and hose guard (2) from the cross head (3). 2. Remove cross head (3) from the cylinder rod (4). 8
IBCD510P
5. Raise the inner mast to pull out carriage as shown. 5
6. Remove carriage from bottom of inner mast (9). Carriage weighs 64kg (141 lb).
IBCD503P
3. Remove hoses (5).
NOTE: Use the following steps to install the carriage. 7. Raise the inner mast (9) to put in the carriage (8) onto the mast, and lower the inner mast to cover carriage bearing fully.
Lift Trucks Mast System
6
Disassembly & Assembly
End By: a. Install backrest. b. Install forks.
Disassemble Carriage 7
IBCD504P
Start By:
6
a. Remove carriage. 8. Install stop bolt (7). Shim stop bolt as required to obtain a 4 to 6 mm (.157 to .242 in) lap with top carriage stop on the inner upright.
1
9. Put the chains in position over cross head. Install nuts(6) onto the chain anchors to a torque of 300 L 30 NIIm (220 L 22 lbIIft).
IBCD571P
2
1. Remove the roll pins and pins(2) to disconnect chains(1).
5
IBCD503P 3
10. Install hoses (5).
2
IBCD572P
1
2. Remove lower roller bearings(3) and the shims from the carriage.
4 3
IBCD502P
11. Install cross head (3) to cylinder rod (4). 12. Install hose guard (2) and bolts (1) to a torque of 8 L 2 NIIm (6 L 1.5 lbIIft). Lift Trucks Mast System
7
Disassembly & Assembly
1. Select bearings from the chart to obtain minimum clearance (C) between bearings and channel leg for full channel length. Use same bearing at all four locations.
7 4 8
CARRIAGE BEARING CHART 9 5
6
IBCD573P
Part No.
Bearing Size
Bearing O.D.*
D580006
Undersize
98.5 mm (3.878 in)
D580007
Standard
99.0 mm (3.898 in)
D580008
Oversize
99.5 mm (3.917 in)
* Permissible tolerance of L 0.08 mm (.003in)
3. Remove screw(5) and washer(4). Remove two top roller bearings(6) and the shims.
Refer to carriage Adjustment in Testing & Adjusting. 4. Remove bolt (7), washer, pin-adjust (8) and sideroller bearing (9) from the carriage.
Assemble Carriage NOTE : The standard, Full Free Lift and Full Free Triple Lift carriage load bearings are all adjusted the same way. The Full Free Triple Lift carriage is shown in the following illustrations. To make the carriage clearance adjustments, carriage must be removed from the mast.
IBCD543P
Use the procedure that follows to adjust carriage load bearings.
A
A B
A
2. Find narrowest point by ruler on the inner mast in the area where the bearings make contact.
1
4
5(STD) 3 A
C
D
C
B
B
C 5 (FF, FFT)
6 VIEW A-A C
C
7
10
9
8
IBCD574P
2
A VIEW C-C IBCD581I
VIEW B-B
3. Install enough shims (1) that have been divided into two equal groups behind bearings (2). At installation, there is to be contact [zero clearance (A)] between the bearings and the narrowest point of inner mast.
Carriage Adjustment (3) Upper bearings. (4) Shims. (5) Bolt. (6) Screw. (7) Side-roller bearings. (8) Lower bearings. (9) Pin-adjust. (10) Bolt. (A) Zero clearance. (B) 4.0 to 6.0 mm. (.157 to .242 in) clearance. (C) Minimum clearance. (D) 4.5 L 0.5 mm
Lift Trucks Mast System
4. Do step 2 through 3 for other sets of bearings.
8
Disassembly & Assembly
Mast 4
Remove & Install Mast Start By: a. Remove forks. Move the truck to the place where pit is set up. 3
IDCD016P
5. Tighten screw (3) that holds the top and middle bearings (4) to the carriage to a torque of 34 L 7 NIm (25 L 5 lbIft).
1 2
6
IBCD511P
1. Support mast assembly(2) with a hoist and strap (1) as shown.
IBCD571P
5
6. Position chains (6) on the carriage. Install pins (5) and the roll pins. 3
End By: a. Install carriage, raise the inner mast and insert the carriage from the bottom of inner mast. IBCD512P
NOTICE Place identification marks on all hydraulic connectors and hoses to assure proper installation. Plug and cap all hydraulic connectors and hoses to avoid debris and contamination from entering the system.
2. Disconnect hose(3). NOTE : For BC15/18/20T and B13/15/18T-2, see article 6 prior to disconnecting hose (3).
Lift Trucks Mast System
9
Disassembly & Assembly
9 6
IBCD513P
5
4
8
WARNING
IBCD502S
Tilt cylinders (4) can drop when pin(6) is removed. To avoid component damage or personal injury, support tilt cylinder (4) while removing pin(6).
6. BC15/18/20T, B13/15/18T-2 Raise the carriage and mast to open outer lower part. Remove bolt (9) from the front of mast each side. Remove bolt (8) from the pit each side. Disconnect hose (3) of article 2.
3. Remove bolt (5) from each side of mast assembly (2). 4. Remove pin (6) from the tilt cylinders on each side of the mast assembly.
103
7
IBCD582I IBCD514P
7. B16/18/20X Tilt forward mast assembly with the hoist. Remove bolts (8) from each side.
5. D,G15/18/20S(C)-2, GC15/18/20S(C)-2, B15/18S Tilt forward mast assembly about 8¡ with the hoist. Remove four bolts (7) from pit each side of the base of mast assembly.
WARNING Loosen the tension of straps to be connected with hoist when mast assembly is tilted forward. If straps are too tight, mast assembly could slide off when bolts (7), (8), (10) are removed.
8. Use the hoist to remove mast assembly from the truck. 9. Install the mast in the reverse order of removal. End By: a. Install forks. Lift Trucks Mast System
10
Disassembly & Assembly
Disassemble Mast Start By: a. Remove lift chain to be connected primary lift cylinder. b. Remove primary lift cylinder.
5
NOTE: The following disassembly and assembly procedure is for a full free triple lift mast. IBCD520P
4. Disconnect and remove chains(5) from the bottom of the mast.
2
7 6
1
IBCD518P
1. Remove hoses (1) along with the hose support clamps (2).
8
IBCD521P
5. Remove clamp (6) and bolt (7) from stationary mast and disconnect regulator (8) from secondary cylinder(For D,G15/18/20S(C)-2, GC15/18/20S(C)-2, B15/18S). 3 2 4
10
IBCD519P
2. Remove hose sheave (3).
9
3. Remove chain nut(4) from the top of the mast (each side).
10
IBCD504S
6. Remove tube assÕy (9) and bolt (10) from stationary mast and disconnect regulator (8) from secondary cylinder (For BC15/18/20T, B13/15/18T-2, B16/18/20X).
Lift Trucks Mast System
11
Disassembly & Assembly
15
IBCD523P
11
16 7. Remove top cylinder retainer bolts (11) from each side of the mast.
17
D,G15/18/20S(C)-2, GC15/18/20S(C)-2, B15/18S
12
16
IBCD524P
15
8. Remove cylinder retainer brackets(12) from each cylinder.
17 BC15/18/20T, B13/15/18T-2
IBCD527P
13
9. Remove secondary cylinders(13). Each cylinder weighs 38 kg (84 lb).
17
14
B16/18/20X IBCD584I
11. Remove bearing mounting pins(15) and screw (16) from the mast lower hinge mounting part.
IBCD526P
12. Check the condition of the bearings(17) located in each of the mast mounting bracket. Replace the bearings (17) with new if worn or damaged.
10. Check the condition of bearings(14) located in each of the tilt cylinder pin bores. Replace bearings(14) with new if worn or damaged.
Lift Trucks Mast System
12
Disassembly & Assembly
24
21
24
22
18
23 19
IBCD528P
IBCD534P
13. Move inner mast channel (21) downward.
18. Move intermediate mast channel (24) downward.
14. Remove bearings (18) and shims from the intermediate mast channel (24).
19. Remove bearings (22) and the shims from the stationary mast channel.
15. Remove nylon pads (19) and shims.
20. Remove nylon pads (23) and the shims.
20
24 25
IBCD533P
IBCD529P
16. Remove bearings (20) and shims from the inner mast channel (21).
21. Remove bearings (25) and the shims from the intermediate mast channel (24).
21
24
IBCD535P
IBCD530P
17. Fasten nylon straps and hoist to inner channel (21). Remove inner channel. The weight of the inner channel is 110 kg (243 lb).
Lift Trucks Mast System
22. Fasten nylon straps and a hoist to the intermediate mast channel (24). Remove intermediate mast channel. The intermediate mast channel weighs 112kg (247 lb).
13
Disassembly & Assembly
Assemble Mast NOTE: The standard, Full Free Lift and Full Free Triple Lift mast load bearings are all adjusted the same way. The mast shown in the following illustrations is the Full Free Triple Lift mast. 1. Make sure all parts are clean and free of dirt and foreign material. 2. Check all parts for damage, use new parts for replacement.
IBCD541P
A. Lower Bearing Adjustment of Intermediate Mast
4
5
4. Find narrowest point by ruler on the stationary mast in the area where the bearings make contact at 420 mm (16.5 in) channel lap.
NOTICE When the correct amount of shim has been installed behind bearings (1) there will be contact (zero clearance) between the bearings and the inner mast at most narrow point of mast.
6
3
A
C
B
IBCD505S Mast Adjustment Lower Bearings (A) Zero clearance. (B) Minimum clearance. (C) Zero clearance. (3) Bearing. (4) Bearing. (5) Shims. (6) Shims.
IBCD535P
5. Lifting by crane, insert intermediate mast into stationary mast from the upper side.
3. Select lower bearings (3) and (4) from the chart to obtain minimum clearance (B) between bearing and channel leg for full channel length. Use same bearing on left and right side.
Mast And Carriage Bearings Part No.
Bearingsize
Bearing O.D.*
D580006
Undersize
98.5 mm (3.878 in)
D580007
Standard
99.0 mm (3.898 in)
D580008
Oversize
99.5 mm (3.917 in)
* Permissible tolerance L 0.08 mm (.003 in)
Lift Trucks Mast System
14
Disassembly & Assembly
1 4 3
IBCD534P
IBCD533P
6. Install 1mm shim and bearing (1) of stationary upper basically.
2
9. Install 1mm shim and bearing (4) of intermediate lower basically.
1
4
5
6
3
IBCD538P
A
NOTE: When installing shims (2) behind bearings (1), make sure the amount of shim is divided equally when positioned behind each bearing.
B
7. Install the correct amount of shim (2) behind rollers until contact (zero clearance) is made between the bearings.
C
IBCD505S
8. Install pads (3) to each side. Refer to ÒUpper Pad AdjustmentÓ of Disassebly & Assembly.
Mast Adjustment Lower Bearings (A) Zero clearance. (B) Minimum clearance. (C) Zero clearance. (3) Bearing. (4) Bearing. (5) Shims. (6) Shims.
NOTE: When installing shims (5) behind bearings (4), make sure the amount of shim is divided equally when positioned behind each bearing (4).
Lift Trucks Mast System
15
Disassembly & Assembly
IBCD531P
IBCD534P
10. Make sure intermediate mast lower bearings are properly shimmed in the stationary mast by rolling up and down and moving intermediate mast to right and left. If clearance between both masts can be detected, pull out the intermediate mast from the stationary mast with crane and add shim 0.5 mm or 1 mm to both intermediate lower bearings.
13. Install 1 mm shim to each bearing of stationary mast upper basically. Bearing should be selected D580006 undersize bearing.
4
11. In case of standard and full free mast, inner lower bearings can be easily extruded by pulling down the inner mast from the bottom of stationary mast. If intermediate mast is stuck and cannot move by rolling up and down, there might be excessive shim. Pull out the intermediate mast from the stationary mast and remove shim 0.5 mm to both intermediate lower bearings. Repeat same procedure of above until properly shimmed. There is to be contact zero clearance (C) between intermediate lower bearings and stationary channel at approximately 420 mm (16.5 in) channel lap.
IBCD533P
14. Install 1mm shim and bearing (4) of intermediate lower basically.
B. Upper Bearing Adjustment of Stationary Mast
IBCD535P
12. Lift by crane, insert intermediate mast into stationary mast from the upper side.
Lift Trucks Mast System
16
Disassembly & Assembly
Repeat same procedure of above until properly shimmed. There is to be contact zero clearance (F) between stationary upper bearings and the widest point of intermediate mast to be checked before.
D E 7
C. Upper Pad Adjustment
8
E F
7
7
8
9
10
E
8
F 7
IBCD506S
9
Mast Adjustment Upper Bearings (D) Zero clearance. (E) 0.80 mm (.031 in) Clearance maximum. (F) Zero clearance. (7) Pads. (8) Shims. (9) Shims. (10) Shims.
8 10
E
IBCD506S Mast Adjustment Upper Bearings (D) Zero clearance. (E) 0.80 mm (.031 in) Clearance maximum. (F) Zero clearance. (7) Pads. (8) Shims. (9) Shims. (10) Shims.
17. Install shims (8) behind each pad (7) until there is 0.80 mm (.031 in) maximum clearance (E) between the pads and the inner and intermediate masts with the masts at full extension. Lift by crane, and pull out intermediate mast from stationary mast and insert the shims behind each pad. In case of standard and full free mast, the pads of stationary upper can be easily extruded by pulling down the inner mast from the bottom of stationary mast.
IBCD532P
15. Make sure stationary mast upper bearings are properly shimmed by rolling up and down and moving intermediate mast to right and left. If clearance between both masts can be detected, pull out the intermediate mast from the stationary mast with crane and add shim 0.5 mm or 1 mm to both stationary upper bearings. 16. In case of standard and full free mast, stationary upper bearings can be easily extruded by pulling down the inner mast from the bottom of stationary mast. If intermediate mast is stuck and cannot move by rolling up and down, there might be excessive shim. Pull out the intermediate mast from the stationary mast and remove shim 0.5 mm to both stationary upper bearings.
Lift Trucks Mast System
17
Disassembly & Assembly
D. Lower Bearing Adjustment of Inner Mast
4
5
6
3 IBCD542P
A
19. Find narrowest point by ruler on the intermediate mast in the area where the inner lower bearings make contact full length of intermediate mast excluding minimum channel lap 420 mm (16.5 in).
C
B
12
11
IBCD505S Mast Adjustment Lower Bearings (A) Zero clearance. (B)Minimum clearance. (C)Zero clearance. (3)Bearing. (4)Bearing. (5)Shims. (6)Shims.
IBCD530P
18. Select lower bearings (3) and (4) from the chart to obtain minimum clearance (B) between bearing and channel leg for full channel length. Use same bearing on left and right side.
20. Lifting by crane, insert inner mast (11) into intermediate mast (12) from the upper side.
Mast And Carriage Bearings Part No.
Bearing Size
Bearing O.D.*
D580006
Undersize
98.5 mm (3.878 in)
D580007
Standard
99.0 mm (3.898 in)
D580008
Oversize
99.5 mm (3.917 in)
13
* Permissible tolerance L 0.08mm (.003in)
IBCD528P
21. Install 1 mm shim and bearing (13) of intermediate upper basically.
Lift Trucks Mast System
18
Disassembly & Assembly
E. Upper Bearing Adjustment of intermediate Mast
14
Follow same procedure with above B. F. Upper Pad Adjustment of Intermediate Mast Follow same procedure with above C. 24. If the bearings were removed from the mast mounting brackets, install new ones.
IBCD529P
25. Put a small amount of clean grease on mounting bearing. Install mounting pins and screw into mast mounting brackets. Refer to Mast Mounting Group Adjustment of Testing & Adjusting.
22. Install 1mm shim and bearing (14) of inner lower basically.
4
5
6
3
A
15
B
IBCD526P
C
26. If the bearings were removed from the tilt cylinder pin bores (15), install new ones. IBCD505S Mast Adjustment Lower Bearings (A) Zero clearance. (B) Minimum clearance. (C) Zero clearance. (3) Bearing. (4) Bearing. (5) Shims. (6) Shims.
23. Make sure inner mast lower bearings are properly shimmed in the intermediate mast by rolling up and down and moving inner mast to right and left. If clearance between both masts can be detected, pull down the inner mast from the bottom of intermediate mast. Inner lower bearings can be easily extruded. Add shim 0.5 mm or 1 mm to both inner lower bearings. If inner mast is stuck and cannot move by rolling up and down, there might be excessive shim. Pull out the inner mast from the intermediate mast and remove shim 0.5 mm to both inner lower bearings. Repeat same procedure of above until properly shimmed. There is to be contact zero clearance (C) between inner lower bearings and intermediate channel at narrowest point. Lift Trucks Mast System
16
IBCD527P
27. Install secondary cylinders (16) into the stationary mast.
19
Disassembly & Assembly
24 10
17
9 23
IBCD524P
22 10
28. Install secondary cylinder mounting brackets (17) over the secondary cylinders. IBCD504S
31. Install regulator (22) to secondary cylinder and tube assÕy (23) and bolts (24) to stationary mast. (For BC15/18/20T, B13/15/18T-2, B16/18/20X)
18
IBCD523P
29. Install top cylinder retainer bolts (18) for the secondary cylinders.
25
IBCD520P 20
32. Connect chains (25) at the bottom of the mast.
19
21
27
IBCD521P
30. Install regulator (21) to secondary cylinder and clamp (19) and bolt (20) to stationary mast. (For D,G15/18/20S(C)-2, GC15/18/20S(C)-2, B15/18S)
26
IBCD519P
33. Connect chains (26) at the chain bracket of stationary mast upper. 34. Install sheave (27) of lift hose.
Lift Trucks Mast System
20
Disassembly & Assembly
28
IBCD518P
35. Install hoses (28) along with the hose support clamps. End by : a. Install primary lift cylinder. b. Install lift chain to be connected primary lift cylinder.
Lift Trucks Mast System
21
Disassembly & Assembly
Testing & Adjusting
Mast And Carriage Bearings
Carriage Adjustment NOTE: The standard, Full Free Lift and Full Free Triple Lift carriage load bearings are all adjusted the same way. The Full Free Triple Lift carriage is shown in the following illustrations.
A
A
D580006
Undersize
98.5 mm (3.878 in)
D580007
Standard
99.0 mm (3.898 in)
D580008
Oversize
99.5 mm (3.917 in)
4. Shim bolt as needed to obtain a 4.0 to 6.0 mm (.157 to .242 in) overlap (B) between bolt (3) and the carriage stop on the inner upright. (See Carriage Adjustment in Testing & Adjusting).
4
5(STD)
B
Bearing O.D.*
3. Equally shim both sides until contact (A) is made (zero clearance) between bearings and inner mast at narrowest point
Use the procedure that follows to adjust carriage load bearings.
A
Bearing Size
* Permissible tolerance of L 0.08mm (.003in)
To make the carriage clearance adjustments, carriage must be removed from the mast.
A
Part No.
3
C
D
5. Torque for screw.............34 L 7 NIm (25 L 5 lbIft)
C
6. Refer to ÒCarriage AssemblyÓ of Disassembly & Assembly.
C B
B
6
5 (FF, FFT)
VIEW A-A C
C
7
10
9
8
A VIEW C-C
VIEW B-B
IBCD581I Carriage Adjustment (3) Upper Bearings. (4) Shims. (5) Bolt. (6) Screw. (7) Side-roller Bearings. (8) Lower Bearings. (9) Pin-adjust. (10) Bolt. (A) Zero Clearance. (B) 4.0 to 6.0 mm. (.157 to .242 in) Clearance. (C) Minimum Clearance. (D) 4.5 L 0.5 mm
1. Select lower bearings from the chart to obtain minimum clearance (C) between bearings and channel leg for full channel length. Use same bearing in all two locations. 2. Select upper bearing from the chart to obtain minimum clearance (C) between bearings and channel leg for full channel length. Use same bearing at all two locations. (For G20SC-2, GC20SC-2, BC20T, D20SC-2, and B20X, bearings are same with upper, middle 4 locations.)
Lift Trucks Mast Systems
22
Testing & Adjusting
2. Make adjustments to chain anchor nuts (1) or bolts (2) for equal tension of the mast and carriage chains.
Chain Adjustments Chain Adjustment Check
3. Put LOCTITE NO.242 Thread Lock on the threads of the locknuts after the adjustment is completed.
IBCD505P 2
IBCD508P
Lift the carriage and mast high enough to put their full weight on the carriage and mast chains. Check the chains, and make sure the tension is the same.
Outer Lift Chains (2) Chain Anchor Bolts.
Chain Adjustment
Chain Wear Test
If the tension is not the same on both chains, do the procedure that follows:
Chain wear test is a measurement of wear of the chain links and pins. Do the steps that follow to check chain wear.
WARNING
1. Lift the mast and carriage enough to put tension on the lift chains.
Personal injury can be caused by sudden movement of the mast and carriage. Blocks must be used to prevent the mast and carriage from any movement while the adjustments are made. Keep hands and feet clear of any parts that can move.
2. Measure precisely ten links of chain distance at the center of pins in millimeter. A chain wear gauge can also be used. 3. Calculate chain wear rate. New one pitch = 15.88 mm Chain wear rate (%) Actual measurement - 158.8 = 158.8
x 100
WARNING Do not put a lift truck into service if the chain wear indication is 2% or more. A reading of 2% or more could cause damage or injury to persons.
1
IBCD506P Inner Lift Chains (1) Chain Anchor Nuts.
4. If the chain wear indication is 2% or more, replace the lift chain. 1. Lift the mast and carriage and put blocks under the mast and carriage to release the tension from the lift chains.
Lift Trucks Mast Systems
23
Testing & Adjusting
Carriage and Mast Height Adjustment
Forks Parallel Check
1. Move the mast either forward or backward so it is in the vertical position.
1. Lift the mast and operate the tilt control lever, until the top surface of the forks is parallel with the floor. Place two straight bars, that are the same width as the carriage, across the forks as shown. Measure the distance from the bottom of each end of the two bars to the floor. The forks must be parallel within 3 mm (.12 in) for Full Tapered and Polished (FTP) forks, all other forks 6.4 mm (.25 in), for their complete length.
2. Lower the carriage completely.
2. If not parallel, determine which one is defective and replace it.
A
IDCS130S Forks Parallel Check (Typical Example)
IBCD585I
3. On Full Free Lift and Full Free Triple Lift models, the bottom of the inner mast must be even with the bottom of the stationary mast. 4. Measure the distance from the bottom of the inner upright to the bottom of carriage bearing end. 5. The measurement (A) must be as follows: <STD> D,G15/18/20S(C)-2.......................22 mm(0.866 in) B15/18S .........................................7 mm (0.276 in) B16/18/20X, GC15/18/20S(C)-2, B13/15/18T-2, BC15/18/20T ........- 6 mm(-0.236 in) <FFL & FFTL> D, G15/18/20S(C)-2......................36 mm (1.417in) B15/18S .......................................21 mm (0.827 in) GC15/18/20S(C)-2 .......................11 mm (0.433 in) B16/18/20X, B13/15/18T-2, BC15/18/20T..................................8 mm (0.315 in) NOTE : If the above measurements are not correct, make adjustments to the chains to get the correct measurement. See Chain Adjustments in TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
Lift Trucks Mast Systems
24
Testing & Adjusting
Tilt Cylinder Length Check
Tilt Cylinder Alignment If the tilt cylinders are out of alignment, extra stresses in the mast assembly and the mast hinge area will result. To prevent damage, the tilt cylinders must stop evenly at the end of the tilt back and tilt forward strokes. Tilt Angle Check
IDCD009P
1. Tilt the mast to full forward position. Measure the extended length of the cylinder rods from the cylinder housing to the mast. The difference of length between the two cylinder rods must be within 3.18 mm (.125 in) of each other. IDCD008P Tilt Angle Check (Typical Example)
Drift Test The tilt angle of the mast must be checked in the full tilt back and full tilt forward positions. A tilt indicator or a protractor can be used to measure the angle. Both sides of the mast must be checked to make sure that the mast is not twisted.
Drift is movement of the mast or carriage that is the result of hydraulic leakage in the cylinders or control valve. Before testing the drift:
The tilt angle is determined by the tilt cylinders used. See tilt cylinders in specifications to determine the tilt angle from the cylinder being used.
WARNING Personal injury can be caused by sudden movement of the mast or carriage. Use wood blocks and clamps to hold the mast in this position. Keep hands and feet clear of any parts that can move.
1. Check the chain adjustment and tilt cylinder alignment and make necessary adjustments. 2. Lift the mast approximately 762 mm (30 in). Use wood blocks and clamps to hold the mast in this position. 3. Check the mast hinge bolts to make sure they are tight. 4. Remove the blocks and clamps and lower the mast.
Lift Trucks Mast Systems
25
Testing & Adjusting
Drift Test For Lift System 1. Secure a rated capacity load on the forks of the lift truck. Operate the lift truck through a complete lift and tilt cycle until the oil is at normal temperature of operation, 45 to 55 ¡C (113 to 131 ¡F).
2
2. Put the mast in a vertical position. Raise a rated capacity load to a sufficient height to test the lift cylinders. 3
3. Measure any drift of the carriage for a ten minute period. Drift for all models shall not exceed 100.0 mm (4.00 in).
1
IBCD513P Tilt Cylinder Adjustment (1) Pivot eye. (2) Bolt. (3) Rod.
1. Loosen bolt (2) at pivot eye (1).
Tilt Cylinder Adjustment
2. Turn rod (3) into or out of pivot eye (1) to obtain the correct length. The minimum length from the end of rod to the rear face of eye is 16 mm.
WARNING Tilt cylinder pivot eyes can loosen if the torque on the pivot eye clamping bolt is not tight enough. This will let the tilt cylinder rod turn in the tilt cylinder eye. The cylinder rod may twist out of the pivot eye and the tilt cylinder will be out of alignment or may let the mast fall and cause personal injury or damage. When the rod lengths are made even, the tilt angle differences or the mast alignment will no longer be a problem.
16mm
To correct the tilt angle or tilt cylinder length, an adjustment must be made to the tilt cylinder as follows :
EHCS046S
3. Tighten bolt (2) and the nut to a torque of 95 L 15 N¥m (70 L 10 lb¥ft).
Lift Trucks Mast Systems
26
Testing & Adjusting
(1) With chains adjusted for equal tension, run mast to full lift. If mast does not kick (move) to one side, no shims are needed. If mast does kick (move) to one side, disconnect cylinder from the bar on that side. Add shim, connect cylinder, adjust chains and run mast to full lift to check for kick. Repeat process if necessary. The total shim pack must not be more than three shims maximum.
Lift & Tilt Mounting Group Adjustment
(2) Install bearing outer race to a depth of (F) ............................4.5 L 0.8 mm (.177 L .031 in).
A
(3) Tilt cylinder installation shown. (4) (Full Free Lift Mast Only): Tighten nuts until U-bolt is firm against cylinder, do not apply standard torque.
1
3 VIEW A-A B
B 2
(F) VIEW B-B
4
IBCD508S
Lift Trucks Mast Systems
27
Testing & Adjusting
Mast mounting Group Adjustment
2
3
2
1 IBCD502S
For B13/15/18T-2, BC15/18/20T
1
3
IBCD509S
For D,G15/18/20S(C)-2, GC15/18/20S(C)-2
3
2 IBCD582I
For B16/18/20X
1 3
1. Tighten screw (1) that holds bearing (3) to hinge bracket of stationary mast to a torque of 34 L7 NIm (25 L 5 lbIft).
IBCD510S
2. Install roll pin (2) to a depth 2 ~ 3 mm (0.079 ~ 0.118 in) from surface of bearing.
For B15/18S 3. Apply the crean grease to a surface of bearing. 4. Apply Loctite No242 to bolts and tighten with a torque 180 L 20 NIm (130 L 15 lbIft). Lift Trucks Mast Systems
28
Testing & Adjusting
SB4021E01 Oct. 2000
Schematic Lift Trucks Hydraulic System D15S-2, D18S-2, D20SC-2 G15S-2, G18S-2, G20SC-2
11
9
8
9
6
7
12
MODEL : D15S-2, D18S-2, D20SC-2 G15S-2, G18S-2, G20SC-2
5
T 10 CF EF
LS
13 P
Item
1 4 3 2
Components
1
Hydraulic Pump
2
Suction Strainer
3
Hydraulic Filter
4
Control Valve
5
Flow Regulator
6
Flow Protector - Primary
7
Flow Protector - Secondary
8
Lift Cylinder - Primary
9
Lift Cylinder - Secondary
10
Tilt Cylinder
11
Steering Cylinder
12
Steering Unit
13
Priority Valve
SB4049E00 Oct. 2000
Schematic Lift Trucks Electric System D15S-2, D18S-2, D20SC-2
SB4022E00 May 2000
Schematic Lift Trucks Electric Systems G15S-2, G18S-2, G20SC-2
SB2309E01
Operation & Maintenance Manual LIFT TRUCKS G15S-2, G18S-2, G20SC-2 D15S-2, D18S-2, D20SC-2
WARNING Do not start, operate or service this machine unless you have read and understand these instructions and received proper training. Unsafe or improper use of the machine may cause serious injury or death. Operators and maintenance personnel must read this manual and receive training before operating or maintaining the machine. This manual should be kept with the machine for reference and periodically reviewed by the machine operator and by all personnel who will come into contact with it.
The following warning is provided pursuant to California Health & Safety Code Sections 25247.5 et, seq,
WARNING California Proposition 65 Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
Information Section
Table of Contents Information Section Lift Truck Operation............................................57 Operating Techniques ........................................59 Parking the Lift Truck .........................................63 Storage Information............................................64 Transportation Hints ...........................................65 Towing Information .............................................66
Table of Contents .................................................1 Foreword ..............................................................2
Safety Section Important Safety Information................................4 Safety ...................................................................5 Warning Signs and Labels .........................5 General Hazard Information.......................9 Operation Information ..............................10 Maintenance Information .........................13 Operator Restraint System (If Equipped) .................................................................16 Avoiding Lift Truck Tipovers .....................19 How to Survive in a Tipover (If Operator Restraint System Equipped) .................................................................24
Maintenance Section Tire Inflation Information.....................................67 Torque Specification ...........................................68 Cooling System Specifications...........................70 Fuel Specifications .............................................72 Lubricant Specifications .....................................74 Lubricant Viscosities and Refill Capacities ........76 Maintenance Intervals ........................................77 When Required ..................................................78 Every 10 Service Hours or Daily ........................90 First 50 - 100 Service Hours ...............................94 First 250 Service Hours....................................100 Every 250 Service Hours or Monthly ...............101 Every 500 Service Hours or 3 Months .............105 Every 1000 Service Hours or 6 Months ...........108 Every 1500 Service Hours or 9 Months ...........110 Every 2000 Service Hours or 12 Months..........111
General Section Specifications .....................................................26 Noise and Vibration ............................................29 Capacity Chart ..................................................30 Serial Number ...................................................32 OperatorÕs Warning and Identification Plate .....33
Environment Protection Section Operation Section Environment Protection ....................................119 Operator's Station and Monitoring Systems.......35 Lift Truck Controls ..............................................39 Refueling ............................................................42 Before Starting the Engine .................................45 Lift Fork Adjustment ...........................................47 Starting the Engine.............................................51 Dual Fuel System...............................................54 After Starting the Engine ....................................56
Index Section Index.................................................................120
¥ Worldwide Network
-1-
Information Section
Foreword Photographs or illustrations guide the operator through correct procedures of checking, operation and maintenance of the DAEWOO operator restraint system.
Literature Information This manual should be stored in the operator's compartment in the literature holder or seat back literature storage area.
SAFE and EFFICIENT OPERATION of a lift truck depends to a great extent on the skill and alertness on the part of the operator. To develop this skill the operator should read and understand the Safe Driving Practices contained in this manual.
This manual contains safety, operation, transportation, lubrication and maintenance information. Some photographs or illustrations in this publication show details or attachments that can be different from your lift truck. Guards and covers might have been removed for illustrative purposes.
Forklift trucks seldom tipover, but in the rare event they do, the operator may be pinned to the ground by the lift truck or the overhead guard. This could result in serious injury or death.
Continuing improvement and advancement of product design might have caused changes to your lift truck which are not included in this publication. Read, study and keep this manual with the lift truck.
Operator training and safety awareness is an effective way to prevent accidents, but accidents can still happen. The DAEWOO operator restraint system can minimize injuries. The DAEWOO operator restraint system keeps the operator substantially within the confines of the operatorÕs compartment and the overhead guard.
Whenever a question arises regarding your lift truck, or this publication, please consult your DAEWOO dealer for the latest available information.
This manual contains information necessary for Safe Operation. Before operating a lift truck make sure that the necessary instructions are available and understood.
Safety The Safety Section lists basic safety precautions. In addition, this section identifies the text and locations of warning signs and labels used on the lift truck.
Operation The Operation Section is a reference for the new operator and a refresher for the experienced one. This section includes a discussion of gauges, switches, lift truck controls, attachment controls, transportation and towing information.
Read and understand the basic precautions listed in the Safety Section before operating or performing lubrication, maintenance and repair on this lift truck.
Operator Restraint System(If Equipped)
Photographs and illustrations guide the operator through correct procedures of checking, starting, operating and stopping the lift truck.
This manual contains safety, operation and maintenance information for the DAEWOO operator restraint system. Read, study and keep it handy.
Operating techniques outlined in this publication are basic. Skill and techniques develop as the operator gains knowledge of the lift truck and its capabilities.
WARNING Your DAEWOO truck comes equipped with an operator restraint system. Should it become necessary to replace the seat for any reason, it should only be replaced with another DAEWOO operator restraint system.
Maintenance The Maintenance Section is a guide to equipment care. The illustrated, step-by-step instructions are grouped by servicing intervals. Items without specific intervals are listed under ÒWhen RequiredÓ topics. Items in the ÒMaintenance IntervalsÓ chart are referenced to detailed instructions that follow. -2-
Information Section
Maintenance Intervals Use the service hour meter to determine servicing intervals. Calendar intervals shown (daily, weekly, monthly, etc.) can be used instead of service hour meter intervals if they provide more convenient servicing schedules and approximate the indicated service hour meter reading. Recommended service should always be performed at the interval that occurs first. Under extremely severe, dusty or wet operating conditions, more frequent lubrication than is specified in the ÒMaintenance IntervalsÓ chart might be necessary. Perform service on items at multiples of the original requirement. For example, at ÒEvery 500 Service Hours or 3 MonthsÓ, also service those items listed under ÒEvery 250 Service Hours or MonthlyÓ and ÒEvery 10 Service Hours or DailyÓ.
Environment Management Note that DAEWOO INDUSTRIAL VEHICLE DIVISION is ISO 14001 certified which is harmonized with ISO 9001. Periodic ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITS & ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS have been made by internal and external inspection entities. LIFE-CYCLE ANALYSIS has also been made through out the total product life. ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM includes DESIGN FOR ENVIRONMENT from the initial stage of the design. ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM considers environmental laws & regulations, reduction or elimination of resource consumption as well as environmental emission or pollution from industrial activities, energy saving, environment-friendly product design(lower noise, vibration, emission, smoke, heavy metal free, ozone depleting substance free, etc.), recycling, material cost reduction, and even environmentally oriented education for the employee.
-3-
Safety Section
Important Safety Information Most accidents involving product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards, and use common sense. Persons must also have the necessary training, skills and tools before attempting to perform these functions. Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death. Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information. Safey precautions and warnings are provided in this manual and on the product. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or other persons. The hazards are identified by the ÒSafety Alert SymbolÓ and followed by a ÒSignal WordÓ such as ÒWARNINGÓ as shown below.
WARNING
The meaning of this safety alert symbol is as follows: Attention! Become Alert! Your Safety is Involved. The message that appears under the warning, explaining the hazard, can be either written or pictorially presented. Operations that may cause product damage are identified by NOTICE labels on the product and in this publication. DAEWOO cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard, and common sense is always required. The warnings in this publication and on the product are therefore not all inclusive. Before any tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not specifically recommended by DAEWOO is used, you must be sure that it is safe for you and others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures you choose. The information, specifications, and illustration in this publication are on the basis of information available at the time it was written. The specifications, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can affect the service given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before starting any job. DAEWOO dealers have the most current information available.
-4-
Safety Section
Safety The safety rules and regulations in this section are representative of some, but not all rules and regulations noted under the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and are paraphrased without representation that the OSHA rules and regulations have been reproduced verbatim.
Warning Signs and Labels
Please refer to 1910. 178 in Federal Register Vol. 37, No. 202, the National Fire Protection Association No. 505 (NFPA), American National Standard, ANSI B56. 1 Safety Standard for Low lift and High Lift Trucks and subsequent revisions for a complete list of OSHA rules and regulations as to the safe operation of powered industrial lift trucks. Since regulations vary from country to country outside in U.S.A., operate this lift truck in accordance with local regulations.
Make sure that you can read all safety signs. Clean or replace these if you cannot read the words or see the pictures. When cleaning the labels use a cloth, water and soap. Do not use solvent, gasoline, etc.
There are several specific safety signs on your lift truck. Their exact location and description of the hazard are reviewed in this section. Please take the time to familiarize yourself with these safety signs.
You must replace a label if it is damaged, missing or cannot be read. If a label is on a part that is replaced, make sure a new label is installed on the replaced part. See your dealer for new labels.
DAEWOO lift trucks are manufactured according to the regulations and standards laid down in EU Machinery Directive 98 / 37 /EC and EMC directive 89/336/EC. Please refer to the Directives 89 / 655 /EC and 89 / 391 /EC and its amendments for the safe use of DAEWOO lift trucks. The most effective method of preventing serious injury or death to the lift truck operator or others is for the lift truck operator to be familiar with the proper operation of the lift truck, to be alert and to avoid actions or conditions which can result in an accident.
IPSO001P
Located on the right of the steering wheel.
Do not operate a lift truck if in need of repair, defective or in any way unsafe. Report all defects and unsafe conditions immediately. Do not attempt any adjustments or repairs unless trained and authorized to do so.
WARNING Improper operation or maintenance could result in injury or death. Do not operate or work on the lift truck unless you are properly trained. Read and understand the Operation and Maintenacne Manual. Additional manuals are available from dealers.
(This also provides allowable lift truck capacity information.)
-5-
Safety Section
8. Do not permit riders on forks or machine at any time. 9. Do not allow anyone to stand or pass under the elevated portion of any machine. 10. Be sure operating surface can safely support machine. 11. Operate machine and attachments only from operator's position. IPSO002P
12. Do not handle unstable or loosely stacked loads.
Located on the right side of the operator's seat.
13. Use minimum tilt when picking up or depositing a load.
WARNING Only trained and authorized personnel may operate this machine. For safe operation, read and follow the operation and maintenance Manual furnished with this lift truck and observe the following warnings:
14. Use extreme care when handling long, high, or wide loads. 15. Forks should be completely under load and spread apart as far as load permits. 16. Machine should be equipped with overhead guard or equivalent protection. Where load requires it, use load backrest extension. Use extreme caution if operating without these devices.
1. Before starting machine. Check all controls and warning devices for proper operation. 2. Refer to machine identification plate for allowable machine capacity. Do not overload. Operate machines equipped with attachments as partially loaded machines when not handling a load.
17. Parking jLower lifting mechanism to floor. Put directional control or shift lever in neutral. Set parking/secondary brake. Turn ÒON - OFFÓ switch off. Chock wheels if machine is on incline. Disconnect battery when storing electric machines.
3. Put directional control or shift lever in neutral before ÒON j OFFÓ switch is turned on. 4. Start, turn and brake smoothly. Slow down for turns, slippery or uneven surfaces. Extremely poor surfaces should be repaired. Avoid running over loose objects or holes in the roadway surfaces. Use extreme caution when turning on inclines.
18. Observe safety rules when handling fuel for engine powered machine and when changing batteries for electric machines.
5. Travel with load as low as possible and tilted back. If load interferes with visibility, travel with load trailing. 6. On grade operations travel with load up grade. 7. Watch out for pedestrians and obstructions. Check overhead clearances.
-6-
Safety Section
WARNING
WARNING
Contents under pressure may be hot. Allow to cool before opening.
Do not stand or ride on the forks. Do not stand or ride on a load or pallet on the forks. Do not stand or walk under the forks.
IA3M1003 IAOY005I
Located on the radiator top tank by the radiator cap. Located on the lift cylinder.
WARNING WARNING Operation without this device in place may be hazardous. No hands. Do not place hands in this area.Do not touch, lean on, or reach through the mast or permit others to do so.
IB6OO03P
Located on the load backrest. IPSO003P
Located on the mast.
-7-
Safety Section
WARNING
WARNING
Operation without this device in place may be hazardous. This guard conforms to A.N.S.I.
To avoid personal injury, stay clear of moving fan.
B56.1 and F.E.M.Section 4. This design has been tested with an impact of appropriate value.
IAOY009I
Located inside the engine compartment cover.
IB6OS02P
WARNING
Located on the Overhead Guard.
WARNING To avoid personal injury, allow no riders. A lift truck is designed for only one operator and no riders.
IC3O001P
Deflate tire before removing wheel nuts at tire change.
ILOS002P
Located beside the operator's station.
-8-
Safety Section
General Hazard Information Always use the overhead guard. The overhead guard is intended to protect the lift truck operator from overhead obstructions and from falling objects. A truck that is used for handing small objects or uneven loads must be fitted with a load backrest.
G
IN
N
R
A
W
t no ate do per o
If the lift truck must be operated without the overhead guard in place due to low overhead clearance, use extreme care. Make sure there is no possibility of falling objects from any adjacent storage or work area. Make sure the load is stable and fully supported by the carriage and the load backrest extension (if equipped).
IAOY010I
Attach a ÒDo Not OperateÓ or similar warning tag to start switch or controls before servicing or repairing the lift truck.
Do not raise loads any higher than necessary and never raise a load higher than 1830 mm (72 in) with the overhead guard removed.
Do not start or service the lift truck when a ÒDO NOT OPERATEÓ or similar warning tag is attached to the start switch or controls.
Always use load backrest extension when the carriage or attachment does not fully support the load. The load backrest extension is intended to prevent the load or any part of the load from falling backwards into the operator's station.
Wear a hard hat, protective glasses and other protective equipment as required by job conditions. Know the width of your attachments so proper clearance can be maintained when operating near fences, boundary obstacles, etc.
When operation the lift truck, do not depend only on flashing lights or back-up alarm (if equipped) to warn pedestrians.
Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry that can catch on controls or other parts of the lift truck.
Always be aware of pedestrians and do not proceed until the pedestrians are aware of your presence and intended actions and have moved clear of the lift truck and/or load.
Keep the lift truck, especially the deck and steps, free of foreign material such as debris, oil tools and other items which are not part of the lift truck.
Do not drive lift truck up to anyone standing in front of an object.
Secure all loose items such as lunch boxes, tools and other items which are not part of the lift truck.
Obey all traffic rules and warning signs.
Know the appropriate work-site hand signals and who gives them. Accept signals from one person only.
Keep hands, feet and head inside the operator station. Do not hold onto the overhead guard while operating the lift truck. Do not climb on any part of the mast or overhead guard or permit others to do so. Do not allow unauthorized personnel to ride on the forks or any other part of the lift truck, at any time. When working in a building or dock, observe floor load limits and overhead clearances.
-9-
Safety Section
Inhaling freon gas through a lit cigarette or other smoking method or inhaling fumes released from a flame contacting freon can cause bodily harm or death. Do not smoke when servicing air conditioners or wherever freon gas may be present.
Operation Information Mounting and Dismounting Mount and dismount the lift truck carefully.
Never put maintenance fluids into glass containers.
Clean your shoes and wipe your hands before mounting.
Use all cleaning solutions with care.
Face the lift truck when mounting and dismounting.
Do not use steam, solvent, or high pressure to clean electrical components.
Use both hands face the lift truck when mounting and dismounting.
Report all needed repairs.
Use the handgrips for mounting and dismounting. Do not try to climb on or off the lift truck when carrying tools or supplies. Never get on or off a moving lift truck. Do not use any controls as handholds when entering or leaving the operator's station. Never get on or off a moving lift truck. Never jump off the lift truck. IPSO007P
Inspect the part of the chain that is normally operated over the crosshead roller. When the chain bends over the roller, the movement of the parts against each other causes wear.
Keep hands and steering wheel free of slippery material.
Inspect to be sure that chain link pins do not extend outside of the bore hole.
Perform a walk-around inspection daily and at the start of each shift. Refer to the topic ÒWalk-around InspectionÓ in ÒEvery 10 Service Hours or DailyÓ section of this manual.
Before Starting the Lift Truck
If any single link pin is extended beyond its connecting corresponding link, it should be suspected of being broken inside of its bore hole.
Adjust the seat so that full brake pedal travel can be obtained with the operator's back against the seat back.
Inspect the chain anchor and the anchor links for wear.
Make sure the lift truck is equipped with a lighting system as required by conditions. Make sure all hydraulic controls are in the HOLD position. Make sure the direction control lever is in the NEUTRAL position. Make sure the parking brake is engaged. Make sure no one is standing and/or working on,
- 10 -
Safety Section
underneath or close to the lift truck before operating the lift truck.
An operator must constantly observe his lift truck for proper operation.
Operate the lift truck and controls only from the operator's station.
Operating the Lift Truck Always keep the lift truck under control.
Make sure the lift truck horn, lights, backup alarm (if equipped) and all other devices are working properly.
Obey all traffic rules and warning signs. Never leave the lift truck with the engine operating, or with the parking brake disengaged.
Check for proper operation of mast and attachments. Pay particular attention to unusual noises or erratic movement which might indicate a problem.
Operate the engine only in a well ventilated area. Lower mast, with or without load, before turning or traveling. Tip over could result. Watch out for overhead obstructions.
Make sure service and parking brakes, steering, and directional controls are operational. Make sure all personnel are clear of lift truck and travel path.
Always observe floor load limits and overhead clearance.
Refer to the topic ÒLift Truck OperationÓ in the ÒOperation SectionÓ of this manual for specific starting instructions.
Start, turn, and brake smoothly, slow down for turns, grades, slippery or uneven surfaces.
Starting the Lift truck
G
IN
N
R
A
W
t no ate do per o
IAOY013I
Use special care when operation on grades. Do not angle across or turn on grades. Do not use lift truck on slippery grades. Travel with forks downgrade when unloaded. Travel with load upgrade.
IAOY010I
Do not start the engine or move any of the controls if there is a ÒDO NOT OPERATEÓ or similar warning tag attached to the start switch or controls.
Do not overload, or handle offset, unstable, or loosely stacked loads. Refer to load capacity plate on the lift truck. Use extreme caution when handing suspended, long, high or wide load.
Before Operating the Lift Truck Test brakes, steering controls, horn and other devices for proper operation. Report faulty performance. Do not operate lift truck until repaired. Learn how your lift truck operates. Know its safety devices. Know how the attachments work. Before moving the lift truck, look around. Start, turn and brake smoothly.
- 11 -
Safety Section
Loading or Unloading Trucks/Trailers Do not operate lift trucks on trucks or trailers which are not designed or intended for that purpose. Be certain truck or trailer brakes are applied and wheel chocks in place (or be certain unit is locked to the loading dock) before entering onto trucks or trailers. If trailer is not coupled to tractor, make sure the trailer landing gear is properly secured in place. On some trailers, extra supports may be needed to prevent upending or corner dipping.
IKOO038I
Tilt elevated load forward only when directly over unloading area and with load as low as possible.
Be certain dock plates are in good condition and properly placed and secured. Do not exceed the rated capacity of dock boards or bridge plates.
Do not stunt ride or indulge in horseplay. Always look and keep a clear view of the path of travel.
Lift Truck Parking
Travel in reverse if load or attachment obstructs visibility. Use extreme caution if visibility is obstructed.
When leaving the operator station, park the lift truck in authorized areas only. Do not block traffic.
Stay in designated travel path, clear of dock edges, ditches, other dropoffs and surfaces which cannot safely support the lift truck. Slow down and use extra care through doorways, intersections and other location where visibility is reduceds. Slow down for and avoid pedestrians, other vehicles, obstruction, pot holes and other hazards or objects in the path of travel.
IB6OS02P
¥ Park the lift truck level, with the forks lowered and the mast tilted forward until the fork tips touch the floor.
Always use overhead guards except where operation conditions do not permit. Do not operate lift truck in high stacking areas without overhead guards.
¥ Move the direction control lever to NEUTRAL. When stacking, watch for falling objects. Use load backrest extension and overhead guard.
¥ Engage the parking brake. ¥ Turn the key switch off and remove the key.
Refer to the topic ÒOperation TechniquesÓ in the ÒOperation SectionÓ of this manual.
¥ Turn the disconnect switch to OFF and remove the key (if equipped). ¥ Block the drive wheels when parking on an incline.
- 12 -
Safety Section
Maintenance Information Perform all maintenance unless otherwise specified as follows :
They will throw or cut any object or tool that falls or is pushed into them.
¥ Park the lift truck in authorized areas only. ¥ Park the lift truck level, with the forks lowered and the mast tilted forward until the fork tips touch the floor. ¥ Place the transmission controls in neutral. ¥ Engage the parking brake. ¥ Stop the engine. ¥ Remove the start switch key and turn the disconnect switch OFF (if equipped). ¥ Block the drive wheels when parking on an incline.
Do not use a kinked or frayed wire rope cable. Wear gloves when handling the wire rope cable. Retainer pins, when struck with force, can fly out and injure nearby persons. Make sure the area is clear of people when driving retainer pins. Wear protective glasses when striking a retainer pin to avoid injury to your eyes. Chips or other debris can fly off objects when struck. Make sure no one can be injured by flying debris before striking any object.
Pressure Air Pressure air can cause personal infury. When using pressure air for cleaning, wear a protective face shield, protective clothing and protective shoes.
Falling Objects Protective Structure(FOPS) This is an attached guard located above the operator's compartment and secured to the lift truck.
The maximum air pressure must be below 205 kPa (30 psi) for cleaning purposes.
To avoid possible weakening of the Falling Objects Protective Structure (FOPS), consult a DAEWOO dealer before altering, by adding weight to, welding on, or cutting or drilling holes into the structure.
Fluid Penetration Always use a board or cardboard when checking for a leak. Escaping fluid under pressure, even a pinhole size leak, can penetrate body tissue, causing serious injury, and possible death. If fluid is injected into your skin, it must be treated by a doctor familiar with this type of injury immediately.
The overhead guard is not intended to protect against every possible impact. The overhead guard may not protect against some objects penetrating into the operator's station from the sides or ends of the lift truck.
Crushing or Cutting Prevention
The lift truck is equipped with an overhead guard and FOPS as standard. If there is a possibility of overhead objects falling through the guard, the guard must be equipped with smaller holes or a plexiglass cover.
Support equipment and attachments properly when working beneath them. Do not depend on hydraulic cylinders to hold it up. Any attachment can fall if a control is moved, or if a hydraulic line breaks.
Any altering done that is not specifically authorized by DAEWOO invalidates DAEWOO's FOPS certification. The protection offered by this FOPS will be impaired if it has been subjected to structural damage. Structural damage can be caused by an overturn accident, by falling objects, etc.
Never attempt adjustments while the lift truck is moving or the engine is running unless otherwise specified. Where there are attachment linkages, the clearance in the linkage area will increase or decrease with movement of the attachment.
Do not mount any item such as fire extinguishers, first aid kits and lights by welding brackets to or drilling holes in any FOPS structure. See your DAEWOO dealer for mounting guidelines.
Stay clear of all rotating and moving parts. Keep objects away from moving fan blades.
- 13 -
Safety Section
Burn Prevention
Fire or Explosion Prevention
Coolant
All fuels, most lubricants and some coolant mixtures are flammable.
At operating temperature, the engine coolant is hot and under pressure. The radiator and all lines to heaters or the engine contain hot water or steam. Any contact can cause severe burns.
Fuel leaked or spilled onto hot surfaces or electrical components can cause a fire. Do not smoke while refueling or in a refueling area.
Steam can cause personal injury.
Do not smoke in areas where batteries are charged, or where flammable materials are stored.
Check the coolant level only after engine has been stopped and the fill cap is cool enough to remove with your bare hand.
Batteries in series can be located in separate compartments. When using jumper cables always connect positive(+) cable to positive(+) terminal of battery connected to starter solenoid and negative(-) cable from external source to starter negative(-) terminal. (If not equipped with starter negative(-) terminal, connect to engine block.)
Remove the cooling system fill cap slowly to relieve pressure. Cooling system additive contains alkali that can cause personal injury. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes and do not drink. Allow cooling system components to cool before draining.
See the Operation Section of this manual for specific starting instructions.
Oils
Clean and tighten all electrical connections. Check daily for loose or frayed electrical wires. Have all loose or frayed electrical wires tightened, repaired or replaced before operation the lift truck.
Hot oil and components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or components to contact the skin. At operation temperature, the hydraulic tank is hot and can be under pressure.
Keep all fuels and lubricants stored in properly marked containers and away from all unauthorized persons.
Remove the hydraulic tank fill cap only after the engine has been stopped and the fill cap is cool enough to remove with your bare hand.
Store all oily rags or other flammable material in a protective container, in a safe place.
Remove the hydraulic tank fill cap slowly to relieve pressure.
Do not weld or flame cut on pipes or tubes that contain flammable fluids. Clean them thoroughly with nonflammable solvent before welding or flame cutting on them.
Relieve all pressure in air, oil fuel or cooling systems before any lines, fittings or related items are disconnected or removed. Batteries
Remove all flammable materials such as fuel, oil and other debris before they accumulate on the lift truck.
Batteries give off flammable fumes which can explode.
Do not expose the lift truck to flames, burning brush, etc., if at all possible.
Do not smoke when observing the battery electrolyte levels. Electrolyte is an acid and can cause personal injury if it contacts skin or eyes.
Shields, which protect hot exhaust components from oil or fuel spray in the event of a line, tube or seal failure, must be installed correctly.
Always wear protective glasses when working with batteries.
Do not operate in areas where explosive gases exist or are suspected.
- 14 -
Safety Section
Fire Extinguisher
¥ End fittings damaged or leaking. ¥ Outer covering chafed or cut and wire reinforcing exposed. ¥ Outer covering ballooning locally. ¥ Evidence of kinking or crushing of the flexible part of hose. Armouring embedded in the outer cover. ¥ End fittings displaced. ¥
Have a fire extinguisher-type BC and 1.5KG minimum capacity-on rear overhead guard leg with latch and know how to use it. Inspect and have it serviced as recommended on its instruction plate. Ether Ether is poisonous and flammable.
Make sure that all clamps, guards and heat shields are installed correctly to prevent vibration, rubbing against other parts, and excessive heat during operation.
Breathing ether vapors or repeated contact of ether with skin can cause personal injury. Use ether only in well-ventilated areas. Do not smoke while changing ether cylinders.
Tire Information Explosions of air-inflated tires have resulted from heat-induced gas combustion inside the tires. The heat, generated by welding or heating rim components, external fire, or excessive use of brakes can cause gaseous combustion.
Use ether with care to avoid fires. Do not store replacement ether cylinders in living areas or in the operator's compartment. Do not store ether cylinders in direct sunlight or at temperatures above 39¡C (102¡F).
A tire explosion is much more violent than a blowout. The explosion can propel the tire, rim and axle components as far as 500 m (1500 ft) or more from the lift truck. Both the force of the explosion and the flying debris can cause personal injury or death, and property damage.
Discard cylinders in a safe place. Do not puncture or burn cylinders. Keep ether cylinders out of the reach of unauthorized personnel.
AT LEAST 15m (50 ft)
Lines, Tubes and Hoses
AT LEAST 500m (1500 ft)
Do not bend or strike high pressure lines. Do not install bent or damaged lines, tubes or hoses. Repair any loose or damaged fuel and oil lines, tubes and hoses. Leaks can cause fires. Contact your DAEWOO dealer for repair or replacement. Check lines, tubes and hoses carefully. Do not use your bare hand to check for leaks. Use a board or cardboard to check for leaks. See Fluid Penetration in the Safety Section for more details. Tighten all connections to the recommended torque. Replace if any of the following conditions are found.
IAOY012I
Do not approach a warm tire closer than the outside of the area represented by the shaded area in the above drawing.
- 15 -
Safety Section
Dry nitrogen(N2) gas is recommended for inflation of tires. If the tires were originally inflated with air, nitrogen is still preferred for adjusting the pressure. Nitrogen mixes properly with air.
Operator Restraint System (If Equipped) Warning Signs and Labels
Nitrogen inflated tires reduce the potential of a tire explosion, because nitrogen does not support combustion. Also, nitrogen helps prevent oxidation and the resulting deterioration of rubber and corrosion of rim components.
Your DAEWOO lift truck has the following tipover warning decals. Make sure that you can read all safety signs. Clean or replace these if you cannot read the words or see the pictures. when cleaning the labels use a cloth, water and soap. Do not use solvent, gasoline, etc. You must replace a label if it is damaged, missing or cannot be read. If a label is on a part that is replaced, make sure a new label is installed on the replaced part. See you DAEWOO Lift Truck dealer for new labels. The most effective method of preventing serious injury or death to yourself or others is to familiarize yourself with the proper operation of the lift truck, to be alert, and to avoid actions or conditions which can result in an accident.
Proper nitrogen inflation equipment and training in its use are necessary to avoid overinflation. A tire blowout or rim failure can result from improper or misused equipment. Stand behind the tread and use a self-attaching chuck when inflation a tire. Servicing, changing tires and rims can be dangerous and should be done only by trained personnel using proper tools and procedures. If correct procedures are not followed while servicing tires and rims, the assemblies could burst with explosive force and cause serious personal injury or death. Follow carefully the specific information provided by your tire or rim servicing personnel or dealer.
WARNING Tipover can occur if the truck is improperly operated. In the event of a tipover, injury or death could result.
- 16 -
Safety Section
WARNING
Adjust the seat before operating the lift truck. After adjusting, joggle the seat to make sure it is properly locked, DO NOT adjust the seat while the truck is in motion.
WARNING Your DAEWOO truck comes equipped with a DAEWOO operator restraint system. Should it become necessary to replace the seat for any reason, it should only be replaced with another DAEWOO operator restraint system.
The ÒSurvive in tipoverÓ warning is located on the overhead guard. It shows the proper use of the operator restraint system.
Seat Adjustment Seat Belt Front-to-back adjustment
Lever
Move the lever, slide the seat to the desired position, and release the lever. The Operator Restraint System, Prevents the operator from jumping from the operatorÕs compartment in the event of a forward or side tipover.
- 17 -
Safety Section
The system is designed to keep the operator on the seat and in the operatorÕs compartment in the event of a tipover.
WARNING
Inspection
WARNING
3. In the event of a tipover, the seat and restraint system should be inspected for damage and replaced, if necessary.
WARNING
1. If the seat belt is torn, if pulling motion is interrupted during extension of the belt, or if the belt cannot be inserted into the buckle properly, replace the seat belt assembly.
The seat belt may cause the operator to bend at the waist. If you are pregnant of have suffered from some abdominal disease, consult a doctor before you use the seat belt.
WARNING Fasten the Seat Belt
Plate
Buckle 2. Replace the seat belt assembly every 3 years even if it passes visual inspection. For replacement, see the date of manufacture labelled on the back side of the belt.
1. Grip the plate (connector) of the belt and pull the belt from the retractor. Then insert the plate into the slot of the buckle until a snap is heard. Pull on the belt to confirm it is latched. 2. Make sure the belt is not twisted.
- 18 -
Safety Section
Avoiding Lift Truck Tipovers
WARNING
Lift Truck Stability
If you fasten the belt across your abdomen, the belt may injure your abdomen in an accident.
INSO023I
Counterbalanced lift truck design is based on the balance of two weights on opposite sides of a fulcrum (the front axle). The load on the forks must be balanced by the weight of the lift truck. The location of the center of gravity of both the truck and the load is also a factor. This basic principle is used for picking up a load. The ability of the lift truck to handle a load is discussed in terms of center of gravity and both forward and sideways stability.
3. Be sure to fasten the belt across your hips, not across your abdomen. NOTE : The belt is designed to automatically adjust to your size and movement. A quick pull on the belt will confirm that the automatic adjuster will hold the belt position in the event of an accident.
Center of Gravity (CG) Release the Seat Belt
CG
INSO024I
The point within an object, at which the whole weight of the object may be regarded as being concentrated, is called the center of gravity or CG. If the object is uniform, its geometric center will coincide with its CG. If it is not uniform, the CG could be at a point outside of the object. When the lift truck picks up a load, the truck and load have a new combined CG.
Push the button of the buckle to release the belt. The belt will automatically retract when released. Hold the plate of the belt and allow the belt to slowly retract.
- 19 -
Safety Section
Stability and Center of Gravity
CG truck
Combined CG
Lift Truck Stability Base
CG-Truck will tip over
CG load
INSO025I
INSO027I
The stability of the lift truck is determined by the location of its CG; or, if the truck is loaded, the combined CG of the truck and load. The lift truck has moving parts and, therefore, has a CG that moves. The CG moves forward or backward as the mast is tilted forward or backward. The CG moves up or down as the mast moves up or down. The CG and, therefore, the stability of the loaded lift truck, is affected by a number of factors such as:
For the lift truck to be stable (not tip over forward or to the side), the CG must stay within the area of the lift truck stability base Ð a triangular area between the front wheels and the pivot of the steer wheels. If the CG moves forward of the front axle, the lift truck will tip forward. If the CG moves outside of the line on either side of the stability base, the lift truck will tip to the side.
¥ the size, weight, shape and position of the load ¥ the height to which the load is lifted ¥ the amount of forward or backward tilt ¥ tire pressure ¥ dynamic forces created when the lift truck is accelerated, braked or turned ¥ condition and grade of surfaces on which the lift truck is operated
WARNING Dynamic forces (braking, acceleration, turning) also affect stability and can produce tipover even when the CG is within the stability triangle.
Capacity Load (Weight and Load Center) CG load
Combined CG CG truck
INSO026I INSO028I
These same factors are also important for unloaded lift trucks. They tip over sideways easier than a loaded lift truck carrying its load in the lowered position.
The capacity load of the lift truck is shown on the capacity/nameplate riveted to the truck. It is determined by the weight and load center. The load center is determined by the location of the CG of the load.
- 20 -
Safety Section
The load center shown on the nameplate is the horizontal distance from the front face of the forks, or the load face of an attachment, to the CG of the load. The location of the CG in the vertical direction is the same as the horizontal dimension.
Safe Driving Practices
Remember that, unless otherwise indicated, the capacity load shown on the nameplate is for a standard lift truck with standard backrest, forks and mast, and having no special-purpose attachment. In addition, the capacity load assumes that the load center is no further from the top of the forks than it is from the face of the backrest. If these conditions do not exist, the operator may have to reduce the safe operating load because the truck stability may be reduced. The lift truck should not be operated if its capacity/nameplate does not indicate capacity load.
INSO030S
DONÕT overload. Always handle loads within the rated capacity shown on the capacity plate.
NOTE : If the load is not uniform, the heaviest portion should be placed closer to the backrest and centered on the forks.
NOTICE 1. Capacity/Nameplates originally attached to forklifts sold by DAEWOO shall not be removed, altered or replaced without DAEWOOÕs approval.
INSO031S
2. DAEWOO assumes no responsibility for lift trucks placed in service without a valid DAEWOO Nameplate.
DONÕT go over rough terrain! If unavoidable, slow down.
3. If necessary to change your specification, contact your DAEWOO lift truck dealer.
- 21 -
Safety Section
INSO032S
INSO035S
DONÕT start, turn, or stop quickly. Sudden movement can cause the lift truck to tipover.
DONÕT turn on, or drive across an incline.
INSO036S
DONÕT tilt elevated loads forwards! This can cause the lift truck to tipover forward.
INSO033S
DONÕT crowd. Maintain a safe distance from the edge of docks, ramps and platforms. Always watch Òtail swingÓ
INSO037S
DONÕT elevate tilted loads! This can also cause the lift truck to tipover forward. INSO034S
DONÕT drive on soft ground.
- 22 -
Safety Section
INSO038S
INSO041S
DONÕT pick up an off center load! Such a load increases the possibility of a tipover to the side.
DONÕT jump off if your truck starts to tipover! Stay in your seat to survive.
INSO042I
INSO039S
DONÕT drive on slippery surfaces! Sand, gravel, ice or mud can cause a tipover. If unavoidable, slow down.
DONÕT compromise safety. Wear a hard hat if required on your job site.
INSO043I INSO040S
DONÕT travel with the mast raised.
DONÕT attempt to pick up or deposit a load unless the lift truck is level.
- 23 -
Safety Section
How to Survive in a Tipover (If Operator Restraint System Equipped)
FASTEN SEAT BELT
WARNING
TIPOVER CAN OCCUR IF TRUCK IS IMPROPERLY OPERATED. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.
DON'T JUMP
HOLD ON TIGHT TO STEERING WHEEL
BRACE FEET
LEAN AWAY FROM IMPACT
LEAN FORWARD
IN CASE OF TIPOVER
WARNING
DON'T JUMP INSO047I
DONÕT jump.
FASTEN SEAT BELT
FASTEN SEAT BELT
WARNING
TIPOVER CAN OCCUR IF TRUCK IS IMPROPERLY OPERATED. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.
DON'T JUMP
HOLD ON TIGHT TO STEERING WHEEL
BRACE FEET
LEAN AWAY FROM IMPACT
LEAN FORWARD
IN CASE OF TIPOVER
INSO045I
In the event of a tipover, the risk of serious injury or death will be reduced if the operator is using the operator restraint system and follows the instructions provided.
HOLD ON TIGHT INSO048I
Hold on tight. FASTEN SEAT BELT
WARNING
TIPOVER CAN OCCUR IF TRUCK IS IMPROPERLY OPERATED. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.
DON'T JUMP
HOLD ON TIGHT TO STEERING WHEEL
BRACE FEET
LEAN AWAY FROM IMPACT
LEAN FORWARD
IN CASE OF TIPOVER FASTEN SEAT BELT
WARNING
TIPOVER CAN OCCUR IF TRUCK IS IMPROPERLY OPERATED. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.
DON'T JUMP
HOLD ON TIGHT TO STEERING WHEEL
BRACE FEET
LEAN AWAY FROM IMPACT
LEAN FORWARD
IN CASE OF TIPOVER
FASTEN SEAT BELT INSO046I
Always use operator restraint system.
BRACE FEET INSO049I
Brace your feet and keep them within the operatorÕs compartment.
- 24 -
Safety Section
FASTEN SEAT BELT
WARNING
TIPOVER CAN OCCUR IF TRUCK IS IMPROPERLY OPERATED. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.
DON'T JUMP
HOLD ON TIGHT TO STEERING WHEEL
BRACE FEET
LEAN AWAY FROM IMPACT
LEAN FORWARD
IN CASE OF TIPOVER
LEAN AWAY INSO050I
Lean away from the direction of fall.
FASTEN SEAT BELT
WARNING
TIPOVER CAN OCCUR IF TRUCK IS IMPROPERLY OPERATED. INJURY OR DEATH COULD RESULT.
DON'T JUMP
HOLD ON TIGHT TO STEERING WHEEL
BRACE FEET
LEAN AWAY FROM IMPACT
LEAN FORWARD
IN CASE OF TIPOVER
LEAN FORWARD INSO051I
Lean forward.
- 25 -
General Section
Specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CHARACTERISTICS Manufacturer Model Capacity Load center Power type Operator type Tires Wheels (x = driven) DIMENSIONS Lift with STD two - stage mast Fork carriage
13
Forks
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 23a
Tilt of mast
24 25 26 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 45 49 50 51 52 53 55 56 57 58
Overall dimensions
at rated load center distance electric, diesel, gas, LPG Stand-on, rider seated c = cushion, p = pneumatic number, front/rear
kg mm
maximum fork height with rated load free lift special free lift ISO class thickness B width B length fork spacing ( minimum B maximum ) foreward/backward length without forks width most lowered height mast extened height overhead guard height seat height
mm mm mm
Outside turning radius Load moment constant ( from center of front wheel to fork face ) 90¡ stacking aisle ( add load length and clearance ) 90¡ intersecting aisle PERFORMANCE travel, loaded / unloaded lift, loaded / unloaded Speeds lowering, loaded / unloaded Drawbar pull at 1.6 km / h, loaded / unloaded Gradeability at 1.6 km / h, loaded / unloaded Acceleration time travelling loaded / unloaded WEIGHT Total weight with load front / rear Axle load without load front / rear CHASSIS number of front / rear Tires front size rear Wheelbase Tread front/rear at the lowest point loaded Ground clearance at center of wheelbase Service brake Parking brake DRIVE Battey voltage / capacity manufacturer/model rated output (at rpm) gas / LPG Engine max. torque (at rpm) gas / LPG cycle / cylinders / displacement fuel consumption type Transmission number of speeds forward / reverse Relief pressure system / attachment Noise level Leq
- 26 -
mm mm deg mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm km / h mm / s mm / s kg % s kg kg kg
mm mm mm mm
V / AH kW(rpm) kg - m cc l / hr
kPa dB (A)
General Section
DHI G18S-2 1750 500 gas / LPG rider - seated p X 2/ 2
DHI G20SC-2 2000 500 gas / LPG rider - seated p X 2/ 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3300 130
3300 130
3300 130
ll 35 B 100 B 900
ll 35 B 100 B 900 216 B 905 6/8 2202 1070 2190 4350 2150 985 1970 394 2360 1750
ll 40 B 100 B 900
9 10 11 12
6/8 2155 1070 2190 4350 2150 985 1950 394 2340 1720
6/8 2243 1070 2190 4350 2150 985 2000 399 2390 1780
13 HT G RI NG LE TI IS EC E A RS GL TE AN IN
DHI G15S-2 1500 500 gas / LPG rider - seated p X 2/ 2
21 23
MINIMUM ASLE - 90¡ STACK
14
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 23a
A 18 9
14 20
40 10 39 16
22
38 15
* A : OPERATOR CLEARANCE : 1050 mm
IPGO001L
18 / 19 530 / 600 500 / 450 1200 28
18 / 19 530 / 600 500 / 450 1200 26
18 / 19 530 / 600 500 / 450 1200 24
24 25 26 28 30 31
2870
3050
3190
1295 / 1575
1225/ 1825
1190/ 2000
32 33 34
2/2 6.50 B 10 - 12 5.00 B 8 - 10 1360 890 / 910 120 150 foot / hydraulic hand / mech
2/2 6.50 B 10 - 12 5.00 B 8 - 10 1360 890 / 910 120 150 foot / hydraulic hand / mech
2/2 6.50 B 10 - 12 5.00 B 8 - 10 1360 890 / 910 120 150 foot / hydraulic hand / mech
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
12 / 45 MMC / G420 27.2 (2100) 14(1400)/13.3(1400) 4 / 4 / 1997
12 / 45 MMC / G420 27.2 (2100) 14(1400)/13.3(1400) 4 / 4 / 1997
12 / 45 MMC / G420 27.2 (2100) 14(1400)/13.3(1400) 4 / 4 / 1997
Powershift 1/1 17600
Powershift 1/1 17860
Powershift 1/1 21550
45 49 50 51 52 53 55 56 57 58
- 27 -
General Section
DHI D18S-2 1750 500 Diesel rider - seated p X 2/ 2
DHI D20SC-2 2000 500 Diesel rider - seated p X 2/ 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3300 130
3300 130
3300 130
ll 35 B 100 B 900
ll 40 B 100 B 900
6/8 2155 1070 2190 4350 2150 985 1950 394 2340 1720
ll 35 B 100 B 900 216 B 905 6/8 2202 1070 2190 4350 2150 985 1970 394 2360 1750
9 10 11 12
6/8 2243 1070 2190 4350 2150 985 2000 399 2390 1780
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 23a
18 / 19 530 / 600 500 / 450 1400 33
18 / 19 530 / 600 500 / 450 1400 30
18 / 19 530 / 600 500 / 450 1400 28
24 25 26 28 30 31
2920
3100
3240
1350/ 1570
1240/ 1860
1190/ 2050
32 33 34
2/2 6.50 B 10 - 12 5.00 B 8 - 10 1360 890 / 910 120 150 foot / hydraulic hand / mech
2/2 6.50 B 10 - 12 5.00 B 8 - 10 1360 890 / 910 120 150 foot / hydraulic hand / mech
2/2 6.50 B 10 - 12 5.00 B 8 - 10 1360 890 / 910 120 150 foot / hydraulic hand / mech
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
12 / 60 DHI/DC24 32.4 (2250) 14.5 (1800) 4 / 4 / 2369
12 / 60 DHI/DC24 32.4 (2250) 14.5 (1800) 4 / 4 / 2369
12 / 60 DHI/DC24 32.4 (2250) 14.5 (1800) 4 / 4 / 2369
Powershift 1/1 17600
Powershift 1/1 17860
Powershift 1/1 21550
45 49 50 51 52 53 55 56 57 58
13 HT G RI NG LE TI IS EC E A RS GL TE AN IN
DHI D15S-2 1500 500 Diesel rider - seated p X 2/ 2
21 23
MINIMUM ASLE - 90¡ STACK
14
13
A 18 9
14 20
40 10 39 16
22
38 15
* A : OPERATOR CLEARANCE : 1050 mm
IPGO001L
- 28 -
General Section
Noise and Vibration Noise at operator ear (measured by BITA)
Vibration (weighted overall value) unit:m/sec2
unit:dB(A) Model
Measuring Place
Leq Model
G15S - 2 G18S - 2 G20SC- 2
Seat
Steering Wheel
Floor Plate
0.85
0.89
0.92
78.3 G15S - 2 G18S - 2 G20SC- 2
* Test course ; Concrete road unit:dB(A) unit:m/sec2 Model D15S - 2 D18S - 2 D20SC- 2 (
Leq
Measuring Place Model
84.2 ( 103.5 ) D15S - 2 D18S - 2 D20SC- 2
) Value shows sound power level measured by prEN12053
Seat
Steering Wheel
Floor Plate
0.95
1.1
0.92
* Test course ; Concrete road
- 29 -
General Section
Capacity Chart - Without Sideshift SINGLE TIRE
MODEL STD, FFL
FFT
A. B. C. A. B.
kg 1500 1300 1100
G15S - 2 D15S - 2
kg 1500 1300 1100
900
900
700 500 300
700 500 300 500
600
700
D. E. F.
800 900 1000 1100 1200
500
600
700
800 900 1000 1100 1200
mm
mm
A. 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 4800 mm MFH MAST D. 5000 mm MFH MAST E. 5500 mm MFH MAST F. 6000 mm MFH MAST
A. 2500 ~ 4500 mm MFH MAST B. 5000 mm MFH MAST
IB6OG01I
A. B.
A. B. C.
kg 1700
kg 1700
1500 1300
G18S - 2 D18S - 2
1500 1300
C.
1100
1100
900 700 500
900 700 500 500
600
700
800 900 1000 1100 1200
D. E. F.
500
600
700
800 900 1000 1100 1200
mm
A. 2500 ~ 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 5000 mm MFH MAST
mm
A. 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 4800 mm MFH MAST D. 5000 mm MFH MAST E. 5500 mm MFH MAST F. 6000 mm MFH MAST IB6OG02I
A. B. C.
A. kg 1300
C.
kg
B.
1200 1100 1000 900
G20S C- 2 D20S C- 2
800 700 500
600 700
800 900 1000 1100 1200
1500 1300 1100 900 700 500 300
D. E. F.
500
600
A. 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 4800 mm MFH MAST D. 5000 mm MFH MAST E. 5500 mm MFH MAST F. 6000 mm MFH MAST
A. 2500 ~ 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 5000 mm MFH MAST
- 30 -
700
800
900 1000 1100 1200
mm
mm
IB6OG03I
General Section
Capacity Chart - With Sideshift SINGLE TIRE
MODEL STD, FFL
FFT
A. B. C.
A. kg 1300
C.
kg
B.
1200 1100 1000 900 800
G15S - 2 D15S - 2
700 500
600 700
1500 1300 1100 900 700 500 300
D. E. F.
500
800 900 1000 1100 1200
600
700
800
900 1000 1100 1200
mm
mm
A. 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 4800 mm MFH MAST D. 5000 mm MFH MAST E. 5500 mm MFH MAST F. 6000 mm MFH MAST
A. 2500 ~ 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 5000 mm MFH MAST
IB6OG04I
A. B. C.
G18S - 2 D18S - 2
A. B. C.
kg 1500
kg 1500
1300 1100
1300 1100
900
900
700 500 300
700 500 300 500
600
700
D. E. F.
800 900 1000 1100 1200
500
600
700
mm
800 900 1000 1100 1200
mm
A. 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 4800 mm MFH MAST D. 5000 mm MFH MAST E. 5500 mm MFH MAST F. 6000 mm MFH MAST
A. 2500 ~ 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 5000 mm MFH MAST
IB6OG05I
A. B.
A. B. kg 1700
kg 1900 1700 1500 1300
G20S C- 2 D20S C- 2
1500 1300
C. D.
1100 900 700 500
1100 900 700 500
600
700
800 900 1000 1100 1200
E.
C. D.
F.
500
600
A. 2500 ~ 3700 mm MFH MAST B. 4000 mm MFH MAST C. 4500 mm MFH MAST D. 5000 mm MFH MAST
A. 4000 mm MFH MAST B. 4500 mm MFH MAST C. 4800 mm MFH MAST D. 5000 mm MFH MAST E. 5500 mm MFH MAST F. 6000 mm MFH MAST
- 31 -
700
800 900 1000 1100 1200
mm
mm
IB6OG06I
General Section
Serial Number Serial Number Locations For quick reference, record your lift truck's serial numbers in the spaces provided below the photographs.
IB2O401P
IPSO001P
Power Shift Transaxle Number
Lift Truck Serial Number
IPGO008P
Side Shift Serial Number (If Equipped)
IB2O607P
2.0 liter Gasoline and LP - Gas Engine Serial Number.
IPGO006P
2.4 liter Diesel Engine Serial Number.
- 32 -
General Section
Operator's Warning and Identification Plate Familiarize yourself with the OPERATOR'S WARING, IDENTIFICATION, LIFT CAPACITY and ATTACHMENT PLATES. DO NOT exceed CAPACITY AS EQUPPED load ratings.
Operator's Warning Plate
Idenitification, Lift Capacity and Attachment Plate
IPSO002P IPSO001P
Located by the right side of the operator's seat on the engine compartment cover.
Located on the cowl to the right side of the steering column. Below are abbreviations that may appear on the IDENTIFICATION, LIFT CAPACITY and ATTACHMENT PLATES and their meanings.
Mast Abbreviations STD
- Standard Mast (single inner member, low free lift)
FF
- Full Free Lift Mast (single inner member with high free lift duplex cylinder)
FFT
- Triple Lift Mast (two inner members) with either low or full free lift characteristics.
QUAD - Quadruple (Quad) Mast(with three inner members) NOTE : When only a mast-type is listed on the identification plate, a standard carriage and forks are used.
- 33 -
General Section
Attachment Abbreviations (Includes Special Forks) SC
- Special Carriage-increased width, height or outreach
SSS
- Shaft-type Sideshift Carriage
HSS
- Hook-typer Sideshift Carriage (ITA)
CW
- Counterweight
SF
- Special Forks
SWS
- Swing Shift, Sideshift
RAM
- Ram or Boom
DBCBH - Double Cube Block Handler HFP
- Hydraulic Fork Positioner
CR
- Crane Arm or Crane Boom
TH
- Tire Handler
CTH
- Container Handler
LPP
- Load Push-Pull Device
CC
- Carton Clamp
RC
- Roll Clamp
LS
- Load Stabilizer
PWH
- Pulp Wood Handler
SS - ST -Sideshift-Side Tilt Carriage
- 34 -
Operation Section
OperatorÕs Station and Monitoring Systems 3. Diesel Engine Start Preheat Indicator Light - The light will come ON when the key is turned to the ON position from the OFF position. This indicates that the glow plugs are preheating the precombustion chambers for easier starting. The amount of time needed to preheat the precombustion chambers is approximately seven seconds, depending on the surrounding air temperature. When the light goes OFF the maximum pre-combustion chamber temperature has been reached and the key can be turned to the START position to start the engine.
ILO1049P
Instrument Panel
1
3
2
5
6
4. Diesel Engine Water in Fuel Filter Indicator Light - Indicates when the engine is running, there is water in the fuel filter exceeds 100cc.
7
The light will come ON when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The light should go off after the engine is started. If the light turns on with the engine running, park the lift truck and stop the engine. Drain some fuel(and any water) until clean fuel flows from the filter which approximately takes 5 to 6 seconds.
4 ILOO001I
1. Engine Oil Indicator Light - Indicates insufficient engine oil pressure. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. If the light turns on while operation the lift truck, insufficient engine oil lubricating system pressure is indicated. Park the lift truck and stop the engine.
5. Fuel Level Gauge - Indicates fuel level. (Gas, Diesel, or Dual Fuel Trucks Only) 6. Engine Coolant Gauge - Indicates coolant temperature. If the pointer moves beyond the green band while operation the lift truck, overheating is indicated. Park the lift truck and stop the engine.
Check the system for a malfunction. The light will turn on when the oil pressure drops to approximately 70 kPa(10 psi).
Check the cooling system for a malfunction. The point will be at the end of the green band when the coolant temperature reaches approximately 106¡C(223¡F) on all engines.
2. Alternator Indicator Light - Indicates if the battery charging system is operational. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
7. Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge - Indicates transmission oil temperature. If the pointer moves beyond the green band while operating the lift truck, excessive transmission oil temperature is indicated. Park the lift truck and stop the engine.
The light should go off after the engine is started, indication the alternator is producing sufficient voltage to charge the battery. If the light turns on with the engine running, check the alternator charging system for a malfunction.
- 35 -
Operation Section
Electrical Disconnect Switch (If Equipped)
IB6OO02P
8. Service Hour Meter - Indicates the total number of hours the engine and the lift truck have operated. The hour meter will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, whether the engine is running or not. The hour meter is used to determine lubrication and maintenance intervals.
ILOO005P
1. ON - Connects the battery for electrical power to all electrical circuits. 2. OFF - Disconnects the battery from all electrical circuits.
ILO1048P
9. Horn Switch - Push on the horn button to sound the horn.
ILO0003P
10. Choke Control - Controls the gasoline engine choke. When the engine is cold, pull the choke control out all the way. Gradually push the control in as the engine warms up.
- 36 -
Operation Section
Engine Compartment
Circuit Breaker
IB6OO03P
ILO0006P
Circuit Breaker-Protects the main electrical circuits. To reset the circuit breaker, push the button in. Located in the engine compartment.
1. The engine compartment is accessible by pulling the latch and raising the hood and seat assembly. ( Note : Unlock latch before pulling - if key equipped )
ILO4010P
2. The hood and seat assembly is held up by a support cylinder. Make certain the air cylinder is operating properly and will hold the hood up before doing anything in the engine compartment.
- 37 -
Operation Section
Seat
Fuel Selector Switch (If Dual Fuel Equipped)
NOTE : Seat arrangments may vary. Basic operation will be similar. Seat adjustment should be checked at the beginning of each shift and when operators change. Lock the seat into position before operating, to prevent an unexpected seat change.
IB1O1004
NOTE : The switch is located in the engine compartment or on the cowl. 1. LPG - This position supplies electrical power to the LP fuelock solenoid and the vacuum switch, when the ignition switch is in the ON or the START position. With the LP-Gas fuel tank valve open and when vacuum is present, LP-Gas can then flow the tank through the converter to the carburetor.
ILO6008P
Adjust seat to allow full brake pedal travel with operator's back against seat back. NOTE : The seat can only be correctly adjusted with the operator fully seated.
2. OFF - This position shuts off all fuelsupply to the carburetor and is used when changing from Gasoline to LPGas or LP-Gas to Gasoline fuel. Electrical power shuts off the electric fuel pump and the fuelock solenoid. Before switching to the LPG position, allow the engine to run until all of the gasoline in the carburetor is consumed and the engine stops. 3. GAS-This position supplies electrical power to the electric fuel pump and the fuelock solenoid. This will allow gasoline fuel to flow from the tank through the fuel filter and fuel pump to the carburetor.
- 38 -
Operation Section
Lift Truck Controls Direction Control Lever
Transmission Inching Control Pedal
ILOO009P
1. Forward - Push the lever forward for FORWARD direction travel.
IB6OO04P
Inching Control Pedal - Pushing down on the inching pedal, modulates the hydraulic pressure to the clutch packs, permitting disc slippage.
2. Neutral - Move the lever to center
4position for NEUTRAL. 3. Reverse - Pull the lever back for REVERSE direction travel.
Futher pushing on the pedal completely relieves clutch pack pressure and applies the service brakes to stop and hold the lift truck.
Plate for Function of Pedals (If Equipped)
NOTE : The purpose of the inching control pedal is to provide precise inching control at slow travel speed, with high engine rpm. This is used for fast hydraulic lift during load approach, pickup or pisitioning.
ILOO010P
It shows the function of each pedal i.e. inching (clutch), brake and accelerator.
- 39 -
Operation Section
Service Brake Pedal
Parking Brake Lever
IB6OO04P
ILOO014P
Push DOWN on the brake pedal to slow or stop the lift truck.
Pull the lever BACK to engage the parking brake.
RELEASE the brake pedal to allow the lift truck to move.
Push the lever FORWARD to release the parking brake.
Accelerator Pedal
Lift Control
IB6OO04P
ILOO015P
Push DOWN on the pedal to increase engine rpm (speed).
NOTE : To prevent a sudden change of position of the load, operate all lift, tilt and attachment controls smoothly.
RELEASE the pedal to decrease engine rpm (speed).
1. Lower Position - Push the lever FORWARD smoothly to lower the load. 2. Hold Position - When the lever is released it will return to the HOLD or center position Lifting or lowering action will stop. 3. Lift Position - Pull the lever BACK smoothly to lift the load.
- 40 -
Operation Section
Tilt Control
ILOO016P
1. Mast Tilt Forward - Push the lever
3FORWARD smoothly to tilt the mast forward. 2. Mast Hold - When the lever is
3released it will return to the HOLD or center position. Tilting action will stop. 3. Mast Tilt Back - Pull the lever BACK
3smoothly to tilt the mast backward.
Sideshift Attachment (If Equipped)
ILOO024P
1. Sideshift Left - Push the lever FORWARD to shift the carriage to the left. 2. Sideshift Hold - When the lever is released it will return to the HOLD or center position. Sideshifting action will stop. 3. Sideshift Right - Pull the lever BACK to shift the carriage to the right.
- 41 -
Operation Section
Refueling Gasoline or Diesel Engine Equipped
WARNING Explosive fumes may be present during refueling. Do not smoke in refueling areas. Lift truck should be refueled only at designated safe locations. Safe outdoor locations are preferable to those indoors.
IB6OS02P
1. Park the lift truck only at a designated safe location. Place the transmission in NEUTRAL. Lower the forks to the ground. Engage the parking brake. Stop the engine.
Stop the engine and get off the lift truck during refueling.
NOTICE Do not allow the lift truck to become low on fuel or completely run out of fuel. Sediment or other impurities in the fuel tank could be drawn into the fuel system. This could result in difficult starting or damage to components.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day of operation to drive out moisture laden air and to prevent condensation. In the cold weather, the moisture condensation can cause rust in the fuel system and hard starting due to it's freezing. Do not fill the tank to the top. Fuel expands when it gets warm and may overflow.
ILOO017P
2. Remove the filler cap. 3. Fill the fuel tank slowly. Install the filler cap. If spillage occurs, wipe off excess fuel and wash down area with water. NOTE : Drain water and sediment from fuel tank as required by prevailing conditions. Also, drain water and sediment from the main fuel storage tank weekly and before the tank is refilled. This will help prevent water or sediment being pumped from the storge tank into the lift truck fuel tank.
- 42 -
Operation Section
Changing LP-Gas Tanks 1. Park the lift truck on level ground, with the parking brake applied, the transmission in NEUTRAL, the forks lowered and the engine running at low idle.
IB6OO05P
6. Check to be sure that the LP-Gas warning plate is in position on the lift truck, and is legible. 7. Check to be sure the replacement tank is of the correct type. 8. Inspect the replacement tank for damage such as dents, scrapes or gouges and for indication of leakage at valves or threaded connections.
IPOO017P
2. Close the fuel shut off valve at the LP - Gas tank. Run the engine until it stops, then off the ignition switch and disconnect the switch (if equipped). 3. Disconnect the fuel supply line.
IPOO020P
9. Check for debris in the relief valve, for damage to various valves and liquid level gauge. IPOO018P
10. Inspect the quick-disconnect couplings for deterioration, damage or missing flexible seals.
4. Loosen the retaining clamps and remove the tank.
NOTICE If the location pin (dowel) is missing or broken, be sure the pin is replaced.
5. Check the mounting to be sure the locating pin (dowel) is not missing or broken.
- 43 -
Operation Section
IPOO021P
11. Position the replacement tank so that the locating pin (dowel) is in place. 12. Clamp the tank securely. 13. Connect the fuel supply line. 14. Open the fuel valve by slowly turning the valve counterclockwise. If the fuel valve is opened too quickly, a back pressure check valve will shut off the fuel supply. If this happens, close the fuel valve completely. Wait five seconds and then open the fuel valve very slowly. 15. Inspect the LP-Gas fuel lines and fittings with a soap solution after filling the tank or when looking for leaks.
- 44 -
Operation Section
Before Starting the Engine 5. Inspect the carriage, forks or attachments for wear, damage and loose or missing bolts.
Walk-Around Inspection Make a thorough walk-around inspection before mounting the lift truck or starting the engine. Look for such items as loose bolts, debris buildup, oil or coolant leaks. Check condition of tires, mast, carriage, forks or attachments. Have repairs made as needed and all debris removed. Before starting the gas engine, push the accelerator pedal all the way down once and then slowly it to set the automatic choke.
6. Inspect the tires and wheels for cuts, gouges, foreign objects, inflation pressure and loose or missing bolts.
IB6OS02P
7. Inspect the overhead guard for damage and loose or missing mounting bolts. 8. Inspect the hydraulic system for leaks, worm hoses or damaged lines.
IB6OS02P
1. Inspect the operator's compartment for loose items and cleanliness.
9. Look for transmission and drive axle leaks on the lift turck and on the ground.
2. Inspect the instrument panel for broken or damaged indicator lights or gauges. 3. Test the horn and other safety devices for proper operation.
IB6OS06P
Typical Example 10. Inspect the engine compartment for oil, coolant and fuel leaks.
IPOO022P
4. Inspect the mast and lift chains for wear, broken links, pins and loose rollers.
- 45 -
Operation Section
IB6OO07P
ILOO027P
Typical Example
13. Observe the fuel level gauge after starting the truck. Add fuel if necessary.
11. Measure the engine crankcase oil level with the dip stick. Maintain the oil level between the MAX. and MIN., (or FULL and ADD) notches on the dip stick.
WARNING Personal injury may occur from accidents caused by improper seat adjustment. Always adjust the operator's seat before starting the lift truck engine. Seat adjustment must be done at the beginning of each shift and when operators change.
IB6OO08P
Typical Example 12. Observe the engine coolant level in the coolant recovery bottle. With the engine cold, maintain the level to the COLD mark. If the recovery bottle is empty, also fill the radiator at the top tank. ILO6008P
14. To position the seat, PUSH the lever away from the seat track and move the seat forward or backward to a comfortable position.
- 46 -
Operation Section
Lift Fork Adjustment knowledgeable of the material used and the required welding and heat treatment process.
Hook-type Fork For load stability, always adjust the forks as wide as possible. Position the load evenly on both forks.
Users should evaluate the economics of returning the forks to the manufacutrer for repairs or purchasing new forks. This will vary depending on many factors including the size and type of fork. Forks should be properly sized to the weight and length of the loads, and to the size of the machine on which they are used. The general practice is to use a fork size such that the combined rated capacity of the number of forks used is equal to or greater than the ÒStandard (or rated) CapacityÓ of the lift truck. The individual load rating, in most cases, will be stamped on the fork in a readily visible area. Generally on the top or side of the fork shank.
IPOO029P
1. Lift the hook pin and slide the fork to the new position.
¥ A fork rated at 2200 pounds at 24 inch load center will be stamped 2200B24.
2. Secure the hook pin in the carriage slot. Follow the same procedure for the other fork.
¥ A fork rated at 1200 kg at 500 mm load center wil be stamped 1200B500.
Inspection, Maintenance and Repair of Lift Truck Forks
The manufacturer idenitification and year and date of manufacture is also usually shown.
The following provides practical guidelines for inspection, maintenance and repair of lift truck forks. It also provides general information on the design and application of forks and the common cause fo fork failures.
Some countries have standards or regulations which apply specifically to the inspection and repair of forks. Users countries have standards for regulations which apply specifically to the inspection and repair of forks.
Lift truck forks can be dangerously weakened by improper repair or modification. They can also be damaged by the cumulative effects of age, abrasion, corrosion, overloading and misuse.
Users may also refer to the International Organization For Standardization-ISO Technical Report 5057-Inspection and Repair of Fork Arms and ISO Standard 2330-Fork Arms-Technical Characteristics and Testing.
A fork failure during use can cause damage to the equipment and the load. A fork failure can also cause serious injury.
While there are no specific standards or regulations in the United States, users should be familiar with the requirements for inspection and maintenance of lift trucks as provided by the 29 Code Federal Register Safety Standard (s) B56.1, B56.5 or B56.6 as applicable to the type of machine (s) in use.
A good fork inspection and maintenance program along with the proper application can be very effective in preventing sudden on the job failures. Repairs and modifications should be done only by the fork manufacturer or a qualified technician
- 47 -
Operation Section
Causes of Fork Failure 1. Improper Modification or Repair. Fork failure can occur as a result of a field modification involving welding, flame cutting or other similar process, which affect the heat treatment and reduces the strength of the fork.
spread and the forks to twist laterally about their mountings. ¥ Wear Forks are constantly subjected to abrasion as they slide on floors and loads. The thickness of the fork blade is gradually reduced to the point where it may not be capable of handling the load for which it was designed.
In most cases, specific processes an techiniques are also required to achieve proper welding of the particular alloy steels involved. Critical areas most likely to be affected by improper processing are the heel section, the mounting components and the fork tip.
¥ Stress Risers
2. Bent or Twisted Forks. Forks can be bent out of shape by extreme overloading, glancing blows against walls or other solid objects or using the fork tip as a pry bar.
Scratches, nicks and corrosion are points of high stress concentration where cracks can develop. These cracks can progress under repetitive loading in a typical mode of fatigue failue.
Bent or twisted forks are much more likely to break and cause damage or injury. They should be removed from service immediately.
4. Overloading. Extreme overloading can cause permanent bending or immediate failure of the forks. Using forks of less capacity than the load or lift truck when lifting loads and using forks in a manner for which they were not designed are some common causes of overloading.
3. Fatigue. Parts which are subjected to repeated or fluctuating loads can fail after a large number of loading cycles even though the maximum stress was below the static strength of the part.
Fork Inspection
The first sign of a fatigue failure is usually a crack which starts in an area of high stress concentration. This is usually in the heel section or on the fork mounting. As the crack progresses under repetitive load cycling, the load bearing cross section of the remaining metal is decreased in size until it becomes insufficient to suport the load and complete failure occurs. Fatigue failure is the most common mode of fork failure. it is also one which can be anticipated and prevented by recognizing the conditions which lead up to the failure and by removing the fork from service prior to failing.
IAOO034S
Establish a daily and 12 month inspection routine by keeping a record for the forks on each lift truck.
¥ Repetitive Overloading
Initial information should include the machine serial number on which the forks are used, the fork manufacturer, type, original section size, original length and capacity. Also list any special characteristics specified in the fork design.Record the date and results of each inspection, making sure the following information is included :
Repetitive cycling of loads which exceeds the fatigue strength of the material can lead to fatigue failure. The overload could be caused by loads in excess of the rated fork capacity and by use of the fork tips as pry bars. Also, by handling loads in an manner which cause the fork tips to
- 48 -
Operation Section
¥ Actual wear conditions, such as percent of original blade thickness remaining.
12 Months Inspection Forks should be inspected, at a minimum, every 12 months. If the truck is being used in a multi-shift or heavy duty operation, they should be checked every six months. See ÒForksÓ in the Maintenance Section of this manual.
¥ Any damage, failure or deformation which might impair the use of the truck. ¥ Note any repairs or maintenance. An ongoing record of this information will help in idenitifying proper inspection intervals for each operation, in identifying and solving problem areas and in anticipating time replacement of the forks.
Maintenance and Repair 1. Repair forks only in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
First Installation
Most repairs or modifications should be done only by the original manufacturer of the forks or an expert knowledgeable of the materials, design, welding and heat treatment process.
1. Inspect forks to ensure they are the correct size for the truck on which they will be used. Make sure they are correct length and type for the loads to be handled.
2. The following repairs or modifications SHOULD NOT be attempted.
If the forks have been previously used, perform the Ò12 Month Inspection.Ó If the forks are rusted, see ÒMaintenance and RepairÓ
¥ Flame cutting holes or cutouts in fork blades. ¥ Welding on brackets or new mounting hangers.
2. Make sure fork blades are level to each other within acceptable tolerances. See ÒForks, Step 4,Ó in the Ò2000 Service Hours or 1 YearÓ in ÒMaintenance Intervals.Ó
¥ Repairing cracks or other damage by welding. ¥ Bending or resetting. 3. The following repairs MAY be performed.
3. Make sure positioning lock is in place and working. Lock forks in position before using truck. See ÒForks, Step 7,Ó in the Ò2000 Service Hours or 1 YearÓ in ÒMaintenance IntervalsÓ.
¥ Forks may be sanded or lightlyground, to remove rust, corrosion or minor defects from the surfaces.
Daily Inspection - Before First Use and at Each Preventive Maintenance Inspection
¥ Heel sections may be ground with a carbon stone to remove minor surface cracks or defects. Polish the inside radius of the heel section to increase the fatigue life of the fork. Always grind or polish in the direction of the blade and shank length.
1. Visually inspect forks for cracks, especially in the hell section, around the mounting brackets, and all weld areas, Inspect for broken or jagged fork tips, bent or twisted blades and shanks.
¥ Repair or replace the positioning locks on hook type forks. Repair or replace most fork retention devices used with other fork types.
2. Make sure positioning lock is in place and working. Lock the forks in position before using the truck. See Ò2000 Service Hours or 1 YearÓ in ÒMaintenance IntervalsÓ.
4. A fork should be load tested before being returned to service on completion of repairs authorized and done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Remove all defective forks from service.
- 49 -
Operation Section
Most manufacturers and standards require the repaired fork to be tested with a load 3 times the specified capacity and at the load center marked on the fork arm.With the fork restrained in the same manner as its mounting on the lift truck, apply the test load twice, gradually and without shock. Maintain the test for 30 seconds each time. Check the fork arm before and after the second application of the test load. It shall not show any permanent deformation. Consult the fork manufacturer for further information as may be applicable to the specific fork involved. Testing is not required for repairs to the positioning lock or the markings.
- 50 -
Operation Section
Starting the Engine Prestart Conditions
Gasoline Engine
NOTE : The engine will not start unless the transmission directional control lever is in the NEUTRAL position.
IB6OO09P
1. Engine is cold but the temperature of ambient is higher than 0 degree C. IB6OO09P
1) PUSH the chock control all the way. 2) Depress the accelerator pedal completely and then release it. 3) Then, depress the accelerator pedal more than 1/2 of its stroke and hold in this position. 4) Turn the ignition switch to the START position to crank the engine. 5) Release it when the engine starts.
1. Engine the parking brake, if not already engaged. Place the transmission directional control lever in the NEUTRAL position.
In normal weather, depress the accelerator pedal more than half of itÕs stroke and hold in this position.
ILOO005P
2. Lift trucks equipped with electrical disconnect switches ; the engine will not start unless the disconnect switch is in the ON (closed) position.
ILO7008P
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position. Release it when the engine starts. Gradually push the choke control IN as the engine warms up. Allow the engine to warm up slowly.
- 51 -
Operation Section
LP-Gas Engine
Diesel Engine Starting a Cold Diesel Engine
WARNING 1. Turn the key to the ON position. The start preheat light will come ON. The preheat light will stay ON approximately seven seconds, depending on the surrounding air temperature.
LP - Gas fuel is flammable and can cause personal injury. Inspect LP - Gas fuel lines and fitting for leaks. Inspect tank for secure mounting.
NOTICE Do not engage the starter for more than 30 seconds.
2. When the preheat light goes OFF, turn the key to the START position, with the accelerator pedal fully depressed. 3. Release the key when the engine starts and release the accelerator pedal to a low idle position. 4. If the engine stalls or does not start, turn the key to the OFF position, then repeat steps 1 thru 3. IPOO017P
Starting a Warm Diesel Engine
1. Turn the tank fuel valve ON by slowly turning the valve counterclockwise. Observe the LP -Gas gauge(if equipped).
1. Turn the key to the ON position and then to START position, without waiting for the preheat light to go OFF. At the same time fully depress the accelerator.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position. Release it when the engine starts.
2. Release the key when the engine starts and release the accelerator pedal to a low idle position.
- 52 -
Operation Section
Starting From a 12 Volt External Source WARNING Sparks occurring near the battery could cause vapors to explode. Always connect the external power source ground cable to a point away from and below the battery, and well clear of fuel system components.
IB6OO10P
Typical Example
NOTICE Do not reverse battery cables. It can cause damage to the alternator. Always connect the external power source cables in parallel with the lift truck battery cables : POSITIVE(+) to POSITIVE(+) and NEGATIVE(-) to NEGATIVE(-). Attach ground cable last, remove first. All lift trucks equipped with DAEWOO built internal combustion engines are NEGATIVE(-) ground.
- 53 -
Operation Section
Dual Fuel System 4. Move lever (1) to the LPG (3) position.
Changing From Gasoline to LP - Gas
5. Lower the hood and seat assembly.
ILOO027P ILOO018P
NOTE : The UnderwriterÕs Laboratory (U.L.) requires that the gasoline tank must be at least one - quarter full when operating on LP - Gas. This will allow the lift truck to be restarted on gasoline and moved to an approved refueling area, when operating in a hazardous area.
6. Open the fuel valve, on the LP - Gas tank, by slowly turning the valve counterclockwise. 7. Turn the ignition switch key to the OFF position and then to the START position to start the engine. Release it when the engine starts.
1. Park the lift truck level in an authorized refueling area with the forks lowered, the parking brake applied, the transmission in NEUTRAL and the engine running.
Changing From LP - Gas to Gasoline
2. Raise the hood and seat assembly. Make certain the air lift cylinder securely holds the hood open.
1. Park the lift truk level in an authorized refueling area with the forks lowered, the parking brake applied, the transmission in NEUTRAL and the engine running.
3 2 1
4
IB1O1004
ILOO018P
Typical Example
2. Close the fuel valve on the LP - Gas tank. Allow the engine to run until the fuel in the line runs out and the engine stops. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3. Move lever (1), on the fuel selector switch to the OFF(2) positoin. Leave lever (1) in this position until the gasoline in the carburetor is used and the engine stops.
3. Raise the hood and seat assembly. Make certain the air lift cylinder securely holds the hood open. - 54 -
Operation Section
3
1 4
IB1O1005
Typical Example 4. Move lever (1) from the LPG (3) postion to the GAS (4) position. 5. Lower the hood and seat assembly. 6. Turn the ignition switch key to the ON position. NOTE : On trucks equipped with electric fuel pumps wait approximately 15 seconds to fill the carburetor with gasoline. 7. Turn the ignition switch key to the START position and start the engine. Release it when the engine starts.
- 55 -
Operation Section
After Starting the Engine Observe all indicator lights and gauges frequently during operation, to make sure all systems are working properly. All of the indicator lights will come ON with the ignition switch in the ON position before the engine is started.
1
2
5
6
7 IB6OO02P
7. Observe the hour meter to make sure it is operating properly.
3
8. Observe the fuel level gauge for fuel level in the tank.
4 ILOO001I
1. The engine oil pressure indicator light (1), will not come ON with the engine running, unless there is low or no oil pressure. Stop the engine immediately, if the light comes ON. 2. The alternator indicator light (2), should not come ON during normal operation. The alternator is not charging if the light comes ON with the engine running. 3. The diesel engine water in fuel filter indicator light(4), will not come ON with the engine running,unless water in fuel filter exceeds 100cc. Stop the engine immediately and drain the water if the light comes ON. 4. Observe the fuel level gauge (5) for fuel level in the tank. 5. The engine coolant gauge pointer (6), will be in the green band with the engine running, unless the coolant temperature is excessive. 6. The power shift transmission gauge pointer (7), will be in the green band with the engine running, unless the oil temperature is excessive.
- 56 -
Operation Section
Lift Truck Operation Power Shift Transaxle
WARNING
1. Start the engine. See topic ÒStarting the EngineÓ
A lift truck with the engine running but without an operator can move slowly (creep) if the transmission is engaged. This could result in personal injury. Always place the transmission control lever in the NEUTRAL (center) positon and apply the parking brake before dismounting the lift truck.
IB6OO04P
2. Push down on the service brake pedal to hold the lift truck until ready to move it. 3. Release the parking brake. NOTE : The parking brake must be released before the directional control can be used.
IB6OO04P
5. Release the service brake. 6. Push down on the accelerator pedal to obtain the desired travel speed. Release the pedal to decrease travel speed.
WARNING Sudden revesal of a loaded lift truck traveling forward can cause the load to fall or the lift truck to tip.
ILOO009P
4. Select the direction of travel by pushing the directional lever FORWARD for forward direction or by pulling the lever BACK for reverse direction.
Failure to comply could result in personal injury. Stop the loaded lift truck completely, before shifting to reverse.
NOTE : Directional changes can be made under full power at speeds up to 8 km/h (5 mph). A speed of 8 km/h (5 mph) is a fast walk. Directional shift changes at speeds above 8 km/h (5 mph) are considered abusive.
- 57 -
Operation Section
IB6OO04P
IB6OO04P
7. To change the lift truck direction of travel, release the accelerator pedal.
11. To stop the lift truck when traveling in either direction, release the accelerator pedal.
8. Push down on the service brake pedal to reduce the lift truck speed as necessary.
12. Push down on the service brake pedal and bring the lift truck to a smooth stop.
Inching NOTE : The purpose of the inching pedal is to provide precise lift truck inching control at very slow travel speed and high engine rpm. This is used for fast hydraulic lift, during load approach, pick up or load positioning.
ILOO009P
9. Move the directional lever to the desired direction of travel. Slowly push down on the accelerator pedal as the lift truck changes direction. 10. When the direction change is completed, continue to push down on the accelerator pedal to obtain the desired travel speed. IB6OO04P
1. To inch (creep) in either direction, slowly push down on the inching pedal. This will start to apply the service brakes and allow the transmission clutch discs to slip. 2. Vary the position of the inching pedal and the acceleratror pedal to control the inching speed and distance. 3. Pushing down further on the inching pedal will disengage the transmission completely and apply the service brakes fully to stop and hold the lift truck. This will provide full engine power for fast hydraulic lift.
- 58 -
Operation Section
Operating Techniques Inching into Loads
Lifting the Load 1. Lift the load carefully and tilt the mast back a short distance.
IAOO037I
Typical Example IPOO033I
1. Move the lift truck slowly FORWARD into positon and engage the load. The truck should be square with load, forks spaced evenly between pallet stringers and as far apart as load permits.
Typical Example 2. Tilt the mast further back to cradle the load
IPOO034I
IPOO032I
Typical Example
Typical Example
2. Move the lift truck FORWARD until the load touches the carriage.
3. Operate the lift truck in reverse until the load is clear of the other material. 4. Lower the cradled load to the travel position. NOTE : Lift and tilt speeds are controlled by engine rpm.
- 59 -
Operation Section
Traveling with the Load
Unloading
NOTICE Travel with the load as low as possible, while still maintaining ground clearance.
IAOO042I
Typicl Example 1. Move the lift truck into the unloading position.
IAOO041I
Typical Example 1. Travel with the load uphill on upgrades and downgrades.
IKOO038I
Typical Example 2. Tilt the mast FORWARD only when directly over the unloading area.
WARNING
IAOY013I
Typical Example
Do not tilt the mast forward with the load unless directly over the unloading area, even if the power is off.
2. For better vision, travel in reverse with bulky loads.
- 60 -
Operation Section
Turning
IAOO044I
Typical Example IAOO046I
3. Deposit the load and BACK away carefully to disengage the forks.
1. When turning sharp corners, keep close to the inside corner. Begin the turn when the inside drive wheel meets the corner.
IAOO045I
Typcial Example
IAOO047I
2. In narrow aisles, keep away from the stockpile when turning into the aisle. Allow for conterweight swing.
4. Lower the carriage and forks to the travel position or to the park position.
- 61 -
Operation Section
Lifting Drums or Round Objects
Operating in Hot Weather Keep the following points in mind when you operate the lift truck in hot weather. 1. Check the radiator. Clogging can cause the overheating. Clean them out regularly with a blast of compressed air. Also, check the leakage of water. 2. Check the fan belt tension and adjust to proper tension 3. Even if the engine overheats and the coolant boils over, let the engine idle for a while with opening engine hood until temperature falls before shut off the engine.
IAOO048I
1. Block drums or round objects. Tilt the mast FORWARD and side the fork tips along the floor to get under the load.
IAOO049I
2. Before lifting, tilt the mast BACK slightly until the load is cradled on the forks.
- 62 -
Operation Section
Parking the Lift Truck
IB6OS02P
ILO7008P
1. Park in an authorized area only. Do not block traffic. If LP - Gas equipped, do not park near elevator shafts or any other area where LP-Gas could collect in a pocket (low area), causing a potentially dangerous condition.
5. Turn the key in the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key.
IPOO017P
NOTE : If an LP - Gas equipped lift truck is stoped or parked for an indefinite or prolonged period of time, shut off the LP-Gas fuel tank valve.
ILOO009P
2. Place the transmission controls in NEUTRAL.
6. Actuate each loading lever serveral times to remove the residual pressure in the respective cylinders and hoses.
3. Engage the parking brake. 4. Lower the forks to the ground.
WARNING Blocking the wheels will prevent unexpected lift truck movement, which could cause personal injury.
- 63 -
Operation Section
Storage Information ¥ Cover components such as the breather and air cleaner which may be caught with humidity.
Before Storage Before storing your lift truck, clean and inspect as the following procedures.
¥ The machine should be operated at least once a week. Fill the cooling system, if cooling water is discharged, and mount the battery. Start the engine and warm up thoroughly. Move the machine a little forwards and backwards. Operate the hydraulic controls several times.
¥ Wipe away grease, oil, etc. adhering to the body of the truck with waste cloth, and use water, if needed. ¥ While cleaning the truck, check general condition of the truck. Especially check the truck body for recess or damge and tires for wear or nails or stones in the tread.
To Operate the Lift Truck After a Long Time Storage ¥ Remove covers and antirust from each of the components and exposed parts.
¥ Fill the fuel tank with fuel specified. ¥ Check for leakage of hydraulic oil, engine oil, fuel, or coolant, etc. ¥ Apply grease, where needed.
¥ Drain the engine crankcase, transmission (clutch type machine), differential and final reduction gear, clean the inside of them and add new oil.
¥ Check for looseness of nuts and bolts, especially hub nuts.
¥ Drain off foreign matter and water from the hydraulic oil tank and fuel tank.
¥ Check mast rollers to see that they rotate smoothly.
¥ Remove the head cover from the engine cylinder. Oil valves and rocker shaft and check each valve for proper operation.
¥ Prime the oil into the lift cylinders by actuating the lift lever all the way several times.
¥ Add cooling water to the specified level.
¥ Drain off coolant completely in water of cold weather, if antifreeze is not used.
¥ Charge the battery and mount it on the machine. Connect the cables.
Long Time Storage
¥ Perform pre-operational checks carefully. (refer to ÒBefore Starting the EngineÓ) ¥ Warm up the machine.
Perform the following service and checks in addition to the ÒParking the lift truckÓ services. ¥ Taking the rainy season into consideration, park the machine at a higher and hard ground. ¥ Avoid parking on soft grounds such as an asphalt ground in summer. ¥ Dismount the battery from the machine.Even though the machine is parked indoors, if the place is hot or humid, the battery should be kept in a dry, cool place. Charge the battery once a month. ¥ Apply antirust to the exposed parts which tend to rust.
- 64 -
Operation Section
Transportation Hints Lift Truck Shipping
Machine Lifting and Tiedown Information
Check travel route for overpass clearances. Make sure there is adequate clearance if the lift truck being transported is equipped with a high mast, overhead guard or cab.
NOTICE Improper lifting or tiedowns can allow load to shift and cause injury and/or damage.
To prevent the lift truck from slipping while loading, or shifting in transit, remove ice, snow or other slippery material from the loading dock and the truck bed before loading.
1. Weight and instructions given herein apply to lift trucks as manufactured by DAEWOO.
NOTICE 2. Use proper rated cables and slings for lifting. Position the crane for level lift truck lift.
Obey all state and local laws governing the weight, width and length of a load.
3. Spreader bar widths should be sufficient to prevent contact with the lift truck
Observe all regulations governing wide loads.
4. Use the tiedown locations provided for lift truck tiedown.
NOTICE Remove ice, snow or other slippery material from the shipping vehicle and the loading dock.
Check the state and local laws governing weight, width and length of a load. Contact your DAEWOO Lift Truck dealer for shipping instructions for your lift truck.
IAOO051I
Always block the trailer or the rail car wheels before loading the lift truck. Position the lift truck on the truck bed or the rail car. Apply the parking brake and place the transmission control in NEUTRAL. Turn ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key. If LP-Gas equipped, shut off the LP-Gas fuel tank. Block the wheels and secure lift truck with tiedowns.
- 65 -
Operation Section
Towing Information To provide sufficient control and braking when moving a disabled lift truck downhill, a larger towing lift truck or additional lift trucks connected to the rear could be required. This will prevent uncontrolled rolling. The different situation requirements cannot be given, as minimal towing lift truck capacity is required on smooth level surfaces to maximum on inclines or poor surface conditions.
WARNING Personal injury or death could result when towing a disabled lift truck incorrectly. Block the lift truck wheels to prevent movement before releasing the brakes. The lift truck can roll free if it is not blocked. Follow the recommendations below, to properly perform the towing procedure.
Consult your DAEWOO Lift Tuck dealer for towing a disabled lift truck.
These towing instructions are for moving a disabled lift truck a short distance, at low speed, no faster than 2 km/h (1.2 mph), to a convenient location for repair. These instructions are for emergencies only. Always haul the lift truck if long distance moving is required. Shield must be provided on the towing lift truck to protect the operator if the tow line or bar should break. Do not allow riders on the lift truck being towed unless the operator can control the steering and/or braking.
IB6OO09P
1. Release the parking brake.
Before towing, make sure the tow line or bar is in good condition and has enough strength for the towing situation involved. Use a towing line or bar with a strength of at least 1.5 times the gross weight of the towing lift truck for a disabled lift truck stuck in the mud or when towing on a grade.
NOTICE Release the parking brake to prevent excessive wear and damage to the parking brake system.
2. Check that the service brake pedal is released. Keep the tow line angle to a minimum. Do not exceed a 30¡ angle from the staight ahead position. Connect the tow line as low as possible on the lift truck that is being towed.
3. Key switch is in the OFF position. 4. Direction control lever is in neutral. 5. Fasten the tow bar to the lift truck.
Quick lift truck movement could overload the tow line or bar and cause it to break. Gradual and smooth lift truck movement will better.
6. Remove the wheel blocks. Tow the lift truck slowly. Do not tow any faster than 2 km/h (1.2 mph).
Normally, the towing lift truck should be as large as the disabled lift truck. Satisfy yourself that the towing lift truck has enough brake capacity, weight and power, to control both lift trucks for the grade and the distance involved.
WARNING Be sure all necessary repairs and adjustments have been made before a lift truck that has been towed to a service area is put back into operation.
- 66 -
Maintenance Section
Tire Inflation Information The tire inflation pressures shown in the following 1 chart are cold inflation shipping pressures.
Size
Ply Rating or Strength Index
6.5X10 7.0X15 28X9-15 28X12.5-15
10 12 12 16
Tire Inflation Pressures Adjustment
Shipping Pressure kPa psi 790 825 825 725
A tire inflation in a warm shop area, 18¡ to 21¡C (65¡ to 70¡F), will be underinflated if the machine works in freezing temperatures. Low pressure shortens the life of a tire.
115 120 120 105
Tire Inflation
Standard tire, ply rating and inflation pressures.
1
The operating inflation pressure is based on the weight of a ready - to - work machine without attachments, at rated payload, and in average operating conditions. Pressures for each application may vary and should always be obtained from your tire supplier. NOTE : Fill tires to the recommended pressures listed L35 kpa (5 psi). Tires can be filled with nitrogen.
IAOM001S
Typical Example
WARNING Personal injury or death could result when tires are inflated incorrectly. Use a self - attaching inflation chuck and stand behind the tread when inflating a tire. Proper inflation equipment, and training in using the equipment, are necessary to avoid overinflation. A tire blowout or rim failure can result from improper or misused equipment.
NOTICE Set the tire inflation equipment regulator at no more than 140 kPa (20 psi) over the recommended tire pressure.
- 67 -
Maintenance Section
Torque Specification Torques for Standard Hose Clamps-Worm Drive Band Type
Torques for Standard Fasteners NOTICE
NOTICE
The following charts give general torques for bolts, nuts and taperlock studs or SAE Grade 5 or better quality.
The following chart gives the torques for initial installation of hose clamps on new hose and for reassembly or retightening of hose clamps on existing hose.
Clamp Width
Initial Installation Torque on New Hose
16 mm(.625 in) 13.5 mm(.531 in) 8 mm(.312 in)
N¥m 7.5L0.5 4.5L0.5 0.9L0.2
Clamp Width
Initial Installation Torque on New Hose
16 mm(.625 in) 13.5 mm(.531 in) 8 mm(.312 in)
N¥m 4.5L0.5 3.0L0.5 0.7L0.2
Torques for Bolts and Nuts Thread Size Inch 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 1/2
Ib in 65L5 40L5 8L2
Ib in 40L5 25L5 6L2
Standard Bolt & Nut Torque N¥m lb ft 12L3 9L2 25L6 18L4.5 47L9 35L7 70L15 50L11 105L20 75L15 160L30 120L20 215L40 160L30 370L50 275L37 620L80 460L60 900L100 660L100 1300L150 950L100 1800L200 1325L150 2400L300 1800L225 3100L350 2300L250
Torques for Taperlock Studs Thread Size Standard Bolt & Nut Torque Inch N¥m lb ft 1/4 8L3 6L2 5/16 17L5 13L4 3/8 35L5 26L4 7/16 45L10 33L7 1/2 65L10 48L7 5/8 110L20 80L15 3/4 170L30 125L22 Torques for Taperlock Studs 7/8 260L40 190L30 1 400L60 300L45 1 1/8 500L70 370L50 1 1/4 650L80 480L60 1 3/8 750L90 550L65 1 1/2 870L100 640L75
- 68 -
Maintenance Section
Torques for Metric Fasteners NOTICE Be very careful never or mix metric with U.S. customary (standard) fasteners. Mismatched or incorrect fasteners will cause machine damage or malfunction and can result in personal injury. Original fasteners removed from the machine should be saved for reassembly whenever possible. If new fasteners are needed, they must be of the same size and grade as the ones that are being replaced. The material strength identification is usually shown on the bolt head by numbers (8.8, 10.9, etc). The following chart gives standard torques for bolts and nuts with Grade 8.8.
NOTE : Metric hardware must be replaced with metric hardware. Check parts manual for proper replacement.
Torques for Bolts and Nuts Thread Size Inch M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36
Metric ISO Thread Standard Torque N¥m lb ft 12L3 9L2 28L7 20L5 55L10 40L7 100L20 75L15 160L30 120L20 240L40 175L30 460L60 340L40 800L100 600L75 1600L200 1200L150 2700L300 2000L225
- 69 -
Maintenance Section
Cooling System Specifications Check the specific gravity of the coolant solution frequently in cold weather to ensure adequate protection.
Coolant Information NOTE : The following information is generic and valid for lift trucks.
Clean the cooling system if it is contaminated, if the engine overheats if foaming is observed in the radiator.
Engine operating temperatures have increased to improve engine efficiency. This means proper cooling system maintenance is especially important. Overheating, overcooling, pitting, cavitation erosion, cracked heads, piston seizures, and plugged radiators are classic cooling system failures. In fact, coolant is as important as the quality of fuel and lubricating oil.
Coolant should be drained, the system cleaned and new coolant added every 2000 service hours or two years. Filling at over 20 liters (5 U.S. gallons) per minute can cause air pockets in the cooling system.
DAEWOO recommends that the coolant mixture contain a minimum of 30% antifreeze or equivalent.
After draining and refilling the cooling system, operate the engine with the radiator cap removed until the coolant reaches normal operating temperature and the coolant level stabilizes. Add coolant as necessary to fill the system to the proper level.
Never add coolant to an overheated engine, engine damage can result. Allow the engine to cool first.
Never operate without a thermostat in the cooling system. Cooling system problems can arise without a thermostat.
All water is corrosive at engine operating temperature. The cooling system should be protected with a 3 to 6% concentration of liquid supplemental coolant additive at all times, regardless of the concentration of antifreeze.
Coolant Water
NOTICE
Hard water, or water with high levels of calcium and magnesiun ions, encourages the formation of insoluble chemical compounds by combining with cooling system additives such as silicates and phosphates.
Excessive supplemental coolant additive greater than the recommended 6%, together with concentrations of antifreeze greater than 65% can cause deposits to form and can result in radiator tube blockage, overheating, and/or water pump seal damage. If the machine is to be stored in, or shipped to, an area with freezing temperatures, the cooling system must be protected to the lowest expected outside (ambient) temperature.
The tendency of silicates and phosphates to precipitate out-of-solution increases with increasing water hardness. Hard water, or water with high levels of calcium and magnesium ions encourages the formation of insoluble chemicals, especially after a number of heating and cooling cycles.
The engine cooling system is normally protected to -28¡C(-20¡F) with antifreeze, when shipped from the factory unless special requirements are defined.
DAEWOO prefers the use of distilled water or deionized water to reduce the potential and severity of chemical insolubilty.
- 70 -
Maintenance Section
Minimum Acceptable Water Water Content Limits gr/gal (ppm) Chlorides 2.4 (40) maximum Sulfates 5.9 (100) maximum Total Hardness 10 (170) maximum Total Solids 20 (340) maximum pH 5.5 to 9.0 ppm = parts per million Using water that meets the minimum acceptable water requirement may not prevent drop-out of these chemical compounds totally, but should minimize the rate to acceptable levels.
Antifreeze Make proper antifreeze additions Adding pure antifreeze as a makeup solution for cooling system top-up is an unacceptable practice. It increases the concentration of antifreeze in the cooling system which increase the concentration of dissolved solids and undissolved chemical inhibitors in the cooling system. Add antifreeze mixed with water to the same freeze protection as your cooling system. Use the chart below to assist in determining the concentration of antifreeze to use. Antifreeze Concentrations Protection Temperature Concentration Protection to -15¡C (5¡F) 30% antifreeze and 70% water Protection to -23¡C (-10¡F) 40% antifreeze and 60% water Protection to -37¡C (-34¡F) 50% antifreeze and 50% water Protection to -51¡C (-60¡F) 60% antifreeze and 40% water
- 71 -
Maintenance Section
Fuel Specifications Fuel Information
Fuel Types
Use only fuel as recommended in this section.
DAEWOO Diesel Engines have the ability to burn a wide variety of fuels. These fuels are divided into two general groups, preferred and permissible.
NOTICE
The Preferred Fuels provide maximum engine service life and performance. They are distillate fuels. They are commonly called diesel fuel, MDO diesel, furnace oil, gas oil or kerosene (for cold weather operation).
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day of operation to drive out moist air and to prevent condensation. Maintain a constant level near the top of the day tank to avoid drawing moisture into the tank as the level decreases. Do not fill the tank to the top. Fuel expands as it gets warm and can overflow.
Experience has proven that distillate fuels meeting the following basic specifications will result in optimum engine performance and durability.
Do not fill the fuel filters with fuel before installing them. Contaminated fuel will cause accelerated wear to the fuel system parts.
DAEWOO strongly encourages the use of fuels that meet the Preferred Fuels specification. The permissible fuels are crude oils or blended fuels. Use of these fuels can result in higher maintenance costs and reduced engine service life.
Drain the water and sediment from any fuel storage tank before it is refilled. This will help prevent water and/or sendiment from being pumped from the fuel storage tank into the engine fuel tank.
Crude oil is used to describe oils/fuels that are not refined and are in the original state as when pumped from the ground. Certain types of crude oils can be burned in DAEWOO Engines. PREFERRED DISTILLATE FUEL FOR DISEL ENGINES Specifications Requirements* Aromatics (AST D1319) 35% Max. Ash (ASTM D482) 0.02% Weight Max. Cetane Number 35 Min. for 45 Max. (ASTM D613) 40 Min. for DI Engines Cloud Point (ASTM D97)
Not Above Lowest Expected Ambient Temperature
Gravity API (ASTM D287)
30 Min. and 45 Max.
Pour Point (ASTM D97)
6¡C (10¡F) Below Ambient Min.
Sulfur (ASTM D2788, D3605 orD1552)
0.5% Max. (See Sulfur Topic)
Viscostiy, Kinematic @ 20.0 cSt Max. 38¡C (100¡F) (ASTM D445) 1.4 cSt Min. Water & Sediment (ASTM D1796) *As delivered to fuel system
- 72 -
0.01% Max.
Maintenance Section
Fuel Sulfur Content The percentage of sulfur in the fuel will affect the engine oil recommendations. Fuel sulfur is chemically changed during combustion to form both sulfurous and sulfuric acid. These acids chemically attack metal surfaces and cause corrosive wear. Certain additives used in lubricating oils contain alkaline compounds that are formulated to neutralize these acids. The measure of this reserve alkalinity in a lubricating oil is known as its Total Base Number (TBN). TBN is essential to neutralize the acids from combustion gases and to minimize corrosive wear. Any API classification performance oil should have sufficient TBN for fuels with less than 0.5% sulfur. For fuels with 0.5% to 1.5% sulfur by weight, engine oil must have a TBN of 20 times the percentage of fuel sulfur as measured by the ASTM (American Society of Testing Materials) D-2896 method. (ASTM D-2896 can normally be found at your local technological society, library or college). DAEWOO recommends infrared analysis (in conjunction with wear metal analysis) of used oil in determining the effectiveness of oil TBN and acid neutralization. For fuel with sulfur exceeding 1.5% by weight, use an oil with a TBN of 30 and reduce the oil change interval by one half. Also, infrared analysis and wear metal analysis should be used to establish oil change intervals. Periodically request fuel sulfur content information from your fuel supplier. Fuel sulfur content can change with each bulk delivery.
- 73 -
Maintenance Section
Lubricant Specifications Lubricant Information
Hydraulic Oil (HYDO)
Certain abbreviations follow Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) J754 nomenclature and some classifications follow SAE J183 abbreviations.
The following commercial classifications can be used in the hydraulic system. ¥ API CF-4/SG, CF-4/SF, CE/SG, CE/SF, CD/SG, or CD/SF ¥ MIL-L-2104E or D
The MIL specifications are U.S.A. Military Specifications.
Industrial premium hydraulic oils that have passed the Vickers vane pump test (35VQ25) and/or have a minimum of 0.09% zinc additive may also be used. These oils should have antiwear, antifoam, antirust and antioxidation additives for heavy duty use as stated by the oil supplier. ISO viscosity grade of 46 would normally be selected.
The recommended oil viscosities can be found in the Lubricant Viscosities chart in this publication. Grease is classified by the National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) based on ASTM D217-68 Worked Penetration characteristics which are given a defined consistency number.
Transmission Oil (TDTO) Engine Oil (DEO and EO) NOTICE
The following oil specifications provide guidelines for the selection of commercial products :
This oil is formulated for transmissions and drive trains only, and should not be used in engines. Shortened engine life will result.
¥ API CF-4/SG, CF-4/SF, CE/SG, CE/SF ¥ API SD, SE
NOTE : Muti-grade oils are not blended by DAEWOO for use in transmissions. Multi-grade oils which use high molecular weight polymers as viscosity index improvers lose their viscosity effectiveness by permanent and temporary shear of the viscosity index improver and therefore, are not recommended for transmission and drive train compartments.
NOTICE Failure to follow the oil recommendations can cause shortened engine lift due to carbon deposits or excessive wear.
Consult the EMA Lubricating Oils Data Book for a listing of oil brands.
NOTE : Failure to follow this recommendation can cause shortened transmission life due to material incompatibility, inadequate frictional requirements for disk materials and/or excessive gear wear.
NOTE : The percentage of sulfur in the fuel will affect the engine oil recommendations. For fuel sulfur effects, the Infrared Analysis or the ASTM D2896 procedure can be used to evaluate the residual neutralization properties of an engine oil. The sulfur products formation depends on the fuel sulfur content, oil formulation, crankcase blowby, engine operating conditions and ambient temperature.
The API CD/TO - 2 or To - 4 specification or MIL - L 2104D or E oil could be used.
- 74 -
Maintenance Section
Gear Oil (GO) Gear Oil offers maximum protection against the scoring and pitting of gear teeth and rolling element bearings. Gear Oil can also provide excellent stability under high temperature conditions and has superior low temperature performance. It will also give protection against rust and corrosion. Select an oil that meets API GL-5 spec or MIL-L2105C spec.
- 75 -
Maintenance Section
Lubricant Viscosities and Refill Capacities Lubricant Viscosities
Refill Capacities
Lubricant Viscosities for Ambient (Outside) Temperatures
Refill Capacities-(Approximate) Compartment or System
Liters U.S. Imperial Gal. Gal. 4.0 1.1 0.88 Engine Crankcase w/Filter G420 Gasoline & LP-Gas
Oil ¡C ¡F Compartment --------------------------------------or System Viscosities Lubricant Viscosities Min Max Min Max Engine Crankcase (Gasoline and LP-Gas) and Lift Chains API CF-4, CF-4/SG, API CE, CE/SG
SAE 10W30 -20 +40 -4 +104 --------------------------------------------------------------------------SAE 15W40 -15 +50 +5 +122
Engine Crankcase Diesel API CF - 4
SAE 10W SAE 10W30 SAE 15W40
Power Shift Transmission API CD/TO-2/TO-4
SAE 10W
-20 +10
SAE 30W
0
Hydraulic and Power Steering System Drive Axle Brakes
-20 +10 -4 +50 -20 +40 -4 +104 -15 +50 +5 +122 -4
+50
+35 32 +95
Engine Crankcase w/Filter DC24 Diesel
6.5
1.72
1.43
Cooling System w/Coolant Recovery Bottle G420 Gasoline & LP-Gas
9.5
2.5
2.1
Cooling System w/Coolant Recovery Bottle DC24 Diesel
9.8
2.55 2.174
Fuel Tank-G Series, D series Gasoline, Diesel LP-Gas -G-Series Power Shift Transmission Hydraulic & Power Steering System
42
11.0
Drive Axle Brake System
SAE 10W -20 +40 -4 +104 --------------------------------------------------------------------------SAE 10W30 -20 +40 -4 +104 --------------------------------------------------------------------------SAE 15W40 -15 +50 +5 +122 SAE 80W90 -20 +50 -4 +122 SAE J1703f -30 +50 -22 +122 DOT-3 or DOT-4
- 76 -
PTA18
9.2
15.2 kg 33.5 lb 33.5 lb 10.0 2.7 2.2 30 7.9 6.6 4.5 1.0
1.2 0.26
1.0 0.22
Maintenance Section
Maintenance Intervals First 250 Service Hours NOTICE All maintenance and repair, except Every 10 Service Hours or Daily, on the lift truck must be prformed by qualified and authorized personnel only.
Engine Valve Lash - Check, Adjust ...................100 Hydraulic Return Filter - Change.......................100
Every 250 Service Hours or Monthly Hydraulic Oil Level - Check ...............................101 Drive Axle Oil Level - Check..............................101 Attachment & Mast - Inspect, Lubricate ............102 Steering Mechanism - Check, Lubricate ...........102 Battery Terminal - Clean, Inspect ......................103 Brake Oil Level - Check.....................................103 Engine Oil & Filter - Change..............................103 PCV Valve System - Inspect, Clean ..................103 Diesel Engine.....................................................104
NOTICE Careless disposal of waste oil can harm the environment and can be dangerous to persons. Always dispose of waste oil to an authorized personnel only.
When Required
Every 500 Service Hours or 3 Months
Carburetor & Fuel Filter - Adjust, Check, Clean, Change ..........................78 Priming the Fuel System(Diesel Engine).............80 Fuel Tank Filler Cap and Screen(If Equipped) - Clean .................................................................81 Seat, Hood Latch & Support Cylinder Check, Lubricate..................................................71 Fuses, Bulbs and Circuit Breaker Change, Reset.....................................................82 Air Intake System - Check, Clean, Change.........84 Distributor & Spark Plug - Check.........................86 Tires and Wheels - Inspect, Check .....................87 Ignition Timing(Gasoline, LP-Gas and Dual Fuel Engine) - Check, Adjust .......................................88 Carburetor(Gasoline, LP - Gas Dual Fuel Engine) Adjust...................................................................88 Wheel Bolts & Nuts - Inspect...............................89
Belts - Check, Adjust .........................................105 Tilt Cylinders - Check, Adjust, Lubricate............105 Mast Hinge Pin - Lubricate ................................106 Crosshead Roller - Inspect ................................106 Transmission Oil & Strainer - Change, Clean ...107 Parking Brake - Test, Adjust ..............................107 Inching & Braking Control Shaft - Lubricate ......107 Horn & Lights(If Equipped) - Check...................107 Overhead Guard - Inspect .................................107
Every 10 Service Hours or Daily
Drive Axle Oil - Change .....................................110
Engine Oil Level - Check.....................................90 Coolant Level - Check, Clean, Change ...............90 Air Cleaner Indicator - Check ..............................91 Walk-Around Inspection - Inspect........................92 Mast Channels(Roller Mast Only) - Lubricate .....93 Transmission Oil Level - Check...........................93
Every 2000 Service Hours or 12 Months
Every 1000 Service Hours or 6 Months Hydraulic Oil & Return Filter & Breather & Strainer - Check, Clean, Change ....108 Lift Chains - Check, Adjust ................................108
Every 1500 Service Hours or 9 Months
Steer Wheel Bearings - Repack.........................111 Cooling System - Clean, Change ......................112 Forks - Inspect ...................................................114 Drive Wheel Bearing - Repack ..........................118
First 50-100 Service Hours Engine Oil & Filter - Change................................94 Transmission Oil & Strainer - Change, Clean .....96 Drive Axle Oil - Change .......................................97 Parking Brake - Test, Adjust ................................98
- 77 -
Maintenance Section
When Required You must read and understand the warnings and instructions contained in the Safety section of this manual, before performing any aperation or maintenance procedures.
Fuel Filter (Gasoline Engine and Dual Fuel Engine) - Check, Clean, Change
Carburetor & Fuel Filter - Adjust, Check, Clean, Change
NOTE : Engine must be stopped and cool.
Carburetor (Gasoline and LP-Gas Engine and Dual Fuel System) - Adjust
Park the lift truck in an authorized refueling area with the forks lowered, parking brake applied, transmission in NEUTRAL and the engine stopped.
If the engine is hard to start or the exhaust is smoking, the carburetor may need adjusting.
1. Raise the hood and seat assembly. Before adjusting the carburetor make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature. Park the lift truck with the forks lowered, parking brake applied, transmission in neutral and the engine stopped.
WARNING Fuel leaked or spilled onto hot surfaces or electrical components can cause a fire.
For the complete procedure and specifications for your specific engine, see the ÒService ManualÓ.
Turn the disconnect switch OFF or disconnect the battery when changing fuel filters.
NOTICE UNDER DUSTY OR OTHER DIRTY OPERATING CONDITIONS Clean the fuel filter every month and replace it every year.
IB6OM01P
2. Loosen Bolt (1) and clamps (2) (3). 3. Replace old fuel filter with new filter. 4. Fastemed Bolt (1) and clamps (2) (3).
- 78 -
Maintenance Section
Fuel Filter ( LP-Gas Engine ) - Check, Clean, Change NOTE : Engine must be stopped and cool. Park the lift truck in an authorized refueling area with the forks lowered, parking brake applied and the transmission in NEUTRAL.
1
2
3
4
6
5
IB2O609P
4. Remove cover w/magnet (1), O-ring (2) and filter element (3) from bottom cover (4). 5. Wash the filter element (3) in clean, nonflammable solvent. 6. Dry the filter element with 205 kPa (30 psi) maximum air pressure. IOMO013P
7. Check bottom cover O-ring (2) for damage. Replace it if necessary.
1. Close the fuel shutoff valve on the LP-Gas tank. Run the engine until fuel in the line runs out and the engine stops. Turn off the ignition switch.
8. Install the filter element (3), O-ring (2), and cover (1) on bottom cover (4). 9. Tighten the cover (1). 10. Install the filter by washer (5) and nut (6). 11. Open the fuel valve by slowly turning the valve counterclockwise. 12. Start engine and then turn the ignition key switch off. 13. Check the fuel lines and fittings with a soap solution. Make repairs if necessary.
IB2O608P
2. Scribe a line across the filter housing covers. 3. Remove the cover retaining screws.
- 79 -
Maintenance Section
NOTICE
NOTICE
UNDER DUSTY OR OTHER DIRTY OPERATING CONDITIONS
Do not fill fuel filters with fuel before installing them. Contaminated fuel will cause accelerated wear to fuel system parts.
Clean the fuel filter every month and replace it every year.
5. Install the new fuel filter cartridge assembly.
Fuel Filter (Diesel Engine) - Check, Clean, Change
6. Turn the new fuel filter cartridge assembly until the filter gasket is fitted against the sealing face.
Changing Filter Element
7. Turn the fuel filter cartridge assembly an additional 2/3 of turn.
Park lift truck with the forks lowered, parking brake applied, transmission in neutral, engine stopped and cool.
Priming the Fuel System (Diesel Engine)
1. Raise the hood and seat assembly.
Bleeding the Fuel System
WARNING
After changing the fuel filter cartridge assembly, or after having serviced any part of the fuel system, make sure that the air is bled from the system.
Fuel leaked or spilled onto hot surfaces or electrical components can cause a fire. Turn the disconnect switch OFF if fitted or disconnect the battery when changing fuel filters.
IC3O004P
1. Loosen one of four bleeding screws(1) on overflow pipes to injection nozzles. IC3O003P
2. Remove fuel filter cartridge assembly. 3. Remove sensor assembly from cartridge assembly. 4. Before installing a new cartridge assembly, assemble existing sensor assembly, apply a small amount of clean fuel to the filter cartridge gasket.
- 80 -
Maintenance Section
Fuel Tank Filler Cap and Screen (If Equipped) - Clean Park the lift truck with the forks lowered, parking brake applied, transmission in neutral and the engine stopped.
IC3O003P
2. Push the priming pump on top of the fuel filter housing against the spring to allow air mixed with fuel to escape through the bleeding screw. Ensure that excess fuel is collected in a container or rag to prevent fuel from getting onto engine parts. ILOO017P
3. Repeat the pumping action until no bubbles are visible in the flowing fuel.
1. Remove the filler cap assembly. Clean in clean, nonflammable solvent.
4. Tighten the bleed screw. 2. Dry cap assembly. 5. Start the engine and check fuel system for leaks.
3. Install filler cap assembly.
WARNING
Draining the Water From the Fuel Filter
Fuel leaked or spilled onto hot surfaces or electrical components can cause a fire.
4. Drain moisture and sediment from fuel tank as required by prevailing conditions.
IC3O003P
1. Turn the wing nut counter clockwise to open the drain valve on the bottom of the fuel filter. 2. Drain some fuel (and any water) until clean fuel flows from the filter.
- 81 -
Maintenance Section
Seat, Hood Latch & Support Cylinder - Check, Lubricate
Fuses, Bulbs and Circuit Breaker - Change, Reset Fuses NOTE : If a fuse filament separates, use only the same type and size fuses for replacement, If the filament in a new fuse separates, have the circuits and instruments checked.
NOTICE Always replace fuses with ones of the correct ampere rating.
ILO6008P
1. Check the operation of the seat adjuster rod. Make sure that the seat slides freely on its track. Lightly oil the seat slider tracks if necessary.
IPMO002P
Remove the front cover of fuse box. The fuses are located under the cover.
ILOO006P
Fuse - Protects an eletrical circuit from an overload. Opens (filament separates) if an overload occurs.
2. Pull the latch to raise the hood and seat assembly. Make certain the support cylinder will hold the hood open.
IPMO003P
Check the fuses. Use a flashlight, if necessary.
- 82 -
Maintenance Section
Circuit Breaker
IPMO004P
Fuses are identified as follows : ILOO006P
1. Horn - 10 amp. 2. Flood Lights, Instrument Panel Illumination. Hour Meter Display - 15 amp. 3. Instrument Panel, Hour Meter. Ignition Coil (G -Type) - 10 amp 4. Engine stop - 15 amp 5. Back-up Relay, Bugger, Lamp, Stop Lamp. Strobe - 15 amp 6. Engine Starter Relay - 5 amp
1. Raise the hood and seat assembly. Make sure the support cylinder securely holds the hood open.
Bulbs Bulbs are identified as follows : *1. Bulb-head lamp halogen (12V-35W) *2. Bulb-back up (12V-10W) *3. Bulb-turn signal (12V-23W) *4. Bulb-stop & tail (12V-23/8W)
IB6OO03P
Typical Example 2. The main circuit breaker is located on the rear of the support for the controls.
*OPTIONAL LAMP OR LIGHT
NOTE : To reset circuit breakers push in on the button. The button should stay in if the breaker is reset. If the button will not stay in, or comes out shortly after reset, have the circuits checked.
- 83 -
Maintenance Section
Air Intake System - Check, Clean, Change
NOTICE Do not allow dirty air to enter the intake hose when cleaning the inside of the cleaner housing.
Servicing Filter Element
5. Check the air cleaner housing for loose retaining bolts. 6. Reset the air cleaner service indicator. 7. Install the air filter element. 8. Install the cover and tighten the cover latches.
Service the air cleaner when the red target in the service indicator (1) stays locked in the visible position with the engine stopped.
9. Start the engine and observe the position of the indicator. If the indicator shows RED after the installation of the primary element, install another clean or a new element or, replace the secondary element. See topic, ÒChanging Secondary ElementÓ.
1. To service the air cleaner, raise the hood and seat assembly. Make certain the support cylinder securely holds the hood open. Loosen the cover latches and remove the cover.
10. Stop the engine and close the hood and seat assembly.
IB6OM02P
IPMO007P
2. Rotate the element slightly to separate it from its base and remove it from the air cleaner housing. 3. Clean and inspect the element or replace with a new element. See topic, ÒCleaning Primary Filter ElementÓ. 4. Clean the inside of air cleaner housing and the cover. Inspect all connections between the air cleaner and carburetor. Check intake hose for cracks, damage necessary to prevent leakage.
- 84 -
Maintenance Section
Changing Secondary Element
Cleaning Primary Filter Elements
Relace the secondary element after the primary element has been cleaned three times or yearly.
WARNING Pressure air can cause personal injury.
1. Remove the primary air cleaner element. See topic ÒServicing Filter ElementÓ. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing and cover.
When using pressure air for cleaning, wear a protective face shield, protective clothing and protective shoes. The maximum air pressure must be below 205 kPa (30 psi) for cleaning purposes.
NOTICE Do not clean the elements by bumping or tapping them. Inspect filter elements after cleaning. Do not use a filter with damaged pleats, gaskets or seals.
IPMO008P
2. Remove the secondary element. Inspect the gasket between the air cleaner housing and the engine inlet. Replace the gasket if it is damaged.
When cleaning with pressure air, use 205 kPa (30 psi) maximum pressure to prevent filter element damage.
NOTICE
When cleaning with pressure water, use 280 kPa (40 psi) maximum pressure to prevent filter element damage.
Always replace the secondary element. Do not attempt to reuse it by cleaning. Have spare elements on hand to use while cleaning used elements. 3. Install a new secondary element. Install a new or cleaned primary element. Install the cover. Tighten the latches.
The primary element should be replaced after a year's service or after cleaning no more than 6 times.
4. Start the engine and observe the air cleaner service indicator. If the indicator shows RED after installing a new secondary elemennt and a cleaned primary (outer) element, replace the cleaned primary filter with a new element. 5. Stop the engine. Close the hood and seat assembly.
- 85 -
Maintenance Section
Air-205 kPa (30 psi) Maximum Pressure
Distributor & Spark Plug - Check Distributor (Gasoline, and LP-Gas Engines and Dual Fuel Engine) - Check Park the lift truck with the forks lowered, parking brake applied, transmission in neutral and the engine stopped. 1. Raise the hood and seat assembly. 2. Disconnect the battery cable.
IAOM009I
Direct air on the inside and outside of the element along the length of the pleats. Check the element for any tears, rips or damage. Checking Element
IB2O608P
3. Remove the distributor cap. Clean the distributor cap. Check the cap for cracks, carbon runners and corroded terminals. Replace the cap if necessary. 4. Remove the rotor. Check the rotor for burned and corroded contacts. Replace the rotor if necessary.
IAOM011I
1. Insert a light inside the clean dry element and examine it. Discard the element if tears, rips or damage are found.
NOTE : No diagnostic check is necessary for contactless electronic sensor. If the engine misfires, or will not start, consult your DAEWOO Lift Truck dealer for service or the proper procedure to service the electronic pack.
2. Wrap and store good elements in a clean, dry place.
5. Install the rotor and distributor cap. Secure the distributor cap in position with the spring clips. 6. Close the hood and seat assembly.
- 86 -
Maintenance Section
Spark Plugs (Gasoline, and LP-Gas Engines and Dual Fuel Engine) - Check
Tires and Wheels - Inspect, Check WARNING
Park the lift truck with the forks lowered, parking brake applied, transmission in neutal and the engine stopped.
Servicing and changing tires and rims can be dangerous and should be done only by trained personnel using proper tools and procedures.
1. Raise the hood and seat assembly.
Deflate tire before removing wheel nuts from the truck.
2. Disconnect the battery cable.
If correct procedures are not followed while servicing tires and rims, the assemblies could burst with explosive force and cause serious physical injury or death. Follow carefully the specific information provided by your tire servicing man or dealer.
Check Inflation and Damage IB2O607P
Inspect tires for wear, cuts, gouges and foreign objects. Look for bent rims and correct seating of locking ring.
3. Disconnect the spark plug wires. Check the wires for cracks, wear, high voltage leaks or broken connectors.
Check tires for proper inflation. See ÒTire Inflation PressuresÓ.
4. Clean the engine block in the area around the spark plugs.
To inflate tires always use a clip-on chuck with a minimum 60 cm (24 inches) length of hose to an inline valve and gauge.
5. Remove the spark plugs. Inspect the porcelain for cracks and high voltage tracking. Check the electrodes for wear, carbon or corrosion. Replace plugs that are defective.
Always stand behind the tread of the tire. NOT in front of the rim.
6. Clean the spark plugs. To set the electrode gaps for a particular engine, see the ÒService ManualÓ. Install the plugs. 7. Close the hood and seat assembly.
- 87 -
Maintenance Section
Ignition Timing (Gasoline, LP-Gas and Dual Fuel Engine) - Check, Adjust on Gasoline engine, 4¡ BTDC @740rpm on LP Gas engines, 9¡ BTDC @740rpm
NOTICE IPMO022P
Be sure to check and set Dual fuel ignition timing on gasoline fuel. Dual fuel engines timing must be 4¡ BTDC at 800rpm. If the engine is to be run on LP fuel for a long period of time, the timing can be adjusted to 9¡ BTDC at 740rpm for better performance. When the fuel is changed back to gasoline, the timing must be 4¡ BTDC at 740rpm. If the timing is at 9¡ BTDC at 740rpm on gasoline fuel for a long period or time, the pistons will be damaged.
Do NOT reinflate a tire that has been run while flat or underinflated, without first checking to make sure the rim is not damaged and is in the correct position. When tires are changed, be sure to clean all rim parts and, if necessary, repaint to stop detrimental effects of corrosion. Sand blasting is recommended for removal of rust. Deflate tire before removing wheel nuts from the truck.
Ignition timing may vary by engine type. See the ÒService ManualÓ for the complete procedure and specifications for your specific engine.
Check all components carefully and replace any cracked, badly worn, damaged and severely rusted or corroded parts with new parts of the same size and type. If there is any doubt, replace with new parts.
Carburetor (Gasoline, LP - Gas and Dual Fuel Engine) - Adjust
Do NOT, under any circumstanes, attempt to rework, weld, heat or braze any rim components.
If the engine is hard to start or the exhaust is smoking, the carburetor may need adjusting. Before adjusting the carburetor make sure the engine is at normal operating temperature. Park the lift truck with the forks lowered, parking brake applied, transmission in neutral and the engine stopped.
Outer rim
For the complete procedure and specifications for your specific engine, see the ÒService ManualÓ. IPMO023I
The safety disc wheel has designed to prevent loosening of the rim bolt on the two-piece rim where the tire is attached to the truck. The rim nut is attached to the inner side. The bolt head is rounded. For that reason, the tire must first be removed from the truck when the rim is taken apart.
- 88 -
Maintenance Section
Wheel Bolts & Nuts - Inspect Inspect Tightness Steer Wheels
IPMO024P
Typical Example 1. Inspect tightness of wheel bolts in a sequence opposite each other 110 N¥m (81 lb ft). Drive Wheels
IPMO025P
2. Inspect tightness of wheel nuts in a sequence opposite each other to 180 N¥m (133 lb ft).
- 89 -
Maintenance Section
Every 10 Service Hours or Daily You must read and understand the warnings and instructions contained in the Safety section of this manual, before performing any aperation or maintenance procedures.
Engine Oil Level - Check
Coolant Level - Check, Clean, Change
1. Raise the hood and seat assembly.
Checking Coolant Level WARNING WARNING
Hot oil and components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or components to contact skin.
At operating temperature, the engine coolant is hot and under pressure. Steam can cause personal injury.
Gasoline and LP-Gas Engines
Check the coolant level only after the engine has been stopped and the fill cap is cool enough to touch with your bare hand. Remove the fill cap slowly to relieve pressure. Cooling system conditioner contains alkali. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes to prevent personal injury.
IB1O1012
2. Maintain oil level between the Max. and Min. marks on the dipstick.
Diesel Engines IB6OO08P
Typical Example 1. Observe the coolant level with engine cold. Maintain coolant level to the proper line on expansion bottle. If the expansion bottle has no coolant, it will be necessary to check coolant at the radiator filler neck. 2. Remove the radiator cap. Fill radiator to the top of the filler neck. Inspect radiator cap. Replace if damaged. Install the radiator cap.
IC3O005P
- 90 -
Maintenance Section
Air Cleaner Indicator - Check Checking Service Indicator
IB6OM03P
3. Start and run the engine to stabilize the coolant level in the filler neck. If low add coolant until it reaches the top of the filler neck. Install the radiator cap. Observe coolant level in the expansion bottle. If necessary, add coolant to bring the coolant to the appropriate line on the expansion bottle.
IB6OM02P
1. Observe the air cleaner service indicator. 2. Service the air cleaner when the RED band in the service indicator, lock in the visible position. See topic, ÒAir Intake System - Check, Clean, ChangeÓ in ÒWhen RequiredÓ.
4. Stop the engine. 5. Inspect the cooling system for leaks, hose cracks or loose connections.
NOTE : Service the element more frequently, as required, in severe dust or lint conditions. Also, service it more frequently where the operator is required to wear a respirator.
WARNING Pressure air can cause personal injury.
3. Close hood and seat assembly.
When using pressure air for cleaning, wear a protective face shield, protective clothing and protective shoes. Maximum air pressure must be less than 205 kPa (30 psi) for cleaning purposes.
6. Blow any dust and lint from the radiator fins.
- 91 -
Maintenance Section
Walk-Around Inspection - Inspect For maximum service lift of the lift truck, make a thorough walk-around inspection. Look around and under the truck for such items as loose or missing bolts, debris or dirt buildup, fuel, oil or coolant leaks and cut gouged tires. Have any repairs made and debris removed, as needed. IB6OM04P
5. Inspect the operator's compartment for loose items and cleanliness. 6. Inspect the instrument panel for broken gauges and indicator lights. 7. Test the horn and other safety devices for proper operation.
IB6OS02P
1. Inspect the tires and wheels for cuts, gouges, foreign objects, inflation pressure and loose or missing bolts. 2. Inspect the mast and lift chains for wear, broken links, pins and loose rollers. 3. Inspect the hydraulic system for leaks, worn hoses or damaged lines. IB6OM05P
4. Look for transmission and differential leaks on the lift truck and on the ground.
Typical Example 8. Inspect the cooling system for leaks, worn hoses and debris buildup. 9. Inspect engine compartment for oil, coolant and fuel leaks. 10. Inspect the forks. ¥ Visually inspect forks for cracks, especially in the heel section, around the mounting brackets, and all weld areas. ¥ Inspect for broken or jagged fork tips, bent or twisted blades and shanks. Make sure positioning lock is in place and working. Lock the forks in position before using the truck. See ÒEvery 2000 Service Hours or 12 Months. ¥ Remove all defective forks from service.
- 92 -
Maintenance Section
Mast Channels (Roller Mast Only) - Lubricate
Transmission Oil Level - Check Checking Oil Level WARNING Hot oil and components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or components to contact skin.
1. Start and operate the lift truck until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. IPMO031P
2. Park the lift truck level with the forks lowered, parking brake applied and the transmission controls in NEUTRAL.
The channels on the roller-type mast require a break-in period. Apply a light film of lubricant on the channels where the rollers ride. This will prevent metal peel until the rollers set a pattern.
3. With the service brake applied and the engine at low idle, shift the directional control lever to forward and then to reverse, to fill the clutches. 4. Shift the direction control lever to the NEUTRAL position.
IB6OM06P
Open the cover(1) on the floor plate. 5. Remove the dip stick(2). Observe the oil level. 6. Maintain the oil level between the marks on the dip stick.
- 93 -
Maintenance Section
First 50-100 Service Hours You must read and understand the warnings and instructions contained in the Safety section of this manual, before performing any aperation or maintenance procedures.
Engine Oil & Filter - Change Engine Chankcase ( Gasoline, and LP - Gas ) 1. Operate lift truck a few minutes to warm oil. Park the lift truck with the forks lowered, parking brake applied, transmission in neutral and the engine stopped. 2. Raise rear of lift truck off ground and black securely.
IB2O619P
5. Remove and discard oil filter element. 6. Wipe sealing surface of oil filter element mounting base. Make sure all of the old gasket is removed.
WARNING Hot oil and components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or components to contact skin.
7. Before installing a new filter element, apply a small amount of clean engine oil to the flter element gasket. 8. Install the new filter element. When the gasket contacts the base, tighten it 3/4 of a turn more. Do not overtighten. 9. Raise the lift truck, remove the blocking and lower the lift truck. 10. Fill the crankcase. See ÒRefill CapacitiesÓ. 11. Start the engine and allow the oil to fill the filter and passages. 12. Check for oil leaks.
IOMO027P
3. Remove the crankcase drain plug and allow oil to drain. Clean and install drain plug. 4. Raise the hood and seat assembly.
IB2O508P
- 94 -
Maintenance Section
13. Stop the engine and measure the oil level. Maintain the oil level to the FULL mark on the dip stick. 14. Close hood and seat assembly.
Engine Crankcase(Diesel) The percentage of sulfur in the fuel will affect the engine oil recommendations. If the fuel has over 0.5% sulfur content, the CD engine oil must have a TBN of 20 times the percentage of fuel sulfur (TBN as measured by the ASTM D-2896 method). Your oil supplier should be able to furnish the correct oils.
IC3O006P
4. Remove and discard oil filter element. 5. Wipe sealing surface of oil filter element mounting base. Make sure all of the old gasket is removed.
1. Operate lift truck a few minutes to warm oil. Park the lift truck with the forks lowered, parking brake applied, Transmission in neutral and the engine stopped.
6. Before installing a new filter element, apply a small amount of clean engine oil to the filter element gasket.
2. Raise rear of lift truck off ground and block securely.
7. Install the new filter element. When the gasket contacts the base, tighten it 11/4 of a turn more. Do not overtighten.
WARNING 8. Raise the lift truck, remove the blocking and lower the lift truck.
Hot oil and components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or components to contact skin.
9. Raise the hood and seat assembly. 10. Fill the crankcase. See ÒRefill CapacitiesÓ.
IPMO040P IC3O007P
3. Remove the crankcase drain plug and allow oil to drain. Clean and install drain plug.
11. Start the engine and allow the oil to fill the filter and passages. 12. Check for oil leaks.
- 95 -
Maintenance Section
Transmission Oil & Strainer - Change, Clean Power Shift Transaxle(PTA18) WARNING Hot oil and components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or components to contact skin.
IC3O008P
13. Stop the engine and measure the oil level. Maintain the oil level between the MAX. and MIN. marks on dip stick.
Park the lift truck level, with the forks lowered, parking brake engaged, transmission in NEUTRAL and the engine stopped.
14. Close hood and seat assembly.
Component is shown removed from the lift truck for illustrative purposes.
NOTICE
1. Remove drain plug (1). Allow the oil to drain. Check O-ring seal and replace if necessary. Remove the strainer.
Servicing of the engine oil and oil filter element will largely affects on the engine performance as well as the engine life. Engine oil and filter element must be changed initially 50 hours.
Normal
Oil gauge
Drain plug (1) Strainer
IPMO060I
2. Wash the strainer in clean, nonflammable solvent and dry it. Install the strainer, and the drain plug.
- 96 -
Maintenance Section
3. Remove the filler cap. Fill the compartment with oil. See ÒRefill CapacitiesÓ. Install the dip stick/filler cap.
Drive Axle Oil - Change Park the lift truck on a level surface. Apply the parking brake. Place the directional control lever in NEUTRAL and stop the engine.
4. Start the engine. 5. With the service brake applied and engine at low idle, shift the transmission to forward and reverse to fill the clutches. 6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. Engage the parking brake. 7. Remove the dip stick. Observe the oil level. 8. Maintain the oil level to the lower mark (min. cold) when the oil temperature is about 40c (104d) or to the upper mark when the oil temperature is about 80c (175d), on the dip stick.
IB6OM08P
1. Raise the load backrest high enough to access the drain plug and level/fill plug.
9. Check for oil leaks at the strainer and drain plug. 10. Stop the engine. Install the floor plate.
2. Block the bottom of the mast with a block of wood to hold the load backrest in the raised position. 3. Place an appropriate container under the axle to catch the oil as it drains. Remove the drain plug and the level/fill plug. 4. Allow the oil to drain completely out. Discard the old oil according to federal, state, and local regulations. 5. Clean and reinstall the drain plug. 6. Add sufficient fresh oil through the level/fill opening until it reaches the bottom of the hole. See the section Lubricant Viscosities and Refill Capacities for the type and amount of oil to use. 7. Clean and reinstall the level/fill plug. 8. Remove the wood blocking and lower the load backrest.
- 97 -
Maintenance Section
Parking Brake - Test, Adjust
To Adjust
NOTE : Be sure area around the lift truck is clear of personnel and obstructions.
Park the lift truck on the level, with forks lowered, transmission in NEUTRAL and the engine stopped.
Test Operation 1. Drive the lift truck, fully loaded, forward up a 15% incline.
IB6OM10P
1. Remove the floor plate.
IB6OM09P
2. Halfway up the incline, stop the lift truck with the service brake.
IB6OO10P
2. Release the parking brake lever.
IB6OO10P
3. Engage the parking brake. Slowly release the service brake. 4. The parking brake should hold the lift truck. If the lift truck starts to move, immediately apply the service brakes. Have the parking brake adjusted. IPMO035P
3. Loosen nut(1). Adjust nut(2) to tighten the cable.
- 98 -
Maintenance Section
IB6OM09P
4. Check the parking brake operation at 15% incline. If the parking brake could not hold the truck, go to step 3.
- 99 -
Maintenance Section
First 250 Service Hours You must read and understand the warnings and instructions contained in the Safety section of this manual, before performing any aperation or maintenance procedures.
Engine Valve Lash - Check, Adjust
Hydraulic Return Filter - Change
NOTE : Initial valve lash adjustment on a new or rebuilt engine only, is recommended at the first scheduled oil change interval, due to initial wear and seating of valve train components.
WARNING Hot oil and components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or component to contact skin.
WARNING Hot oil and components can cause burns. Allow additional time for the engine to cool before measuring valve clearance.
Park the lift truck level with the forks lowered, parking brake engaged, transmission in NEUTRAL and the engine stopped.
NOTICE Measure the valve lash with the engine stopped. To obtain an accurate measurement, allow at least 20 minutes for the valves to cool the engine cylinder head and block temperature.
Set the clearance to the nominal appropriate clearance given in the ÒValve Clearance SettingÓ chart shown below.
IB6OM10P
1. Loosen the bolts of the hydraulic tank top plate assembly. 2. Remove the return filter from tank top plate assembly.
Valve Clearances
3. Change the return filter. Valve
G420 Engine (Gas & LP - Gas, Exhaust Valves Dual Fuel) intake Valves 2.4 liter (DC24) Diesel
Clearance
4. Install the tank top plate assembly and fasten the bolts.
NET LASH NO ADJUSTMENT
Exhaust Valves 0.45mm (0.018 in) Intake Valves 0.45mm (0.018 in)
Refer to the Ò Service Manual Ó for the complete valve adjustment procedure.
- 100 -
Maintenance Section
Every 250 Service Hours or Monthly You must read and understand the warnings and instructions contained in the Safety section of this manual, before performing any aperation or maintenance procedures.
Hydraulic Oil Level - Check
Drive Axle Oil Level - Check Park the lift truck on a level surface. Apply the parking brake. Place the directional control lever in NEUTRAL and stop the engine.
WARNING At operating temperature, the hydraulic tank is hot and under pressure. Hot oil can cause burns. Remove the fill cap only when the engine is stopped, and the cap is cool enough to touch with your bare hand. Remove the fill cap slowly to relieve pressure.
1. Operate the lift truck for a few minutes to warm the oil. Park the lift truck on a level surface, with the forks lowered, mast tilted back, parking brake engaged, transmission in NERTRAL and the engine stopped. 2. Pull the latch and raise the hood and seat assembly. Make sure the air lift cylinder securely holds the hood open.
IB6OM12P
1. Raise the load backrest high enough to access the level/fill plug. 2. Block the bottom of the mast with a block of wood to hold the load backrest in the raised position. 3. Remove the level/fill plug. The oil level should reach the bottom of the hole. If oil is needed, see the section Ò Drive axle Ð Change Oil Ó in Ò First 50 - 100 Service Hours Ó. 4. Clean off the level/fill plug and put it back in place. 5. Remove the wood blocking and lower the load backrest.
IB6OM11P
3. Remove the breather/dip stick. Maintain the oil level to the FULL mark on the breather/dip stick.
- 101 -
Maintenance Section
Attachment & Mast - Inspect, Lubricate
Steering Mechanism - Check, Lubricate
1. Operate the lift, tilt and attachment controls. Listen for unusual noises. These may indicate a need for repair. 2. Check for loose bolts and nuts on the carriage. Remove any debris from the carriage and mast. 3. Check the forks and attachments for free operation and damage. Have repairs made if necessary. IPMO039P
1. Lubricate the steer axle king pins, total of four fittings. Two on the right side and two on the left side. 2. Lubricate the steering link bearings, total of four fittings. Two on the right side and two on the left side. 3. Check for any worn or loose components of the steering mechanism. Remove any debris or trash as required.
IPMO038P
4. Brush a film of oil on all links of the chain. 5. Raise and lower the carriage a few times to work lubricant into the chain links.
NOTICE Lubricate chains more freequently than normal in applications where the lift truck is operating in a atmosphere which could cause corrosion of components or when lift truck must work in rapid lift cycles.
6. Check the chain anchors and individual links for wear, loose pins or cracked leaves.
- 102 -
Maintenance Section
Battery Terminal - Clean, Inspect
Engine Oil & Filter - Change See topic, ÒEngine Oil & Filter - ChangeÓ in ÒFitst 50 - 100 Service HoursÓ
WARNING Batteries give off flammable fumes that can explode. Do not smoke when observing the battery electrolyte levels. Electrolyte is an acid and can cause personal injury if it contacts skin or eyes. Always wear protective glasses when working with batteries.
PCV Valve System - Inspect, Clean Gasoline, and LP-Gas Engines With engine running at idle, remove ventilation hose from P.C.V. valve ; if valve is working properly, a hissing noise will be heard as air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
IB6OM17P IB2O624P
Typical Example 1. Clean the top of the battery and terminals.
Checking Ventilation Hoses
2. Check terminals for corrosion. Coat terminals with heavy grease.
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Check each hose for cracks or distortion. 3. Disconnect all hoses and blow them out with compressed air.
Brake Oil Level - Check
IPMO047I
IB6OM13P
If any hose cannot be made free of obstructions, replace with a new one.
- 103 -
Maintenance Section
Diesel Engines With engine running at idle, remove ventilation hose from P.C.V. valve ; if valve is working properly, a hissing noise will be heard as air passes through it and a weak air pressure should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
IPMO048I
Checking Ventialtion Hoses 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Check each hose for cracks or distortion. 3. Disconnect all hoses and blow them out with compressed air.
IPMO047I
If any hose cannot be made free of obstructions, replace with a new one.
- 104 -
Maintenance Section
Every 500 Service Hours or 3 Months You must read and understand the warnings and instructions contained in the Safety section of this manual, before performing any aperation or maintenance procedures.
Belts - Check, Adjust
Tilt Cylinders - Check, Adjust, Lubricate
Fan Pulley
Chassis Pivot Eyebolts - Lubricate 1. Remove floor plates.
Alternator Pulley
Crank Pulley
IPMO048I
Typical Example 1. Check the condition and adjustment of the belt. Correct adjustment allows 12mm (0.47 inch) deflection under 98N(22lb) of force.
IB6OM14P
2. Lubricate two fittings for the pivot eyebolts, one on each tilt cylinder. 3. Check the pivot eye pins for loose retainer bolts and wear.
Mast Pivot Eyes-Lubricate
IB6OM18P
Typical Example NOTICE Failure to loosen the alternator mounting bolt(2) will cause excessive stress and break the alternator mounting ear. IPMO053P
2. To adjust the alternator drive belt, loosen adjusting bracket bolt(1) and mounting bolt(2). Move the alternator in or out as required. Tighten bolts(1) and (2).
1. Lubricate two fittings for the mast pivot eyes, one on each side of the mast. 2. Check the pivot eye pins for loose retainer bolts and wear.
- 105 -
Maintenance Section
Cylinder Rod Extension-Adjust
Mast Hinge Pin - Lubricate
NOTE : The following description is for forward tilt. For cylinder rod back tilt, the collar should be stationary by the tilt eye. If it is not, the O-ring inside the collar may need to be replaced. To adjust back tilt, spacers must be added or removed.
IPMO051P
1. Lower the forks and tilt the mast forward. 2. Lubricate the two fittings for the mast hinge pins, one on each side of the mast. IPMO054P
1. Check to make sure the tilt cylinders extend and retract evenly. 2. If one cylinder continues to move after the other cylinder has stopped in full forward or backward tilt, an adjustment must be made to one cylinder.
Crosshead Roller - Inspect 1. Operate the mast through a lift cycle. Watch the chains move over the crosshead rollers. Make sure the chain is tracking over the rollers properly.
3. To adjust the cylinder rod extension, move the spacer to the rear and loosen the pinch bolt on the clevis. 4. Turn the cylinder rod in or out of the clevis to obtain the proper adjustment. Turning the rod into the clevis shortens the stroke. Turning the rod out of the clevis lengthens the stroke. 5. Tighten the pinch bolts to a torque of 95L15 N¥m (70L10 lb ft). Check the cylinder rods again for even travel.
IPMO055P
Typical Example 2. Check for damaged crosshead rollers, guards and retainer rings.
- 106 -
Maintenance Section
Transmission Oil & Strainer - Change, Clean
Horn & Lights(If Equipped) - Check
See topic, Ò Transmission Oil & Strainer - Change, Clean Ó in Ò First 50 - 100 Service Hours Ó
Parking Brake - Test, Adjust See topic, Ò Parking Brake - Test, Adjust Ó in Ò First 50-100 Service Hours. Ó
Inching & Braking Control Shaft - Lubricate
ILO1048P
1. Press horn button, to determine if horn is operational. 2. Check and replace all defective gauges. 3. Check all lights such as warning, directional, backup, driving and flood lights for correct operation. Replace all burned out bulbs. Have repairs made if needed.
Overhead Guard - Inspect IB6OM15P
1. Lubricate three fittings for the inching and brake pedal control shaft.
1
1
2
IB6OM19P
1. Check tightness of overhead guard mounting bolts at 105 N¥m (77 lb ft)(1) & 60 N¥m (44 lb ft)(2). 2. Check overhead guard for bent or cracked sections. Have repairs made if needed.
- 107 -
Maintenance Section
Every 1000 Service Hours or 6 Months You must read and understand the warnings and instructions contained in the Safety section of this manual, before performing any aperation or maintenance procedures. 2. Remove the air breather from mounting bracket / connecting hose.
Hydraulic Oil & Return Filter & Breather & Strainer - Check, Clean, Change
3. Wash the breather in clean, nonflammable solbent and dry it.
WARNING
4. Install the air breather.
Hot oil and components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or components to contact skin.
5. Loosen the bolts of the hydrulic tank top plate assembly.
Park the lift truck level with the forks lowered, parking brake engaged, transmission in NEUTRAL and the engine stopped.
Filter
Strainer ILOM040P
6. Remove the return filter from tank top plate assembly. 7. Change the return filter. IPMO075P
8. Remove the suction strainer from the tank.
1. Remove the hydraulic tank drain plug. Allow the oil to drain into a suitable container. Clean and install the plug.
9. Wash the suction strainer in clean, nonflammable solvent and dry it. 10. Reinstall the suction strainer change the suction strainer if reguired. 11. Install the tank top plate assembly and fasten the bolt. 12. Fill the hydraulic tank. See topic ÒRefill CapacitiesÓ. Install the dip stick/filler cap assembly.
ILO1025P
13. Start the engine and operate the hydraulic controls, and the steering system, through a few cycles to fill the lines. Look for oil leaks. 14. Stop the engine and check the oil level. With all cylinders retracted, maintain the oil level to the FULL mark on the dip stick/filler cap assembly. - 108 -
Maintenance Section
To Adjust
Lift Chains - Check, Adjust
1 2 IPMO064P
IPMO066P
1. Check the lift chains for wear. Complete instructions on the use of the tool are furnished.
1. Loosen locknut(1) and turn nut(2), on the loose chain to equalize tension on the lift chains. 2. Tighten locknut(1).
IPMO065P
2. Lift the forks high enough to put their full weight on the carriage and chains. 3. Check the lift chains for equal tension. The tension on the chains must be equal. 4. If the chains are loose or the tension is not equal, have the chains adjusted.
- 109 -
Maintenance Section
Every 1500 Service Hours or 9 Months You must read and understand the warnings and instructions contained in the Safety section of this manual, before performing any aperation or maintenance procedures.
Drive Axle Oil - Change See topic, ÒDrive Axle Oil - ChangeÓ in ÒFirst 50 100 Service HoursÓ
- 110 -
Maintenance Section
Every 2000 Service Hours or 12 Months You must read and understand the warnings and instructions contained in the Safety section of this manual, before performing any aperation or maintenance procedures.
Steer Wheel Bearings - Repack Park the lift truck level with the forks lowered, parking brake engaged, transmission in NEUTRAL and the engine stopped.
IPMO069S
4. Remove the locknut, lockwasher and flat washer. Remove the outer wheel bearing.
IPMO067P
1. Lift the steer wheels off the ground. Place stands or blocking under the frame and steer axle to support the lift truck. 2. Remove the hub cap which is pressed into the wheel hub.
IPMO070P
5. Remove the wheel assembly. Examine the wheel for damage and wear. Replace the wheel if necessary. NOTE : Deflate tire before removing wheel nuts from the truck.
IPMO068P
3. Straighten the lockwasher tangs.
6. Remove the inner bearing. Clean and lubricate the steering knuckle. Repack both the inner and outer bearing cones. 7. Install the inner bearing. Lubricate the seal and install the wheel assembly on the knuckle. 8. Install the outer wheel bearing and the outer washer. Install the lockwasher and locknut.
- 111 -
Maintenance Section
Cooling System - Clean, Change WARNING At operating temperature, the engine coolant is hot and under pressure. Steam can cause personal injury. Check the coolant level only after the engine has been stopped and the fill cap is cool enough to touch with your bare hand.
IPMO071P
9. Tighten the locknut to 135 N¥m (100 lb ft), while turning wheel hub to seat the bearing. 10. Loosen the locknut. Retorque it to 50L5N¥m (37L4 lb ft). Bend the lockwasher tang to secure locknut.
Remove the fill cap slowly to relieve pressure. Cooling system conditioner contains alkali. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes to prevent personal injury. Use all cleaning solutions with care.
11. Install the hub cap. 12. Raise the lift truck and remove the blocking Lower the lift truck to the ground.
The lift truck must be level, the forks lowered, the parking brake engaged, the transmission in NEUTRAL and the engine stopped and cool.
IB6OM16P
Typical Example 1. Turn the radiator cap slowly to relieve the pressure, then remove the cap.
- 112 -
Maintenance Section
10. Stop the engine and drain the neutralizing solution. 11. Flush the system with clean water until draining water is clear. 12. Close the drain valve and install the block drain plug. Add coolant to the top of the filler neck. 13. Start and run the engine to stabilize the coolant level. See ÒEvery 10 Service hours or DailyÓ, ÒRadiator, Check Coolant LevelÓ, in this manual.
IPMO073P
Typical Example 2. Remove the block drain plug.
IPMO074P
Typical Example 3. Open radiator drain valve. Allow the coolant to drain. Drain the recovery bottle. 4. Close radiator drain valve and install block drain plug. Fill the cooling system with 1 kilo (2 lb) sodium bisulphate per 40 liters (10 gallons) of water. Most commercial cooling system cleaners can be used. 5. Start and run the engine for 30 minutes. 6. Stop the engine and drain the cleaning solution. 7. Flush the system with clean water, until draining water is clear. 8. Close the drain valve and install the block drain plug. Fill the system with neutralizing solution, 250 g (1/2 lb) sodium carbonate per 40 liters (10 gallons) 9. Start and run the engine for 10 minutes.
- 113 -
Maintenance Section
Forks - Inspect
B C A
IAOM094I
IAOM095I
Forks should be inspected, at a minimum, every 12 months. If the truck is being used in a muti-shift or heavy duty operation, they should be checked every six months.
2. Check the angle between the upper face of the blade and the front face of the shank. The fork should be withdrawn from service if angle (C) exceeds 93 degrees or deviates by more than 3 degrees from an original angle other than 90 degrees, as may be found in some special application forks.
1. Inspect the forks carefully for carefully for cracks. Special attention should be given to the heel section (A), all weld areas and mounting brackets (B). Inspect the top and bottom hooks on forks used on hook type carriages and tubes on shaft mounted forks. Forks with cracks should be removed from service. ÒWet TestÓ magnetic particle inspection is generally preferred due to its sensitivity and the ease of interpreting the results. Portable equipment is usually recommended so it be moved to the lift truck. Inspectors should be trained and qualified in accordance with The American Societly for NonDestructive Testing, Level ll Qualifications. Contact your local DAEWOO Lift Truck Dealer for further information.
- 114 -
Maintenance Section
E
D
F
L IAOM096I
IAOM097I
3. Check the straightness of the upper face of blade (D) and the front face of shank (E) with a straight edge.
4. Check the difference in height of one fork tip to the other when mounted on the fork carrier. A difference in fork tip height can result in uneven support of the load and cause problems with entering loads.
The fork should be withdrawn from service if the deviation from straightness exceeds 0.5 percent of the length of the blade and/or the height of the shank respectively 5 mm/1000 mm (0.18"/36").
The maximum recommended difference in fork tip elevation (F) is 6.5 mm (0.25") for pallet forks and 3 mm (0.125") for fully tapered forks. The maximum allowable difference in fork tip elevation between the two or more forks is 3 percent of blade length (L). Replace one or both forks when the difference in fork tip height exceeds the maximum allowable difference.
- 115 -
Maintenance Section
M
H
K J
G IAOM098I
IAOM099I
5. Check the fork blade (J) and shank (H) for wear with special attention to the heel (G). The fork should be withdrawn from service if the thickness is reduced to 90 percent or less of the original thickness.
6. Check the fork mountings (K) for wear, crushing and other local deformation, which can cause excessive side to side wobble of the forks. Excessive clearance on hook type forks may allow them to fall from the carrier. Forks which show visible signs of such damage should be removed from service.
Fork blade length may also be reduced by wear, especially on tapered forks and platens. Remove the forks from service when the blade length is no longer adequate for the intended loads.
7. Check the positioning lock and other fork retention devices to make sure they are in place and working. Hook type forks use a spring loaded pin (M), located in the top hook, to engage notches in the top carriage bar to hold the fork in place. When adjusting the fork spacing, the forks are prevented from sliding off the end of the carriage by stop blocks. These stop blocks are at both ends of the carriage and in the path of the bottom fork hook. The load backrest extension may be used in place of the stop blocks in some cases.
- 116 -
Maintenance Section
N
IA3M4086 IA3M4086
IAOM100I
8. Check fork markings (N) for legibility. Renew markings as required to retain legibility.
9. a. Lift the mast and operate the tilt control lever, until the top surface of the forks is parallel with the floor. Place two straight bars that are the same width as the carriage, accross the forks as shown. b. Measure the distance from the bottom of each end of the two bars to the floor. The forks must be parallel within 3 mm (.12 in) for Tapered. c. Put one fork, one third from the tip, under a fixture that will not move. Then operate the tilt control with caution until the rear of the truck lifts just off the floor. Follow the same procedure with the second fork. Repeat Step a.
- 117 -
Maintenance Section
Drive Wheel Bearing - Repack Consult your DAEWOO lift truck dealer for the proper wheel bearing repacking procedure. Packing of bearings and adjustment procedure must be made by a trained mechanic or dealer personnel.
IPMO072P
Torque for wheel mounting nuts (1) is 176L20 N¥m (130L15 lb ft). Torque for brake assembly bolts(2) is 160L20 N¥m (115L15 lb ft). Tighten nut(3) until starting friction torque of bearing is 2.5L0.5 N¥m (1.8L0.4 lb ft).
- 118 -
Environment Protection Section
ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION When servicing this lift truck, use an authorized servicing area and an approved container to collect coolant, oil, fuel, grease, electrolyte and any other potential environmental pollutant before any lines, fittings or related items are disconnected or removed. After servicing, dispose of those materials in an authorized place and container. When cleaning the lift truck, be sure to use an authorized area.
- 119 -
Index Section
Index A
D
Accelerator Pedal .............................................. 40 After Starting the Engine ................................... 56 Air Cleaner Indicator - Check ............................ 91 Air Intake System - Check, Clean, Change........ 84 Servicing Filter Element ................................ 84 Changing Secondary Element .................... 85 Cleaning Primary Filter Elements .................. 85 Antifreeze .......................................................... 71 Attachment Abbreviations................................... 34 Attachment and Mast - Inspect, Lubricate........ 102 Avoiding Lift Truck Tipovers Center of Gravity ( CG )................................. 19 Lift Truck Stability ........................................... 19 Stability and Center of Gravity ...................... 20 Lift Truck Stability Base .................................. 20 Safe Driving Practices .................................. 21
Daily Inspection .................................................. 49 Direction Control Lever....................................... 39 Diesel Engine .............................................. 52,104 Distributor & Spark Plug (Gasoline, LP-Gas Fuel Engines) - Check ......................................... 86 Drive Axle Oil - Change .......................................97 Drive Axle Oil Level - Check .......................... 101 Drive Wheel Bearing -Repack ...........................118 Dual Fuel System ................................................54
E
Battery Terminal - Clean, Inspect .................. 103 Before Starting the Engine ................................ 45 Before Storage .................................................. 64 Before Starting the Lift Truck ............................. 10 Belts - Check, Adjust ....................................... 105 Bulbs................................................................... 83 Burn Prevention - Coolant, Oils, Batteries ........ 14
Electrical Disconnect Switch ( If Equipped )....... 36 Engine Compartment ......................................... 37 Engine Oil ( DEO and EO ) ................................ 74 Engine Oil and Filter - Change ........................ 94 Engine Oil Level - Check .................................. 90 Engine Valve Lash - Check, Adjust ................. 100 Environment Management ................................... 3 Environment Protection..................................... 119 Every 10 Service Hours or Daily ....................... 90 Every 250 Service Hours or Monthly ............... 101 Every 500 Service Hours or 3 Months ............ 105 Every 1000 Service Hours or 6 Months ...........108 Every 1500 Service Hours or 9 Months ........... 110 Every 2000 Service Hours or 12 Months ..........111
C
F
Capacity Charts ............................................. 30,31 Carburetor & Fuel Filter ( Gasoline, LP-Gas Engines) - Adjust, Check, Clean, Change .... 88 Causes of Fork Failure ..................................... 48 Changing LP-Gas Tanks .................................. 43 Changing From Gasoline to LP-Gas ................ 54 Changing From LP-Gas to Gasoline ................. 54 Checking Ventilation Hoses.............................. 104 Circuit Breaker ...............................................37,83 Coolant Level - Check, Clean, Change..............90 Coolant Information ........................................... 70 Coolant Water .................................................... 70 Cooling System - Clean, Change .................. 112 Cooling System Specifications .......................... 70 Crosshead Rollers - Inspect ............................ 106 Crushing or cutting Prevention .......................... 13
Falling Objects Protective Structure(FOPS) ...... 13 Fire or Explosion Prevention ............................. 14 - Fire Extinguisher, ether ................................ 15 First Installation ................................................. 49 First 50 - 100 Service Hours ............................. 94 First 250 Service Hours ................................... 100 Fluid Penetration ............................................... 13 Foreword ............................................................. 2 Fork Inspection ........................................... 48,114 Fuel Information ................................................. 72 Fuel Selector Switch ( If Dual Equipped ) ......... 38 Fuel Specifications ............................................. 72 Fuel Sulfur Content ........................................... 73 Fuel Tank Filler Cap & Screen (If Equipped)..... 81 Fuel Types ......................................................... 72 Fuses, Bulbs and Circuit Breaker - Change, Reset ............................................ 82
B
- 120 -
Index Section
G
M
Gasoline Engine ............................................. 51 Gasoline or Diesel Engine Equipped ............. 42 Gear Oil ( GO ) ................................................... 75 General Hazard Information ................................ 9
Machine Lifting and Tiedown Information .......... 65 Maintenance ........................................................ 2 Maintenance and Repair ................................... 49 Maintenance Information .................................. 13 Maintenance Intervals .................................... 3,77 Mast Channels ( Roller Mast Only ) - Lubricate .................................................... 93 Mast Hinge Pins - Lubricate ............................. 106 Mast Pivot Eyes - Lubricate................................ 92 Mounting and Dismounting ................................ 10
H Hook-type Fork ................................................... 47 Horn and Lights ( If Equipped ) - Check............107 How to Survive in a Tipover ( If Equipped ) ... 24 Hydraulic Oil ( HYDO ) ...................................... 74 Hydraulic Oil Level - Check ...............................101 Hydraulic Return Filter - Change ..................... 100 Hydraulic Oil and Return Filter and Breather and Strainer - Check, Clean, Change .......... 108
I
N Noise and Vibration ........................................... 29
O
Identification, Lift Capacity and Attachment Plate Mast Abbreviations ........................................ 33 Attachment Abbreviations ............................. 34 Ignition Timing (Gasoline, LP-Gas, Dual Fuel Engine) - Check, Adjust ............................... 88 Important Safety Information ............................... 4 Inching ............................................................... 58 Inching Into Loads .............................................. 59 Inching Braking Pedal Control Shaft - Lubricate .................................................... 107 Inspection, Maintenance and Repair of Lift Truck Forks .............................................................. 47
Operating Techniques ........................................ 59 Operating the Lift Truck ..................................... 11 Operating in Hot Weather .................................. 62 Operation ............................................................. 2 Operation Information......................................... 10 Operator Restraint System ( If Equipped ) ........ 16 Operator's Station and Monitoring Systems ...... 35 Operator's Warning Identification .......................33 Attachment Abbreviations .............................. 34 Overhead Guard .............................................. 107 Inspect ......................................................... 107
L
P
Lift Chains - Check/Adjust ................................ 109 Lift Truck Controls ........................................ 39,40 Lift Fork Adjustment ........................................... 47 Lift Truck Operation ............................................57 Lift Truck Parking ............................................... 12 Lift Truck Shipping ............................................. 65 Lifting Drums or Round Objects ........................ 62 Lifting the Load .................................................. 59 Literature Information .......................................... 2 Loading or Unloading Trucks / Trailers............... 12 Long Time Storage ............................................. 64 LP-Gas Engine .................................................. 52 Lubricant Specifications...................................... 74 Lubricant Viscosities and Refill Capacities ........ 76
Parking Brake .................................................... 98 Test, Adjust ................................................... 98 Parking Brake Lever .......................................... 40 Parking the Lift Truck ......................................... 63 PCV Valve System - Inspect, Clean ................. 103 Gasoline, LP-Gas Engines ..........................103 Power Shift Transaxle ....................................... 57 Plate for Function of Pedals ( If Equipped ) ....... 39 Pressure Air ....................................................... 13 Prestart Conditions ............................................ 51 Priming the Fuel System ( Diesel Engine ) ........ 80
- 121 -
Index Section
R
U
Refill Capacities ................................................. 67 Refueling ........................................................... 42
Unloading .......................................................... 60
V S Vibration.............................................................. 28 Safety ............................................................... 2,5 Safety Section ..................................................... 3 Seat ................................................................... 38 Seat Adjustment ................................................ 17 Seat Belt ............................................................. 17 Seat Hood Latch and Supply Cylinder - Check, Lubricate ........................................... 82 Serial Number Locations .................................. 32 Service Brake Pedal .......................................... 40 Sideshift Attachment (If Equipped) .................... 41 Spark Plugs (Gasoline, LP-Gas, Dual Fuel Engines) - Check .......................................... 87 Specifications...................................................... 26 Starting From a 12 Volt External Source ........... 53 Starting the Lift Truck.......................................... 11 Starting the Engine ............................................ 51 Steer Wheel Bearings - Repack ....................... 111 Steering Mechanism - Check, Lubricate .......... 102 Storage Information ........................................... 64
W Walk-Around Inspection ............................... 45,92 Warning Signs and Labels ............................. 5,16 Wheel Bolts and Nuts......................................... 89 Inspect Tightness .......................................... 89 When Required .................................................. 78
T Tilt Control ......................................................... 41 Tilt Cylinders - Check, Adjust, Lubricate ......... 105 Chassis Pivot Eyebolts - Lubricate .............. 105 Mast Pivot Eyes-Lubricate ............................105 Cylinder Rod Extension-Adjust .................... 106 Tire Inflation Information ............................... 15,67 Tire Inflation Pressures Adjustment ................... 67 Tires and Wheels - Inspect, Check .................... 87 Torque Specifications ........................................ 68 Torques for Metric Fasteners ............................. 69 Torques for Standard Fasteners ........................ 68 Towing Information ............................................ 66 Transmission Inching Control Pedal .................. 39 Transmission Oil ( TDTO ).................................. 74 Transmission Oil Level - Check.......................... 93 Transmission Oil & Strainer - Change, Clean ... 96 Transportation Hints .......................................... 65 Traveling with the Load ..................................... 60 Turning ............................................................... 61
- 122 -